JP2018191892A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine allowing a player to play comfortable games in which no discrepancy in the contents of presentations occurs.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a display-color change lottery for each character display Se1 to Se3 is won in a lottery in an MPU of a sound lamp control device and therefore a "red color" is selected, and with respect to a lottery for a change timing of the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2, a "ready-to-win occurrence time" is selected. Further, a variation presentation is a "failure display" and therefore the display color of a fixed pattern phrase character display Se3 is revised (changed) in a "white color".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in order to further improve the interest of the game, there is a tendency that the effect images displayed on the display device are diversified.

  Therefore, in recent gaming machines, the contents of a plurality of diversified effect images are set in a lump so as to reduce the burden of program execution processing that becomes complicated and enormous with the diversification of effect images. (For example, patent document 1).

JP 2017-029747 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the contents of the effects may be flawed by setting the effect images in a lump, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a comfortable game without producing a habit of effect contents.

  In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the start information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means determines based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means. Is done. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the appearance information determination means determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Is done. Further, whether or not a situation advantageous to the player occurs is determined by the advantageous situation determination means. Then, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the appearance information determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. And when changing a labeling means to a 2nd aspect by an aspect change means, the alerting | reporting aspect of a some marking means is changed to a 2nd aspect by a multiple change means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. When the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the mode changing unit is provided when it is determined by the advantageous status determining unit that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur. The first mode notification unit notifies the first mode of the marking unit that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution unit.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display by the special identification information determination means provided in the advantageous situation determination means, or in general It is determined whether the identification information appears. And when it is judged by the special identification information judging means that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the marking means to be notified after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means is performed by the first aspect notification means. Informed in the first mode.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the sign means includes a first sign means appearing before or during execution of the determination effect, and a first sign appearing after execution of the determination effect. Two marking means. Further, when it is determined by the special identification information determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the second indication continuation means provided in the aspect changing means causes the first indication means based on the plurality of changing means. And the 2nd indication means is displayed in the 2nd mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information judging means judges that the special identification information is not displayed in the dynamic display, the second indication changing means provided in the aspect changing means makes the first indication based on the plural changing means. The means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the appearance information determination means determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Is done. Further, whether or not a situation advantageous to the player occurs is determined by the advantageous situation determination means. Then, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the appearance information determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. And when changing a labeling means to a 2nd aspect by an aspect change means, the alerting | reporting aspect of a some marking means is changed to a 2nd aspect by a multiple change means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. When the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the mode changing unit is provided when it is determined by the advantageous status determining unit that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur. The first mode notification unit notifies the first mode of the marking unit that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution unit. Thereby, when the advantageous situation for the player does not occur, the second means is not notified in the indicating means notified after the determination effect even when the indicating means is changed to the second aspect. To do. That is, in a state where a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. In other words, the special identification information determination means provided in the advantageous situation determination means determines whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. And when it is judged by the special identification information judging means that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the marking means to be notified after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means is performed by the first aspect notification means. Informed in the first mode. Thereby, when general identification information appears in dynamic display, even if it is a case where a labeling means is changed to the 2nd mode, the 2nd mode is not notified in the marking means notified after a judgment effect. Configure. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the special identification information determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the second indication continuation means provided in the aspect changing means causes the first indication means based on the plurality of changing means. And the 2nd indication means is displayed in the 2nd mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information judging means judges that the special identification information is not displayed in the dynamic display, the second indication changing means provided in the aspect changing means makes the first indication based on the plural changing means. The means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notifying means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the state immediately after "reach display (normal reach)" appeared in the main display area of the 3rd symbol display device, (b) is sub-display from the state of (a). It is the figure which showed the state where the area | region was erase | eliminated and "normal reach" is performed in the main display area, (c) is a figure where "super reach" occurs from the state of (b), and a cockpit display area is erased And (d) shows a state in which the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed from the state of (c), and the main display area shows that the “super reach” is being executed. It is the figure which showed the state where the "slack display" of the 3rd design appeared in the display area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot type table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the reservation number table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of C table of a stop pattern table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of D table of a stop pattern table. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern table for loss. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the pending | holding change table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot scenario table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the scenario table for loses typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern table at the time of jackpot. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern table at the time of loss. (A) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the variation pattern of “normal reach only”, and (b) shows the appearance timing of each character display in the variation pattern of “super reach only”. It is a time chart, (c) is a time chart which shows the appearance timing of each character display in the fluctuation pattern of "special reach only". (A) is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in the variation pattern of “normal reach + revariation”, and (b) is a current chart of each character display in the variation pattern of “super reach + revariation”. It is a time chart which shows an output timing, (c) is a time chart which shows the appearance timing of each character display in the fluctuation pattern of "special reach + re-change". It is the figure which showed an example of the character change table typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the color change timing table. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the hold information storage area and the execution information storage area. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the back C. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change production process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the execution symbol change process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the character mode setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the character color change restriction | limiting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holding-balls command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the demo command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the change production system command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fixed command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (C) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch type | system | group command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the serif-type command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device, and is emitted from the character design in the central small area of the sub display area. Is a diagram showing a state in which the character display when the reach is expressed in characters is displayed in the small left region, (b) is a variation factor of “normal reach” is started from the state of (a), FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area after the sub-display area is erased, and (c) shows that the variable element of “super reach” is changed from the state of (b). The cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area, and further, the reach middle character that expresses the words uttered from the character design of the player side in characters (D) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “super reach” is completed from the state of (c), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed, In the main display area, the “Lose display” of the 3rd pattern appears, and in addition, a fixed phrase display that displays the words uttered from the character design in the central small area of the sub display area is displayed in the left small area. FIG. (A) is immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device, and is emitted from the character design in the central small area of the sub display area. Is a diagram showing a state in which the character display when the reach is expressed in characters is displayed in the small left region, (b) is a variation factor of “normal reach” is started from the state of (a), FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area after the sub-display area is erased, and (c) shows that the variable element of “super reach” is changed from the state of (b). The cockpit display area is erased, the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area, and further, the reach middle character that expresses the words uttered from the character design of the player side in characters (D) is a diagram showing a state in which “Indication” is executed in the variable element of “Super reach” from the state in (c), and “ It is a figure showing the state where the contents suggesting that "display" appears are displayed. (E) is a state where the variable element of "super reach" ends from the state of (d), and the sub-display area and The cockpit display area is re-displayed, and the “miss display” of the 3rd pattern appears in the main display area. Furthermore, the boilerplate is expressed in characters from the character design in the center small area of the secondary display area. It is the figure which showed the state by which the character display is displayed on the small left area, (f) is a point in time when the "big change display" appears when the variation element of "revariation" is executed from the state of (e) It is the figure which showed the state of. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots (probability variation jackpot) in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots (probability variation jackpot) in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a time chart which shows the appearance timing of each character display in "normal reach + promotion" in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is each character display in "super reach + promotion" in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 6C is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display in “special reach + promotion” in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the hold information storage area and execution information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the character color change restriction | limiting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the state immediately after "reach display (fluctuation element of" normal reach ")" appeared in the main display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area after the sub display area is erased from the state of (a), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the cockpit display area was erase | eliminated and the fluctuation element of "super reach" was performed in the main display area, (d) is a fluctuation element of "super reach" from the state of (c). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a state in which an effect suggesting that “big jackpot display” by the third symbol corresponding to the “time shortening state” appears is performed, and (e) is a state from the state of (d). Secondary display area and cockpit display area Are re-displayed, and a state in which a “big hit display” according to the third symbol corresponding to the “time reduction state” appears in the main display area, (f) from the state of (e) It is the figure which showed the state just before "promotion" production is performed and the "big hit display" by the 3rd pattern corresponding to a "probability fluctuation state" appears. (A) is immediately after “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, It is the figure which showed the state where the character display which expressed the line which was emitted from the character design with the character when the reach occurrence is displayed in the left small area, (b) is the fluctuation of “normal reach” from the state of (a) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the elements are started, the sub display area is erased, and the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area. FIG. ”Variable element is started, and the effect that suggests that“ big jackpot display ”by the 3rd pattern corresponding to“ 15R normal jackpot ”appears in the variable element of“ super reach ”is executed. (D) is a state in which the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of (c), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed, and “15R normal big hit” is displayed in the main display area. A “big hit display” with the 3rd symbol corresponding to 現 appears, and a fixed phrase character display that expresses the words uttered from the character symbol in the central small area of the sub display area in the left small area It is the figure which showed the state. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the structure of the additional data table for characters in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the structure of the additional data table for holding | maintenance in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed the state immediately after "reach display (variation element of" normal reach ")" appeared in the main display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a state in which the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area after the sub display area is erased from the state of (a), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state by which the cockpit display area was erase | eliminated and the variable element of "super reach" was performed in the main display area, (d) is a sub display area and a cockpit display area from the state of (c) FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which “lost display” appears in the main display area. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the structure of the data table in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the background pattern 1 of the background image in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment, (b) is "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the cockpit pattern 1 of the cockpit image in this fluctuation pattern. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the symbol pattern 1 of the symbol image in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the character pattern of the character design in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list at the time of generation | occurrence | production of the fluctuation element of "normal reach" in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only" of 4th Embodiment. (A) is immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and is the center small area of the sub display area. It is the figure which showed the state where the character display which expressed the line which was emitted from the character design with the character when the reach occurrence is displayed in the left small area, (b) is the fluctuation of “normal reach” from the state of (a) The element is started, the sub display area is erased, the fluctuation element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area, and the error character display indicating the error state is displayed. In (c), the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a state in which a reach character display showing a speech uttered from a character design on the player side is displayed and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed; ), The variable element of “super reach” is ended from the state of (c), the sub display area and the cockpit display area are redisplayed, and the “slack display” of the third symbol appears in the main display area, In addition, a fixed phrase character display that expresses words from characters in the center small area of the sub display area is displayed in the left small area, and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed FIG. (A) is immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment, and is the center small area of the sub display area. It is the figure which showed the state where the character display which expressed the line which was emitted from the character design with the character when the reach occurrence is displayed in the left small area, (b) is the fluctuation of “normal reach” from the state of (a) The element is started, the sub display area is erased, the fluctuation element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area, and the error character display indicating the error state is displayed. In (c), the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of (b), the cockpit display area is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a state in which a reach character display showing a speech uttered from a character design on the player side is displayed and an error character display indicating an error state is displayed; ) Displays a content that suggests that a “lost effect” appears in the “reaching effect” when the “reaching effect” is executed in the variable element of “super reach” from the state of (c). And (e) is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display indicating an error state is displayed. (E) is a state in which a variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of (d), and the sub display area and the cockpit display The area is re-displayed, the “slave display” of the 3rd pattern appears in the main display area, and the fixed phrase character table in which the words emitted from the character design in the center small area of the sub-display area are displayed as characters. Is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display indicating an error state is displayed in addition to being displayed in the small left region, and (f) is a variation factor of “revariation” from the state of (e). It is the figure which showed the state in which the error character display which shows an error state is displayed while it is just before the "big hit display" appears.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes (ball holes) 63, 64, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. The frame button 22 is an operation button for causing the player to select the content of the effect in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as “variation effect”). Also used as

  The variation effect is an effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and, as will be described later, a ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (a first entrance 64 described later). (Refer to Fig. 2)) After entering the ball (starting winning), the symbol (3rd symbol to be described later) is changed for a predetermined time and then the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is used for the starting winning. This is an effect of presenting the result of the lottery performed (whether or not a big hit) to the player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are three types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described variation effects and “reach display” executed during the variation effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  Note that “reach display” refers to a display one step before “big jackpot display” indicating that a big jackpot is generated in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) does not stop yet and continues to change. It means the state that is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “reach display” is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the effect of “normal reach” (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as “variable element”). , Developed from the fluctuation element of the “normal reach”, executed from the fluctuation element of the “super reach” having a higher expectation of jackpot than the fluctuation element of the “normal reach”, and also developed from the fluctuation element of the “normal reach” In addition, a “special reach” variable element having a higher jackpot expectation than a “super reach” variable element is prepared. Details of each “reach display” and variable elements will be described later.

  The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed, or during the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element in which the third pattern is fluctuated at high speed without being visible to the player. When the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “city stage” → “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  When the variation factor of “normal reach” is started in the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, the variation factor of “normal reach” to the variation factor of “super reach” or the variation element of “special reach” The screen for selecting the variable element for “super reach” or the variable element for “special reach” in the variable element for “normal reach” may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good.

  Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as a variation factor of “super reach” or a variation factor of “special reach” are displayed, and the frame button 22 is displayed while the selection screen is displayed. When the player presses down, the selected candidate is changed. Then, based on the production candidates selected when developing into the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element, the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element is determined. In accordance with the determination, the variable element of “super reach” is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as the variable element of “special reach”.

  In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, the player makes a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, You may comprise by the operation lever which can be tilted to the front, back, right side, and left). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the “super reach” variation element or the “special reach” variation element may be selected.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game by changing the light-emission mode by turning on or flashing according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined “reach display”. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided lighting portions 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means such as light emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter referred to as “LEDs”). .

  In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when the jackpot or “reach display” or the like, the respective illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on and blinking by the built-in LEDs. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that “reach display” is being made one step before the jackpot. Further, on the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 with a built-in light emitting means such as an LED that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter, abbreviated as “ABS”), in which a region around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more gorgeousness. .) A resin plated member 36 is attached.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

  In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the motor, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is incorporated.

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is a variable display of the first symbol corresponding to each control performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later (hereinafter, the variable symbol display of the first symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). The game state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a perform dynamic display by indicating whether or not the movement is being performed in accordance with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) by the lighting state, or stop after the end of the fluctuation. As a symbol, a symbol corresponding to a result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 (holding ball) The number of reserved balls, which is the number of, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit with respect to the entrance to the first entrance 64 (a big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, “15R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “15R normal jackpot” are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change executed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64. Indicates the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to “probability fluctuation state” after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. This is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is shifted to “time reduction state” after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds, and becomes “time reduction state” for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It is a big hit.

  The “probability change state” means a high probability state in which the jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability change is in progress, in other words, a state of a game that easily shifts to the special game state. That is. The high probability state (probability change state, probability change state) in the first embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” means a low probability state that is not a “probability fluctuation state” or a “time shortening state”, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a jackpot probability than when the “probability fluctuation state”. Is a low state. In addition, the “time shortened state (so-called time-short state)” is a state where the jackpot probability is a low probability state as in the “normal game state”, and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 64.

  Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or the electric accessory is per hit It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening. Specifically, in the “time shortening state”, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is made longer than in the case other than the “time shortening state”, The number of times that an object is released may be made larger than in cases other than the “time reduction state”. Further, in the “time reduction state”, at least two of the increase in the probability of winning the second pattern, the extension of the opening time of the electric accessory, and the increase in the number of opening times of the electric accessory are performed simultaneously. It may be.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a liquid crystal that performs a variation effect of the third symbol while being synchronized with the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (start winning prize). The third symbol display device 81 composed of a display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and the second symbol are displayed in a variable manner by using the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 as a trigger (hereinafter referred to as variation of the second symbol). There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that display “variable display”. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 17 inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are displayed.

  Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of symbols. These symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the third symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display according to is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. FIGS. 5A to 5D schematically show the transition of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when “reach display” described later appears in the main display area Dm. FIG.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching a number from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, In the main symbol with “9”), a large number is added almost to the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) show characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box. An accompanying symbol is added, and an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big win, a variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end. When the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a “probability variation state (probability variation state)”, and when a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpot is awarded, a variation effect with the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) with odd numbers added is provided. Done. Similarly, when a jackpot of up to two rounds is given after the jackpot is ended and a maximum of two rounds of jackpot is given, a main symbol (corresponding to a so-called “accurate symbol”) of a specific symbol number combination (for example, “341”) Fluctuating production is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the “time shortening state (time shortening state)” after the big hit, the variation effect in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm that produces the variation of the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like. In addition, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided at the central portion of the lower base side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2. The right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

  In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the scrolling effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In addition, in each symbol row Z1-Z3, you may comprise so that the arrangement | sequence of a number may differ, respectively. For example, the symbols may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, while the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation effect, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination; hereinafter referred to as “jacket display”) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and notice effect images, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player a sense of expectation that is a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db includes a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) for which a variation effect has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and a variable effect that is being executed. It is an area | region which displays the execution symbol regarding.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as a notice symbol appears is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm may be in a state where it is easy to make a transition to a big hit than usual. Suggested to the player.

  In the sub display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in the first embodiment) performs a predetermined action, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is performed. Based on a special action that is different from the specified action, usually the black boy's hair color, usually the white bee color changes, or another character appears, etc. Is done.

  Furthermore, in the sub display area Ds, in the small right area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that suggests in a stepwise manner whether or not a big hit is generated in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) every time the expected level of occurrence of "reach display" or the jackpot expectation level in the variable effect being executed is increased based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variable effect, When reaching the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter, the jackpot is configured to be confirmed. Accordingly, the sub display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of “reach display” in the main display area Dm.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the changing effect (dynamic display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry (Number of balls to be held) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37. When the cockpit display area Db is displayed, the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 provided in the cockpit display area Db are displayed. It is shown. In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, one reserved symbol (“◯” symbol (white circle symbol) in a normal display mode) is displayed for each reserved ball (the number of reserved balls is 1). The number of held balls is displayed in accordance with the number of held symbols displayed in each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4.

  That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the number of reserved balls is one, When the two reserved symbols are displayed in the second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, respectively, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is two, and the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 When a total of three reserved symbols are displayed on Db3 one by one, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is three times, and one on each of the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. When four reserved symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, the number of reserved balls is zero and there is no variation effect that is reserved.

  In addition, the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that a variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to be larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4. In the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

  The execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is deleted when the variation effect is finished, and the displayed holding symbol moves as a lower side (left side) execution symbol and a holding symbol as the execution symbol is deleted. Displayed. Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variation effect, the first symbol is displayed when the reserved symbol is displayed in the first reservation symbol display area Db1. The reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as an executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 is moved (shifted) as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. Is displayed. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 is moved (shifted) as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db2. Is displayed. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, the reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 is moved (shifted) as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db3. Is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm (in the variable element of “super reach” or “special reach”. Excluding some of the fluctuation factors). On the other hand, when the variation effect ends, or when the variation factor of “super reach” or the variation factor of “special reach” is being executed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continues) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If it is not performed, it indicates that the variation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the variation factor of “super reach” or the variation factor of “special reach” is being executed.

  Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to execute a “hold change notice” using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This “pending change notice” means changing the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm to a plurality of levels of the hold symbol and the display color of the execution symbol from before the execution of the variation effect to during execution. It is a notice to suggest.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as the “hold change notice”, the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol is changed from “white”, which is a normal display mode, to “blue”, red display of a blue display mode. It is configured to be changeable to “red” in the aspect or “rainbow” in the rainbow display form. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is different when the “big hit display” occurs in the variation effect or when the “reach display” occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the execution symbol “ The possibility of the occurrence of “reach display” or “hit display” can be suggested to the player for each display color.

  Specifically, in the “hold change notice”, the change that the hold symbol and the execution symbol show when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the “blue” display mode rather than the normal display mode (“white”). In the production, the ratio of “reach display” or “hit display” is set high. In addition, when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the display mode of “red” rather than “blue”, the ratio of “reach display” or “jacket display” is higher in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. Is set. Furthermore, when the hold symbol and the execution symbol are in the display mode of “rainbow” rather than “red”, the ratio of “reach display” and “big hit display” in the variation effect indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol is higher. Set high. The setting ratio of “holding change notice” will be described later.

  In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “red”, the variation mode indicated by the “red” reserved symbol or the execution symbol is an aspect of the effect (mainly, “super reach”). The production mode is referred to as “production mode”, “special reach” production mode or “special variation” production mode (hereinafter referred to as “super reach” production mode, “special reach” production mode or “special variation” production mode. It is set so that execution of the “generally referred to as“ super reach or more ”effect mode” is confirmed. In addition, when the display form of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “rainbow color”, it is set so that the appearance of the “big hit display” is confirmed in the variation effect indicated by the “rainbow color” reserved symbol or the execution symbol. Has been. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the display pattern of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is “reach display” or “big hit display” step by step in the order of normal (“white”) → “blue” → “red” → “rainbow”. "Is expected to be high.

  It should be noted that the display form of “rainbow color” of “holding change notice” is set so that it can appear only in the execution symbol, not appearing in the holding symbol. This is because if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power-off) after the display form of “rainbow color” in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is revealed, the player obtains Dissatisfaction occurs because the jackpot that should be made is not obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the “rainbow color” display mode in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in advance in the reserved symbol.

  In addition, when the hold symbol is shifted in accordance with the execution (digestion) of the change effect in the state where the display manner of the hold symbol is changed by the “hold change notice”, the display mode of the changed hold symbol is shifted. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected to the previous reserved symbol or execution symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed, the display before the shift is also performed when the changed reserved symbol is shifted to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the execution symbol display area Db0 in accordance with the execution of the variation effect. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the suspended symbol or the execution symbol after the shift.

  Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to “red” in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4, the reserved symbol changes from the third reserved symbol display area Db3 → the second reserved symbol display area Db2 → the first reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db1 to the execution symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or the execution symbol is continuously displayed. Details of the “holding change notice” will be described later.

  In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effects based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, the color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when information on the number of held balls (holding symbols, etc.) is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the “holding change notice” based on the holding symbols cannot be executed. By making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” may be executed.

  Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls for the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit. In the case where the number of held balls is displayed by the holding lamp, it is natural that the pre-reading notice similar to the “holding change notice” of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of display colors of the holding lamp. Is possible.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the transition of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the variation element of “normal reach” and the variation element of “super reach” appear in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a state immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 5B, the “normal reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 5A, the sub display area Ds is deleted, and the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 5C, the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 5B, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. FIG. 5D shows that the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 5C, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the third pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state where "miss display" of appeared.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, when the third symbol is expressed, the main symbol is expressed only by the numerical symbol in the diagram, and the rear symbol consisting of the wooden box and the attached symbol imitating the character are omitted. It is expressed and its explanation is also omitted. Further, in FIG. 5, the “super reach” variable element is illustrated as an example of “reach display” that develops from the “normal reach” variable element. However, the “super reach” variable element and the “special reach” variable element are described. Although the contents of effects such as background display, character design, variation time, etc. are different, the screen configuration of the secondary display area Ds, the cockpit display area Db, etc. (deletion or redisplay, etc.) has the same structure. It is possible to replace the variable element of “” with the variable element of “special reach”.

  First, in FIG. 5A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol of the “7” symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. In the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still “not changed at high speed” so as to be invisible. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears.

  Further, in the sub display area Ds, a character design suggesting that “reach display” has occurred is displayed in the central small area Ds2, and in the left small area Ds1, the words emitted from the character design are displayed as characters. The character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach shown in FIG. Specifically, in the central small region Ds2, the character symbol is displayed as if it is cheering. In the left small area Ds1, a “white” character “Ikuze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is displayed as the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. In conjunction with the display of the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence, a voice corresponding to the character design “Ikuze!” Is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 6) described later. . In the right small area Ds3, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  In the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence of the first embodiment, two types of display modes of “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” can be displayed. Specifically, when “weak pattern” in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is selected, a character pattern “Ikuze!” Is displayed. Further, when the “strong pattern” in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is selected, a character pattern that is more optimistic than the “weak pattern” “Ikeruze!” Is displayed. The details of the “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence will be described later.

  Moreover, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence of the first embodiment is configured such that the displayed character color (display color) can be changed. Specifically, the character is displayed in “white” as the normal display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. In addition, the characters are displayed in “red” as the display color of the first chance up pattern having a higher probability of jackpot than the normal display color. Furthermore, characters are displayed in “golden” as the display color of the second chance up pattern having a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the first chance up pattern (hereinafter “red” of the first chance up pattern and the second chance up pattern Are sometimes collectively referred to as “chance-up patterns”). Details of the change in the display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs will be described later.

  In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four reserved symbols indicate that the number of reserved balls of the variation effect is four.

  FIG. 5B shows a state in which the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. With this “normal reach” variable element, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the “7” symbol being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol can be visually recognized at a low speed. , “5” symbol is scrolled to “6” symbol at low speed).

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” fluctuation element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. As described above, the sub display area Ds has a function of suggesting whether or not “reach display” occurs mainly due to the fluctuating effects in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, the “reach display” is performed. This is because the existence significance of the sub display area Ds is weakened.

  In addition, when the “reach display” is generated in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the “reach display” is “big hit display” or “losing display”. Yes, attention to the display content of the sub display area Ds that suggests the occurrence of “reach display” is reduced.

  Accordingly, when the “reach display” occurs in the main display area Dm, the display contents of the main display area Dm are enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the “reach display” that the player pays attention to. The sub display area Ds is erased along with the display.

  In the state of FIG. 5B, in the cockpit display area Db, as in the display state of FIG. 5A, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. The reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Db1 to Db4, respectively. Accordingly, as in FIG. 5A, the execution symbol indicates that the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the four retention symbols indicate that the variation effect has four reserved balls. Show.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured so that the display of the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed without being erased during the variation factor of “normal reach”. This is because there is a high possibility that a “losing display” appears in many cases where the fluctuation effect of only the fluctuation factor of “normal reach” (“normal reach” effect mode) is out of the big hit lottery. Then, when the variation factor of “normal reach” ends and “losing display” is displayed, the next variation effect is started immediately, so that the player is informed whether the next variation effect is put on hold. There is a need. Accordingly, during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element, the display of the cockpit display area Db is maintained (continuous display), and it is configured to suggest to the player how many reserved balls of the variable effect exist. ing.

  In addition, since the cockpit display area Db is smaller than the sub display area Ds, even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the “normal reach” variable element, the effect of the “normal reach” variable element is not hindered. Therefore, even if the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element, there is no actual harm.

  Further, the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db can execute the “hold change notice” described above, and the “hold change notice” is also indicated in the execution symbol that suggests the content of the variation effect being executed. The display mode of the reserved symbol changed by "" is taken over (inherited) and displayed. In other words, the player is able to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect being executed to the player by the display form of the execution symbol. Therefore, by letting the player confirm the display pattern of the execution symbol during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element, the variable element of the “normal reach” being executed will become a variable element of the “super reach” and win a big hit Whether or not the player is predictable is provided with an interest based on the prediction.

  Specifically, for example, during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element, the execution symbol is displayed in “white”, which is a normal display mode, or “blue”, which is one step higher than the “white”. In such a case, the player predicts that the fluctuation factor of the “normal reach” is unlikely to develop into a fluctuation factor of the “super reach” and become a big hit. On the other hand, if the execution symbol is displayed in “red” or “rainbow” during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element, the player will change the “normal reach” variable element to the “super reach” variable element. It is predicted that the jackpot will be a big jackpot, and that the “big jackpot display” will appear even if the fluctuation factor of the “normal reach” remains. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with the “hold change notice”, the cockpit display area Db is continued during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element in order to give the player the above interest during the execution of the “normal reach” variable element. It is configured to display. Details of the “pending change notice” will be described later.

  FIG. 5C shows a state in which the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 5B. In this “super reach” variable element, a symbol indicating the occurrence of “reach display” based on the “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variable element (hereinafter, this “reach display” is indicated). The symbol is referred to as “reach formation symbol”) and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in FIG. 5C, a “battle effect” in which a plurality of character symbols compete for victory or defeat using almost the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (“competitive effect” in the variable element of “special reach”). Is displayed. In this “battle effect”, an effect (kickboxing in the first embodiment) is performed in which a character design on the player side (for example, the left character design) and a character design on the enemy side (for example, the right character design) fight. . In the “battle presentation”, if the player's character symbol wins, the game is set to be a big hit, and the “big win display” appears as a display result of the variable element of “super reach”. On the other hand, in the “battle effect”, when the enemy character symbol wins, the game is lost, and “lost display” appears as a display result of the variable element of “super reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the latter half of the variable element of “Super Reach”, a “border effect” is executed as to whether the change effect of the third symbol is “big hit display” or “losing display”. It is configured to be. In other words, in the “border effect”, an effect of whether or not the third symbol that is the same as the reach formation symbol is stopped is executed in conjunction with the movement of the character symbol on the player side and the character symbol on the enemy side. . Therefore, if the “reaching effect” is executed for the variable element of “super reach”, the display result of either “big win display” or “losing display” will always appear, and the variable effect will be determined based on the display result. (Excluding the case where the variable element of “revariation” described later is executed). Therefore, the player pays the most attention to whether or not the “big hit display” appears in the “superior effect” of the variable element of “super reach”, and this “external effect” relates to the game of the pachinko machine 10. It is positioned as the most important production.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “border effect” is performed at the stage of the end of the “super reach” variable element (for example, 9 seconds from the start) in the “super reach” variable element. The “variable element” is configured to be performed at the stage of the end of the “special reach” variable element (for example, 19 seconds from the start). Further, a reach middle character display Se2 to be described later appears a little before each “time effect” is performed (for example, one second before the “time effect”). The display mode of Se2 is configured to suggest the result of “border effect”. The display mode of the reach character display Se2 will be described later.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, and instead, the third symbol display is performed. The reach formation symbol of the numerical symbol ("4" in the first embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect appears on the upper left of the display area of the device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. It is configured.

  If a variable element of “Super Reach” has a higher expectation for jackpot than the variable element of “Normal Reach” in the variable effect during execution, the player will have more than one variable effect on hold (standby). In addition, attention is paid to whether the variation effect being executed is “big hit display” or “losing display”. For this reason, attention is not paid to the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the variation effect before execution. Rather, if the reserved symbol is displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of “Super Reach”, the player cannot concentrate on the effect of the variable element of “Super Reach”, and the player There is a case where the user feels annoyed with the display of the reserved symbols.

  In addition, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship with the variation effect being executed. Furthermore, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are set (lottery) processing different from the display control of the variable effect being executed (in the audio lamp control device 113, the variable effect is related to the variable effect). Fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 44) described later, and the display of the reserved symbols is controlled by a holding display setting processing (see FIG. 43) described later. On the other hand, while the variable element of “Super Reach” is being performed, the processing load of display control is increasing by displaying various character designs and displaying many effects on each character design. is there. In such a situation, if display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the variation effect being executed is performed, the processing burden related to the display control of the entire third symbol display device 81 increases for each reserved symbol. As a result, a display abnormality such as so-called frame dropping may occur.

  Furthermore, since the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db takes over (inherits) the display mode of the holding symbol changed by the “pending change notice”, it has a direct relationship with the variation effect being executed. However, the “pending change notice” suggests the appearance expectation degree of “big win display” and the appearance expectation degree of “reach display”. For this reason, when the variable element of “super reach” appears, it is in a state where the indication of the expected level of appearance of “reach indication” as the “pending change notice” is fulfilled. In addition, when the variable element of “Super Reach” appears, the execution of “Reach Display”, which has a high jackpot expectation as the variable element of “Super Reach”, suggests the expected expectation level of “Big Jack Display”. It is in a state that satisfies a certain degree (for example, half). Further, as described above, when the variable element of “Super Reach” appears, the player pays attention to the effect contents of the variable element of “Super Reach”, and displays “Pending change notice” in the execution symbol. There is less interest in aspects.

  Therefore, during the execution of the variable element of “Super Reach”, the suspended symbol and the execution symbol whose attention level of the player is low are deleted, and the effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” is mainly executed on the display screen, Can focus (concentrate) on the production of the variable element of “super reach”. Further, by deleting the reserved symbols and execution symbols whose attention level of the player is low, it is possible to reduce the burden on the display control, and it is possible to prevent display abnormalities such as dropped frames from occurring.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, during the “battle presentation” in the “super reach” variable element (in the “competitive effect” in the “special reach” variable element), the character pattern on the player side (or The enemy character design (same for the following) is spoken, and the reach middle character display Se2 is displayed in which the speech is expressed in characters. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5C, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is deleted, a “white” character “Kurae!” That is a speech uttered from the character design on the player side is a character in reach. Displayed as display Se2. In conjunction with the display of the reach character display Se2, a voice corresponding to the character symbol “Kurae!” Is output from a voice output device 226 (see FIG. 6) described later.

  In the first embodiment, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the reach character display Se2 is displayed in the display area of the cockpit display area Db that is erased along with the execution of the “super reach” variable element. Is configured to do. Conventionally, when displaying a character display (so-called telop) on a display device of a television or a pachinko machine, the character display is displayed on the lower side of the display screen so as not to disturb the display content of the main moving image being displayed. It is common. However, if the reach character display Se2 is displayed so as to overlap the cockpit display region Db while the cockpit display region Db is displayed, the execution symbol or the hold symbol displayed in the cockpit display region Db overlaps with the reach character display. As a result, the contents of the reach character display Se2 may be difficult to recognize.

  In particular, in the situation where the above-mentioned “holding change notice” is displayed in “red” in the execution symbol or the holding symbol, the reach character display Se2 is displayed in the execution symbol or the holding symbol so as to overlap the execution symbol or the holding symbol. And the display color of the same symbol (for example, “red” chance up pattern described later) and “red” of the execution symbol or the reserved symbol and the display color of the reach character display Se2 (for example, “red”) Are similar colors, the character content of the reach character display Se2 is buried in the execution symbol or the reserved symbol and is confused, and the display content of the reach character display Se2 may not be visible.

  Further, when the reach character display Se2 is displayed on the upper side of the cockpit display area Db, the reach character display Se2 must be displayed near the center of the display area corresponding to the display of the cockpit display area Db. The effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” and the character display Se2 in the reach overlap, and the effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” and the display content of the character display Se2 in the reach may be difficult to recognize.

  Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is erased during execution of the “super reach” variable element in which the reach character display Se2 is displayed, and the reach character display Se2 is displayed in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is erased. With this configuration, it is possible to display the displayed content of the reach character display Se2 so as not to overlap with other display objects while effectively using the display area of the erased cockpit display area Db. Therefore, the displayable area of the reach character display Se2 can be secured to make it easy for the player to see the display content, and the effect content of the variation effect can be recognized accurately.

  Further, in the reach character display Se2 of the first embodiment, two types of display modes of “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” can be displayed as in the case of the character display Se1 when reach occurs. Specifically, when “weak pattern” in the reach character display Se2 is selected, a character pattern “Kurae!” Is displayed. In addition, when “strong pattern” in the reach character display Se <b> 2 is selected, a character pattern with a stronger vocabulary than the “weak pattern” of “stop” is displayed. The details of the “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” of the reach character display Se2 will be described later.

  Further, the reach character display Se2 of the first embodiment is configured such that the displayed character color can be changed, similar to the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. Specifically, the character is displayed in “white” as the normal display color of the reach character display Se2. In addition, the characters are displayed in “red” as the display color of the first chance up pattern having a higher probability of jackpot than the normal display color. Furthermore, the character is displayed in “golden” as the display color of the second chance up pattern having a higher probability of jackpot than the first chance up pattern. The details of the display color of the reach character display Se2 will be described later.

  In the state of FIG. 5 (c), the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol that causes the variation factor of this “super reach” is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. ing. The effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” indicates whether the variable effect being executed will be “big hit display” or “losing display”, but is directly related to the display mode of the third graphic Since it is performed by a character design that does not have a symbol, if attention is paid only to the character design in the variable element of “Super Reach” in a state where the third design is not displayed at all, the effect is “reach display”. In some cases, it may not be possible to recognize whether or not it is a “demo screen”. In addition, since the effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is determined whether the “reach display” is generated by which third symbol during the variable element of “Super Reach”. May forget. However, if the reach formation pattern is displayed large during the execution of the variable element of “Super Reach”, the effect of “Super Reach” becomes difficult to see, and the effect of the variable element of “Super Reach” itself is obstructed. There is a risk that.

  Therefore, among the variable elements of “super reach”, the reach formation symbol of the third symbol that causes the variable element of “super reach” is displayed small in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that the “reach display” has occurred without obstructing the effect of the variable element of “super reach”, and the third design that has generated the “reach display” Can be clearly suggested to the player.

  In the state of FIG. 5 (c), a numeric symbol (in the first embodiment) indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is shown in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. , “4”) is displayed. As described above, since the display of the cockpit display area Db is erased during the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, the player can completely determine the number of times of the variable effects suspended depending on the display content of the cockpit display area Db. May not be recognized.

  Therefore, instead of deleting the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, the holding ball of the variable effect is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. It is configured to display a numerical symbol indicating the number. By configuring in this way, during the production of the variable element of “Super Reach”, the number of variable effects held by the player is indicated without impeding the production of the variable element of “Super Reach” Can do.

  In FIG. 5 (d), from the state of FIG. 5 (c), the effect of the variable element of “super reach” is lost (the enemy character symbol wins), and “lost display” appears in the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  Here, the character design in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed as “lost display” after the “spot effect” indicating “big hit display” or “lost display” in the variable element of “super reach” is executed. Is displayed in a manner showing a disappointed expression. Also, in the left small area Ds1, serifs (fixed phrases and expressions that are often used in specific scenes and scenes, etc.) uttered from the character design. In the first embodiment, The character of the fixed phrase as if it originated from the character design corresponding to the result of the “border effect” is displayed as the fixed phrase character display Se3. In the example shown in FIG. 5D, a “white” character “Sumane ...” is displayed as the fixed phrase character display Se3. In conjunction with the display of the fixed phrase character display Se3 for “losing display”, a voice corresponding to the character symbol “Sumane ...” is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 6) described later. It is configured as follows.

  In this case, when the “big hit display” appears after the “super-reach” variable element is executed, the character design in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner indicating a happy mark. In the small left area Ds1, for example, a “white” character “Yataze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design is displayed as a fixed phrase character display Se3. In conjunction with the display of the fixed phrase character display Se3 for the “big hit display”, a voice corresponding to the character design “Yataze!” Is output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 6) described later. It is configured.

  In the first embodiment, as the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “bounce effect”, one character display (“Sumane ...” at the time of losing or “Yataze!” At the time of the big hit!) Is displayed. However, instead of this, a plurality of character displays may be displayed after the “produce effect”. Specifically, for example, after the “border effect” is completed, a scene where each character pattern is spoken so that a plurality of character designs can talk each other, and the “lost effect” appears in the “border effect” The words “I ’m sorry…”, which is a speech uttered from one character design, are displayed as the fixed phrase character display Se3, and “Next, let's do our best…” “” May be displayed as the fixed phrase text display Se3.

  Further, in the fluctuating effect of the first embodiment, after “temporarily displaying” is temporarily stopped, the “losing display” is changed again to “big hit display” by changing the “missing display” again (fluctuating element). Although it is prepared, the pseudo fixed phrase character display (hereinafter, the pseudo fixed phrase character display is referred to as “pseudo fixed phrase character display”) Se4 is displayed even when the “losing display” that is temporarily stopped appears. It is configured to be. In this case, a “white” character “Sumane ...” corresponding to the temporarily stopped “lost display” is displayed as the pseudo-fixed phrase character display Se4, and the effect of “re-variation” is executed. When the “display” appears, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Yataze!” Corresponding to the “big hit display” is displayed again.

  That is, this fixed phrase character display Se3 or pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured to display a line corresponding to the display result of the variation effect of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm. As described above, when the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is “big hit display”, the character symbol of the mode showing the happy expression is “Yayaze” "White" characters are displayed as the fixed phrase text display Se3. On the other hand, in the case where the stop symbol or temporary stop symbol of the third symbol variation effect displayed in the main display area Dm is “lost display”, as described above, the character symbol in a mode showing a disappointed expression. Are displayed as a fixed phrase character display Se3 or a pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4.

  In addition, as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 according to the first embodiment corresponds to one type of the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Yataze!” Corresponding to the “big hit display” and “lost display”. A total of two types of fixed phrase character display Se3, which is one type of fixed phrase character display Se3 of “Sumane ...”, can be displayed. That is, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is not provided with a character pattern such as “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” like the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach, and at that time in the variable performance Each type of character pattern corresponding to the displayed display result (result of success / failure) is displayed.

  On the other hand, the fixed phrase character display Se3 or the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 of the first embodiment is configured such that the character color to be displayed can be changed in the same manner as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach. Specifically, as a normal display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 or the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, “white”, “red”, or “golden”, similar to the character display Se1 when reaching and the character display Se2 during reach. The characters can be displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a chance-up pattern (“red” or “gold”) appears in any of the character displays Se1, Se2, the chance increases in the subsequent character displays Se2-Se4. The display which inherited the pattern is configured to be executable. Specifically, for example, when the first chance up pattern of “red” is executed in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, the character display in the reach character display Se2 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) The “red” first chance-up pattern is configured to be executable. In addition, for example, when the “white” normal pattern is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is executed when the “red” first chance up pattern is executed in the reach character display Se2. In (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4), the “red” first chance up pattern can be executed.

  This is a configuration in which a chance display pattern is drawn at each appearance location in the case where the character display appears at a plurality of locations of the variation effect as in the first embodiment. This is because lottery processing for the places is necessary, and the lottery processing increases the processing load. Also, in the variation effect, if the character display executed first is displayed in a chance-up pattern and then the character display executed later is displayed in a normal pattern that is not a chance-up pattern, In the character display, the jackpot expectation is reduced (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”), and the player who has been uplifted by the appearance of the chance up pattern in the previous character display, This is because there is a possibility that the game will be awakened by seeing the falling expression of the character display.

  Therefore, the chance-up pattern lottery is performed at once for the character display of the variation effect, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, the chance-up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display. By configuring, it is not necessary to perform a lottery process for each appearance location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the chance up pattern is set, the chance up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display, thereby eliminating the phenomenon that the expression of falling down in the character display occurs, so that the player can enter the game. It can prevent being awakened. In particular, the more the number of character display appearance points (for example, five or more locations) that can execute the chance-up pattern in the variation production, the more the batch lottery works and the control burden is remarkably reduced. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the chance up patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are collectively set, for example, in the state where the “effect display” is executed and the “lost display” appears in the variation effect, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is the chance. An up pattern (for example, “red”) may be displayed. In such a case, the player cannot execute the “change display” as it is because the fixed phrase display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern. Thus, it is predicted that “lost display” will change to “big hit display”. However, contrary to the prediction, the variation effect is determined as “losing display”, so that the player makes the pachinko machine 10 distrustful due to the flaw of the effect contents, and the pachinko machine 10 is There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect is determined by “lost display”, a chance-up pattern (for example, “red”) is displayed in the character display Se1 or the character display Se2 when the reach occurs. Even if it has been executed, the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “super effect” variable element of “super reach” is configured not to appear a chance up pattern. That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern. In addition, when the variation effect is confirmed by “big hit display”, when the chance up pattern is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, the “super-reach” variable element “ In the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “effect”, the display color of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. The display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation element of “super reach” ends and the variation effect is stopped and displayed (determined display), the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is the initial state, that is, Each of the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to recognize that the variation effect has been stopped (determined display), and when there is a variation effect on hold (standby), the next variation effect is smoothly displayed. It can be executed. Therefore, when the variable element of “Super Reach” is finished, the fact that the execution symbol and the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed is a natural expression in the flow of the variable production execution process. Does not feel uncomfortable.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 5A to 5D, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the main display area Dm, the sub display area Ds, and the cockpit display area Db are displayed at each timing in the variation effect. By expanding, reducing, erasing, or redisplaying the state, it is configured to make it easy for the player to recognize the display content having high importance at each timing.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the first embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 64 is in an operating state for a predetermined time ( Open).

  The number of balls held in the second entrance 67 of the ball is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of lights of the second symbol holding lamp 84.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) makes a lottery lottery, a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  The first entrance 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades that cover an opening through which the ball enters the first entrance 64. The electric accessory opens or closes the two blades to bring the first entrance 64 into an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In normal times, the first entrance 64 is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand up), and the ball cannot enter the first entrance 64, or It is difficult to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol “◯”, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand upward while the electric accessory is being operated. The first entrance 64 is in an open state in a state of being substantially V-shaped (inverted C-shaped). When the first entrance 64 is in an open state, the sphere can enter the first entrance 64 or a state in which the sphere is easier to enter than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, when the first symbol 64 stops when the symbol “○” is stopped and the first entrance 64 is opened, the ball enters the first entrance 64. It is possible to enter a state where many lottery lotteries can be made by entering the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is set so as to become a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  A second entrance 67 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80. The second entrance 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for passing a sphere in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second entrance 67, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the on. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (also referred to as a normal symbol) is performed.

  As a result of lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through the second entrance 67, if it is determined to be a win, the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and “○ After the symbol "" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 moves from a substantially upright state to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) for a predetermined time. A state in which the sphere can enter the first entrance 64 or a state in which the sphere is easier to enter than in the closed state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning entrances (entrance entrances) 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out entrance 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. Each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter referred to as “MPU”) as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and various lotteries. A random number generator used in the above, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like are mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as “RAM”) 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program, and other interrupt circuits, timer circuits, Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variable effects in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results of variable display in the second symbol display device 83 are performed. Perform the main processing. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a number-of-holds table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a variation pattern table 202e. The main controller 110 executes the above main control by using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are used for lottery lottery, setting of dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of variable display on the second symbol display device 83 For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used. In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS.

  For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and the variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot symbol A first initial value random number used for setting an initial value of the first per random number counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, and a first per random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a first entrance 64 is provided. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 899”), and “899” in the case of a counter that can take a maximum value (for example, “0 to 899”). ) To reach “0”. In particular, when the first per-random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. is there. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 64. It is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the big hit random number table 202a. A jackpot is determined when the value matches the set random number value.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “normal gaming state” and a “low probability state” (a period that is not a “probability variation state”). The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is divided into two types, one for the high probability state used in the case of the “probability variation state (probably changing)”, which is a high probability state that has a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability state. . The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. In the first per random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is three, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the big hit random number table 202a. Has been.

  On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are jackpots is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Yes.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a so that the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state are not duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) to obtain a maximum value (for example, “0”). In the case of a counter that can take a value of “˜99”, the counter returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). Of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that loses, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the stop symbol type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those for the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  As described above, the jackpot type is “15R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “probability fluctuation state” in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds. Later, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, and “15R normal jackpot” that shifts to “time reduction state” for 100 fluctuations, and “probability variation state” after the maximum number of rounds is two rounds of jackpot There is a “2R probability variation jackpot”. In the following description, the 15 round jackpots of “15R probability variable jackpot” and “15R normal jackpot” may be described as “15R jackpot common”.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “15R probability variation big hit”, and the first hit type counter C2 of “15R normal big hit” is associated with it. The values “40 to 79” are associated with each other, and the value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “2R probability variation big hit”.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, “15R probability variable jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%, “15R normal jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%, and “2R” with a probability of 20%. Probable jackpot is selected. Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state is prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table 202b may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of “0 to 99”, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, “99”), returns to “0”.

  In the first embodiment, a rough effect mode of a variable effect at the time of big hit and a loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of reserved variable effects held and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, “non-reach (shortened)” production mode or “non-reach (normal)” production mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and only “normal reach” variable elements are executed as “reach display”. The “normal reach” production mode, the “super reach” production mode in which the “super reach” variation factor is executed after the “normal reach” variation factor, and the “special reach” in the same way. Six special effects are selected, which are a “special reach” effect that executes the variable element and a “special fluctuation” effect that occurs when “2R probability variation jackpot” is selected.

  Here, each effect aspect is demonstrated in detail. Among the production modes, the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode and the “non-reach (normal)” production mode are “in the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 4A)” of the main display area Dm. This is a production mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the “reach display” is not generated after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed.

  Here, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” refers to each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) in the changing effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol displayed on the screen is a variable element that is scrolled at a high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this “high-speed fluctuation” effect, the 3rd symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the 3rd symbol, and the stop result of the variable effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Run as.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed except for a specific production mode (“non-reach (shortening)” production mode). It is configured to be The variable element of “low speed fluctuation” means that the player visually recognizes the variable element of the “high speed fluctuation” in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4A). This refers to a variable element that is scrolling the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. In the variable element of this “low speed fluctuation”, the third symbol sequence Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4A) in the order of the third symbol row while allowing the player to recognize the display contents of the third symbol. Stop displaying symbols. When the same third symbol is stopped in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is assumed that “reach display” has occurred and develops into a variable element of “normal reach”, while in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except in the case of developing to a “pseudo-continuous” described later).

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode, the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” is performed after the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A). ) Stop in turn, and one variation effect is finished. On the other hand, in the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode, the “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is not performed after the “high speed fluctuation” is performed. Z3 stops simultaneously, and one variation effect ends.

  Among the production modes, the “normal reach” production mode is the same as the left design row Z1 and the right design row Z3 in the variation production of each of the design rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4A) of the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the “normal reach” variable element is executed, and other “reach display”, that is, the “reach display” variable element that does not develop into the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element. This is one of the production modes. In the variable element of “normal reach”, as described above, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display region Dm1) and the right symbol row Z3 (right display region Dm3) of the main display region Dm is displayed. It is displayed enlarged than usual. In addition, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display region Dm2) scrolls downward at a low speed on the display screen at a low speed, and is displayed in a state where the player can visually recognize the third symbol of the middle display region Dm2. . Further, in this “normal reach” variable element, the sub display area Ds is erased as the main display area Dm is enlarged (see FIG. 5B).

  Among the production modes, the “super reach” production mode is one of the “reach display” production modes in which the fluctuation element of “super reach” is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”. In this “super reach” effect mode, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4A) is erased from the display state of the “normal reach” variable element. The reach formation symbol of the third symbol that was the cause of the “reach display” is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”, and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform “battle presentation (kickboxing in the first embodiment)” (FIG. 5 ( c)).

  In 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the success or failure of a change effect may be suggested based on the result (win / lose) of the "battle effect". Specifically, for example, in the above “battle production”, if the player's character design wins the enemy's character design, it suggests that the variation production will be “hit display”, and the player When the character design on the side is defeated by the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is “lost display”.

  Among the production modes, the “special reach” production mode is one of the “reach display” production modes in which the fluctuation element of “special reach” is executed by developing from the fluctuation element of “normal reach”. In this “special reach” production mode, during the execution of the “special reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 4) is displayed from the display state of the “normal reach” variable element in the same manner as the “super reach” variable element. (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach formation symbol of the third symbol that was the cause of this “reach display” is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4A) changes from the “normal reach” variable element, and a plurality of characters different from the “super reach” variable element appear to display the “competitive effect”. (In the first embodiment, an automobile race) is performed (not shown).

  In 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the success or failure of a change production may be suggested based on the result (win / loss) of the "competitive production". Specifically, for example, in the above “competitive effect”, if the player's character design wins the enemy's character design, it suggests that the variation effect will be “hit display”, and the player When the character design on the side is defeated by the character design on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is “lost display”.

  Among the production modes, the “special variation” production mode is a production mode that is executed without exception when “2R probability variation jackpot” is won. In this “special variation” effect mode, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the entire main display area Dm is changed from the normal background display, which suggests that “2R probability variation jackpot” occurs. "Movie" production is displayed.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to in accordance with the success / failure of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the number of variation effects currently on hold (the number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured so as to be selected according to the number of waiting variation effects (the number of reserved balls). In the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of a variation effect, first, based on the reservation number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the variation effect is present, the current game state, and the current variation effect. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the change effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random number values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the effect mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the change effect according to whether or not the change effect is appropriate, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit is generated in the acquired variation effect of the third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability variation state”, “time reduction state” or “normal gaming state” This is because the selection ratio of the production mode is changed depending on whether there is (3) the number of reserved balls of the variable production that are held.

  This is because, as a first reason, the degree of expectation that is a big hit for each effect mode is changed. That is, the ratio of the “non-reach” effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, and the “special reach” effect mode depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery is won Are configured to be different from each other, thereby changing the degree of expectation that is a big hit for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production is performed. A mode and a “normal reach” effect mode are easily selected. By configuring in this way, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be made easy to win, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are difficult to win. It can be an effect or an effect that does not hit a jackpot, and the jackpot expectation degree for each effect mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when an effect that is likely to be a big hit appears in a variable effect, it is suggested that the player is likely to generate a big hit while the easy hit effect is being performed, and the game's interest is enhanced. Yes.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to win and a stop pattern table 202d that is difficult to select an effect that is difficult to win (for example, Based on the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11 (a)), it is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is likely to be a big hit, and a stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10) that is easy to select an effect that is difficult to win. (See (a) or FIG. 10 (b))). Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variation effect, if an effect that is likely to be a big hit is being executed, the effect that is likely to cause a big hit in the variable effect and that is difficult to hit is executed. If it is, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variation effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expectation value for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variation effect.

  In addition, as a second reason, in order to reduce as much as possible the useless balls based on entering the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of standby times of the variation effect has reached the upper limit (so-called no lottery by overflow winning). is there. More specifically, since the maximum number of standby times for variable effects is set at 4 times, and the change output is executed for at least a fixed time, the number of times in the “probability change state” and “time reduction state” is In a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter one entrance 64, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls in the third symbol. In these gaming states, if a variation effect with a long variation time is selected, the entry to the first entry port 64 in the state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached frequently occurs, the turning angle, the first entry Despite entering the mouth 64, the lottery opportunity of the 3rd symbol cannot be acquired. Also, even in the “normal game state”, when a variation effect with a long variation time is selected in a state where the maximum number of retained balls of the third symbol has been reached, the number of retained balls of the third symbol during execution of the variation effect. Therefore, even if a ball enters the first ball slot 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball enters the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. Until it is, the ball is stopped and the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered, which affects the management of the game hall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a relatively short variation time is obtained in a gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached or in the number of held balls close to (or coincident with) the maximum number of reserved balls. Based on a stop pattern table 202d (for example, B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B)) that is easy to select, it is configured to select an effect mode of variation effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball entering the first entrance 64 in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

  Furthermore, as a third reason, the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed to maintain the state in which the variation effect is being executed for a long time. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small (there is no), if the ball does not enter the first entrance 64 within the variation time of the variation effect being executed, the next variation effect is required. Cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform a fluctuating effect on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in spite of playing a game by launching a ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is seeking. Instead, it will awaken to the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the ball is difficult to enter the first entrance 64 because the variation design is not performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. It may be judged that the game in the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for variation effects is small, a stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A)) in which a relatively long variation time is easily selected. ) To select the effect mode of the variable effect. Thereby, the situation where the variation effect is not performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  Details of the hold number table 202c and the stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the variation effect is referred to by referring to the hold number table 202c. One of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 is selected based on whether or not, the gaming state at that time, and the number of pending variable effects at that time as well. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d4 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the change effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the number-of-holds table 202c in FIG. 9, when the “normal game state” is extracted, the number of held balls is “1” or “2 or 3”, or “ In the case of a loss extraction of “probability variation state” or “time shortening state” and the number of held balls is “1”, the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 10A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. . Further, when the “normal game state” is extracted and the number of held balls is “4”, or when the “probability variation state” or “time reduction state” is extracted, the number of held balls is “ In the case of “two or three” or “four”, the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 10B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. Further, when “15R jackpot (“ 15R probability variable jackpot ”or“ 15R normal jackpot ””) is extracted, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 11 (a)) Browse) is selected. In addition, even when “2R probability variation big hit” is extracted, the D table 202d4 (see FIG. 11B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the gaming state or the number of reserved balls.

  That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3 or D table 202d4) is selected based only on the jackpot type regardless of the number of held balls and the gaming state at that time, The stop pattern table 202d (the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2) is selected based only on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time only when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of losing).

  In addition, even when winning a jackpot, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, if the number of reserved balls is large when a big win is won, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easily selected (for example, a “super-reach” effect mode in which a variation factor of “high-speed variation” is 3 seconds or “ A “special reach” production mode or the like may be selected. In this case, in each effect form in which “reach display” is executed, an effect form in which only the time of the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is changed from 7 seconds to 3 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a variation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls is four times, even if the variation factor of “high-speed variation” is performed in 3 seconds, When the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element ends (when it is recognized as “high-speed fluctuation” for 3 seconds), “reach display” may occur in the fluctuation effect, and the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 3 seconds. Even in the case where the action is performed, it can be configured such that an effect mode in which “reach display” other than “non-reach (shortened)” is executed is executed. Therefore, at the time of execution of the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 3 seconds, it is not possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

  Further, in the “probability variation state” and “time shortening state”, when the jackpot is not won and the number of reserved balls is small, a stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table) in which a relatively long variation pattern is easily selected. 202d1) may be selected. With this configuration, even in the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state”, it is easy to maintain the state where the variation effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and in the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to make it difficult for the situation where the variation effect is not performed, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

  Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of a loss. FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically illustrating the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “95” to “94”. 97 ”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the“ special reach ”effect mode is set to“ 98 ”and“ 99 ”. In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode, and the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is set not to be selected. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “95”. ”To“ 97 ”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the“ special reach ”effect mode is set to“ 98, 99 ”. In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

  That is, in the A table 202d1, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In the B table 202d2, the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is 75%, the “normal reach” production mode is 20%, the “super reach” production mode is 3%, and the “special reach” production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. The selection ratio of the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, and the “special reach” effect mode of the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 is set to be the same.

  Therefore, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is selected in the A table 202d1, and the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is selected instead of the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode in the B table 202d2. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it can be said that the variation time of the variation effect selected in the A table 202d1 is relatively long compared to the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 is likely to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

  Thus, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, the effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the change effect that is on hold. For example, when the number of reserved balls for a variation effect is large, it is easy to select a “non-reach (shortening)” effect mode with a short variation effect time. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the execution time of the variation effect can be increased by shortening the execution time of the variation effect to be executed and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect.

  In addition, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small, the variation effect time is longer than the “non-reach (shortening)” effect mode in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. The “non-reach (normal)” production mode is easily selected. Thereby, since “non-reach (normal)” having a longer variation production time can be performed than when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is selected, the entry time of the ball to the first entrance 64 Can be ensured, and the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be increased, thereby maintaining the state in which the variation effect is being executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11A, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “40” to “39”. 99 ". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special variation” effect mode, and the “special variation” effect mode is set not to be selected. Further, since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, the “non-reach” effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not allocated to the other “reach display”. Therefore, the stop type selected when “2R probability variation big hit” is won is always set to the “special variation” effect mode. Since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, the “non-reach” effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the C table 202d3, the “normal reach” effect mode is set to 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is set to 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is set to 60%. Further, in the D table 202d4, the “special variation” effect mode is set to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is higher in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and in the variation production at the time of loss, the “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to be higher in the order of “super reach” production mode> “special reach” production mode. Therefore, the expectation degree of jackpot at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is highly likely that the jackpot display results will appear in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode. It is comprised so that it may become. Thereby, the expectation degree to the jackpot can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variation effect, and the uplifting feeling to the jackpot can be tasted according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the player.

  In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected on the basis of the number of reserved balls of the variation effect is different in selecting the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss. It is configured that substantially the same effect mode is selected by determining the variation effect based on the time when the ball enters 64 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. . Specifically, in the case of a lost production effect, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected on the basis of the number of reserved balls of the production effect. In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode or the “non-reach (normal)” production mode is the same, and is assigned to other production modes. The values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (shortened)” production mode is selected or the “non-reach (normal)” production mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable production. The same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of variation are substantially even when the game state transitions (for example, “probability variation state” from “normal game state”). Therefore, the same production mode is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as “pending change notice” is performed based on the production mode selected at the time of winning the start prize, the contents of the pre-reading notice are included in the variable production targeted for the prefetch notice. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which no wrinkle occurs.

  As described above, a situation in which a game is being performed by determining the effect mode of the variation effect to be executed based on whether or not the variation effect is appropriate, the gaming state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variation effect at that time. By reducing the execution time of the variation effect based on the above and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by “1” within a range of “0 to 199”, and reaches a maximum value (that is, “199”) and then returns to “0”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of variation effects. In other words, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in detail in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The change mode is determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform control such as the detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variation effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare commands for all variation patterns of variation effects in main controller 110, and the ROM capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect is determined based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, so that the variation effect can be obtained. The degree of freedom to choose can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the gaming state changes every moment, it becomes possible to select or change the contents of the effect of the variation effect at any time corresponding to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. it can.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of a big hit and a lost variation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of a loss as the fluctuation pattern table 202e. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the production mode, for “E5: normal reach” that is referred to when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “E6: super” that is referred to when the “super reach” production mode is determined. “E7: Special fluctuation”, which is referred to when “E7: Special reach” is determined, and “Ec: Special fluctuation” is referred to when the “special reach” effect is determined. It is divided into for use. Each of the divided groups is associated with a value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit (big hit random number value), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area, and the start winning point The stop pattern table 202d is selected on the basis of the game state in the game and the number of balls held at the time of starting winning, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d are selected. An effect mode is selected based on the result. And the group (group) referred in the variation pattern table 202e1 for jackpots based on the production mode is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is a temporary variation in the variation effect retained in the reserved area. It is determined as a pattern.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, “E5: normal reach” includes “normal reach only” with an overall variation time of 15 seconds, “pseudo gasses + normal reach” with an overall variation time of 25 seconds, and an overall variation time. "Pseudo ream 1 + normal reach" of 35 seconds, "Normal reach + re-variation" of 25 seconds overall change, "Pseudo gas + normal reach + re-variation" of 35 seconds overall change, overall fluctuation Six variation patterns of “pseudo-continuation 1 + normal reach + revariation” with a time of 45 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, each variable element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variation element constitutes a part of one variation effect, and one variation effect is configured by combining each variation element. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as a variable element, a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”, a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, a variable element of “pseudo gas”, a variable element of “pseudo ream 1”, 2 ”,“ normal reach ”variable element,“ super reach ”variable element,“ special reach ”variable element,“ re-change ”variable element, and“ movie ”variable element.

  The “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that fluctuates at a high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is selected, this “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed for 3 seconds at the beginning of the fluctuation production (see FIG. 14), and other than “non-reach (shortening)”. When the effect mode of the variable element (for example, “non-reach (normal)”) is selected, it is performed for 7 seconds at the beginning of the change effect (see FIG. 14). When the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element ends, the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element described later is started (executed), or the variable effect is ended as it is.

  The “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element starts after the execution of the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element for 7 seconds, and is a fluctuation that shows whether or not “reach display” is generated by scrolling the third symbol so that it can be visually recognized. Is an element. The variable element of the “low speed fluctuation” is not executed when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is selected, and the production mode other than the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode (for example, “non-reach (usually normal) ) When “Production mode” is selected, it is performed for 3 seconds after the fluctuation element of “High-speed fluctuation”. That is, in the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode, after the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm do not pass through the “low-speed fluctuation” variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). When the “low speed fluctuation” variable element is completed, the “pseudo gas” variable element described later is started (executed) or the “normal reach” variable element described below is started (executed). Alternatively, it is configured so that the fluctuating effect ends as it is.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 7 seconds and a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” for 3 seconds. Fluctuation production is configured. In addition, the “non-reach (shortening)” effect mode includes a variation effect composed of only a variation pattern of “high-speed variation” for 3 seconds.

  The “pseudo-gase” variable element is a “pseudo-series 1” variable element or “pseudo-series 2” variable element (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-series 1” variable element and “pseudo-series 2” variable element). Is a variable element that does not generate the “pseudo-continuous” variable element.

  A “pseudo-continuous” variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable effect occurs a plurality of times (a pseudo stop is one or more times) in a single variable effect. Specifically, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is started and switched to the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The unit effect that the variation effect is ended and a predetermined stop result (for example, pseudo-continuous chance item “677”) is displayed is a variation element that is performed a plurality of times during one variation effect. The variable element of the “pseudo-continuous” is that the predetermined stop result is stopped at least once after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, so that the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” starts again from the stop result, The effect is executed as if the changing effect was started once more.

  In the variable element of “pseudo gas”, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after execution of the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (FIG. 4 (a)) The effect of whether or not to stop after a reciprocating fluctuation on the top (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo fluctuation”) is performed, and the predetermined stop result does not appear in the “pseudo fluctuation” It is a variable element that does not develop to the variable element of the “pseudo-ream”. Therefore, the variable element of the “pseudo gas” is developed into a variable element of “normal reach” after the end of the variable element of the “pseudo gas”, or “lost display” appears (for example, “687”). ) And the variation production is finished as it is.

  As for the variable element of “Pseudo-ream 1”, a predetermined stop result appears after execution of “pseudo fluctuation” after the variable element of “low speed fluctuation”, and the variable element of the second “high speed fluctuation” is executed again. Thereafter, the second “pseudo fluctuation” is a fluctuation element that develops into a fluctuation element of “normal reach” without a predetermined stop result appearing again. That is, the variable element of “pseudo-run 1” is a pseudo-fluctuation stop (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-stop”) in which a pseudo-run chance is displayed, and then a predetermined stop result in the pseudo stop. Appears, and again is a variable element that starts the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”. Therefore, after completion of the “pseudo-run 1” variable element, it always develops to at least a “normal reach” variable element.

  As for the variable element of “Pseudo-ream 2”, a predetermined stop result appears after execution of “pseudo fluctuation” after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, and the second “high-speed fluctuation” variable element is executed again. In the second “pseudo fluctuation”, a predetermined stop result appears again, and the third “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is executed, and then the fluctuation element develops into a “normal reach” fluctuation element. That is, the “pseudo train 2” is a variable element in which a pseudo stop is performed twice in total, a predetermined stop result appears in each pseudo stop, and the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “pseudo-ream 2” variable element is set to the maximum number of pseudo-variations among the “pseudo-ream” variable elements. Therefore, after the end of the variable element of “pseudo-ream 1”, the variable element of “normal reach” is always developed.

  Therefore, the fluctuation element of “pseudo gas” is an effect that does not stop the pseudo continuous chance after the first fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation”, and is performed for a total of 10 seconds. As for the fluctuation element of “Pseudo Run 1”, the pseudo run chance stops after the first “Low Speed Fluctuation” fluctuation element, and then “Pseudo Fluctuation” is performed. It is an effect in which reach formation symbols appear, and is performed for a total of 20 seconds. As for the fluctuation element of “Pseudo Run 2”, the first “Pseudo Fluctuation” is performed after the first “Slow Fluctuation” fluctuation element, and then the first “Pseudo Fluctuation” is performed. This is an effect in which the “pseudo variation” is stopped again, and then the “pseudo variation” is performed again, and the reach formation symbol appears, which is performed for a total of 30 seconds (see FIG. 14).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after execution of the “pseudo gas” variable element, a pattern in which a “lost display” appears without displaying a predetermined stop result, and a predetermined stop There is a pattern in which the reach formation symbol stops and the fluctuation factor of “normal reach” occurs, although the result is not displayed. In addition, after the execution of the variable element of “pseudo-run 1”, the pattern of displaying the “miss display” without displaying the predetermined stop result and the predetermined stop result as the variable element of “pseudo gas” are displayed. A pattern that does not appear but the reach formation symbol stops and a fluctuation factor of “normal reach” occurs is prepared. Further, after the execution of the variable element of “Pseudo-ream 2”, a “miss display” does not appear directly, and a pattern in which the reach formation symbol stops and “normal reach” occurs is prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the variable element of the “pseudo ream 2” is configured to be selected only when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected. ing. Therefore, if the “Pseudo-Condition 2” variable element is used, then it is determined that the “Super Reach” variable element or the “Special Reach” variable element will occur via the “Normal Reach” variable element. To do.

  Note that a “pseudo-continuous” variable element having a pseudo-stop count (pseudo-continuous chance stop count) of 3 or more may be provided. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined stop result appears in the fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” without executing “pseudo fluctuation”, and the effect is developed in relation to the fluctuation element of “pseudo train”.

  The fluctuation factors of “normal reach” are the fluctuation elements of “low speed fluctuation”, the fluctuation elements of “pseudo gas”, the fluctuation elements of “pseudo ream 1” or the fluctuation elements of “pseudo ream 2” (hereinafter referred to as “low speed fluctuation”). "Variable element," pseudo gas "variable element," pseudo ream 1 "variable element, or" pseudo ream 2 "variable element may be collectively referred to as" low-speed fluctuation "). This is a variation element that shows whether or not a big hit is generated depending on the variation result of the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach formation symbols are stopped and displayed in the row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. This “normal reach” fluctuation element is performed for 10 seconds after a fluctuation element such as “low-speed fluctuation” (see FIG. 14).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after executing the fluctuation element of “normal reach”, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and “super reach” A pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of “special reach”, and a pattern that executes the “variable” variable element once a temporary “lose display” appears. Has been.

  The variation element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the variation of “normal reach” does not stop the “losing display” and the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued. In the main display area Dm, It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot is generated by performing “direction”. This “super-reach” variable is performed for 10 seconds after the “normal reach” variable is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of “super reach”, a pattern that directly displays “lost display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and a temporary And a pattern for executing the “revariation” variable element after the “lost display” appears.

  The variable element of “Special Reach” is developed and executed when the fluctuation pattern of “Normal reach” does not stop “Loss display” and the change of the middle symbol row Z2 is continued. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot is generated by performing “direction”. The variable element of “special reach” is performed for 20 seconds after the variable element of “normal reach” is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the variable element of “special reach”, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “hit display”, and a temporary A pattern that “changes again” after the “lost display” appears is prepared.

  In addition, it is configured to develop into a “super reach” variable element or a “special reach” variable element after execution of the “normal reach” variable element, but instead of this structure, reach formation after “low speed fluctuation” When the symbol is stopped, it may be configured not to go through the “normal reach” fluctuation element but to develop into the “super reach” fluctuation element and the “special reach” fluctuation element. Alternatively, the “special reach” variable factor may be performed after the “super reach” variable factor is executed.

  The variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that is developed and executed after the “lose display” once appears in any “reach display”, and displays the “hit display”. The variable element of this “re-change” is performed for 10 seconds after any “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, only the pattern in which “big hit display” appears after the execution of the “revariation” variable element is prepared. That is, when “re-change” is executed, “big jackpot display” always appears after that.

  The “movie” variable element is a variable element that appears after the execution of “low-speed fluctuation” when “2R probability variable jackpot” is won, and causes a “big jackpot display” corresponding to “2R probability variable jackpot” to appear. . The variation element of the “movie” is performed for 40 seconds after the “low-speed variation”, and an effect that a specific character design (for example, a premier character) speaks a predetermined message is executed in the entire main display area Dm (not shown). )

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, after execution of the “movie” variable element, only a pattern in which “big jackpot display” corresponding to “2R probability variation big hit” appears is prepared. In other words, when “movie” is executed, “big jackpot display” of “2R probable big hit” always appears after that.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E5: normal reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0-9” for “normal reach only (01H)”, “pseudo gas + normal reach ( 02H) ”,“ 20-19 ”for“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Normal Reach (03H) ”,“ 60-79 ”for“ Normal Reach + Revariation (04H) ”,“ Pseudo “80 to 99” for “Gase + Normal reach + Revariation (05H)”, and “100 to 199” for “Pseudo-ream 1 + Normal reach + Revariation (06H)”.

  That is, in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach only (01H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasse + normal reach (02H)” is 5%, “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach (03H)” ”Fluctuation pattern is 20%,“ normal reach + revariation (04H) ”variation pattern is 10%,“ pseudo gasse + normal reach + revariation (05H) ”variation pattern is 10%,“ pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re- The variation pattern “variation (06H)” is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of “revariation” is easily selected (70% of the whole), and in particular, “pseudo ream + normal reach + revariation ( 06H) ”is easily selected (50% of the total). However, games that can expect big hits from any variation pattern by selecting “normal reach only (01H)” or “pseudo gas + normal reach (02H)” that does not include the “revariation” variation factor. Can provide sex.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, “E6: Super reach” includes “super reach only (01H)” with an overall variation time of 25 seconds and “pseudo gasses + super reach” with an overall variation time of 35 seconds. 02H) ”,“ pseudo-run 1 + super reach (03H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 45 seconds,“ pseudo-run 2 + super reach (04H) ”with an overall fluctuation time of 55 seconds, 35 seconds of “Super Reach + Revariation (05H)”, 45 minutes of overall variation time “Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H)”, and 55 minutes of overall variation time of “Pseudo Ream 1+” Eight fluctuation patterns, “Super Reach + Revariation (07H)” and “Pseudo-ream 2 + Super Reach + Revariation (08H)” with an overall fluctuation time of 65 seconds, are available for selection. It is possible values of the variation type counter CS1 associated relative movement pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E6: Super Reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0-9”, “Pseudo Gas ++” for “Super Reach Only (01H)”. "10-19" for "Super Reach (02H)", "20-59" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "60-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 99 ”,“ 100 to 119 ”for“ Super Reach + Revariation (05H) ”,“ 120 to 139 ”for“ Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H) ”,“ Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach ” "140 to 169" for "+ revariation (07H)" and "170 to 199" for "pseudo train 2 + super reach + revariation (08H)".

  That is, in the “super reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “super reach only (01H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasse + super reach (02H)” is 5%, “pseudo ream 1 + super” Reach (03H) variation pattern is 20%, “Pseudo-ream + Super Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 20%, “Super Reach + Revariation (05H)” variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo Gase + The variation pattern of “Super Reach + Re-variation (06H)” is 10%, The variation pattern of “Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach + Re-variation (07H)” is 15%, “Pseudo Ream + Super Reach + Re-variation (08H)” The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 15%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the “revariation” variation element and the variation pattern not including the “revariation” variation element are selected equally (50% each other). It has become so. In addition, a variation pattern including a variation element of “pseudo-continuation 2” is easily selected (35%). However, it is possible to select “super reach only (01H)” and “pseudo gas + super reach (02H)” which do not include the “revariation” variation factor and the “pseudo-ream 2” variation factor. , It can provide a game that can be a big hit from any variation pattern.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, “E7: Special reach” includes “special reach only (01H)” with an overall variation time of 35 seconds and “pseudo gasses + special reach” with an overall variation time of 45 seconds. 02H) ”,“ pseudo-run 1 + special reach (03H) ”with an overall change time of 55 seconds,“ pseudo-run 2 + special reach (04H) ”with an overall change time of 65 seconds, and the overall change time 45 seconds of “Special Reach + Revariation (05H)”, 55 seconds of “Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H)”, and 65 minutes of “Pseudo Ream 1+” Eight fluctuation patterns are selected: "Special reach + re-variation (07H)" and "Pseudo ream + Special reach + Re-variation (08H)" with a total fluctuation time of 75 seconds Are prepared in Noh, possible values of the variation type counter CS1 for each change pattern is associated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E7: Special Reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0-9” for “Special Reach Only (01H)”, “Pseudo Gas + "10-19" for "Special Reach (02H)", "20-39" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "40-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 99 ”,“ 100 to 109 ”for“ Special Reach + Revariation (05H) ”,“ 110 to 119 ”for“ Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H) ”,“ Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach ” “120 to 139” for “+ revariation (07H)” and “140 to 199” for “pseudo-ream + special reach + revariation (08H)”.

  That is, in the “special reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “special reach only (01H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasse + special reach (02H)” is 5%, and “pseudo ream 1 + special” Reach (03H) variation pattern is 10%, “Pseudo-ream + Special Reach (04H)” variation pattern is 30%, “Special Reach + Re-variation (05H)” variation pattern is 5%, “Pseudo Gase + The fluctuation pattern of “special reach + re-variation (06H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo ream + special reach + re-variation (07H)” is 10%, “pseudo ream + special reach + re-variation (08H)” The variation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, the variation pattern including the “revariation” variation element and the variation pattern not including the “revariation” variation element are selected equally (50% each other). It has become so. In addition, it is easy to select a variation pattern including a variation element of “pseudo-run 2” (60%). However, it is possible to select “special reach only (01H)” or “pseudo gas + special reach (02H)” that does not include the “revariation” variation factor or the “pseudo-ream 2” variation factor. , It can provide a game that can be a big hit from any variation pattern.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 202e1, in “E8: special variation”, only one variation pattern of “movie (01H)” having a total variation time of 50 seconds is prepared. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the association between the variation pattern in “E8: special variation” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 199” with respect to “movie (01H)”. Only (01H) "is set to be selectable. That is, when the big hit stop type is “2R probability change big hit”, “movie (01H)” is always selected as the variation pattern.

  When “movie (01H)” is selected by main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to “movie (01H)” is determined by audio lamp controller 113 and display controller 114. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to “movie (01H)”, for example, characters such as “chicken” or “girl” are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the third symbol stops at a specific symbol as the third symbol stops at a specific symbol (for example, “341”), or a specific lamp lights or flashes. Variation patterns are included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for predicting the start of jackpot or “reach display” before or during the start of change may be determined by another change type counter, or when reach is established It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols of the third symbol to be stopped last are shifted and stopped (for example, before and after losing by one symbol).

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, a group dedicated to “2R probability variation jackpot” is provided, but in this pachinko machine 10, when “2R probability variation jackpot” is reached, only the variation pattern of “movie (01H)” Therefore, the group dedicated to “2R probability variation jackpot” is not provided, and the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” in the variation pattern table 202e1 for jackpot Only the association may be defined. In this case, when the jackpot type is “2R probability variation jackpot”, “movie (01H)” may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the variation pattern table 202e1 for jackpot.

  Further, in this pachinko machine 10, only “movie (01H)” is selected when “2R probability variation jackpot” is reached, but when “2R probability variation jackpot” is reached, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected. A variation pattern may be selected. In this case, even in the group dedicated to “2R probability variation jackpot”, such as the “15R jackpot common bonus” group, the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to the variation pattern selected when it becomes “2R probability variation jackpot”. In addition, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reserved area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect retained in the reserved area.

  Next, the loss variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table for loss 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the variation pattern table for loss 202e2 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, the “E0: non-reach (shortening)” and “non-reach (normal)” production modes, which are referred to when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is determined, are determined as the production modes. “E1: non-reach (normal)” for reference, “E2: normal reach” for reference, and “super-reach” effect for reference are determined. "E3: Super Reach", which is referred to when the "special reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Special Reach", which is referred to when the production mode is determined. Each of the divided groups is associated with a value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a big hit value (big hit random value), that is, if it is a lost value, the gaming state at that time and the time point The stop pattern table 202d is selected on the basis of the number of reserved balls and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the variation pattern table for loss 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the loss variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect retained in the reserved area. Is done.

  In the loss variation pattern table 202e2, “E0: non-reach (shortening)” includes only one fluctuation pattern of “non-reach (shortening) only” with an overall fluctuation time of 3 seconds. In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the association between the variation pattern in “E0: non-reach (shortened)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 199” with respect to “non-reach (shortened) only (01H)”. “Only non-reach (shortened) (01H)” is set to be selectable. That is, when the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode is selected in the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss, “non-reach (shortened)” is set for all the values (“0 to 199”) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Only (01H) ".

  In the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss, “E1: non-reach (normal)” includes “non-reach (normal) only” (01H) with an overall fluctuation time of 10 seconds and “ Two variation patterns of “pseudo gas + non-reach (normal) (02H)” are prepared so as to be selectable, and the variation type counter CS1 can be associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E1: non-reach (normal)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 179 with respect to“ non-reach (normal) only (01H) ”. "," Pseudo gas + non-reach (normal) (02H) "is" 180-199 ".

  That is, in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach (normal) only (01H)” is 90%, and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gas + non-reach (normal) (02H)”. Is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern “non-reach (normal) only (01H)” is easily selected (90%).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for loss, “E2: normal reach” includes “normal reach only (01H)” with an overall fluctuation time of 15 seconds and “pseudo gasses + normal reach (02H)” with an overall fluctuation time of 25 seconds. And three variation patterns of “pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach (03H)” with a total variation time of 35 seconds are prepared so as to be selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1. ing.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”, “pseudo gas + normal reach (for normal reach only (01H)”. 02H) ”is“ 100 to 179 ”, and“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Normal reach (03H) ”is“ 180 to 199 ”.

  That is, in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach only (01H)” is 50%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasses + normal reach (02H)” is 40%, “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach (03H)” ”Is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of “normal reach only (01H)” is easily selected (50%).

  In the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss, “E3: Super reach” includes “Super reach only (01H)” with an overall change time of 25 seconds and “Pseudo gasses + super reach” with an overall change time of 35 seconds. 02H) ”,“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Super Reach (03H) ”with an overall variation time of 45 seconds, and“ Pseudo-ream 2 + Super Reach (04H) ”with an overall variation time of 55 seconds. It is prepared so that it can be selected, and each variation pattern is associated with a value that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E3: Super reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 59”, “pseudo gas + "60 to 119" for "Super Reach (02H)", "120 to 179" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "180-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 199 ".

  That is, in the “super reach” production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of “super reach only (01H)” is 30%, the variation pattern of “pseudo gasses + super reach (02H)” is 30%, and “pseudo ream 1 + super” The variation pattern of “Reach (03H)” is set to be selected at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern of “Pseudo-continuous 2 + Super reach (04H)” is set to 10%. Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of “super reach only (01H)”, “pseudo gas + super reach (02H)”, and “pseudo ream 1 + super reach (03H)” It is easy to select uniformly (30%).

  In the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss, “E4: Special reach” includes “special reach only (01H)” with an overall fluctuation time of 35 seconds and “pseudo gasses + special reach” with an overall fluctuation time of 45 seconds. 02H) ”,“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Special Reach (03H) ”with an overall variation time of 55 seconds, and“ Pseudo-ream 2 + Special Reach (04H) ”with an overall variation time of 65 seconds. It is prepared so that it can be selected, and each variation pattern is associated with a value that the variation type counter CS1 can take.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E4: Special Reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 79”, “Pseudo Gas ++” for “Special Reach Only (01H)”. "80 to 159" for "Special Reach (02H)", "160 to 179" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "180-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 199 ".

  That is, in the “special reach” production mode at the time of losing, the variation pattern of “special reach only (01H)” is 40%, the variation pattern of “pseudo gasse + special reach (02H)” is 40%, “pseudo ream 1 + special” The variation pattern of “Reach (03H)” is selected at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern of “Pseudo-ream + Special Reach (04H)” is selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the “special reach” production mode selected at the time of losing, the variation pattern of “special reach only (01H)” and the variation pattern of “pseudo gas + special reach (02H)” are selected equally (40% each other). It is easy to be done.

  In this way, when winning a jackpot, it is configured so that a relatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the entertainment content of the game by enhancing the contents of the variation effect that generates the jackpot. be able to. In addition, in the case where the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, it is configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is easily selected, so that the content of the variation effect at the time of the loss is shortened, and the variation effect is displayed. It can be digested efficiently.

  The variation pattern at the time of losing is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

  Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of “0 to 250”, for example, and reaches the maximum value (that is, “250”) and then returns to “0”. Has been. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the first embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Obtained when detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. In other words, when the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. While the lighting is displayed, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is activated, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = “0 to 250”), and is set for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the dynamics in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display and variation effect and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and input / output. A work area (work area) in which values such as “Input / Output” (hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 39), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 38) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Thus, when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

  The held ball number counter 203a enters the first ball 64 (hereinafter referred to as the first ball) detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 33) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. On the basis of a game ball entering the mouth 64 may be referred to as “start winning”), the dynamic display (variable effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is suspended. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S613 in FIG. 38). Each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls for dynamic display (variable effect) increases, 1 is added to the maximum value “4” (see S203 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time dynamic display (variable effect) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 35).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 34). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of dynamic display (variation effect) without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, the dynamic control (variation effect) managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is held by transmitting a hold ball number command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number of reserved balls in the actual dynamic display (variation effect) held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, The deviation can be corrected.

  Note that the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  In the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the sound lamp controller 113, only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the reserved ball number command is used. Rather, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball counter 203a. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

  That is, when there is a start prize, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 are The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command are changed based on the respective values. Before an effect is executed, prefetching is performed, and it is determined before the execution of the change effect that the change effect will be (whether it will be a big hit, change time, etc.). And based on the judgment result by the prefetching, execution of various effects can be determined, and the content and execution time (timing) of the “holding change notice” can be determined.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the reserve ball number command which shows the number of reserve balls of a change effect, and the command which shows values, such as 1st random number counter C1, may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like different from the held ball number command, a held ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first entrance 64, and A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command based on the above (preliminary variation pattern command and advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the change pattern command and the stop type command.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 33) that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding first to first) so that data corresponding to one start winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (holding) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

  The holding ball execution area 203c is data (counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of the changing effect. Value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 performs processing such as jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and setting of the variation effect. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the above-mentioned holding ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is used as the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to. In addition, the shift in 1st Embodiment shows moving the data memorize | stored in one area | region to another area | region.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, setting of variable effects, and the like. Used by.

  For the jackpot lottery and the dynamic display and change effect setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot type used for determining the jackpot type A hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored. A type counter storage area 203b2 per unit, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored in one holding ball. Although it is provided in the area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). . That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type classification counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the reserved ball. The execution area 203c is shifted to each of the areas 203c1 to 203c4. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 36), and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first per category counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first per category counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c ends, the holding first area becomes empty, and is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuating effect is made is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, when the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data of the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the changing effect is performed is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. The data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, fluctuating effects and continuous The setting of the display mode of the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, such as a notice effect, is controlled.

  The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or “super The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as “reach” effect mode, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for the purpose other than the change of the stage, such as changing the production mode of “super reach”, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as a fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variation pattern table 222d, a pending change table 222e, a scenario table 222f, a character pattern table 222g, a character color change table 222h, and a color change timing table 222i are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222i, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is there.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning prize, and is transmitted by the reserved ball number command, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the prefetching process is executed.

  “Pre-reading” means that each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is read in advance before the big hit lottery or the variation pattern lottery is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the execution start timing of the variation effect. That is. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by the “pre-reading” process, and predict the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination result in advance, and is predicted by the pre-reading process. Based on the result of the big hit lottery or the determination result of the variation pattern, various controls such as setting of a continuous notice effect executed over a plurality of variation effects are executed.

  Then, with this prefetching process, with reference to the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f, what kind of rendering will result in the pending variable production that is the target of the prefetching process (whether or not it will be a big hit) Or the change time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the change effect, and the execution of various effects is determined, or the effect content and execution timing (timing) of the “pending change notice” are determined. Execute control. Details of the pending change table 222e and the scenario table 222f will be described later.

  The RAM 223 includes a change start flag 223a, a sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a hold change counter 223c, a scenario counter 223d, a character pattern counter 223e, a character color lottery counter 223f, a color change timing counter 223g, a hold information storage area 223h, and execution information. A storage area 223i is provided at least.

  The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect should be started in the on state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1207 in FIG. 42). Then, it is turned off when the changing effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 44). When the variation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 performs variation effect processing (see FIG. 31) for executing the standby variation effect when there is a variation effect that is waiting.

  The sub reserved ball number counter 223b is a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores / updates the number of held balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is managed by the sub-held ball number counter 223b. Yes.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect is added by entering the first entrance 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the main controller 110 holds the Is stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1301 in FIG. 43).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the held ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is received in response to the reception. When the variation effect mode on the display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 44). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the holding ball number counter 203a. While synchronizing with the ball counter 203a, the value of the sub-reserved ball counter 223b can be updated.

  The value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of held balls indicated by the command in the sub-held ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the held ball number command, or the number of sub-held balls in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage or after the update at the timing of updating the value of the counter 223b, a display-reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Transmit (see S1313 in FIG. 43 or S1412 in FIG. 44).

  Further, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is referred to in order to determine the timing for executing the “holding change notice” when performing the “holding change notice” described later. Specifically, when it is determined in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, that the “hold change notice” is to be executed, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” is set by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f described later. At the time of determination, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is referred to so that the number of retained balls of the changing effect at that time is determined.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b in the voice lamp control device 113. Is controlled to be displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the retained ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the variation effect is reserved.

  The hold change counter 223c is a counter for drawing whether or not “hold change notice” is executed in the hold symbol and the execution symbol of the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the “holding change notice”, the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol is changed from white, which is a normal display mode, to “blue”, which is a blue display mode, and a red display mode. To “red” or “rainbow” in a rainbow color display mode.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot random number according to the held ball number command received from the main control device 110. Based on the table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the prefetch process can be executed. In the pre-reading process, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect indicated by the held ball number command is grasped, and whether or not the “hold change notice” is performed is determined by the hold change counter 223c and the hold change table 222e based on the effect mode. .

  The hold change counter 223c is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and the maximum value (For example, “99” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”), and then returns to “0”. The value of the hold change counter 223c is updated once every time the main process loops once (see S1111 in FIG. 41). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the variation aspect indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and the hold change counter is based on the effect aspect. With reference to the value of 223c and the hold change table 222e, whether or not “hold change notice” can be executed and the display mode are determined (see S1303 in FIG. 43).

  Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the hold change table 222e. As shown in FIG. 15, the pending change table 222e is divided into groups (groups) based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, the hold change table 222e is for the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing, for the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing, and for the “normal reach” production mode at the time of losing. For the “Super Reach” production mode at the time of a loss, for the “Special Reach” production mode at the time of a loss, for the “Normal Reach” production mode at the time of a big hit, It is divided into the “special reach” production mode at the time and the “special fluctuation” production mode at the big hit. Then, possible values of the hold change counter 223c are associated with the divided groups.

  In the hold change table 222e, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue as “none” which does not change from the normal display mode (“white”) in “E0: non-reach (shortened)” at the time of the loss. The two display modes “blue” are prepared so as to be selectable, and the possible values of the hold change counter 223c are associated with each display mode. In the first embodiment, when “None” is selected in which the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol does not change, “Pending change notice” is not executed.

  For the “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode at the time of losing, the display mode of “red” that changes the color of the reserved symbol or execution symbol to red and “rainbow” that changes to rainbow color is selected As a result, the value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is “red” in the “holding change advance notice”, the “super” in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the execution symbol. This is because it is determined that the variable element of “reach or higher” is executed. Also, in the “holding change notice”, if the color of the holding symbol or the execution symbol is “rainbow”, it is determined that the “hit display” appears in the variation effect indicated by the holding symbol or the execution symbol. Because. Therefore, in the “non-reach (shortened)” production mode where “super-reaching” or “variable” and “big hit display” do not appear, “red” or “rainbow” in “pending change notice” is not selected. Has been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing is “0 to 98” with respect to “none”. “99” for “blue”. Since “red” and “rainbow” are not assigned values, they are represented as “−”.

  That is, when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” is displayed in 99%, the “blue” display mode is 1%, and “red”. The display mode of “rainbow color” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (99%), and the “pending change notice” itself is The setting is unlikely to occur.

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol changes to blue, “none” which does not change from the normal display mode (“white”). The two display modes “blue” are prepared so as to be selectable, and the possible values of the hold change counter 223c are associated with each display mode. In the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing, similarly to the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing, the “super-reach” variable element and the “big hit display” do not appear. For this reason, the value of the hold change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of “red” in which the color of the held symbol or the execution symbol is changed to red and the “rainbow color” that changes to rainbow is not selected. Not.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode at the time of losing is “0 to 98” with respect to “none”. “99” for “blue”. Since “red” and “rainbow” are not assigned values, they are represented as “−”.

  That is, when the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” is displayed in 99%, the “blue” display mode is 1%, and “red”. The display mode of “rainbow color” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

  Accordingly, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (99%), and the “pending change notice” itself is The setting is unlikely to occur.

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is “none” that does not change from the normal display mode (“white”), and “blue” that changes to blue. The two display modes are prepared so as to be selectable, and a value that the hold change counter 223c can take is associated with each display mode. In the “normal reach” production mode at the time of losing, the “non-reach (short)” production mode at the time of the loss and the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of the loss, "Big jackpot" does not appear. For this reason, the value of the hold change counter 223c is associated so that the display mode of “red” in which the color of the held symbol or the execution symbol is changed to red and the “rainbow color” that changes to rainbow is not selected. Not.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the loss is “0 to 79” and “blue” with respect to “none”. On the other hand, it is “80 to 99”. Since “red” and “rainbow” are not assigned values, they are represented as “−”.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the “non-change” display mode is “80%”, the “blue” display mode is 20%, “red” and “rainbow” "Is displayed at a rate of 0%.

  Therefore, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of losing, the “none” display mode is easily selected (80%), but the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing and The “blue” display mode is more easily selected (1% → 20%) than the “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing.

  In the hold change table 222e, the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of losing is “blue” in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode (“white”) and changes to blue. ”And“ red ”that changes to red are prepared so as to be selectable, and a value that the hold change counter 223c can take is associated with each display mode.

  In addition, in the “super reach” production mode at the time of losing, the “hit” display does not appear like the “non-reach (shortened)” production mode at the time of losing, so the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is rainbow The value of the pending change counter 223c is not associated with the display so that the display form “rainbow color” that changes is not selected. On the other hand, since the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is to execute the variable element of “super reach”, the “red” display mode that suggests the execution of the “super reach” variable element is selected. The possible values of the hold change counter 223c are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is “0 to 19” and “blue” with respect to “none”. "20 to 89" for "red" and "90 to 99" for "red". Since “rainbow color” is not assigned a value, it is expressed as “−”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 20%, the “blue” display mode is 70%, and the “red” display mode is Is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%, and the display mode of “rainbow color” is 0%.

  Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing, the “blue” display mode is more easily selected than the “none” display mode (70%). In addition, a display mode of “red” having a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the display mode of “blue” is set to be selectable (10%).

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing, the color of the hold symbol or execution symbol changes to “none (white)” that does not change, “blue” that changes to blue, and red. Three display modes of “red” are prepared so as to be selectable, and a value that the hold change counter 223c can take is associated with each display mode.

  Note that in the “special reach” production mode at the time of losing, as the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing, the “big hit display” does not appear, so the color of the reserved symbol or execution symbol changes to rainbow The value of the hold change counter 223c is not associated with the display so that the display form “rainbow color” is not selected. On the other hand, since the “special reach” production mode at the time of losing is to execute the “special reach” variable element, the “red” display mode is selected to suggest the execution of the “super-reach or higher” variable element. The possible values of the hold change counter 223c are associated with each other.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. "10-49" for "red" and "50-99" for "red". Since “rainbow color” is not assigned a value, it is expressed as “−”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 10%, the “blue” display mode is 40%, and the “red” display mode is Is set to be selected at a rate of 50% and the display mode of “rainbow color” is 0%.

  Therefore, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing, the “red” display mode is more easily selected than the “blue” or “none” display mode (50%). ing.

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, the color of the hold symbol or execution symbol is “none” that does not change from the normal display mode (“white”), and “blue” that changes to blue. And a “rainbow color” that changes to a rainbow color are prepared so as to be selectable, and a value that the hold change counter 223c can take is associated with each display mode. In addition, in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the variable element of “super-reach or higher” is not executed, so the holding symbol or the “red” display mode in which the color of the execution symbol changes to red is not selected. The value of the change counter 223c is not associated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. On the other hand, “10 to 89” and “90 to 99” for “rainbow”. Note that since “red” is not assigned a value, “−” is written.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 10%, the “blue” display mode is 80%, and the “red” display mode is The display mode of 0% and “rainbow color” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

  Accordingly, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit, the “blue” display mode is easily selected (80%), and the “rainbow” display mode is also selected. (10%), it is set so that a “pending change notice” is likely to occur.

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is “none” which does not change from the normal display mode (“white”), and “blue” which changes to blue ”,“ Red ”that changes to red, and“ Rainbow ”that changes to rainbow color are selectable, and the possible values of the pending change counter 223c correspond to each display mode. It is attached.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. "10 to 39", "40 to 89" for "red", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 10%, the “blue” display mode is 30%, and the “red” display mode is Is set to be selected at a rate of 50% and the display mode of “rainbow color” is 10%.

  Therefore, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, the “red” display mode is easily selected (40%), and the “blue” display mode is also easily selected ( 30%), and the display mode of “rainbow color” is also selected (10%), so that “holding change notice” is likely to occur.

  In the hold change table 222e, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is “none” that does not change from the normal display mode (“white”), and “blue” that changes to blue ”,“ Red ”that changes to red, and“ Rainbow ”that changes to rainbow color are selectable, and the possible values of the pending change counter 223c correspond to each display mode. It is attached.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to “none”. "10 to 19", "20 to 89" for "red", and "90 to 99" for "rainbow".

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 10%, the “blue” display mode is 10%, and the “red” display mode is Is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%, and the display mode of “rainbow color” is 10%.

  Therefore, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, the “red” display mode is easily selected (70%), and the “blue” display mode is also selected (10 %) And the display mode of “rainbow color” is also selected (10%), so that “holding change notice” is set to occur easily.

  In the “holding change table 222e”, the “special variation” effect mode at the time of the big hit is “blue” in which the color of the reserved symbol or the execution symbol does not change from the normal display mode (“white”) and the color changes to blue. ”,“ Red ”that changes to red, and“ Rainbow ”that changes to rainbow color are selectable, and the possible values of the pending change counter 223c correspond to each display mode. It is attached.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223c and the “hold change notice” in the “special variation” effect mode at the time of the big hit is “0 to 69” and “blue” with respect to “none”. "70-79", "80-89" for "red", and "90-99" for "rainbow".

  That is, when the “special variation” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected (when “2R probability change big hit” is won), the “pending change notice” is “none” display mode is 70% and “blue” is displayed. The display mode is set to 10%, the “red” display mode is 10%, and the “rainbow” display mode is 10%.

  Accordingly, in the “pending change notice” selected in the “special variation” effect mode at the time of jackpot, the display mode of “none” is easily selected (70%), and “blue”, “red”, or “rainbow color” "" Is also set to be selected equally (10%), so "holding change notice" is unlikely to occur, but when it occurs, it is set to be selected almost evenly. .

  Therefore, the appearance probability of the “hold change notice” at the time of losing is, for example, when the number of held balls in the “normal game state” is the first, that is, when the production mode is selected by the A table 202d1. The “pending change notice” is selected at a rate of 91.05% for “none” that does not change, 7.65% for “blue”, and 1.3% for “red”. In addition, the appearance probability of the “holding change notice” at the time of the big hit is, for example, when “15R probability change big hit” is won, that is, when the production mode is selected by the C table 202d3, “None” that does not change is selected at a ratio of 10%, “blue” is 20.5%, “red” is 59.5%, and “rainbow” is 10%. Therefore, when winning the jackpot lottery of the 3rd pattern, among the “pending change notice”, “red” and “rainbow” are easy to select and “none” and “blue” are difficult to select, When the lottery is lost, “None” or “Blue” is easily selected, and “Red” is difficult to select (“Rainbow” is not selected when lost).

  In this way, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps whether or not the fluctuating effect indicated by the reserved ball number command and the effect mode are based on the result and the effect mode. Thus, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute “hold change notice” and the display mode. By configuring in this way, the result of the variation effect is suggested to the player by the reserved symbol before the execution of the variation effect, and the variation effect held by the player until the variation effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by predicting whether or not it will be a big hit.

  Note that the hold change information of the “hold change notice” determined (selected) based on the values of the hold change table 222e and the hold change counter 223c is a hold information storage area 223h, which will be described later, indicated by the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b. Is stored in the pending change information storage area 223h5 (see FIG. 24). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, “hold change notice” is executed in the hold symbol or the execution symbol based on the hold change information stored in the hold information storage area 223h and scenario data described later.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The scenario counter 223d is a counter for determining the execution timing of the determined “pending change notice”. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the “hold change notice” and the display mode based on the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the execution of the “holding change notice” is determined, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f.

  The scenario counter 223d is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value ( For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”, the counter returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the scenario counter 223d is updated (for example, 1 is added) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) every time the main process loops once. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the variation mode indicated by the reserved ball number command is grasped, and on the basis of the effect mode, Whether or not to execute “change notice” and the display mode are determined. When execution of the “holding change notice” is determined, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is determined with reference to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f (see S1305 in FIG. 43).

  Here, the scenario table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 refers to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f when the execution of the “pending change notice” is determined. The execution timing of the “holding change notice” is determined. In this case, even with the same “hold change notice (for example,“ blue ”), the execution timing of the“ hold change notice ”at the time of losing is different from the execution timing of the“ hold change notice ”at the big hit. Thus, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the execution timing of the “holding change notice”. FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot scenario table 222f1.

  In the jackpot scenario table 222f1 of FIG. 16, in each of the number of reserved balls (four patterns of the number of reserved balls “1” to “4”) at the time when the vertical is determined to be “preservation change notice”, Each of the number of reserved balls is divided into a total of 12 kinds of situation patterns classified into display modes of “holding change notice” (three patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”). In addition, as a timing for executing (starting) the “hold change notice” in the row, four patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of held balls (number of held balls “1” to “4”), There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including four patterns of “start (shift)”, “before reach”, “after reach”, or “after hold erase” in the number “0” (during execution of the variation effect). Each is divided. Then, possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the divided groups.

  The “holding change notice” in the first embodiment is executed in the timing pattern determined by the scenario counter 223d and the scenario table 222f for each of the above-mentioned situation patterns (displayed). It is set to be.

  Specifically, for example, when the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is “0” for the number of held balls and “at the start” is selected, the variation effect that determines the “holding change notice” starts. The “holding change advance notice” is executed at the timing of being executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is “0” for the number of held balls and “before reach” is selected, the change effect in the changing effect that determines the “holding change notice” is being performed. At the timing before the “reach display” appears (for example, when the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is being executed or when the left symbol row Z1 is stopped while the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is being executed) “Change notice” is executed. If the execution timing of the “hold change notice” is “0” for the number of held balls and “after reach” is selected, the change effect in the change effect that has determined the “hold change notice” is being selected. The “holding change notice” is executed at the timing when the “reach display” is being executed (for example, when the “normal reach” variable element is being executed). Further, when the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is “0” for the number of held balls and “after hold deletion” is selected, the change effect in the changing effect for which the “holding change notice” is determined is being changed. The "pending change notice" is displayed at the timing when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the execution of the "super reach" variable element or the "special reach" variable element (timing before the execution of the "revariable" variable element). Is executed.

  Further, for example, when “1” as the number of held balls is selected as the execution timing of “hold change notice”, the hold symbol indicating the variation effect that has determined the “hold change notice” is the first hold symbol display area Db1. The “holding change advance notice” is executed at the timing displayed or shifted. In addition, when “2” of the number of held balls is selected as the execution timing of the “holding change notice”, the holding symbol indicating the variation effect that has determined the “holding change notice” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Db2. The “holding change advance notice” is executed at the timing of being shifted or shifted. Further, when “3” is selected as the holding ball number as the execution timing of the “holding change notice”, the holding symbol indicating the variation effect that determines the “holding change notice” is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3. The “holding change advance notice” is executed at the timing of being shifted or shifted. Further, when “4” is selected as the holding timing for the “hold change notice”, the hold symbol indicating the variation effect that has determined the “hold change notice” is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Db4. The “holding change advance notice” is executed at the timing.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the sound lamp The control device 113 draws a “holding change notice” and determines whether or not to execute the “holding change notice”. When execution of “holding change notice” is determined, first, the number of held balls at the time of determination and the display mode of the determined “holding change notice” are grasped. If the fluctuating effect indicated by the number-of-holding-balls command is a jackpot, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” at the jackpot time (the appearance timing) is referred to with reference to the value of the scenario counter 223d and the jackpot scenario table 222f1. ) Is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, there are prepared situation patterns of the number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect at the time when the “holding change notice” is determined and the display modes of the “holding change notice”. Possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the situation pattern.

  First, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the changing effect at the time of determination of the jackpot “holding change notice” is “1”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “2” to “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “1” is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls is “1”, the number of reserved balls of “2” to “4” is not displayed. Therefore, in this jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of held balls is “1” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the number of held balls is “2” to “4” when the “holding change notice” is executed. On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not allocated (see FIG. 16).

  First, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “blue”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 4” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. “5 to 9”, “10 to 14” for “after reach” with the number of retained balls “0”, “15 to 49” for “after erase withhold” with the number of retained balls “0”, It is “50 to 99” for the number “1”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 5% for “Start”, 5% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 5% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls The selection ratio is set so that “after erasure of hold” is 35% and the number of held balls “1” (that is, when the holding symbol is displayed) is 50%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating effect is “1” for the holding ball at the time of determination, and the display symbol is “blue”. The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variation factor of “super reach” or the like (35) %) Is set.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, when determining the execution timing of the “holding change notice”, the production mode of the corresponding variation effect is not determined. Therefore, for example, even when the execution timing of “after deletion of hold” is selected, when the variation production is the “normal reach” production mode, “pending change notice” is executed at the execution timing of “after deletion of hold”. A situation that can not be done can occur. However, in such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, if it is an effect mode in which the “pending change notice” cannot be performed at the determined execution timing, other execution timings that can be executed. (For example, “after reach”). Therefore, when the “hold change notice” execution lottery is won, the “hold change notice” can be reliably executed at any timing. Therefore, when determining the execution timing of the “pending change notice”, even if the execution timing is determined without grasping the effect mode of the fluctuating effect, the “pending change notice” can be executed without fail. It can enhance interest. Details of the change control will be described later.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “red”, the “holding change notice” is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 9” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. “10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with the number of retained balls “0”, “30 to 89” for “after erase withhold” with the number of retained balls “0”, It is “90 to 99” for the number “1”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “red”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved The selection ratio is set so that “after erasure” is 60%, and the number of held balls is “1” (that is, when the symbol is displayed) is 10%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is “super reach” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “1” and the display mode is “red”. The timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased by the variable element etc. is set so as to be most easily selected (60%).

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “rainbow”, the “holding change notice” Correspondence between the execution timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 4” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. “5 to 9”, “10 to 49” for “after reach” when the number of held balls is “0”, and “50 to 99” for “after held” that is “0”. ing. Note that the “rainbow color” display mode of the “holding change notice” does not appear in the reserved symbol and can appear only in the execution symbol, so in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, the number of reserved balls is “1”. The value of the scenario counter 223d is not allocated with respect to the execution timing.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “rainbow”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At the start" 5%, "0" spheres "before" reach 5%, "0" spheres "after reach" 40%, "0" spheres Is set to a selection ratio of 50% for “after erasure” and “1” for the number of balls held (that is, when the holding symbol is displayed).

  Accordingly, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is “super” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “1” and the display mode is “rainbow”. The timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased by the variation factor of “reach” is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing during the execution of “reach display” is selected. It is set to be easy (40%). Note that the “rainbow color” display mode of the “holding change notice” at the time of the big hit is set to the above selection ratio regardless of the number of held balls at the time when the “holding change notice” is determined. Therefore, the description of the “rainbow color” display mode of the “holding change notice” at the time of the big hit when the number of held balls “2” to “4” at the time of determination of the “holding change notice” is omitted.

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the changing effect at the time of determination of the jackpot “holding change notice” is “2”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “3” or “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “2” is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls is “2”, the number of reserved balls “3” or “4” is not displayed. Therefore, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, when the number of held balls is “2” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the number of held balls when the “holding change notice” is executed is “3” or “4”. On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not allocated (see FIG. 16).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of “hold change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 4” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “5 to“ before reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”reserved balls,“ 15-39 ”for“ after erase withhold ”with“ 0 ”retained balls, “40” to “49” for 1 ”and“ 50 to 99 ”for“ 2 ”reserved balls.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 5% for “Start”, 5% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 5% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls Selection ratio of 25% for “after erasure”, 10% for held ball (ie, when holding symbols are shifted), 10%, and “2” number of held balls (ie, when holding symbols are displayed) is 50% It is set to become.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating effect is “2” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “blue” and the display mode is “blue”. The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variation factor of “super reach” or the like (25) %) Is set.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “red”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 9” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. 10 to 19 ”,“ 20 to 29 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”,“ 30 to 79 ”for“ after withdrawal ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”, The number is “80 to 89” for the number “1” and “90 to 99” for the number of reserved balls “2”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “red”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved Selection ratio of 50% for “after erasure”, 10% for the number of held balls (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted), and 10% for the number of holding balls “2” (that is, when the holding symbol is displayed) It is set to become.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is “super reach” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “2” and the display mode is “red”. The timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased by the variable element etc. is set so as to be most easily selected (50%).

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the variation effect at the time of determination of the jackpot “holding change notice” is “3”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “3” is generated. That is, when the reserved ball number “3” is generated, the reserved symbol having the reserved ball number “4” is not displayed. Therefore, in the jackpot scenario table 222f1, at the time when the number of held balls is “3” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the scenario counter 223d is compared with the number of held balls “4” when the “holding change notice” is executed. Is not assigned (see FIG. 16).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 4” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “5 to“ before reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”,“ 15-29 ”for“ after erase withhold ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”,“ The number is “30 to 39” for “1”, “40 to 49” for “2” reserved balls, and “50 to 99” for “3” reserved balls.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 5% for “Start”, 5% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 5% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls “After erasure” is 15%, the number of held balls is “1” (ie, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of holding balls is “2” (ie, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of held balls is “3” (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to a selection ratio of 50%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating effect is “3” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “blue” and the display mode is “blue”. The timing at the time of display is most easily selected (50%), and then the timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variation factor of “super reach” or the like is easily selected (15 %) Is set.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, the “holding change notice” is executed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 9” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. “10 to 19”, “20 to 29” for “after reach” with the number of retained balls “0”, “30 to 69” for “after withdrawal” with the number of retained balls “0”, The number is “70 to 79” for the number “1”, “80 to 89” for the number of reserved balls “2”, and “90 to 99” for the number of reserved balls “3”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, the execution time of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved "After erasure" is 40%, the number of balls held is "1" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is "2" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the holding symbol is " “3” pieces (that is, when a reserved symbol is displayed) is set to have a selection ratio of 10%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is “super reach” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “3” and the display mode is “red”. The timing at the time of redisplay after the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db are erased due to the variable element etc. is set so as to be most easily selected (40%).

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the variation effect at the time of determination of the jackpot “holding change notice” is “4”.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is The correspondence with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 4” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “5 to“ before reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”. 9 ”,“ 10-14 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”reserved balls,“ 15-19 ”for“ after erase withhold ”with“ 0 ”retained balls, “20-29” for 1 ”,“ 30-39 ”for“ 2 ”reserved balls,“ 40-49 ”for“ 3 ”reserved balls,“ 4 ”reserved balls It is “50 to 99” for each piece.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 5% for “Start”, 5% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 5% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls “After erasure” is 5%, the number of balls held is “1” (that is, when the holding symbols are shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is “2” (that is, when the holding symbols are shifted) is 10%, and the number of balls is held The selection ratio is set so that “3” (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and “4” symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 50%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating effect is “4” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “blue” and the display mode is “blue”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 16, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “red”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 9” for “starting” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. 10 to 19 ”,“ 20 to 29 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”,“ 30 to 59 ”for“ after withdrawal ”with the number of retained balls“ 0 ”, “60” to “69” for the number “1”, “70 to 79” for the number “2” of reserved balls, “80 to 89” for the number “3” of reserved balls, “ “90-99” for “4” pieces.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, the execution time of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved “After clearing hold” is 30%, the number of held balls is “1” (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of holding balls is “2” (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the holding symbol is “ The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3 ”(that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) and 10% for“ 4 ”that is reserved (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed).

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot variation effect is “super reach” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “4” and the display mode is “red”. The timing at the time of re-display after the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db is erased by the variable element etc. is set so as to be most easily selected (30%).

  As described above, when the “holding change notice” is performed on the holding symbol and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect that generates a big hit, it is displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0 of the cockpit display region Db by the variable element of “super reach” or the like. When the execution symbol is erased, the effect of the variable element of the “super reach” is finished, and the execution symbol display symbol Db0 in the cockpit display area Db is displayed again. ) Configure as possible.

  As a result, the notification target object (change object) that is always visible is changed directly and notified, or compared to the case where the notification object is newly displayed and notified. While making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change, it is possible to casually change the display mode of the notice object. By making the object to be noticed once invisible and then casually changing it, the player first feels uncomfortable, and then recognizes that the source of the discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, jackpot) Thus, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing an unexpected production to the player.

  In addition, by assigning more execution timings of “holding change notice” to the latter half of the fluctuation effect (“after reach” or “after hold cancellation”), the jackpot expectation increases even after the latter half of the fluctuation effect. The player can play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of the “pending change notice”. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting a big hit until the second half of the variation production, and it is possible to provide interest to the player for a long time.

  Next, the lost scenario table 222f2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the scenario table for loss 222f2. In the scenario table for loss 222f2 in FIG. 17, as in the scenario table 222f1 for big hits, the number of held balls (the number of held balls “1” to “4”) of the fluctuating effect at the time when the longitudinal is determined to be “holding change notice”. 4 patterns), a total of 12 kinds of situation patterns divided into display modes of “holding change notice” (three patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”) for each number of held balls It is divided into each. In addition, as a timing for executing (starting) the “hold change notice” in the row, four patterns at the time of display or shift to each number of held balls (number of held balls “1” to “4”), There are a total of 8 types of timing patterns, including four patterns of “start (shift)”, “before reach”, “after reach”, or “after hold erase” in the number “0” (during execution of the variation effect). Each is divided. Then, possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the divided groups.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, there are prepared situation patterns of the number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect at the time of determination of the “holding change notice” and each display mode of the “holding change notice”. Possible values of the scenario counter 223d are associated with the situation pattern. Note that “rainbow color” in the display mode of “pending change notice” suggests that a jackpot is generated when the display mode of “rainbow color” appears, and is not selected in the event of a loss. Therefore, since the value of the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to any of the number of suspended effects at the time when the “holding change notice” is determined in the “rainbow color” status pattern of the scenario table 222f2 for losing, Description is omitted.

  First, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect at the time of determination of “losing change notice” is “1”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “2” to “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “1” is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls is “1”, the number of reserved balls of “2” to “4” is not displayed. Therefore, in the scenario table 222f2 for losing, when the number of held balls is “1” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the number of held balls is “2” to “4” when the “holding change notice” is executed. On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not allocated (see FIG. 17).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of “hold change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” Associating with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0-9” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “10” for “before reach” with the number of retained balls “0”. “19”, “20-29” for “after reach” with “0” reserved balls, “−” for “after erase withhold” with “0” retained balls, “1” It is “30 to 99” for each piece.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved The selection ratio is set so that “after erasure” is 0% and the number of held balls is “1” (that is, when the symbol is displayed) is 70%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot fluctuating effect is “1” for the holding ball at the time of determination, and the display symbol is “blue”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (70%).

  Note that, in the scenario table for loss 222f2, the scenario counter 223d is not assigned to the execution timing of “after erasure” with the number of retained balls “0”. This is because in order to perform “hold change notice” at the execution timing of “after hold deletion”, it is necessary to perform some effects such as “revariation” variable elements after the “reach display” effect is executed. is there. In the first embodiment, after the “reach display” is performed, the “re-change” variation element or the like is not performed except for a big hit, and “losing display” is determined. Therefore, in the variation display of loss, there is no “re-change” variable element that determines the jackpot after the “reach display” effect, so the re-display of the execution symbol (holding pattern) after “reach display” If the “pending change notice” is executed at the timing of, a production habit will occur. Therefore, the scenario counter 223d is set not to be assigned to the execution timing “after the hold erasure” so that such an event does not occur.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “red”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 19” for the “starting time” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. 20 to 39 ”,“ 40 to 59 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”,“ − ”for“ after ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”, It is “60 to 99” for “1”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “1” and the display mode is “red”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 20% for “Start”, 20% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 20% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls The selection ratio is set so that “after erasure” is 0%, and the number of held balls is “1” (that is, when the symbol is displayed) is 40%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “1” and the display mode is “red” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “red”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the changing effect at the time of determination of the “holding change notice” of the losing is “2”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “3” or “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “2” is generated. That is, when the number of reserved balls is “2”, the number of reserved balls “3” or “4” is not displayed. Therefore, in the scenario table 222f2 for lose, when the number of held balls is “2” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the number of held balls when the “holding change notice” is executed is “3” or “4”. On the other hand, the value of the scenario counter 223d is not allocated (see FIG. 17).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is Associating with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0-9” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “10” for “before reach” with the number of retained balls “0”. “19”, “20-29” for “after reach” with “0” reserved balls, “−” for “after erase withhold” with “0” retained balls, “1” “30 to 39” for the number and “40 to 99” for the number of reserved balls “2”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved Selection ratio of 0% for “after erasure”, 10% for the number of balls held (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted), and 10% for the number of balls held (ie, when the holding symbol is displayed) is 60% It is set to become.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “2” and the display mode is “blue” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “blue”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (60%).

  Next, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “pending change notice” shown in the example of FIG. 17 is “2” and the display mode is “red”, the execution timing and scenario of the “pending change notice” The correspondence with the value of the counter 223d is “0 to 19” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “20 to 39” for “before” with the number of retained balls “0”. ”,“ 40 to 59 ”for“ after reach ”with“ 0 ”reserved balls,“ − ”for“ after erase ”with“ 0 ”reserved balls, and“ 1 ”reserved balls “60 to 69”, and “2” is “70 to 99” for the number of reserved balls.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “2” and the display mode is “red”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 20% for “Start”, 20% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 20% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls Selection ratio of 0% after “holding erasure”, “1” number of balls held (ie, when holding symbols are shifted) 10%, and “2” number of balls being held (ie when holding symbols are displayed) is 30% It is set to become.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “2” and the display mode is “red” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “red”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (30%).

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the changing effect at the time of determination of the “holding change notice” of the losing is “3”. In this case, the number of reserved balls “4” does not exist when the number of reserved balls “3” is generated. That is, when the reserved ball number “3” is generated, the reserved symbol having the reserved ball number “4” is not displayed. Accordingly, in the scenario table 222f2 for lose, at the time when the number of held balls is “3” when the “holding change notice” is determined, the scenario counter 223d is compared with the number of held balls “4” when the “holding change notice” is executed. Is not assigned (see FIG. 17).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is Associating with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0-9” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “10” for “before reach” with the number of retained balls “0”. “19”, “20-29” for “after reach” with “0” reserved balls, “−” for “after erase withhold” with “0” retained balls, “1” “30 to 39” for the number of balls, “40 to 49” for the number of reserved balls “2”, and “50 to 99” for the number of reserved balls “3”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved "After erasure" is 0%, the number of balls held is "1" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is "2" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of held balls “3” (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is set to a selection ratio of 50%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “3” and the display mode is “blue” when the holding ball number at the time of determination is “blue”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (50%).

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determining “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 19” for the “starting time” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. 20 to 39 ”,“ 40 to 59 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”,“ − ”for“ after ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”, “60” to “69” for 1 ”,“ 70 to 79 ”for“ 2 ”reserved balls, and“ 80 to 99 ”for“ 3 ”reserved balls.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, the execution time of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 20% for “Start”, 20% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 20% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls "After erasure" is 0%, the number of balls held is "1" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is "2" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the holding symbol is " “3” pieces (that is, when holding symbols are displayed) is set to a selection ratio of 20%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “3” and the display mode is “red” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “red”. It is set so that the timing at the time of display and “starting”, “before reaching”, or “after reaching” of the variation effect can be easily selected (each 20%).

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of suspended balls of the changing effect at the time of determination of the “holding change notice” of the losing is “4”.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “hold change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” is Associating with the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0-9” for “starting” with the number of retained balls “0”, and “10” for “before reach” with the number of retained balls “0”. “19”, “20-29” for “after reach” with “0” reserved balls, “−” for “after erase withhold” with “0” retained balls, “1” “30 to 39” for the number of balls, “40 to 49” for the number of reserved balls “2”, “50 to 59” for the number of reserved balls “3”, and “4” of the number of reserved balls On the other hand, it is “60 to 99”.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “blue”, the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. "At start" is 10%, "0" is "reach" before 10%, "0" is after "reach" is 10%, "0" is reserved "After erasure" is 0%, the number of balls held is "1" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is "2" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the number of held balls The selection ratio is set so that “3” (that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) is 10%, and “4” symbols (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed) is 40%.

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the loss is “4” and the display mode is “blue”. The display timing is set so that it is most easily selected (40%).

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 17, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “4” and the display mode is “red”, execution of the “holding change notice” is performed. The correspondence between the timing and the value of the scenario counter 223d is “0 to 19” for the “starting time” with the number of held balls “0”, and “before reach” with the number of held balls “0”. 20 to 39 ”,“ 40 to 59 ”for“ after reach ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”,“ − ”for“ after ”with the number of reserved balls“ 0 ”, “60” to “69” for 1 ”,“ 70 to 79 ”for“ 2 ”reserved balls,“ 80 to 89 ”for“ 3 ”reserved balls,“ 4 ”reserved balls It is “90 to 99” for each piece.

  That is, when the number of held balls at the time of determination of “holding change notice” is “3” and the display mode is “red”, the execution time of the “holding change notice” is the number of held balls “0”. 20% for “Start”, 20% for “Before Reach” with “0” retained balls, 20% for “After Reach” with “0” retained balls, and “0” retained balls "After erasure" is 0%, the number of balls held is "1" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, the number of balls that are holding is "2" (that is, when the holding symbol is shifted) is 10%, and the holding symbol is " The selection ratio is set to 10% for 3 ”(that is, when the reserved symbol is shifted) and 10% for“ 4 ”that is reserved (that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed).

  Therefore, the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol or the holding symbol corresponding to the jackpot changing effect is “4” and the display mode is “red” when the number of holding balls at the time of determination is “red”. “At the start”, “Before reach”, or “After reach” are easily selected (20% each).

  In this way, by changing the execution timing (appearance timing) of the same “holding change notice (for example,“ blue ”)” at the time of loss of variation effect and the big hit, The jackpot expectation can be made different between the display mode of "" and the timing at which the display mode appears. Therefore, the suggested contents of the jackpot expectation level by the “holding change notice” can be diversified by the display mode of the “holding change notice” and the appearance timing, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The character pattern counter 223e is a counter for drawing lots of types of character patterns of the character display Se1 when reaching and the character display Se2 during reach that appear in the “reach display”. As described above, the first embodiment is configured such that “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” can appear as the character patterns of the character display Se1 when reaching and the character display Se2 during reach. The voice lamp control device 113 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 44) described later based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and displays the character pattern counter 223e and the character pattern table 222g. By using, the contents of the character patterns of the character displays Se1 and Se2 that appear at the time of “reach display” are selected.

  The character pattern counter 223e is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value (For example, “99” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”), and then returns to “0”. The value of the character pattern counter 223e is updated (for example, 1 is added) once every time the main process loops once (see S1111 in FIG. 41). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a variation pattern command and a stop type command are received from the main control device 110, a character pattern counter is used in accordance with the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. With reference to the value of 223e and the character pattern table 222g, the contents of the character pattern of the character display Se1 when reaching and the character display Se2 during reach are determined (see FIG. 46).

  Here, the character pattern table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as a character pattern table 222g, a jackpot character pattern table 222g1 referred to at the time of jackpot and a loser character pattern table 222g2 referred to at the time of loser. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot character pattern table 222g1.

  In the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 executes any “reach display” in the variation effect of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Depending on whether it is a big hit or not, either the big hit character pattern table 222g1 or the loss character pattern table 222g2 is referred to, and the value of the character pattern counter 223e at that time and the type of “reach display” (type of effect mode) ) And the contents of the character pattern (“weak pattern” or “strong pattern”) of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach that are displayed in the “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the character display Se1 and Se2 of “weak pattern” are respectively displayed as the character patterns as the initial setting of the character display Se1 when reaching and the character display Se2 during reach. As shown, “white” character displays Se1 and Se2 are displayed. Accordingly, whether or not the character display Se1 and the character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence by the character pattern table 222g and the character pattern counter 223e are changed from the initial setting of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during the reach. The lottery is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the jackpot character pattern table 222 g 1, the vertical row is the effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot (“normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, “special reach” effect mode, and “special” It is grouped by “variation” production mode).

  Specifically, as the production mode, for “E5: normal reach” that is referred to when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “E6: super” that is referred to when the “super reach” production mode is determined. “E7: Special fluctuation”, which is referred to when “E7: Special reach” is determined, and “Ec: Special fluctuation” is referred to when the “special reach” effect is determined. It is divided into for use. And the value which the character pattern counter 223e can take is each matched with the group of the divided production | presentation aspect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the row of the jackpot character pattern table 222g1 indicates the timing when the character display appears in the variable display, that is, the timing when the character display Se1 appears when the reach occurs, “During reach” when the reachable character display Se2 appears, “When temporarily stopped” when the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 appears, and “When stopped” when the fixed phrase character display Se3 appears ”, Character patterns of character display appearing are associated with each other.

  Here, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the appearance timing of each character display Se1-Se4 in a change production is demonstrated. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing an example of a variation effect of a variation pattern that does not include the “re-variation” variation element. FIG. 20A shows “normal reach only (“ E201H ”or“ E501H ””). FIG. 20B is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3. FIG. 20B shows the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in “super reach only (“ E301H ”or“ E601H ”)”. FIG. 20C is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in “Special reach only (“ E401H ”or“ E701H ”).

  On the other hand, FIG. 21 is a time chart showing an example of the variation effect of the variation pattern including the variation element of “revariation”. FIG. 21A illustrates each of “normal reach + revariation (“ E504H ”)”. FIG. 21B is a time chart showing the appearance timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and FIG. 21B is a time chart showing the appearance timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in “super reach + revariation (“ E605H ”)”. FIG. 21C is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se4 in “special reach + revariation (“ E705H ”)”. In each time chart, the upper part of the time chart describes events such as variable elements and symbol stops in the variation effect along with the number of seconds, and each character display that appears in the variation effect in the lower part of the time chart. The names of Se1 to Se4 are described according to each appearance timing.

  20 and 21, “when reach occurs” is the character display when reach occurs at the timing when the “normal reach” variable element occurs after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” ends in the variable effect. It shows that Se1 appears. That is, at the timing indicated by “when the reach occurs”, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is generated from the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds at the time when the fluctuation element of “normal reach” occurs. To be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence that is displayed at the time of “occurrence of reach” is “Ikuze!” As “weak pattern” and “I can see!” As “strong pattern”. Two types are available. In addition, this pachinko machine 10 always changes “normal reach” if any “reach indication (variation factor of“ normal reach ”, fluctuation factor of“ super reach ”or fluctuation factor of“ special reach ”) occurs. Since the elements are executed, the variation effect in which “reach display” is executed is configured such that the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs at the time of reach occurrence.

  Next, “During Reach” shown in the examples of FIGS. 20 and 21 is in the variation effect, while the fluctuation element of “Super Reach” or the fluctuation element of “Special Reach” is being executed. This indicates that the reach character display Se <b> 2 appears at the timing immediately before the “pronouncement” indicating the content suggesting “”. In other words, at the timing indicated by “During Reach”, the character design on the player side faces the character design on the enemy side before the “pronounced effect” in the variation factor of “Super Reach” or the variation factor of “Special Reach”. The reach character display Se2 is displayed.

  In the first embodiment, there are two types of reach character display Se2 displayed in “During Reach”: “Karae!” As “Weak Pattern” and “Dome!” As “Strong Pattern”. ing. The pachinko machine 10 has a variation pattern in which the display result of the variation effect appears after the execution of the variation element of “normal reach” (that is, the variation pattern when the effect mode of “E5: normal reach” is selected). Since the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” is not executed, the in-reach character display Se2 in the “during reach” is not displayed (not selected).

  Next, the “design temporary stop” shown in the example of FIG. 21 tentatively displays a temporary “miss display” in the main display area Dm after any variable element of “reach display” is executed in the variation effect. This shows that the pseudo-canonical phrase character display Se4 appears in the displayed state and before the “re-change” variable element is executed. That is, at the timing indicated by the “design temporary stop”, the pseudo-typical phrase character display Se4 is emitted from the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds when the “reach display” variable element ends. To be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed in the “design temporary stop” is displayed corresponding to the display result of the third design temporarily displayed in the main display area Dm. It is configured. Specifically, one type of character display of “Sumane ...” corresponding to “losing display” is prepared, and no character display corresponding to “hit display” is prepared. This is because, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 appears only in the provisional “lost display” temporarily displayed in the variation effect, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 appears. This is because a variable element of “re-change” is always performed later, and there is no pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 based on “big hit display”.

  Next, the “symbol stop” shown in the example of FIGS. 20 and 21 is performed in the main display area Dm after any of the “reach display” or “re-change” variable elements are executed in the variation effect. This indicates that the fixed phrase character display Se3 appears at the timing when the “big hit display” or “losing display” displayed in a fixed manner is displayed. That is, at the timing indicated by the “symbol stop”, when the “reach display” variation element or the “revariation” variation element ends, the character pattern displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is fixed. Phrase character display Se3 is displayed so as to be emitted.

  In the first embodiment, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in the “symbol stop” is configured to be displayed corresponding to the display result of the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm. . Specifically, two types of character display are prepared: “Yataze!” Corresponding to “Big hit display” and “Sumane ...” corresponding to “Lost display”. Accordingly, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 corresponding to the provisional temporary “losing display” at the “temporary stop” and the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the “missing display” at the “stopping” are the same. It is configured to be displayed as content.

  Note that the fixed phrase character display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed in the “symbol stop” and “symbol temporary stop” are not provided with “weak pattern” and “strong pattern” as character patterns. This is because the timing of “symbol stop” is after the “border effect” is executed in the variation effect, and the “big hit display” or “losing display” of the variation effect is fixed. Therefore, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in the “symbol stop” only needs to directly express the display result of the variation effect, and it is necessary to provide a character pattern with a high expectation degree of jackpot such as “strong pattern” This is because the nature is poor. In addition, the timing of “Design Temporary Stop” is a pseudo display of “Design Temporary Stop” itself and “Design Stop”, so the contents of “Design Temporary Stop” and “Design Stop” match. It is necessary to let Therefore, the character pattern of the pseudo-phrasal character display Se4 and the character pattern of the fixed-phrase character display Se3 are configured to match.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. Here, the allocation of the character pattern counter 223e for each effect mode in the jackpot character pattern table 222g1 will be specifically described. As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the production mode “E5: Normal reach” is selected, the association between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is “weak” when “reach occurs”. “0-9” for the “pattern” character pattern and “10-99” for the “strong pattern” character pattern “when reach”.

  That is, in the variation production of “E5: Normal reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” of “when reach” is 10% and the character pattern of “strong pattern” of “when reach” is 90%. It is set to be.

  Therefore, when the effect mode of “E5: normal reach” is selected in the jackpot variation effect, the character pattern “strong pattern” of “when reach” is set to occur most easily (90%). .

  When the production mode “E5: normal reach” is selected, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not allocated at the timing of “reach”. As described above, when the character display appears at the timing of “reach”, the character pattern on the player side in the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” is displayed as a line. Although the display state to be emitted is required, the character design on the player side is not displayed at the execution timing of “during reach” because the character design on the player side is not displayed in the production mode with only the variation element of “normal reach”. This is because the display cannot be displayed.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the production mode “E6: Super Reach” is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223 e at each timing is “when a reach occurs”. Is “weak pattern” and “under reach” is “weak pattern”, “0-9”, “when reach” is “weak pattern”, and “under reach” is “strong pattern” "30-49", "reach occurrence" for character patterns "10-29", "when reach occurs" is "strong pattern", and "during reach" is "weak pattern" The character pattern “hour” is “strong pattern” and “during reach” is “50 to 99” for the character pattern “strong pattern”.

  In other words, in the variation production of “E6: Super Reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” is 10% for both “when reach” and “during reach”, and “weak pattern” is “weak pattern”. 20% of character patterns with “strong pattern” as “reach” and “strong pattern” when “reach occurs” and 20% of character pattern as “weak pattern” when “reach occurs” The character pattern “strong pattern” for both “reach” is set to a selection ratio of 50%.

  Therefore, when the effect mode of “E6: Super Reach” is selected in the jackpot fluctuating effect, the “strong pattern” character pattern is most likely to occur in both “when reach” and “during reach” (50% ) Is set as follows.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the production mode “E7: Special Reach” is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223 e at each timing is “when a reach occurs”. “0-9” for character patterns with “weak pattern” and “under reach” being “weak pattern”, “weak pattern” when “reach occurs”, and “strong pattern” during “reach” “40-69”, “when reach occurs” for character patterns “10-39”, “when reach” is “strong pattern”, and “under reach” is “weak pattern” "Is a" strong pattern "and" during reach "is" 70 to 99 "for a character pattern of" strong pattern ".

  That is, in the variation production of “E7: Super Reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” for both “when reach” and “during reach” is 10%, and “when weak reach” is “weak pattern”. 30% of character patterns with “strong pattern” as “reach”, “strong pattern” when “reach occurs”, and 30% of character pattern as “weak pattern” when “reach occurs”, “when reach” The character pattern “strong pattern” is set to 30% for both “during reach”.

  Accordingly, when the effect mode of “E7: Special Reach” is selected in the jackpot fluctuating effect, a character pattern other than “weak pattern” in “when reach” and “during reach”, that is, “when reach” occurs. Is a “weak pattern” and “reach” is a “strong pattern” character pattern, “when reach” is a “strong pattern” and “reach” is a “weak pattern” character pattern, or “ The character pattern “strong pattern” is set so that both “when reach” and “during reach” are easily selected (both are 30%).

  As shown in the example of FIG. 18, when the effect mode of “E8: special variation” is selected, the variation element of “movie” is executed in the variation effect, and any one other than the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. The character display does not appear. Therefore, since it is not necessary to determine “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” in each character display Se1, Se2, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not associated. Therefore, the character pattern counter 223e corresponding to the effect mode of “E8: special variation” is described as “−”.

  In the present embodiment, since the character display does not appear in “E8: special variation”, it is not necessary to provide the “E8: special variation” classification (group) in the jackpot character pattern table 222g1. In addition, as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 that appears at the timing of “design temporary stop” and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears at the timing of “design stop” have a single character pattern. Therefore, the jackpot character pattern table 222g1 may not be provided.

  Next, the loss character pattern table 222g2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the character pattern table for losing 222g2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the character pattern table for losing 222 g 2, as in the character pattern table for jackpot 222 g 1, the vertical row is the rendering mode selected at the time of losing, that is, the “non-reach (shortening)” rendering mode, “non- The “reach (normal)” production mode, “normal reach” production mode, “super reach” production mode, and “special reach” production mode are grouped.

  Specifically, the “E0: non-reach (shortening)” and “non-reach (normal)” production modes, which are referred to when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is determined, are determined as the production modes. “E1: non-reach (normal)” for reference, “E2: normal reach” for reference, and “super-reach” effect for reference are determined. "E3: Super reach" that is referred to when the "special reach" effect mode is determined, and "E4: Special reach" that is referred to when the aspect is determined. And the value which the character pattern counter 223e can take is each matched with the group of the divided production | presentation aspect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the row of the character pattern table for losing 222g2 shows the timing at which the character display appears in the variable display (three patterns of “when reach”, “during reach” or “design stop”). Is associated with the character pattern of the character display that appears. In the case of a loss, the variable element of “re-change” is not selected. Therefore, unlike the big hit character pattern table 222g1, the appearance timing of “design temporary stop” is not provided in the character pattern table 222g for loss. .

  Here, the allocation of the character pattern counter 223e for each effect mode in the character pattern table for losing 222g2 will be specifically described. As shown in the example of FIG. 19, when “E0: non-reach (shortened)” and “E1: non-reach (normal)” production modes are selected, “reach display” does not occur in the variable production. None of the character displays Se1 to Se4 appear. Therefore, since it is not necessary to determine “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” in each character display Se1, Se2, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not associated. Accordingly, the character pattern counter 223e corresponding to the production modes of “E0: non-reach (shortened)” and “E1: non-reach (normal)” is expressed as “−”.

  In the present embodiment, the character display does not appear in “E0: non-reach (shortened)” and “E1: non-reach (normal)”, so “E0: non-reach” in the character pattern table 222g2 for losing. (Shortening) "and" E1: non-reach (normal) "may not be provided (group).

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the production mode “E2: Normal reach” is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223e at each timing is “when reach occurs”. “0 to 89” for the “weak pattern” character pattern and “90 to 99” for the “strong pattern” when “reach occurs”.

  That is, in the variation production of “E2: Normal reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” of “when reach” is 90%, and the character pattern of “strong pattern” of “when reach” is 10%. It is set to be.

  Therefore, when the production mode of “E2: Normal reach” is selected in the loss variation production, the character pattern “weak pattern” of “when reach” is set to occur most easily (90%). .

  When the production mode “E2: Normal reach” is selected, the value of the character pattern counter 223e is not allocated at the timing “reach”. This is because, similarly to “E5: normal reach”, the character display emitted from the character design on the player side cannot be displayed at the execution timing of “during reach”.

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the production mode “E3: Super Reach” is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223 e at each timing is “when a reach occurs”. Is “weak pattern” and “during reach” is “weak pattern”, “0 to 69”, “when reach” is “weak pattern”, and “reach” is “strong pattern” "70-84" for the character pattern of "", "85-94", "reach occurrence" for the character pattern of "when the reach occurs" is "strong pattern" and "during reach" is "weak pattern" The character pattern “hour” is “strong pattern” and “during reach” is “95-99” for the character pattern “strong pattern”.

  That is, in the variation production of “E3: Super Reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” for both “when reach” and “during reach” is 70%, and “when reach” is “weak pattern”. 15% of character patterns with “strong pattern” as “reach”, “strong pattern” when “reach occurs”, and 10% of character pattern with “weak pattern” in “reach”, “when reach” The character pattern “strong pattern” for both “reach” is set to a selection ratio of 5%.

  Therefore, when the production mode of “E3: Super Reach” is selected in the loss variation production, the character pattern with “weak pattern” is most likely to occur when “reaching occurs” and “during reach” (70%). Is set to

  Next, as shown in the example of FIG. 19, when the production mode “E4: Special Reach” is selected, the correspondence between the character pattern and the character pattern counter 223 e at each timing is “when a reach occurs”. “0-89” for “weak pattern” and “weak pattern” is “weak pattern”, “weak pattern” is “weak pattern”, and “strong pattern” is “reach” “95-97”, “when reach occurs” for character patterns “90-94”, “when reach” is “strong pattern”, and “under reach” is “weak pattern” "Is" strong pattern "and" medium reach "is" 98, 99 "for the character pattern of" strong pattern ".

  That is, in the variation production of “E4: Super Reach”, the character pattern of “weak pattern” is 90% in both “when reach” and “during reach”, and “weak pattern” is “weak pattern”. 5% of character patterns with “strong pattern” for “reaching”, “strong pattern” for “when reaching” and 3% for “weak pattern” when “reaching”, and “when reaching” The character pattern of “strong pattern” for both “reach” is set to be 2%.

  Therefore, when the production mode of “E4: Special Reach” is selected as the variation production of the loss, the character pattern having “weak pattern” is most likely to occur when “reaching occurs” and “during reach” (90%). Is set to

  In the pachinko machine 10, the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is set as an effect mode that is difficult to select at the time of a loss and is easily selected at the time of a big hit. Therefore, when the “super reach” production mode or “special reach” production mode at the time of losing is selected, the character display of “strong pattern” appears in “when reach” or “during reach”. Despite the situation where the loss appears as a result of the fluctuating production, the “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode with a high jackpot expectation level is executed, and “Leach occurrence” with a high jackpot expectation level is executed. When the character display of “strong pattern” is witnessed during “time” or “during reach”, the player's expectation for jackpot is excessively increased. Then, when the player's expectation for the jackpot is increased and the “losing display” appears in the variation presentation, the player will produce an effect with a high jackpot expectation value (such as “super-reach” presentation mode + each character) By combining the “strong pattern” of the displays Se1 and Se2), it is likely that the “big hit display” is likely to appear, and the “miss display” is awakened, There is a risk of interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, it is difficult to select the character display of “strong pattern” in “when reach” or “during reach”. Thus, the number of cases where the player is awakened can be reduced.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the character pattern “strong pattern” in “when reach” or “during reach” is easily selected at the time of a big hit. By configuring in this way, when the “super-reach” variable element or “special reach” variable element is executed, the “strong pattern” is executed when “reach occurs” or “during reach”. Can increase the possibility of the “big hit display” appearing as the display result of the variation effect. As a result, the display result of either “Super Reach” variable element or “Special Reach” variable element after “Strong pattern” in “Reach occurrence” or “During reach” appears. Can greatly enhance the interest of whether or not it will appear.

  As described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears at the timing of “symbol stop” has a single character pattern. Therefore, like the big hit character pattern table 222g1, the lost character pattern table 222g2 You may comprise so that it may not provide.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The character color lottery counter 223f is a counter for drawing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that appear when “reach display” is executed in the variation effect of the third symbol. In the first embodiment, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are “white” as the normal display color, and “red” as the display color of the first chance-up pattern having a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the normal display color. ”And“ gold ”as the display color of the second chance up pattern having a higher probability of jackpot than the first chance up pattern, so that a total of three display colors can be displayed. The voice lamp control device 113 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 44) described later based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. In the variation effect process, the character color lottery counter By using 223f and the character color change table 222h, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that are displayed at the time of “reach display” are selected.

  The character color lottery counter 223f is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, After reaching a value (for example, “99” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”), it returns to “0”. The value of the character color lottery counter 223f is updated (for example, 1 is added) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) every time the main process loops once. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a variation pattern command and a stop type command are received from the main controller 110, the character color change table 222h is referred to, and the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. The display color content of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is determined according to the production mode and the value of the character color lottery counter 223f (see FIG. 46).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the display color lottery based on the character color lottery counter 223f and the character color change table 222h is won, and the jackpot is won, Although there are differences depending on the change timing (details of the change timing will be described later), the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are configured to be collectively set. That is, when the display color of any one of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is changed, the character colors of the subsequent character displays Se2 to Se4 are displayed with the changed display color.

  This is because, as in the first embodiment, when the character displays Se1 to Se4 appear at a plurality of locations of the variation effect, the chance of “red” or “gold” for each character display Se1 to Se4. This is because, when the up pattern is selected, lottery processing is required for the number of characters displayed, and the processing load increases. Also, in the character display executed earlier in the variation effect, after the character display of the chance up pattern whose display color has been changed appears, the character of the normal pattern that is not the chance up pattern in the character display executed later If the display is made to appear, the jackpot expectation is reduced (hereinafter referred to as “falling down expression”), and the player who has been uplifted by the appearance of the chance and the chance-up pattern, This is because there is a risk of being awakened by witnessing the falling expression.

  Therefore, the display color lottery is collectively performed in the character display of the variable effect, and when the chance up pattern appears even once, the chance up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display. Thus, it is not necessary to perform a lottery process for each character display, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the chance up pattern is set, the chance up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display, thereby eliminating the phenomenon that the expression of falling down in the character display occurs, so that the player can enter the game. It can prevent being awakened. In particular, the more the number of character display appearance points (for example, five or more locations) that can execute the chance-up pattern in the variation production, the more the batch lottery works and the control burden is remarkably reduced. It becomes possible.

  Here, the character color change table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the character color change table 222h. The voice lamp control device 113 executes this “reach display” in the variation effect of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and this character color change table 222h. , And the display of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that appear in the “reach display” based on the value of the character color lottery counter 223f at that time and the type of “reach display” (type of effect mode) Determine the color (change color). As shown in FIG. 22, the character color change table 222h is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, for “E0: non-reach (shortening)” referred to when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode at the time of losing is determined, and “non-reach (normal)” production mode at the time of losing For “E1: non-reach (normal)”, “E2: normal reach” that is referred to when the “normal reach” performance mode is determined, and “ For “E3: Super Reach” that is referred to when the “Super Reach” effect mode is determined, and for “E4: Special Reach” that is referred to when the “Special Reach” effect mode at the time of losing is determined, For “E5: Normal reach”, which is referred to when the “normal reach” performance mode at the big hit is determined, and the “super reach” production at the big hit For “E6: Super Reach” that is referred to when the event is determined, “E7: Special Reach” that is referred to when the “special reach” performance mode at the time of jackpot is determined, and “ It is divided into “E8: special variation” that is referred to when the “special variation” effect mode is determined. Each of the divided groups is associated with a value that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f.

  In the first embodiment, “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, and “E8: special variation” are configured so that the character displays Se1 and Se2 do not appear. In the character color change table 222h, the value of the character color lottery counter 223f is not assigned to “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, and “E8: special variation”. The character color change table 222h may not be provided with the classification (group) of “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, and “E8: special variation”. .

  In the character color change table 222h, the display color (change color) of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is one of “none” that does not change from the normal display color (“white”) in “E2: normal reach” at the time of the loss. The display mode is configured to be selected. That is, in “E2: normal reach”, the character color lottery counter is selected so that the display mode of “red” in which the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 change to red and “golden” in which the color changes to gold is not selected. The value of 223f is not associated. Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the production mode “E2: Normal reach” is selected, only “None (“ White ”)” in which the colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 do not change is selected. The display colors of Se1 to Se4 do not change.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the display color “red” of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is selected only in the “super reach” or “normal reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot or loss. In the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of losing, the “red” character display Se1 to Se4 is not selected. As a result, when the “red” character displays Se1 to Se4 appear, it is determined that the “super reach or more” effect mode at the time of jackpot or loss or the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot is selected. It is configured as follows. The “E2: normal reach” classification (group) may not be provided in the character color change table 222h.

  In the character color change table 222h, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 changes to red when “E3: Super reach” at the time of the loss is “None” that does not change from the normal display color (“white”). Three display modes of “red” and “gold” that changes to gold are prepared so as to be selectable, and values that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f are associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f in “E3: Super Reach” and the display color (change color) of the character display is “0 to 89”, “ “90” to “98” for “red” and “99” for “gold”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the character display Se1 to Se4 has a display color of “none (“ white ”)” is 90%, a display color of “red” is 9%, The display color of “golden” is set to be selected at a rate of 1%.

  Therefore, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is a setting (90%) in which “none” that does not change the display color is easily selected.

  In the character color change table 222h, in the case of “E4: Special Reach” at the time of losing, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 changes to red from “none” that does not change from the normal display color (“white”). Three display modes of “red” and “gold” that changes to gold are prepared so as to be selectable, and values that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f are associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f in “E4: Special Reach” and the display color (change color) of the character display is “0 to 79”, “ “80 to 98” for “red” and “99” for “gold”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the character display Se1 to Se4 is “None (“ white ”)” is 80%, “Red” is 19%, The display color of “golden” is set to be selected at a rate of 1%.

  Therefore, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is a setting (80%) in which “none” that does not change the display color is easily selected.

  In the character color change table 222h, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is “None” that does not change from the normal display color (“white”), and “E5: Normal reach” at the time of the big hit changes to red. Three display modes, “red” and “gold” that changes to gold, are prepared so as to be selectable, and values that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f are associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f and the display color (change color) of the character display in “E5: normal reach” is “0 to 29” and “red” "30 to 89" for "" and "90 to 99" for "golden".

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display colors “1” (“white”) of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are 30%, the display color of “red” is 60%, and “golden” "Is selected so as to be selected at a rate of 10%.

  Accordingly, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of “red” can be easily selected (60%), and therefore the character displays Se1 to Se4. The display color is set so as to be easily changed.

  In the character color change table 222h, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 changes to red when “E6: Super reach” at the time of the big hit is “None” that does not change from the normal display color (“white”). Three display modes of “red” and “gold” that changes to gold are prepared so as to be selectable, and values that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f are associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f in “E6: Super Reach” and the display color (change color) of the character display is “0-19”, “ “20 to 79” for “red” and “80 to 99” for “gold”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display colors “1” (“white”) of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are 30%, the display color of “red” is 60%, The display color of “golden” is set to be selected at a rate of 10%.

  Accordingly, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of “red” is easily selected (60%). The display color of Se4 is set so as to be easily changed.

  In the character color change table 222h, the display color of the character displays Se1 to Se4 changes to red when the display color of the character display Se1 to Se4 does not change from the normal display color (“white”) in “E7: special reach” at the time of the big hit. Three display modes of “red” and “gold” that changes to gold are prepared so as to be selectable, and values that can be taken by the character color lottery counter 223f are associated with each display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the value of the character color lottery counter 223f in “E7: Special Reach” and the display color (change color) of the character display is “0-9”, “ “10 to 69” for “red” and “70 to 99” for “gold”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display colors “None (“ white ”)” of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are 10%, the display color of “red” is 60%, The display color “gold” is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

  Accordingly, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 selected in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit are set so that the display color of “red” is easily selected (60%). The display color of Se4 is set so as to be easily changed.

  Therefore, the display color of the character display Se1 to Se4 at the time of losing is, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the “normal game state” is the first, that is, when the effect mode is selected by the A table 202d1. The display colors of the displays Se1 to Se4 are selected as 99.3% of “None”, which remains “white”, 0.65% of “red”, and 0.05% of “gold”. The display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 at the time of the big hit are, for example, when “15R probability variation big hit” is won, that is, when the production mode is selected by the C table 202d3, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. However, “None” that remains “white” is selected at a rate of 14.5%, “Red” at 60%, and “Golden” at 25.5%. Therefore, when winning the jackpot lottery of the third symbol, among the character displays Se1 to Se4 appearing during the “reach display”, “red” or “gold” is easy to select, and “none” is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery is lost, “None” is easily selected, and “Red” or “Golden” is difficult to select.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is set as an effect mode that is difficult to select at the time of a loss and is easily selected at the time of a big hit. Accordingly, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed when “the reach occurs” or “during reach” If it is displayed in “red” or “golden” with a high expectation level, the jackpot expectation level will be excessively increased in spite of the fluctuating effect of the loss. If the “losing display” appears in the fluctuating production in the state that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high, an effect with a high jackpot expectation value (“super reach” production mode etc. + “Red” of each character display Se1, Se2, etc.) ), The player who is disappointed that there is a high possibility that a “hit indication” will appear, may be awakened by the appearance of the “lose indication” and interrupt the game. is there.

  Therefore, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 displayed when “reach occurs” or “during reach” are “ By making it difficult to select “red” or “gold”, it is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the player is awakened.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, regarding the display colors of the character displays Se 1 and Se 2 displayed when “reach occurs” and “during reach”, “red” or “gold” is selected for the big hit time than when lost. It is configured to be easy. By configuring in this way, the character display Se1, Se2 is “red” when “reaching occurs” or “during reach” in combination with the execution of the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach”. Alternatively, when executed in “golden”, the possibility of “big hit display” appearing as a display result of the variation effect can be increased. As a result, the “super-reaching” variable element after the change of the display color of the character display Se1, Se2 at the time of “reach occurrence” or “during reach” or the “special effect” variable element, It is possible to dramatically increase the interest of whether or not the display result appears.

  Furthermore, when the character pattern of “strong pattern” in “when reach” or “during reach” is combined with a change in display color, the possibility of “big hit display” appearing as a display result of the variation effect is further increased. Can be increased. As a result, when “reach occurs” or “during reach”, the fluctuation pattern of “super reach” or “special reach” after “strong pattern” appears as the character pattern and “red” or “gold” appears as the display color. The “interesting effect” in the variable element “” can further enhance the interest of whether or not any display result appears.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The color change timing counter 223g displays the character display Se1 when reach occurs and the character display Se2 during reach when the “reach display” is executed in the variation effect of the third symbol (hereinafter, character display Se1 and reach when reach occurs). This is a counter for drawing lots of timings for changing (changing) the display color of “middle character display Se2” (sometimes referred to as “each character display Se1, Se2”).

  That is, when the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is won by the character color lottery counter 223f and the character color change table 222h (for example, the value of the character color lottery counter in the “special reach” at the time of big hit) In the range of “10” to “99”), according to the selected (selected) display color, the display color is changed to the display color at the appearance timing of the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or Whether the display color is changed to the display color when the reach character display Se2 appears is determined by lottery.

  Specifically, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a variation effect process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. By using the color change timing counter 223g and the color change timing table 222i, the timing for changing the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is selected.

  This color change timing counter 223g is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1111 in FIG. 41) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and the maximum After reaching a value (for example, “99” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 99”), it returns to “0”. The value of the color change timing counter 223g is updated (for example, 1 is added) once (see S1111 in FIG. 41) every time the main process loops once. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main control device 110, the color change timing counter according to the effect mode of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. With reference to the value of 223g and the color change timing table 222i, the change timing of the display color in each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is determined (see FIG. 46).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is changed based on the lottery by the color change timing counter 223g and the color change timing table 222i, the change is made. In the display colors of the character displays Se2 to Se4 appearing after the character displays Se1 and Se2, the display colors of the changed character displays Se1 and Se2 are inherited (followed).

  This configuration eliminates the need for lottery processing for each character lottery, reduces the processing burden, and increases the chance that the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is "red" or "golden" When the pattern is set, the chance-up pattern can be displayed following the subsequent character display, thereby preventing the occurrence of falling expression in the character display. In addition, by determining the change timings of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 at once by lottery, the display color can be controlled by simpler control than by lottery of the display color changes for each of the character displays Se1 and Se2. Diversify change patterns and enhance the fun of gaming.

  Here, the color change timing table 222i will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the color change timing table 222i. The sound lamp control device 113 executes this “reach display” in the variation effect of the third symbol based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and this color change timing table 222i. In the “reach display”, based on the variation effect rendering mode (type of “reach display”) indicated by the variation pattern command and the stop type command and the value of the color change timing counter 223g at that time. The change timing which changes the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2 which appears is determined. As shown in FIG. 23, the color change timing table 222i is grouped based on the selected rendering mode and the determined display colors (change colors) of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

  Specifically, for “red” and “gold” in “E0: non-reach (shortening)” referred to when the “non-reach (shortening)” production mode is determined at the time of losing, Referred when the “reach (normal)” effect mode is determined, “E1: non-reach (normal)” for “red” and “golden” and “normal reach” effect modes are determined. “E2: normal reach” for “red” and “gold”, and “E3: super reach” for “red” and “gold” for reference And “E4: Special reach” which is referred to when the “special reach” effect mode is determined, and “red” and “gold”. A value that can be taken by the color change timing counter 223g is associated with each of the divided groups.

  Also, at the time of a big hit, refer to when “Super Reach” effect mode is determined for “Red” and “Gold” for “E5: Normal reach”, which is referenced when the “Normal reach” effect mode is determined "E6: Super Reach" for "Red" and "Gold" and "E7: Special Reach" for "Red" and "Gold" that are referred to when the production mode is determined And “red” and “gold” in “E8: special variation” referred to when the “special variation” effect mode is determined. A value that can be taken by the color change timing counter 223g is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the first embodiment, “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, and “E8: special variation” are configured so that the character displays Se1 and Se2 do not appear. In the color change timing table 222i, the value of the color change timing counter 223g is not assigned to “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, and “E8: special fluctuation”. In addition, in “E2: normal reach” at the time of losing, the color change of each character display Se1, Se2 is not won (see FIG. 22), and the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is not changed. In the color change timing table 222i, the value of the color change timing counter 223g is not allocated to “E2: normal reach”.

  In the first embodiment, character display does not appear in “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, “E2: normal reach”, and “E8: special fluctuation”, or Since the display color of the character display does not change, “E0: non-reach (shortened)”, “E1: non-reach (normal)”, “E2: normal reach”, and “E8: special fluctuation” appear in the color change timing table 222i. You may comprise so that division (group) may not be provided.

  In the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “red” is won in “E3: Super reach” at the time of loss, two change timings of “when reach” and “during reach” are changed. Are prepared so that the color change timing counter 223g can be associated with each change timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “red” in “E3: super reach” is “0 to 9” with respect to “when reach occurs”. , “10 to 99” for “during reach”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected and “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change of “when reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be selected at a ratio of 10% and the change timing of “during reach” is 90%.

  Accordingly, in the “super-reach” effect mode at the time of losing, when “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character-in-reach character display Se2 displayed during the execution of the variable element of “super-reach” The display color of the reach character display Se2 is set to be easily changed to “red” (90%) at the timing when is displayed.

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the “gold color” display color is selected in “E3: Super Reach” at the time of loss, two change timings of “when reach occurs” and “during reach” are selected. The change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “gold” in “E3: super reach” is “0, 1” with respect to “when reach”. , “2 to 99” for “during reach”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected and “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change of “when reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be selected at a rate of 2% and the change timing of “during reach” is 98%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of losing, when “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se2 displayed during the execution of the variable element of “super reach” Se2 Is set such that the display color of the reach character display Se2 is easily changed to “golden” (98%).

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “red” is won in “E4: special reach” at the time of loss, two change timings of “when reach” and “during reach” are selected. The change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and the value that the color change timing counter 223g can take is associated with each change timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, in “E4: Special Reach”, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “red” is “0 to 4” with respect to “when reach”. , “5 to 99” for “during reach”

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected and “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of “when the reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display Is selected at a rate of 5% and the change timing of “during reach” is 95%.

  Accordingly, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing, when “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se2 displayed during the execution of the variable element of “special reach” The display color of the reach character display Se2 is set to be easily changed to “red” (95%) at the timing when is displayed.

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color “gold” is selected in “E4: special reach” at the time of loss, two change timings “when reach occurs” and “during reach” are selected. The change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and the value that the color change timing counter 223g can take is associated with each change timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, in “E4: Special Reach”, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “gold” is “0”, “ “1 to 99” for “reaching”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing is selected and “gold” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change timing of “when the reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display Is set to be selected at a rate of 1% and the change timing of “during reach” is 99%.

  Accordingly, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of losing, when “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display during reach Se2 displayed during the execution of the variable element of “special reach” The display color of the reach character display Se2 is set to be easily changed to “gold” (99%) at the timing when is displayed.

  As described above, the “reach display” at the time of losing is configured such that the display color of the character display is more easily changed from “at the time of reach” to “during reach”. This can be changed by changing the display color of the character display at the time of reach occurrence in the change production that results in a loss if the display color of the character display is changed at the time of the occurrence of reach. This is because the first half of the performance will overwhelm the expectation of the jackpot, and the player may be awakened to the game by being overwhelmed. Therefore, by making the display color of the character display easier to change during “reaching” than “when a reach occurs” in the loss variation effect, It is possible to prevent a person from being awakened to the game. In addition, even if the display color of the character display does not change at the time of “reach”, it is configured so that the change of the display color of the character display can also occur at “at the time of a big hit” In this variation production, a big hit can be expected.

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “red” or “gold” is selected in “E5: normal reach” at the time of the big hit, one change timing of “when reach occurs” is selected as the change timing It is configured to be. In other words, since “E5: normal reach” cannot be executed with the “super reach” variable element and the “special reach” variable element, the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element is executed. The character display of “in reach” which can be displayed inside cannot be displayed. Therefore, when the production mode “E5: normal reach” is selected, the value of the color change timing counter 223g is not associated with the change timing of “during reach”. Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the production mode of “E5: normal reach” is selected, only the change timing of “when reach occurs” is selected, so the reach displayed at the timing of “when reach occurs”. At the time when the character display Se1 is displayed at the time of occurrence, the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach is changed to “red” or “golden” and displayed.

  In the first embodiment, since “E5: normal reach” has a single character display change timing, the “E5: normal reach” classification (group) is not provided in the color change timing table 222i. May be.

  In the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “red” is won in “E6: Super reach” at the time of the big hit, two change timings of “when reach” and “during reach” are changed as change timings. Are prepared so that the color change timing counter 223g can be associated with each change timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “red” in “E6: super reach” is “0 to 79” with respect to “when reach occurs”. , “80-99” for “Leaching”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change in “when reach” occurs as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be selected at a rate of 80% and the change timing of “during reach” is 20%.

  Accordingly, in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, when “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at the start of the variable element of “normal reach” is displayed. When the reach occurs, the display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is set to be easily changed to “red” (80%).

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “golden” is won in “E6: Super reach” at the time of big hit, two change timings of “when reach” and “during reach” are selected. A change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and a value that the color change timing counter 223g can take is associated with each change timing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, in “E6: Super Reach”, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “gold” is “0 to 69” with respect to “when reach occurs”. , “70-99” for “reaching”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change of “when reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be selected at a ratio of 70% and the change timing of “during reach” is 30%.

  Accordingly, in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, when “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at the start of the variation element of “normal reach” is displayed. At the time of display, the display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is set to be easily changed to “gold” (70%).

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “red” is won in “E7: special reach” at the time of the big hit, two change timings of “when reach” and “during reach” are selected. The change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “red” in “E7: Special Reach” is “0 to 69” with respect to “when reach occurs”. , “70-99” for “reaching”.

  In other words, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change in “when reach” occurs as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be 70% and the change timing of “(Super /) Special Reach” is selected at a ratio of 30%.

  Accordingly, in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, when “red” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at the start of the variation element of “normal reach” is displayed. The display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is set to be easily changed to “red” (70%).

  Next, in the color change timing table 222i, when the display color of “gold color” is won in “E7: special reach” at the time of the big hit, two change timings “when reach” and “during reach” are selected. The change timing is prepared so that it can be selected, and each change timing is associated with a possible value of the color change timing counter 223g.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, in “E7: Special Reach”, the correspondence between the value of the color change timing counter 223g and the change timing in the display color “gold” is “0 to 59” with respect to “when reach”. , “60-99” for “reach”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected and “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the change of “when reach occurs” as the change timing of the display color of the character display The timing is set to be selected at a ratio of 60% and the change timing of “during reach” is 40%.

  Accordingly, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode at the time of jackpot, when “golden” is selected as the display color of the character display, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at the start of the variation element of “normal reach” is displayed. The display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is set to be easily changed to “golden” (60%).

  As described above, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected as the effect mode, and the “red” display color is selected, the reach medium is set to “meeting reach” when lost. While the character display Se2 is likely to change to “red” (90% or 95%), the character display Se1 is likely to change to “red” (80% or 70%) when a reach occurs in the case of a big hit. Is set to Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 of “when reach” is displayed in “red”, the “big hit display” is displayed in the variation effect. The possibility of putting out can be increased. As a result, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 is displayed in “red” at the time of “reach occurrence” and then developed into a “super reach” variable element or a “special reach” variable element, By letting the player expect that a “big win” will appear, and by making the player pay more attention to the “super-reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element, Can be increased.

  In addition, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected as the effect mode, and the “gold” display color is selected, the reach character display “Se2” is displayed in the “reach” mode. Is easy to change to “golden” (98% or 99%), while the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of the reach that is displayed at the start of the variable element of “normal reach” is likely to change to “golden” (70% or 60%) %) Is set.

  This is set so that the “gold color” display color of the character display is easily selected when the “big win display” is won, and is difficult to select during the “lose display”. Therefore, at the time of losing, it is configured so that the “golden” character display does not appear until the second half of the variation effect, that is, the appearance timing of the character display Se2 during reach, and the “golden” display at the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. By configuring the color so that it is difficult to reveal, it is possible to reduce the display of “golden” characters from the first half of the losing variation effect and excessively expecting the jackpot. Even if it is a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being awakened by excessively beating the player.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is expected from the first half of the variation effect by displaying the “golden” character display at the appearance timing of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence at the time of the jackpot. A high “golden” character display can be displayed to enhance the interest of the game, and the variation effect can be a big hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved without arousing the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when displaying the character display in the “reach display” of the fluctuation display, based on whether or not the fluctuation appears (effect mode) and the counters 223e to 223g, Determine the character pattern (“weak pattern” or “strong pattern”), display color (“white”, “red”, or “gold”)) and change timing (“when reach” or “during reach”) Is configured to do. By configuring in this way, the display mode of each character display Se1, Se2 displayed in the “reach display” is displayed in various patterns reflecting the result of the lottery determination, and depending on the display mode of each character display Se1 The jackpot expectation can be varied. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by letting the player infer whether or not the variation effect will be a “hit display” depending on the display mode of each character display Se1, Se2.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The hold information storage area 223h is information for performing a prefetch process, that is, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 which are acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 upon starting winning and are transmitted by the hold ball number command. Each value of the hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, hold change information indicating the display mode of “hold change notice”, scenario data indicating the execution timing of “hold change notice”, change This is an area for storing pending erasure information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not “re-change” is performed in the change effect.

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform prefetch processing (hold display setting processing ( (See FIG. 43). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold change information, the scenario data, the hold erase information, and the re-change information obtained by the prefetching process to hold the change information storage area 223h5, the scenario data storage area 223h6 in the hold information storage area 223h, Stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223h7 and the re-variation information storage area 223h8, respectively, and “hold change notice” is executed based on the values stored in the areas 223h5 to 223h8.

  The execution information storage area 223i is information for performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, that is, the first information acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 with the start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball number command. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, hold change information indicating a display mode of “hold change notice”, and execution timing of “hold change notice” , Scenario data indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect, and re-variation information indicating whether or not a variable element of “re-variation” is performed in the variation effect. It is an area for storing.

  When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 detects that the execution timing of the variation effect is detected, it is stored in the first hold information storage area of the hold information storage area 223h described above in order to execute the setting of the change effect and the like. The information (the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) for performing the changing effect is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i.

  Here, the details of the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i. The hold information storage area 223h has four areas of hold information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the hold information storage first to fourth areas, a first per-random number counter storage area 223h1 that stores the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type type counter C2 are stored. Per-type counter storage area 223h2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, fluctuation type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored, Hold change information storage area 223h5 in which hold change information indicating the display mode of “notice” is stored, scenario data storage area 223h6 in which scenario data indicating the execution timing of “hold change notice” is stored, and cockpit display in the variable effect Stores pending erasure information indicating whether or not area Db is erased That pending erase information storage area 223H7, and re-variation information storage area 223h8 re fluctuation information indicating whether variables of "re fluctuation" is performed in the variation effect is stored is at least provided.

  The execution information storage area 223i includes the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the currently executed variation effect, the hold change information indicating the display mode of the “hold change notice”, and the execution timing of the “hold change notice”. , Scenario data indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the changing effect, and re-change information indicating whether or not “re-change” is performed in the changing effect. It is an area for.

  In addition, the hold information storage first to fourth areas respectively hold values indicating the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to a maximum of four fluctuating effects and the display mode of “hold change notice”. Change information, scenario data indicating the execution timing of “hold change notice”, hold deletion information indicating whether or not the cockpit display area Db is deleted in the change effect, and a variable element of “re-change” in the change effect. This is an area for storing re-variation information indicating whether or not it is performed.

  Specifically, the execution information storage area 223i is an area corresponding to the currently executed variation effect, and the hold information storage first area is the first change in time among the suspended change effects. It is an area corresponding to the effect, and the hold information storage second area is an area corresponding to the change effect that is held second oldest in time among the change effects held, and the hold information storage third area is This is the area corresponding to the variation effect that is held third oldest among the time-varying variation effects, and the hold information storage fourth area is reserved fourth oldest among the variation effects reserved. This is an area corresponding to the fluctuating production.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserve ball number command from the main control device 110, the speech lamp control device 113 holds the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. Extracted from the ball number command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls included in the first to fourth reserved information storage areas. The data is stored in the random number counter storage area 223h1, the first hit type counter storage area 223h2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4.

  Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of fluctuating effects held at that time is X, and the reserved ball number command includes The values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th variation variation effect that is temporally reserved among the variation variations that have been suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223h1 to 223h4 are stored. At this time, main controller 110 stores the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved X area of reserved ball storage area 203b. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the reserved information storage X area.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a prefetch process (pending display setting process (see FIG. 43)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the hold information storage X area. The hold change information, scenario data, hold deletion information, and re-variation information generated based on the processing result are stored in the storage areas 223h5 to 223h8 of the same hold information storage X area. That is, in each hold information storage X area, whether or not the “hold change notice” is executed in each variation effect, the execution timing when the “hold change notice” is executed, and the cockpit display area Db in each change effect is displayed. Whether or not an effect to be deleted is included and whether or not “re-change” is performed in each change effect are stored.

  On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of a change effect from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a shift process in the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i. In other words, since the suspended variation effect is reduced by one and the execution of the variation effect that is first suspended in time is started, the hold information storage first area corresponding to the first suspended variation effect is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i corresponding to the currently executed variation effect. Let

  Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage second area are stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage fourth area Move to 223h8.

  As a result, the execution information storage area 223i stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. Further, in the hold information storage first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored. Will be. That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223h. The

  In the sound lamp control device 113, when prefetching processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 43)) is performed, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of holding balls) held from the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is grasped. And based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variation effect is reserved among the first to fourth information storage areas are prefetched. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit, variation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is “1”, the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect is one, and therefore the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the stored information storage first area Prefetch the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is “4”, the fluctuating ball number is four, so the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the stored information fourth area are stored. Prefetch the value and make a decision.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the sound lamp control device 113 accesses the RAM 203 and the like of the main control device 110. I can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 has a holding information storage area 223h, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuating effects held by the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h. That is, when the suspended variation effect is executed, the result of the variation effect will be determined (whether it will be a big hit, the change time, etc.) before executing the variation effect, The sound lamp control device 113 can execute execution of various effects, and can control the execution mode and execution timing of the “holding change notice”.

  In the above-described shift processing in the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i, the number of held balls when the change pattern command and the stop type command are received (update based on the reception of the change pattern command and the stop type command is performed). Data is shifted (shifted) only for the areas corresponding to the variable effects that are reserved among the first to fourth areas for storing the reserved information.

  For example, when the change pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b before the update is “4”, and all areas of the reserved information storage area 223h (the reserved information storage first to fourth areas) ) Is stored. In this case, the hold information storage first area data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i, the hold information storage second area data is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the hold information storage third area data is held. Shift to the information storage second area, and shift the data in the hold information storage fourth area to the hold information storage third area.

  On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is “2”, the data in the first storage information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i. Then, the data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the hold information storage third and fourth areas in which the fluctuating effects are not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

  Regardless of the presence / absence of data, the data in the hold information storage first to fourth areas are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (the execution information storage area 223i or the hold information storage first to third areas), respectively. You may comprise as follows. In this case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) for each of the first to fourth areas for storing the hold information, the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect or a continuous effect. Controls the notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and a bus line. 240, 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 provides a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Received from the sound lamp controller 113. An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Below, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the program ROM 232 and the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on a command input from the sound lamp control device 113.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to store a large amount of image data, the character ROM 234 has a small area and a large memory. The NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a capacity and is inexpensive. In the first embodiment, a 2-gigabyte NAND flash memory 234a is used. As a result, a large number of images displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be stored, so that the images displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be diversified, and the fun of the game is enhanced. ing.

  The NAND flash memory 234a generates defective block data in which data cannot be written due to its nature. Therefore, in the character ROM 234, a known arbitration circuit 234b (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) that performs data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. See). Since the arbitration circuit 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM 234 and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 has a different defect in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the first embodiment). ) In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the next one frame image, and also executes a display process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and image data necessary for drawing an image by the image controller 237 is read out from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 in advance before drawing. The video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. At this time, which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred (and which address is stored) is determined by the MPU 231 according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 232. To decide.

  When the image controller 237 draws an image, image drawing processing is executed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 without using the image data in the character ROM 234. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the image controller 237 uses the image data stored in advance in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. Thus, the image can be immediately drawn without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 234. Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a desired time.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to do. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  As a result, after the initial setting process at the time of power-on (main process (see FIG. 48)) is completed, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. be able to. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114. Since the image data is made resident, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident (not expanded) in the resident video RAM 235, the character image is read from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. On the other hand, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data necessary for drawing. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  Whether the image data necessary for the image controller 237 to draw an image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 (and at which address) the MPU 231 stores the program ROM 232. Is determined according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the image, and when the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image, the storage location of the required image data (resident video RAM 235 or normal video) Which address is stored in which RAM 236 and which address is stored). The image controller 237 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231. Thus, the image controller 237 can concentrate on drawing an image.

  When the image controller 237 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 231, the image data required for drawing is stored from the image type required for drawing (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. Which address is stored in which address and in which address is stored). In this case, when the MPU 231 stores image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 displays the type of image (or the corresponding image) displayed by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 234 storing the data) and the storage location of the image data based on the control signal from the MPU 231, and the RAM (not shown) provided in the image controller 237 stores the image data. The type (or the address of the character ROM 234 storing the corresponding image data) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 237 may determine the storage location of the image data necessary for the image. By determining the image data storage destination by the image controller 237, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a data transfer buffer memory from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132) of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234. It is configured by a static RAM (Static RAM, hereinafter referred to as “SRAM”) having kilobytes, and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

  When transferring an image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 reads data for one block from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the unused time.

  If the image data is transferred directly from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 without providing the buffer RAM 237a, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, so the reading speed is low. During transfer of image data of a desired size, the input / output port is composed of a dynamic RAM (Dynamic RAM; hereinafter referred to as “DRAM”) having one port (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “1-port type”). One port of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and other data access cannot be performed for a long time. Thereby, during that time, the image controller 237 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. There is a possibility that the image display of the third symbol display device 81 is delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type DRAM (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) is used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used in the image controller 237. There is a limit to the control using, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM capable of high-speed operation in the image controller 237, so that image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

  In addition, in the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 issues to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information in the drawing list, the start address (storage start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is included. And the final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the start address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine the time that is not used for the display processing to 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

  As described above, the resident video RAM 235 is configured by a one-port DRAM, and is used so that image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten when the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. In the resident video RAM 235, among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, the data corresponding to the image displayed frequently, and the main control Data corresponding to an image to be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) is transferred from the character ROM 234 and is resident.

  The resident video RAM 235 includes a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variation image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f, a reserved symbol area 235g, A cockpit image area 235h, a sub display image area 235i, and a character design area 235j are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is performing initialization processing at power-on. It is. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the variation effect when it is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and at the time of power-on. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the change image 283 is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on (see S2002 and S2003 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 shows the time when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining an image.

  Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The image data to be transferred is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. A power-on main image 282 shown in FIG. 26A is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, which are variation start instruction commands, are received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is turned on when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. On the display screen of the main image 282, a power-on stop image 283a of a “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” symbol at the same position as the “O” symbol as shown in FIG. The “x” symbol power-on stop image 283b is repeatedly displayed alternately during the period of the fluctuation effect. Then, the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is judged from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113. The power-on stop image 283a shown in b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and in the case of “lost display”, the power-on stop image 283b shown in FIG. 26C is constant after the change effect is stopped. Display time.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs drawing of the main image 282 at the time of input. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned at the game hall confirms the main image 282 at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can do. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image 282 when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. can do. In addition, since the player or the person related to the game hall can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the resident video Wait until the initialization process ends without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the remaining image data to be resident in the RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, the main image 282 at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 operates without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has been started, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  Further, if the player starts playing while the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected in the first entrance 64, the fluctuation at power-on The power-on variation image 283 is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 resident in the image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the symbol display device 81. Therefore, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image 283. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  At the stage when the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected while the throw-in main image 282 is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 is stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, the image data is instantaneous. If a resident video RAM 235 retains data when a power failure occurs, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b is used when the power is restored. The power-on main image 282 and the power-on fluctuation image 283 can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. 27 and 28 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 27B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 28 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Of the back surfaces A to C, the back image corresponding to the back surface is an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display region displayed in the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. Is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. Then, the back image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage, the MPU 231 first sets a position between the position a and the position a ′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 237 is controlled to be displayed in the 81 main display area Dm. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the display area reaches an image between the position c and the position d, the display area is again displayed on the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. The image controller 237 is controlled. Therefore, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third image in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the player changes the stage to “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 31A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 28B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 28C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 28A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 28A to 28C are displayed again in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 27A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. The back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 28A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B excluding FIG. During the start-up process after the input, the image is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ or as shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b). The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image between FIGS. 28A and 28B is fixed to the range, and the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the first image, the initial position of the back surface B or the back surface C can be instantly indicated by the third symbol display device. It is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81, also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images in FIGS. 28A to 28B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range shown in FIGS. 28A to 28B is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, images corresponding to the images of FIGS. 28B to 28C and FIGS. 28C to 28A are displayed while the images of FIGS. 28A to 28B are displayed. Since the data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. 28A to 28B without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 28 (b) to 28 (c) and FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (a) are sequentially displayed with time. Can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that on the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is a sub-area (not shown) dedicated to the back image provided in an image storage area 236a (see FIG. 25) of the normal video RAM 236 described later. Stored). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, Next, the image from the position b ′ is displayed on the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the third symbol display device 81 can be connected smoothly. The back image is scrolled.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data of the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The image controller 237 is controlled. Thereby, in the main display area Dm of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the image between position a-position c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed by smooth connection so that it may flow toward the left direction. .

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. As a result, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character in the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. As a result, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error as an error command. Is notified to the display control device 114. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The reserved symbol area 235g is an area in which data relating to the display mode of the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 and the initial setting (default setting) of the reserved symbol is resident. That is, in the reserved symbol area 235g, image data corresponding to the “white” symbol “◯”, which is the display mode of the initial setting (default setting) of the execution symbol and the reserved symbol, is resident. Thereby, when displaying an execution symbol and a reserved symbol in the execution symbol display region Db0 or the reserved symbol display regions Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display region Db of the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the execution symbol or the reserved symbol can be quickly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, the cockpit display area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed even though a plurality of balls have entered the first entrance 64 and the reserved symbols are displayed on the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the reserved symbol (executed symbol) is not displayed in Db.

  The cockpit image area 235h is an area for resident image data corresponding to the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the cockpit image area 235h, image data corresponding to a cockpit image other than the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data corresponding to the cockpit display area Db from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, The cockpit display area Db can be quickly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even when the cockpit display area Db is continuously displayed in the variation effect, or when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after the “super reach” variation element or the “special reach” variation element is executed. By reading the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h, the cockpit display area Db can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the cockpit display area Db is always the third display area unless the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element is executed, even when the rear image of the main display area Dm is scroll-displayed. The symbol display device 81 is configured to be fixedly displayed at a certain position (lower display area) of the display area. Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is a display object having a higher display frequency than the specific third symbol or the specific back image. Accordingly, the resident video RAM 235 is provided with a cockpit image area 235h for the cockpit display area Db, and is configured to perform display control based on the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h, whereby the NAND flash memory 234a. The cockpit display area Db having a high display frequency can be smoothly displayed as compared with the case of directly reading from the display.

  The sub display image area 235i is an area for resident image data corresponding to the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data corresponding to the sub display area Ds from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, The sub-display area Ds can be quickly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even when the sub display area Ds is continuously displayed in the variation effect, or when the sub display area Ds is redisplayed after executing the “reach display”, the sub display stored in the sub display image area 235i. By reading out the image data corresponding to the area Ds, the sub display area Ds can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly to the cockpit display area Db, the sub display area Ds does not execute the “super reach” variable element or the “special reach” variable element even when the rear image of the main display area Dm is scroll-displayed. As long as it is always displayed fixedly at a fixed position (upper display area) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the sub display area Ds is a display object having a display frequency higher than that of the specific third symbol or the specific back image, like the cockpit display area Db. Therefore, the resident video RAM 235 is provided with the sub display image area 235i for the sub display area Ds, and the display control is performed based on the image data corresponding to the sub display area Ds stored in the sub display image area 235i. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly display the sub display area Ds having a higher display frequency than when directly reading from the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The character design area 235j is an initial setting of reach character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed when “reach display” occurs in the variation effect. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to (default setting). That is, data relating to the “white” which is the normal display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the character pattern “weak pattern” are stored in the character design area 235j. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when any one of the “reach display” is executed, each character display Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the “reach display” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured.

  Here, the display mode of each character display Se1, Se2 is determined by the various counters 223e or the like at the start of the variation effect, and based on the determination, each character display is quickly displayed in the variation effect. It is required to display Se1 and Se2.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to the initial settings (default settings) of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is resident in the character design area 235j in advance. Therefore, the display control device 114, based on the received display variation pattern command and display stop type command, images corresponding to the character displays Se1 to Se4 that are resident in advance in the character design area 235j of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the data, the character display Se1 to Se4 can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Thereby, since it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to each character display Se1 to Se4 from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design area 235j is used. By reading the image data corresponding to the stored character displays Se1 to Se4, the character displays Se1 to Se4 can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, the initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1-Se4 is a display mode with the highest appearance frequency. Therefore, the processing load of the display control regarding each character display Se1-Se4 can be reduced by storing each character display Se1-Se4 with high appearance frequency in the character design area 235j.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is constituted by a one-port DRAM. In the normal video RAM 236, when the image controller 237 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image read out from the character ROM 234 in advance is displayed. This is for temporarily storing image data. The normal video RAM 236 is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data, and has at least a data table storage area 232a.

  The data table storage area 232a describes the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). The display to be displayed with the passage of time for the display data table 232a1 and the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113) The transfer data information and transfer timing of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the additional data table 232a2 describing the contents and the display data table 232a1 are defined. This is an area in which the transfer data table 232a3 is stored.

  The display data table 232a1 is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). The display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect, the demonstration effect, the final display effect, and the restart effect is prepared.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The fixed display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is fixedly displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. This is an effect displayed at 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a lost symbol, an effect of emphasizing “lost display” is performed, and the stop symbol is any one of “15R probability variable big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “2R probability big hit” The effect that emphasizes each “big hit display” is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  In addition, the restart effect is a confirmation command (confirmation for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When the command is not received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image obtained by vibrating the third symbol. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 232a stores one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demonstration effect, the confirmed display effect, and the restart effect. In addition, if the variation display data table 232a1 that is the display data table 232a1 for variation effect has 32 variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Further, in the variation display data table 232a1, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed when the variation effect is stopped, for example, When the variation effect pattern is a winning variation effect pattern, it is clearly different from the normal variation effect that is used when a stoppage design for loss is instructed by the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). A display data table 232a1 for default change which is a change effect is also prepared. The default variation is to display the third symbol at a high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the sound lamp control device 113, and to receive the confirmation command. The special stop symbols (for example, symbols displayed as “9”, “8”, and “7” in order from the left column) are determined as the stop symbols.

  When the variation effect pattern instructed from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 performs the operation in the main control device 110. There is a possibility that the variation effect and the final display effect cannot be performed by correctly reflecting the result of the lottery.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a default variation effect is performed, and a special stop symbol indicating a special loss is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the variation effect. Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the 3rd symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a big hit definite display effect.

  Even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state. Can continue playing with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is lost, it can be suggested to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state. Although the confirmation display is lost, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Here, the details of the display data table 232a1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change 232a1 in the display data table 232a1. The display data table 232a1 is displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for a power frame is precisely defined.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the display data table for change 232a1, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, one cockpit image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,... .), Character patterns (such as characters (character 1, character 2,...) Used for various effects such as boy images and characters, character display Se1 when a reach occurs, etc. Drawing information for each sprite such as character design 1, character design 2,...) Is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects, characters, and character designs are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, each character display Se1 to Se4 that appears in the “reach display” is displayed as “white” as the display mode of the initial setting (default setting). The character pattern of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character pattern Se2 during the reach are displayed as “weak pattern”. Therefore, even if it is a case where the lottery process regarding the chance up pattern of each character display Se1-Se4 is not performed appropriately, each character display Se1-Se4 can be displayed by the display mode of an initial setting. Therefore, each character display Se1 to Se4 can be displayed even when an error or the like occurs regarding the lottery process of each character display Se1 to Se4. Also, the initial display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is displayed in the “white” display color and the “weak pattern” character pattern having the lowest advantageous suggestion level, thereby producing a fluctuating effect of loss. Even so, the jackpot expectation can be configured not to increase excessively. For this reason, even if the lottery process of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not properly performed due to the occurrence of an error or the like, it is configured so as not to display a display that will despise the player's expectation. This makes it possible to provide a comfortable game without causing distrust.

  Note that the character display Se1 to Se4 may not be displayed as an initial display mode of the character displays Se1 to Se4. When the lottery process of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not properly performed due to an error or the like, by not displaying each character display Se1 to Se4, the player's expectation for the jackpot is not excessively given and the player is distrusted. A comfortable game can be provided without feeling.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, the display data table for change 232a1 defines only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table 232a1 will be described, but instead of this, which of the back surface type and the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type is selected. You may make it prescribe | regulate the positional information which shows whether a range should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing based on the display data table 232a1 (or display on the third symbol display device 81). In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display data table 232a1. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the rear surface type, and image drawing based on the display data table 232a1 (or the third symbol display device). 81) may be displayed, and may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display. The back surface type and the position information together with the type information of the position information (for example, a range corresponding to the initial position) Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  The display position of the cockpit image is fixed at the lower center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. Therefore, in the variation display data table 232a1, only the cockpit type, which is information for specifying the type of the cockpit image, is defined as in the case of the back image. This cockpit type specifies whether to continuously display the cockpit display area Db in the variation effect, or to erase the cockpit display area Db during execution of the “super reach” variation element or the “special reach” variation element. Information is described.

  The MPU 231 specifies the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db as a drawing target when the cockpit display area Db is specified to be displayed by the cockpit type. On the other hand, when it is specified that the cockpit display area Db is not displayed (erased) by the cockpit type, it is specified that the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db is not to be drawn.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  In “0000H”, which is the start address of the display data table for variation 232a1, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described, and the final address of the display data table for variation 232a1 (in the example of FIG. 29, “02F0H”). ) Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described is associated with the effect to be specified in the display data table 232a1 for variation. Drawing contents are described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table 232a1 to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, reads out the data from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the data in the work RAM 233 described later. The pointer is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and a pointer 233e described later is initialized to “0”. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 233e. In the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e, An image content to be drawn is specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, so that the image as defined by the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b.

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the display data table 232a1 is prepared for each effect as described above, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the display data table 232a1 is set. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that, in the pachinko machine 10, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It is.

  On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted. The display data table 232a1 corresponding to each effect cannot be provided. In this way, the display data table 232a1 is prepared corresponding to each effect, the display data table buffer 233b corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set display data table 232a1. Can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It is.

  Next, the details of the additional data table 232a2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 is a display to be displayed as time passes with respect to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). The contents are described. Here, “add to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). Displays an image that is not displayed, displays another effect on the one effect, changes part or all of the color of the one effect, or changes the image displayed in the one effect It includes the concept of doing.

  In other words, the additional data table 232a2 adds an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 selected based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). Drawing content necessary to display the image, drawing content necessary to change part or all of the color tone of the one production, and an image displayed as an initial setting (default setting) in one production The drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying are predetermined.

  In this embodiment, the “reach” of the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table 232a1 selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). A case will be described in which display content for displaying a change pattern to be additionally displayed with respect to “display” is defined by the additional data table 232a2.

  That is, the additional data table 232a2 is prepared corresponding to the change patterns such as the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color re-change contents of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the “reach display” of the variation effect, for example. Specifically, a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to the change patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are stored in the data table storage area 232a.

  In the additional data table 232a2, the contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are precisely specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table 232a1. . In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  For example, in the example of the additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 30, one character (character 1) and one character design (character design 1) are associated with the address “01F4H” defined in the display data table 232a1. Each sprite type (character type, character type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2 indicates that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address. Meaning Null data is defined (the address “0001H” in FIG. 30 is applicable).

  Note that “0000H”, which is the top address of the additional data table 232a2, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table 232a1, and is the last address of the additional data table 232a2 (in FIG. 30). In the example, “02EFH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address “02EFH” in which the “End” information is described is made to correspond to the effect to be specified in the additional data table 232a2. The drawn contents are described.

  Further, the additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 30 exemplifies a change corresponding to the change pattern of the change effect that is the change pattern of “normal reach only”, and the change effect of “normal reach only” (for example, “ E201H ”(see FIG. 20A)), that is, it is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Specifically, “01F4H” is set as an address corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, which is the start time of the fluctuation element of “Normal reach”, and the central small area Ds2 is set at the start of the fluctuation element of “Normal reach”. The display pattern of the displayed character design (for example, change in the color of the hair, etc.) and the change pattern (for example, the display color of “red”, etc.) from the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence emitted from the character design It is configured to be set.

  When the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp controller 113, the additional data table corresponding to the change pattern of the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c of the work RAM 233 described later. Each time the pointer 233e is updated, the pointer 233e indicates from one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and one or more additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The drawing content specified by the address is specified, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. If the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the drawing list is created only from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233e is “0001H”, it is determined that there is no display object to be added because Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table 232a2. Then, a drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in the address “0001H” of the display data table 232a1. On the other hand, when the pointer 233e becomes “01F4H”, the MPU 231 adds the character 1 specified in the address “01F4H” of the additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified in the address “01F4H” of the display data table 232a1. A drawing list is created by adding each sprite of character design 1, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

  Then, by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233e, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table 232a1, and the drawing contents specified by the additional data table 232a2 are added. Therefore, the display data table 232a1 and the additional data are added. An image as defined by the table 232a2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113. When another effect image (for example, a “strong pattern” image of the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence of reach) is displayed in addition to (for example, a variation effect image), it corresponds to the other effect image to be displayed additionally. By setting the additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

  Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are five types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × 5 = 160 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in the pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is separately provided as an additional data table 232a2. By defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display data tables 232a1 and additional data tables 232a2 may be prepared, and an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed. Therefore, the data tables 232a1 and 232a2 corresponding to various kinds of effects can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 232a, and the effects image can be further diversified easily.

  Further, like the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as the additional data table 232a2, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Even if it is a case where display of other effect images to be added and displayed later is determined, additional data corresponding to other effect images is not changed without changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. By simply setting the table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  Furthermore, since the additional data table 232a2 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c are set. From the additional data table 232a2, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e can be easily specified while updating the pointer 233e every time, and 1 corresponding to one frame can be specified from these. One drawing list can be easily generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effects display from the few data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

  In particular, each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed at the time of “reach display” is a character pattern of “weak pattern” or “strong pattern”, a display color of “white”, “red” or “gold”, The change timing of “reach” or the like is determined by lottery, and the display patterns of the display forms of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are various. Therefore, by defining the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 with the additional data table 232a2, it is possible to easily produce a wide variety of character displays from the few data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

  Next, details of the transfer data table 232a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data table 232a3 is prepared corresponding to the display data table 232a1 prepared for each effect. That is, in the transfer data table 232a3, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table 232a1 is stored in the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. Transfer data information to be transferred to the image storage area 236a and transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table 232a1 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is not prepared. . Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table 232a3 corresponds to an address defined in the display data table 232a1, and transfers sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Data information is described (addresses “0001H” and “01F4H” in FIG. 31 are applicable). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. In the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the transfer data table 232a3 transfers the transfer to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data indicating that the target image data does not exist is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 31).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table 232a3, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table 232a1, and the final address of the transfer data table 232a3 (in FIG. 31). In the example, “02EFH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address “02EFH” in which “End” information is described, transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table 232a3 The transfer data information of is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 113, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 exists. Reads the transfer data table 232a3 from the data table storage area 232a and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 described later.

  Then, every time the pointer 233e is updated, the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c are used to draw the image specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e. The content is specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 32) to be described later is created, and the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is transferred from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Transfer data information is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233e becomes “0001H” or “01F4H”, the MPU 231 uses the display data table 232a1 and the additional data for the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table 232a3. In addition to the drawing list created based on the table 232a2, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233e is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table 232a3. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawn list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. A process of transferring to a predetermined sub-area of 236a is executed.

  Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. In the transfer data table 232a3, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1. In addition, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table 232a1 using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display is read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to display the corresponding effect on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the display data table 232a1. Further, by describing the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and surely transfer only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, since the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table 232a1 is reliably transmitted from the character ROM 234 at a desired timing. The image can be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table 232a3 defines the transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table 232a3 has a data structure similar to that of the display data table 232a1, and corresponds to an address defined in the display data table 232a1, and is a transfer target image to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. Data transfer data information is defined. Therefore, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the image data is surely stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In addition, the transfer start timing can be instructed. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 includes a simple image display flag 233a, a display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table buffer 233c, a transfer data table buffer 233d, a pointer 233e, a drawing list area 233f, a time counter 233g, a stored image discrimination flag 233h, and a drawing target. It has at least a buffer flag 233i, a character pattern memory 233j, a red character flag 233k, a gold character flag 233m, an occurrence character color change flag 233n, a reaching character color change flag 233o, and a late limit flag 233p.

  The simple image display flag 233a displays the power-on images (the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283) shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag indicating whether or not. This simple image display flag 233a is used to display the power-on main image 282 on the third symbol display device 81 during the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 after the power is turned on. When the power-on main image 282 is instructed to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is turned on (see S2004 in FIG. 48). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61B) of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A), the third symbol is displayed. In order to display an image other than the power-on image on the display device 81, the display device 81 is set to off (see S2415 in FIG. 61B).

  The simple image display flag 233a is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2021 in FIG. 49B). When the image display flag 233a is on, a simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 49B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 49B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 49 (b) S2029) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233a is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 56) and display are performed so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Setting processing (see FIGS. 57 to 60) is executed.

  The simple image display flag 233a is referred to in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A) executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). In this transfer setting process, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so the resident target image data is stored in the character ROM 234 for resident use. When the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61B) to be transferred to the video RAM 235 is executed and the simple image display flag 233a is off, the image data necessary for the drawing process is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process (refer to FIG. 62) for transferring to is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233b is a buffer for storing one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113, selects the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 232a, The selected display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments a pointer 233e, which will be described later, one by one in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

  The additional data table buffer 233c is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer for storing one or a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to effects to be displayed (change patterns such as display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4). As the MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 once writes null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233c. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 causes the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b to display in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. The presence or absence of production is judged. Each time an effect to be displayed is generated, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a, and the selected additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. To do.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds a pointer 233e to be described later one by one, and in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e and the additional data table buffer In the additional data table 232a2 stored in 233c, a drawing list (described later) that describes image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e. 32).

  As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1. When the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be capable of storing a plurality (for example, 32) of additional data tables 232a2. For this reason, whenever an effect to be added is added, an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the effect is determined, and the additional data table 232a2 is added to the additional data table buffer 233c and stored, so that the display data table 232a1 is supported. A plurality of effects corresponding to the plurality of additional data tables 232a2 can be added to the effect and displayed.

  The transfer data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in accordance with a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. The MPU 231 selects the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a in accordance with storing the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, and selects the selected transfer data. The table 232a3 is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

  If all the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 is prepared. It has not been. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments a pointer 233e, which will be described later, one by one, and in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233e Is defined (that is, if Null data is not described), the drawing list (see FIG. 32) described below describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. Add transfer data information.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. A process of transferring to a predetermined sub-area is executed. Here, as described above, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. In the transfer data table 232a3, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance without delay from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. it can. Therefore, it is possible to display the corresponding effect on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the display data table 232a1. Further, by describing the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and surely transfer only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233e is used to display the corresponding drawing contents or the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2, and the transfer data table 232a3 from the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively. This is for designating an address from which transfer data information of transfer target image data is to be acquired.

  The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233e to “0” as the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b. Then, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame. In the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the pointer update process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233e is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 updates the pointer 233e from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c each time the pointer 233e is updated. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents specified by the address shown, and the transfer should be started at that time from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d Transfer data information relating to image data of a predetermined sprite is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  As a result, when the presentation corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The effect corresponding to the stored additional data table 232a2 can be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b or the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Can do. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d is stored, the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table 232a1 based on the transfer data table 232a3. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display is read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to display the corresponding effect on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the display data table 232a1. Further, by describing the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and surely transfer only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233f includes a display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and a transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d. This is an area for storing a drawing list that is generated based on the image controller 237 for drawing an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 32, a back image used in an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), An effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), A character (character 1, character 1). For each sprite such as character 2,..., Cockpit image, execution symbol, reserved symbol (holding symbol 1, reserved symbol 2,...), Character symbol (character symbol 1,...), Error symbol, The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes information indicating the ROM type (or information indicating the RAM type) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored and its address. ing. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the ROM type (or RAM type) and address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

  The image controller 237 subjects the standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the character ROM 234 (or various video RAMs 235 and 236) to an enlargement / reduction process according to the enlargement ratio, and according to the rotation angle. Rotation processing is performed, semi-transparency processing is performed according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and the filter specification information is processed. The image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn after performing the filtering process by the method specified by the information. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i described later.

  In the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the MPU 231 draws the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e and other drawing data. Detailed drawing information for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the content of the image to be executed (for example, a holding image displaying an execution symbol or a holding symbol, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.) (Detailed information) is generated, and a drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2, and other It is generated according to the sprite type specified from the content of the image. That is, for each sprite, the character ROM 234 (or the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) for storing the image data of the sprite is fixed, so that the MPU 231 displays the image data of the sprite according to the sprite type. The storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address in which are stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 adds the display data table 232a1 and other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Those pieces of information defined in the data table 232a2 are copied as they are. In the present embodiment, no other information is set in the back image and the cockpit image.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Character (character 1, character 2,...), Cockpit image, execution symbol, reserved symbol (reserved symbol 1, reserved symbol 2,...), Character symbol (character symbol 1, character symbol 2...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of error symbols.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffers 236b and 236c by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (the transfer target image data is stored) when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233e. The storage source head address and storage source last address in the character ROM 234, and the storage area start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list.

  Then, if the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237, based on the transfer data information, a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (area indicated by the storage source start address and storage source end address). Then, the image data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The time counter 233g is a counter that counts the production time of effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time (variable effect time) of the effect displayed based on the display data table 232a1 in accordance with storing the one display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b. . This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 49B). Each time the display setting process (see FIG. 57) is executed (see FIG. 57), the time counter 233g is decremented by one (see S2309 in FIG. 57). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233g becomes “0” or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b has ended, and ends the effect. Various processes to be performed together are executed.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233h indicates whether the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image determination flag 233h is generated by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233h generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image determination flag 233h when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2438 in FIG. 62).

  If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S2439 in FIG. 62). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). This is a flag for designating. The MPU 231 specifies the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is “0”, and specifies the second frame buffer 236c when it is “1”. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233i, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 49B) is executed (see S2502 in FIG. 63).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The character pattern memory 233j stores either the “weak pattern” or the “strong pattern” in the character display Se1 or the character display Se2 when reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during “reach display”. It is a memory for storing whether to display. Based on the stored contents of the character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines whether the character pattern in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence or the character display Se2 in the reach is set to “weak pattern” or “strong pattern”. Based on the determination content, the “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” to be displayed on the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach is set.

  The character pattern memory 233j is initialized (ie, cleared to 0) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. When the display control device 114 receives a command related to the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and / or the character display Se2 at the time of reach from the sound lamp control device 113, contents corresponding to the commands are set. (See S2192 in FIG. 55).

  Specifically, for example, when a display weak pattern command is received, data indicating “weak pattern” is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when reach occurs. Further, when the display strong pattern command is received, data indicating “strong pattern” is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when the reach occurs. When the display weak / weak command is received, data indicating “weak pattern” as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and data indicating “weak pattern” as the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in the character pattern memory 233j. Is set. When the display weak / strong command is received, data indicating “weak pattern” as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and data indicating “strong pattern” as the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in the character pattern memory 233j. Is set. When a display strength command is received, data indicating “strong pattern” as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and data indicating “weak pattern” as the character display Se2 during reach are set in the character pattern memory 233j. Is done. In addition, when a display strong / strong command is received, data indicating “strong pattern” as the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and data indicating “strong pattern” as the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in the character pattern memory 233j. Is set.

  As described above, the MPU 231 receives the weak display pattern command, the strong display pattern command, the weak display pattern command, the weak display pattern command, the strong display pattern command, or the strong display command from the sound lamp control device 113. Pattern commands (hereinafter collectively referred to as display weak pattern commands, display strong pattern commands, display weak pattern commands, display weak and strong pattern commands, display strong and weak pattern commands, and display strong and weak pattern commands. When the command is received), the character pattern memory 233j is set based on the received pattern command. On the other hand, when the variation effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 displays the character together with the red character flag 233k described later in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). The pattern memory 233j is cleared to 0 (OFF) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the contents of the pattern command are set in the character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines the character pattern additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the stored contents of the character pattern memory 233j, and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 Is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see 2203 in FIG. 55). As described above, the MPU 231 is based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. To create a drawing list.

  Thereby, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, so that the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence or the character display Se2 during reach in the variation effect is defined by the display data table 232a1. The contents are changed from the original contents (for example, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is changed from “weak pattern” to “strong pattern”, and the character display display Se2 is changed from “weak pattern” to “strong pattern”). Therefore, simply by storing the additional data table for character pattern 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the character display Se1 when reaching or the character display Se2 during reach to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. be able to. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  In the first embodiment, in the character pattern memory 233j, initial setting (default setting) character patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4, that is, “weak pattern” or reach character display Se2 regarding the character display Se1 when reach occurs. Even when a “weak pattern” character pattern is set, the additional data table for character pattern 232a2 is selected based on the character pattern and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. With this configuration, it is not necessary to check whether or not the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is the initial setting, so that the process can be shared and the man-hour at the time of designing the program can be reduced. .

  Instead of the above configuration, when the content set in the character pattern memory 233j is the initial setting (default setting), the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Also good. In the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to determine whether or not the initial setting is made. On the other hand, it is not necessary to store an extra additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c. Can be reduced.

  The red character flag 233k is a flag for setting the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of “reach display” to “red”. The MPU 231 collectively sets the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to “red” based on the setting contents of the red character flag 233k.

  The red character flag 233k is first initialized (that is, turned off) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. When the MPU 231 receives a display red character command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the red character flag 233k to ON (see S2195 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, the MPU 231 displays the red character flag together with the character pattern memory 233j and the like in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) when the variation effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. 233k is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the red character flag 233k is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the red character flag 233k, and uses the character color additional data table 232a2 as the additional data table buffer. It is set (stored) in 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 is based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character color additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. To create a drawing list.

  If both the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color A drawing list is created based on the additional data table 232a2.

  Thus, by setting the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k, the display data table 232a1 is displayed regardless of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the variation effect. The original content (“white”) defined by is changed to “red” and displayed. Therefore, the character color additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the red character flag 233k, and the character color additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display colors of the displayed character displays Se1 to Se4 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  The gold character flag 233m is a flag for setting the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of “reach display” to “golden”. The MPU 231 collectively sets the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 to “golden” based on the setting contents of the gold character flag 233m.

  First, the gold character flag 233m is initialized (that is, turned off) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. When the MPU 231 receives the display gold character command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the gold character flag 233m to on (see S2196 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, the MPU 231 displays the gold character flag together with the character pattern memory 233j and the like in the display setting process (see FIG. 57) when the variation effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. 233m is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the gold character flag 233m is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON of the gold character flag 233m, and uses the character color additional data table 232a2 as the additional data table buffer. It is set (stored) in 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 is based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character color additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. To create a drawing list.

  Thereby, by setting the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the gold character flag 233m, the display data table 232a1 is displayed regardless of the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the variation effect. The original content (“white”) defined by is changed to “golden” and displayed. Therefore, the character color additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the gold character flag 233m, and the character color additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display colors of the displayed character displays Se1 to Se4 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  The occurrence character color change flag 233n is displayed at the time of the start of the “reaching occurrence”, that is, the “normal reach” variable element when the character display display color change lottery for each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected. This is a flag for setting to change the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence at the timing of displaying the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 sets the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence to a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the change in display color of the character display based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence.

  This occurrence character color change flag 233n is initialized (that is, turned off) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. When the MPU 231 receives the display change command for occurrence from the sound lamp controller 113, the MPU 231 sets the occurrence character color change flag 233n to ON (see S2200 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variation effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 displays the character at the time of occurrence together with the character pattern memory 233j in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). The color change flag 233n is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the occurrence character color change flag 233n being turned ON, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). By setting (storing) the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the occurrence of the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence, the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence at the display timing of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence Is changed. As described above, the MPU 231 draws based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character timing additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

  Note that the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n being turned on, and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are both set in the additional data table buffer 233c ( Is stored), a drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2.

  Accordingly, the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the occurrence character color change flag 233n is set, so that the display color of the reach occurrence character display Se1 is changed at the timing when the reach occurrence character display Se1 is displayed. The original content (“white”) defined by the display data table 232a1 is changed to the display color set in the character timing additional data table 232a2 indicating the lottery result (“red” or “gold”) of the change lottery. Displayed. Therefore, the character design change data 232n2 is generated based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence, and the additional character table additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence can be easily changed at the timing when the character display Se1 at the time of the occurrence of reach is displayed on the device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of display can be performed.

  When the character color change flag 233o in the reach is selected for the character display display color change lottery for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 described above, the “reaching”, that is, the variable element of “super reach” or “special reach” Is a flag for setting to change the display color of the in-reach character display Se2 at the timing of displaying the in-reach character display Se2 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable element. . The MPU 231 sets the display color of the character display Se2 during reach based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233o during reach to the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the character display display color change lottery.

  This reach character color change flag 233o is initialized (that is, turned off) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. When the MPU 231 receives the display reach change command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the reach character color change flag 233o to ON (see S2201 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when the variation effect is finished, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 displays the character in the reach together with the character pattern memory 233j and the like in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). The color change flag 233o is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the reach character color change flag 233o is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON reach character color change flag 233o, and the character timing additional data table. 232a2 is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). By setting (storing) the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the on-reach character color change flag 233o being turned on, the display color of the reach character display Se2 changes at the display timing of the reach character display Se2. Is done. As described above, the MPU 231 draws based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character timing additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

  The character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the ON character color change flag 233o being turned on, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are both set in the additional data table buffer 233c ( Is stored), a drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2.

  Accordingly, the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the character color change flag 233o in the reach is set, and the display color of the character character display Se2 in the reach is displayed at the timing when the character character display Se2 in the reach is displayed. The original content (“white”) defined by the data table 232a1 is changed to the display color set in the character timing additional data table 232a2 indicating the lottery result (“red” or “gold”) of the change lottery. Is displayed. Therefore, the character design change data 232n2 is generated based on the setting contents of the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence, and the additional character table additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence can be easily changed at the timing when the character display Se1 at the time of the occurrence of reach is displayed on the device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of display can be performed.

  The late limit flag 233p sets the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to “white” which is a normal display color after “reach display” at the time of the loss is performed. It is a flag for forcibly setting. At this time, the MPU 231 wins the character display display color change lottery based on the setting content of the post-limit flag 233p, and the display color of the character display Se1 or the character display Se2 during reach occurrence is changed to the chance up pattern. Even when the change effect is a display result of losing, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal display color.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a chance-up pattern (“red” or “gold”) appears in any of the character displays Se1, Se2, in principle, the subsequent character displays Se2, Se3 (and pseudo-standard) The phrase character display Se4) is configured to be able to execute a display that succeeds the chance-up pattern.

  This is a configuration in which a chance display pattern is drawn at each appearance location in the case where the character display appears at a plurality of locations of the variation effect as in the first embodiment. This is because lottery processing for the places is required, the control becomes complicated, and the processing load increases. In addition, after the character display of the chance up pattern appears at the appearing place that is executed first in the variation effect, the character display of the normal pattern that is not the chance up pattern appears at the place that is executed later. As a result, the player who was feeling up by the emergence of a chance-up pattern will be witnessed. This is because there is a risk of being awakened.

  Therefore, the chance-up pattern lottery is performed at once for the variable effect character display, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, the chance-up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform the lottery process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the chance up pattern is set, the chance up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display, thereby eliminating the phenomenon that the expression of falling down in the character display occurs, so that the player can enter the game. It can prevent being awakened. Further, by setting the chance-up pattern collectively in the character display of the variation effect, the lottery process is performed for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the additional data table 232a2 is created for each lottery result (each character display). Since the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be set can be reduced compared to the case of setting, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the chance display patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are collectively set, for example, after the effect of “reach display” ends and the “lost display” appears in the variation effect of loss, the fixed phrase character display Se3 May be displayed in a chance-up pattern (for example, “red”).

  In such a case, the player cannot execute the “change display” as it is because the fixed phrase display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern. Thus, it is predicted that “lost display” will change to “big hit display”. However, contrary to the prediction, the variation effect is determined as “losing display”, so that the player makes the pachinko machine 10 distrustful due to the flaw of the effect contents, and the pachinko machine 10 is There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, even when each of the character displays Se1 and Se2 is won by the chance up pattern, when the variation effect is confirmed by “lost display”, the late limit flag 233p is turned on. It is configured so that the chance-up pattern does not appear in the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “reach display” is completed. That is, in the variation display of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected to “white” which is a normal pattern according to the setting content of the special restriction flag 233p and displayed To do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  At this time, the post-limit flag 233p is first initialized (that is, turned off) by an initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives a display standard phrase normal command for displaying the standard phrase character display Se <b> 3 in “white” from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 sets the post restriction flag 233 p to ON at this time (FIG. 55, S2198). On the other hand, when the variation effect ends, that is, when the display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 performs the post-restriction together with the character pattern memory 233j and the like in the display setting process (see FIG. 57). The flag 233p is turned off (cleared to 0) (see S2312 in FIG. 57).

  When the post-limit flag 233p is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the post-limit flag 233p being ON, and uses the character correction additional data table 232a2 as the additional data. It is set (stored) in the table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). At this time, the character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the post-limit flag 233p being turned on is set (stored), so that the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is “red” by the character color additional data table 232a2. Even if it is set to change to “golden”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white”. As described above, the MPU 231 performs drawing based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character correction additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list.

  The character correction additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 are all set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. If there is a character list, the drawing list is created based on the character timing additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, and the character color additional data table 232a2, but the character correction additional data table 232a2 Since it is configured as an additional data table 232a2 having a higher priority than the color additional data table 232a2 (stored last), the character color additional data table 232a2 is set, and each character display Se1 to Se4 is set. Even when the display color is set to be changed (display color other than “white”), the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is changed by setting (storing) the additional data table 232a2 for character correction. It is configured to be displayed in “white”.

  Thereby, the additional data table for character correction 232a2 based on the above-mentioned post-restriction flag 233p is set, so that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “representation” of “reach display” is executed However, even if it is a chance-up pattern set by the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the fact that the character display display color change lottery is won, the normal display is performed by the character correction additional data table 232a2. It is displayed in the color “white”. Therefore, the character display additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the late limit flag 233p, and the character display additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Alternatively, even when the reach character display Se2 is changed to the chance-up pattern and displayed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 can be changed to “white” which is the normal display color. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 39. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 38) activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 39) executed after the startup process, and a regular (first implementation). In the embodiment, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) activated at a cycle of 4 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 37) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 34) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 35) or the fluctuation start process (FIG. 36) which is one of the fluctuation processes are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big win state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. Variable display is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to “0” when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value random number The updated value of the counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values. (In the first embodiment, when “899”, “99”, “99”, “198”, “250” are reached, each is cleared to “0”.) Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, processing for performing dynamic display by the first symbol display device 37 and variation processing for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first input is performed. A start winning process associated with winning a prize at the ball opening 64 is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S110) is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64, and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. Execute (hold) processing. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of balls to be held to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In this start winning process (S110), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entrance (winning) to the first entrance 64 read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 33), A ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes.

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the holding of the variable effect held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N of balls is less than the upper limit (4 in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operation reservation balls is not N <4 (S202: No) Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is set. 1 is added (S203). Then, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved first to fourth areas, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the retained ball number counter 203a 203b3 and variation type counter storage area 203b4 are held (stored) (S204).

  Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the hold first area. Further, if the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “2”, each storage area of the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “3”, the retained third area If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “4” in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in each storage area of the retained fourth area.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) after the addition in the process of S203, the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S204, A command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 for transmitting the reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113. The buffer is set (S205). Thereby, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball number command in the process of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer by the process of S204, or the reserved ball storage area in the process of S204. You may use what read the value stored (suspended) in 203b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the fluctuation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). This variation process (S109) controls dynamic display performed on the first symbol display device 37 and variation effects performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display. If not (S302: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, after the dynamic display is stopped, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Thereby, since the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. it can.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the dynamic display (change) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N) of “effect” is larger than “0” (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not “0” (S304: Yes), it is determined that the execution timing of the changing effect is reached. First, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a 1 is subtracted from (the number N of reserved balls) (S305). This is because the number of reserved balls decreases by one because the execution of one variation effect among the variation effects that have been suspended is started by the variation start process (S307).

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted, such as area 203c, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area.

  After the data shift process of S306, the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is “0” (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is performing a demonstration effect. Is determined, that is, whether or not a demo is being performed (S308). In this determination processing, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is greater than “0”. The period up to is determined as being demo.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S309: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the demonstration command, it transmits the display demonstration command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs the demonstration to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demonstration command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress in the process of S308 (S308: No), a process of determining whether a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the change is stopped. When the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the change and stopping, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demo command. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the change stop, the stop effect of the stop change effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S310). The display time during dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time is determined. If it has not passed (S310: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S311), and it returns to a timer interruption process (refer FIG. 33).

  In the first embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display is started, the red Turn off the LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode is set in which the LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  Although the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches “100”. The LED lighting color is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. Note that the counter value is reset to “0” when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a change start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if the big hit, the first hit type counter C2 Depending on the value of, the symbol that will be “15R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol that will be “2R probability variation jackpot”, or the symbol that will be “15R normal jackpot” is determined.

  In the first embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the “15R probable big hit” comes after the big hit, and the red LED is turned on when the “2R probable big hit” becomes “15R normal big hit”. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is lost, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next dynamic display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 33). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to receive the display confirmation command to stop the changing effect in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stop symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the fluctuation start process (S307) which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). This variation start process (S307) performs a lottery or a lottery lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. The dynamic display and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic effect performed in 81 are determined.

  In the fluctuation start process (S307), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A jackpot lottery (win / no-go decision) process for discrimination is performed (S401).

  Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”) in the jackpot random number table 202a, “7,307” , 582 ”is defined as the jackpot random number value. If the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability variation state”), “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are defined as jackpot random numbers.

  In the process of S401, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. It is determined that it is a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the game is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8B) Display mode is set based on (see S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, that is, after the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, is determined by the jackpot type table 202b. "15R Probable Big Bonus" that shifts to "State", "15R Normal Jackpot" that shifts to "Time Reduction State" after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, "2R probability variation big hit" is determined. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot types (“15R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “15R normal jackpot”) are set as stop types as they are. By setting, the display mode at the time of big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time Then, the variation time of the variation effect is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used (see FIG. 11A or 11B) is selected according to the type of stoppage of the jackpot.

  Then, when “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3). An effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the “normal reach” effect mode, the “super reach” effect mode, or the “special reach” effect mode is selected (see FIG. 11A).

  When the “normal reach” production mode is set as the production mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E5: normal reach” group of the variation pattern table 202e1 for jackpot (see FIG. 12) The variation pattern associated with the value of is selected. That is, in this case, "normal reach only", "pseudo gas + normal reach", "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo gas + normal reach + re-variation" or "pseudo ream + normal reach + re-variation" Is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

  When the “super reach” production mode is set as the production mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E6: super reach” group of the variation pattern table 202e1 for jackpot (see FIG. 12) A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "super reach only", "pseudo gas + super reach", "pseudo ream 1 + super reach", "pseudo ream + super reach", "super reach + re-variation", "pseudo gas + super reach +" The variation pattern of “revariation”, “pseudo sequence 1 + super reach + revariation” or “pseudo sequence 2 + super reach + revariation” is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

  When the “special reach” effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E7: special reach” group in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 12). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, “special reach only”, “pseudo gas + special reach”, “pseudo ream 1 + special reach”, “pseudo ream + special reach”, “special reach + re-variation”, “pseudo gas + special reach +” Any variation pattern of “revariation”, “pseudo train 1 + special reach + revariation” or “pseudo train 2 + special reach + revariation” is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

  Further, when “2R probability variation jackpot” is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4) is selected. An effect mode associated with the value is selected. That is, when “2R probability variation big hit” is won, “special variation” is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected effect mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. In the first embodiment, in this case, only “movie” is selected (see FIG. 12). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the holding ball number counter 203a are set. As an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the game and the current game state, a “non-reach (shortened)” effect mode, a “non-reach (normal)” effect mode, and a “normal reach” effect mode , “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability variation state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal gaming state”, The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the mode is different.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the lost symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “normal gaming state”, the A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of balls held at that time indicated by the number of held balls counter 203a ( Either FIG. 10A or FIG. 10B is selected. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “time shortening state” or “probability variation state”, the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of held balls at that time indicated by the held ball number counter 203a. Alternatively, one of the B tables 202d2 (see FIG. 10A or FIG. 10B) is selected.

  When the “non-reach (shortening)” effect mode is set in the process of S404, the “E0: non-reach (shortening)” group of the variation pattern table for loss 202e2 is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, “only non-reach (shortening)” is selected, and other variation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

  Further, when the “non-reach (normal)” effect mode is set in the process of S404, the “E1: non-reach (normal)” group in the loss variation pattern table 202e2 is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, “non-reach (normal) only”, “pseudo gas + non-reach (normal)” or “pseudo ream 1 + non-reach (normal)” is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

  Further, when the “normal reach” effect mode is set in the process of S402, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E2: normal reach” group of the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss. The variation pattern associated with is selected. That is, in this case, “normal reach only”, “pseudo gas + normal reach” or “pseudo ream 1 + normal reach” is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

  When the “super reach” effect mode is set in the process of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E3: super reach” group of the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss is stored. The variation pattern associated with the value of is selected. That is, in this case, “super reach only”, “pseudo gas + super reach”, “pseudo train 1 + super reach” or “pseudo train 2 + super reach” is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

  When the “special reach” effect mode is set in the process of S402, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “E4: special reach” group of the variation pattern table 202e2 for loss is stored. The variation pattern associated with the value of is selected. That is, in this case, “special reach only”, “pseudo gas + special reach”, “pseudo sequence 1 + special reach”, or “pseudo sequence 2 + special reach” is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern defined in advance and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

  In this way, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared and the development man-hours during development can be reduced.

  In the process of S406, based on the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, the change for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change time corresponding to the change pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S406). Specifically, for example, when a big win lottery is won and a variation pattern of 30 seconds “super reach only” is selected, “E601H” is set as the variation pattern command. In addition, if the 30-second variation pattern of “super reach only” has been selected after losing the big hit lottery, “E301H” is set as the variation pattern command. As described above, even if the variation effect is the same variation time, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the effect of the variation effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 includes the effect state including the success / failure. It is possible to grasp the contents and the variation time, and to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect based on the information.

  In addition, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S407), and the process goes to the variation process (see FIG. 35). Return. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “7” symbol, etc.) is not specified, A stop type command indicating “15R probability variation big hit” is set. If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “15R normal jackpot”, the specific 3rd symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol, etc.) is not specified and “15R normal jackpot” is specified. Set the stop type command to indicate that

  On the other hand, if the win is not won and the “super reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787” etc.) of the third design is not specified, and “ A stop type command indicating a “super reach” effect mode (so-called front / rear loss) is set. Also, if the winning feature is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, the specific 3rd symbol stop mode (eg, “737”) is not specified and the “normal reach” at the time of losing is specified. "A stop type command is set to indicate a production mode (a so-called loss other than before and after). In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” performance mode is selected, a specific stop mode (eg, “258”) of the third design is not specified, and “ A stop type command indicating a non-reach ”production mode (so-called complete loss) is set.

  In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on whether or not the change effect is correct in the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the correctness and determines them. Based on the information, it is possible to determine the stop result of the fluctuating effect for details.

  These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S611.

  Note that the RAM determination value is a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, for example, as will be described in S706 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S612, S613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S612), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, an interrupt is permitted (S610). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 39) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed roughly.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “250” in the first embodiment) , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is performed by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 33) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

  Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 33 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. If there is a passage of a ball to the second winning opening 67, the second symbol display device 83 controls the display of the second symbol. Done. Moreover, in the big hit lottery executed when dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the big hit random number value to be compared with the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether the high probability state or the low probability state. The number will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the game state. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes according to the game state at that time.

  The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, so the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. . In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first per-random number counter C1 and the second per-random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

  In the processing of S701, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 37 has been executed, the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) ends. Thereby, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process (see FIG. 38) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. As a result, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the first embodiment, processing that is periodically executed is executed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing in the main processing. Although the case has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch that were executed in the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment A part or all of the reading process (S106) may be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main process is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process (refer to FIG. 40) that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process (refer to FIG. 41) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1115 (see FIG. 41) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1112 in FIG. 41), it executes a power-off process in S1115. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1115 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1115, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1115, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1115 is executed (see S1114 in FIG. 41). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1115 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1115 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1009 is that when the process from S1004 to S1006 is reached via the process of S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No). , The process proceeds to S1109 without performing the processes in S1102 to S1108. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S1102 to S1108 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variation effect processing of S1109. This is because the command determination process in step S1110 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1109 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous execution of the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in FIG. 40, the process directly proceeds to S1102.

  In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1105). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the variation effect is not executed or during the period of the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. A rear image change command for the device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuating production, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during “reach display” indicates the expectation for the jackpot It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have a feeling, or selecting the one reach production among the some reach productions with the frame button 22. FIG. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1105 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1105) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1106), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1107, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the change effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the change pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1107 is also synchronized with the time required for the changing effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. Executed in time.

  In the process of S1109, the variable effect process is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Execute. Details of this variation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the change effect process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S1111, a counter update process is executed to update the hold change counter 223c, scenario counter 223d, character pattern counter 223e, character color lottery counter 223f, and color change timing counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1111). ). Specifically, the hold change counter 223c, the scenario counter 223d, the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f, and the color change timing counter 223g are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are maximum values (in the first embodiment). When all “99”) are reached, each “0” is cleared.

  As described above, the hold change counter 223c is used to execute the “hold change notice” and select a display mode, and the scenario counter 223d is used to select the execution timing of the “hold change notice”. The counter 223e is used to select a “weak pattern” or “strong pattern” character pattern in the character display Se1 and the character display Se2 when reach occurs, and the character color lottery counter 223f displays the character display Se1 to Se4. The color change timing counter 223g is used for selecting the display color when the change timing to the selected display color is selected from the display timing of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the display timing of the character display Se2 during reach. used.

  When the processing of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1112). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1114), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1115). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1116), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1112 (S1112: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1113), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1113: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1113: Yes), the process is infinitely looped in order to stop the subsequent processes.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1110). This command determination processing (S1110) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1110), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S1201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1201: Yes), a variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1202). The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is set (S1203). Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41).

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (S1102 in FIG. 41). . As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process so that the variation effect of the variation pattern determined by the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1204). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1203: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and based on the stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the change effect is set (S1206), and the change start is started. The flag 223a is set on (S1207), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41).

  The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main process. . The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the process of S1206 is to be confirmed and displayed. To do.

  The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the variation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1206, in the variation effect processing to be executed later, the variation effect variation previously extracted based on the value of each counter C1 etc. included in the reserved ball number command It is determined whether or not the pattern matches the variation pattern of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not the variation effect stop type extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the held ball number command matches the variation effect stop type extracted from the received stop type command. Judgment is made. As a result of those determinations, in one variation effect, when the variation pattern based on the reserved ball number command does not match the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, or the stop type and stop type command based on the retained ball number command If the stop type does not match, it is determined that some abnormality (eg, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, a display error command indicating the abnormality is generated, and transmitted to the display control device 114 The process for performing is performed (refer FIG. 44).

  As a result of the processing of S1204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1208). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1208: Yes), a pending display setting process is performed (S1209), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). In the hold display setting process (S1209), control related to “hold change notice” is performed based on various information included in the received hold ball number command (for example, the value of the first random number counter C1). Details of the hold display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1208, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1208: No), it is then determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1210). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1210: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of reception of the confirmation command is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to S1212. Transition.

  The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1002 in FIG. 41). . The display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command to stop the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, the display is confirmed.

  In the processing of S1212, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is greater than “0” (S1212), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a variation effect that has been suspended and has not been executed. As a result of the determination, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is not greater than “0”, that is, if there is no variation effect in standby (S1212: No), the variation in standby with respect to the display control device 114 A non-holding command for display for notifying that there is no effect is set (S1213), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is larger than “0” (S1212: Yes), there is a variation effect during standby, so the process of S1213 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  The display no-hold command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1002 in FIG. 41) of the main process. The The display control device 114 receives the display no hold command for recognizing that there is no waiting variation effect, and displays the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. To erase.

  If it is determined in step S1210 that a confirmation command has not been received (S1210: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1212), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 41). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1212, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 41 (see S1002 in FIG. 41).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the hold display setting process (S1209) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process (S1209). In the hold display setting process (S1209), first, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball number of the suspended variation effect) is extracted. This is stored in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp controller 113 (S1301).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), so that every time there is a starting win, the processing of S1301 The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when a start winning is detected. The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received hold ball number command is extracted, and the hold information in the hold information storage area 223h Of the stored first to fourth areas (see FIG. 24), the information is stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the reserved ball number command by the processing of S1301 (S1302). That is, when the number of reserved balls is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), each value of the extracted first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 Are stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 223h1, the first per-type counter storage area 223h2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4 of the holding information storage X area.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the held ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, the value stored in the reserved X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 is stored in the hold information storage area 223h of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetch process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223h. That is, when the suspended variation effect is executed, the result of the variation effect will be determined (whether it will be a big hit, the change time, etc.) before executing the variation effect, The audio lamp control device 113 has control for determining the execution of various effects, determining whether or not to execute the “hold change notice” and the display mode, and determining the execution (start) timing of the “hold change notice”. Can be executed.

  Next, in the processing of S1303, it is determined whether or not an execution lottery of “holding change notice” has been won based on various information indicated by the currently held ball number command (S1303). As described above, the execution lottery of “holding change notice” is based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the holding information storage X area. Extraction of whether or not the variation effect indicated by the command and the effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted success / failure and the effect mode, with reference to the value of the hold change counter 223c at that time and the hold change table 222e (see FIG. 15), whether or not the “hold change notice” can be executed and displayed. Determine aspects.

  If the execution lottery of “holding change notice” is won as a result of the processing of S1303 (S1303: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, “blue” or the like) that is the execution lottery result of “holding change notice” The change information is stored in the hold change information storage area 223h5 of the hold information storage X area (S1304). Thereby, it can be memorize | stored for every hold information storage X area whether "hold change notice" is performed.

  Next, in the process of S1304, in order to determine the execution timing of the “pending change notice”, that is, the display timing when the “pending change notice” is reflected in the execution symbol or the holding symbol, the value of the scenario counter 223d at that time And the scenario table 222f, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” is determined, and the scenario data indicating the determined execution timing is stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the hold information storage X area ( S1305). As a result, the execution timing of the “hold change notice” can be stored for each hold information storage X area.

  Next, in the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the variation effect indicated by the currently received number-of-holding-balls command includes a variation factor of “super reach or more” (S1306). As described above, in the variation element of “super reach”, the variation element of “special reach” or the variation element of “special variation”, the execution of the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variation element The symbol and the reserved symbol are deleted. Therefore, a variation effect including a variable element of “super-reach or higher” can be executed even if “after hold cancellation” is included as the execution timing of “hold change notice”. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the holding information storage X area, whether or not the fluctuation effect includes a variable element of “super reach or more”. Is determined.

  As a result of the processing of S1306, if it is a variation effect including a variation element of “super reach or more” (S1306: Yes), the hold erase indicating that the execution symbol and the hold symbol of the cockpit display area Db are erased by the variation effect The information is stored in the hold erasure information storage area 223h7 of the hold information storage X area (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1306, if it is a variation effect that does not include a variation element of “super reach or more” (S1306: No), the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are not erased by the variation effect. Data indicating that no information is stored (blank) (hereinafter referred to as “Null data”) is stored in the pending deletion information storage area 223h7 of the information X area (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1310. Transition. In the processing of S1308, by writing Null data in the pending erasure information storage area 223h7, for example, it is possible to prevent redundant use of the pending erasure information related to the “pending change notice” stored in the pending information storage X area before writing. be able to.

  In the process of S1303, if the “pending change notice” execution lottery is not won (S1303: No), the “pending change notice” is not executed. Null data is stored in the hold change information storage area 223h5, scenario data storage area 223h6, and hold deletion information storage area 223h7 of the information storage X area (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310. In the processing of S1309, by writing null data in each of the storage areas 223h5 to 223h7, for example, it is possible to prevent redundant use of information related to the “hold change notice” stored in the hold information storage X area before writing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a habit of production (for example, “pending change notice” is “rainbow color” in spite of a “lost display”) variation production.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the variation element indicated by the currently-reserved ball number command received this time includes a variation element of “revariation” (S1310). Even if the cockpit display area Db is erased due to a variable element of “super reach” when “after hold erase” is selected as the execution timing of “hold change notice”, the “super There is no point in performing “holding change notice” after “holding erasure” if there is no production after the “reach” variable element.

  Specifically, for example, even if a “pending change notice” of the execution pattern is executed after the “super reach” variable element is executed and the “big hit display” is confirmed, the player is given any interest. I can't do it, but rather I am aroused by a meaningless production. In addition, for example, even if the “Hall Display” is executed after the “Super Reach” variable element is executed and the “Lose Display” is confirmed, the “Lose Display” is confirmed as it is, and the next change effect is displayed. When is started, the player is distrusted with the game by the effect of the production. Therefore, it is determined whether there is a “re-change” variable element that is a variable element that is executed after the “super-reach” variable element, etc., and the “hold change notice” is executed after “hold deletion”. To see if it is possible.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display is performed after the “reach display” is executed depending on whether or not the fluctuation effect includes a fluctuation element of “re-change” (or whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit). The display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) is determined whether to maintain the display color of the chance-up pattern or to change the chance-up pattern to the normal display color again. Is done.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, in the variation effect at the time of losing, the “reach display” is finished on the third symbol display device 81 and the “losing display” appears, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. May be displayed in a chance-up pattern (for example, “red”). In such a case, the player cannot execute the “change display” as it is because the fixed phrase display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern. Thus, it is predicted that “lost display” will change to “big hit display”. However, contrary to the prediction, the variation effect is determined as “losing display”, so that the player makes the pachinko machine 10 distrustful due to the flaw of the effect contents, and the pachinko machine 10 is There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variation element of “revariation” is executed in the variation effect, and the “hit display” is determined without being determined by “losing display”. When the variation element of “variation” is included, the variation effect is a big hit, so even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3), the player's mood is impaired. There is nothing. Therefore, when the chance up pattern is selected, the chance up pattern is displayed in the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3).

  On the other hand, when the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variable element, when the chance up pattern is selected, the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element, It is determined whether or not, and even when the “big hit display” is displayed, even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the fixed phrase character display Se3, the player is not disturbed. Therefore, when the chance up pattern is selected, the chance up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3.

  However, if the variation effect does not include the variable element of “re-variation” and does not result in “big win display”, if the chance up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3, the player can display the chance up pattern. Recognizing this, we have an excessive expectation that a “big hit display” will occur. In addition, even if the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in a chance-up pattern, if the development effect is not executed and the jackpot is not awarded, the player who has experienced the above phenomenon a plurality of times Even if a chance up pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3 comes out with the display appearing, it is realized that the jackpot and the developmental effect are not executed. When the above phenomenon is witnessed in such a mental state, there is a fear that the pachinko machine 10 may be ridiculed and may feel distrust with the pachinko machine 10 or the game hall.

  Therefore, when the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element and does not become the “big hit display”, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal display color (“white”) that is not the chance up pattern. To do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Therefore, as a result of the processing of S1310, if it is a variation effect including the variation element of “revariation” (S1310: Yes), revariation information indicating that the variation element of “revariation” is performed in the variation effect, The information is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223h8 of the holding information storage No. X area (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, if the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element (S1310: No), the “revariation” variation element is not executed. Null data is stored in the re-variation information storage area 223h8 of the information storage X area (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. In the processing of S1312, by writing null data in the re-variation information storage area 223h8, for example, it is possible to prevent redundant use of information related to the “re-variation” variation element stored in the reserved information storage area X before writing. It is possible that there will be a production defect (for example, a malfunction caused by storing re-variation information in spite of the fact that the re-variation effect does not include the variation element of “re-variation”). Can be prevented. Note that it is also possible to recognize that “hold change notice” can be executed at the execution timing “after hold deletion” by the processing of S1307 and S1311.

  In the process of S1313, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the value of the sub reserved ball number counter 223b updated by the process of S1301 to the display control device 114 is set (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314. In the processing of S1314, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the time when the holding symbol is displayed (acquired changing timing of the hold) in the variation effect indicated by the currently held ball number command (S1314). This determination is made when the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the hold information storage X area is the same as the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b, and the execution timing of the “hold change notice” is the hold symbol. Is determined to be displayed.

  As a result of the determination in S1314, if the execution timing of the “holding change notice” is the display time of the hold symbol (S1314: Yes), the determined “hold change notice” is displayed at the timing when the hold symbol is displayed. A display lighting on-hold change command for notifying the display control device 114 of this fact is set (S1315), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, if the execution timing of “hold change notice” is not when the hold symbol is displayed (S1314: No), the process of S1315 is skipped and the process returns to the main process.

  The display hold ball number command and the display turn-on hold change command set in S1313 and S1315 are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see S1002 in FIG. 41). ) To the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display reserved ball number command executes a process so as to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a reserved symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls. In addition, the display control device 114 that has received the on-hold hold change command for display performs display control so that the hold symbol is displayed in the determined “hold change notice” display mode when displaying the hold symbol. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the changing effect process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this variation effect process (S1109).

  This variation effect process (S1109) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and in order to confirm whether or not the variation effect is normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the hold information storage area. Various information stored in the hold information storage first area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i, and information stored in the hold information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the hold information storage first to third areas. Perform the process. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 do not match the contents (information) stored in the execution information storage area 223i, a display error command is generated, and this command is displayed. Processing to set for transmission to the device 114 is performed. Further, when it is the execution timing of the “hold change notice” in the execution symbol and the hold symbol, various commands relating to the execution timing of the “hold change notice” are generated, and these commands are transmitted to the display control device 114. Perform processing to set. Further, the character display Se1, the character-in-reach display Se2, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 when the reach occurs, based on the effect mode of the variation effect and the values of the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f, and the color change timing counter 223g. A process of setting the display mode of (pseudo fixed phrase display Se4) is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 performs display processing related to the variation effect based on the command. It is configured not to start immediately, but to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 1 millisecond) whether or not the above-described display error command or the like is transmitted. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113 and immediately executes display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, for example, the audio lamp control is performed. When a display error command is subsequently transmitted from the device 113, the display process related to the variation effect must be stopped and replaced with a display corresponding to an error based on the display error command (for example, default variation).

  Therefore, even when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 does not immediately execute the display processing related to the variation effect based on the command, and displays from the sound lamp control device 113. For a predetermined time during which the error command for use is likely to be transmitted, the display apparatus waits for execution of display processing related to the variation effect based on the command. By configuring in this way, the display control device 114 can prevent a processing burden caused by executing a useless process in a display process related to a variation effect.

  In addition, although 1 millisecond was illustrated in 1st Embodiment as predetermined time which the display control apparatus 114 may transmit a display error command from the audio lamp control apparatus 113, this waiting time is the display control apparatus 114. As long as the display process is not delayed, any method may be used. Specifically, for example, the display control device 114 is configured to perform display processing and drawing processing for one frame every 20 milliseconds, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured as described above. After executing the command determination process (see FIG. 42), the variation effect process (see FIG. 44) is executed within a few milliseconds. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 generates and transmits a display error command in the variation effect process after transmitting the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Up to at least several milliseconds, it is possible to reliably generate and transmit a display error command. Therefore, the display control device 114 can receive the display error command if there is a display error command by waiting at least several milliseconds after receiving the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. Yes. Therefore, since the display process related to the changing effect can be executed without delay by waiting for a time shorter than the time (20 milliseconds) required for the display process and drawing process for one frame, the third symbol display device It is possible to prevent an event in which the display process of the fluctuation effect to 81 is clearly delayed.

  In the variation effect process (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is not on (that is, is off) (S1401: No), since at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variation effect is displayed. The process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the variation start flag 223a is turned off to start the variation effect. (S1402) Next, the data included in the hold information storage first area provided in the hold information storage area 223h is shifted to the execution information storage area 223i (S1403), and further, the hold provided in the hold information storage area 223h. The data contained in the information storage second to fourth areas is shifted to the hold information storage first to third areas (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In other words, in this case, since the suspended variation effect is reduced by one and the execution of the variation effect that is first suspended in time is started, the hold information corresponding to the first variation effect that is suspended is displayed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of one area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i corresponding to the variation effect being executed. Move to. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage second area are stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h8 of the hold information storage fourth area Move to 223h8.

  As a result, the execution information storage area 223i stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c of the main controller 110. In the four areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored.

  Next, in the process of S1405, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223i, a variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed is acquired (S1405). Then, the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i matches the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether or not it is present (S1406). If the information related to the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received this time is different from the information related to the variation effect previously stored in the execution information storage area 223i (holding information storage area 223h), some abnormality (such as noise) ) Due to the influence of a normal variation effect (variation pattern) cannot be executed. For this reason, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined by this determination process, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

  As a result of the determination in S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 do not match (S1406: No), some abnormality regarding the variation effect to be executed Has occurred, a display error command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  The display error command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). . By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred with respect to the variation effect, and switches the third symbol display device 81 to a display corresponding to the error (for example, default variation). The display control of the error display is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern stored in the execution information storage area 223i matches the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 (S1406: Yes), an abnormality is associated with the variation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

  Next, in the process of S1408, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223i, the stop type of the changing effect to be executed is acquired (S1408). The stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i matches the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether or not it is present (S1409). If the information related to the variable effect indicated by the stop type command received this time is different from the information related to the variable effect previously stored in the execution information storage area 223i (holding information storage area 223h), any abnormality (such as noise) ), The normal variation effect (stop type) cannot be executed. For this reason, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined by this determination process, and it is confirmed whether or not a normal variation effect can be executed.

  As a result of the determination in S1409, if it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i does not match the stop type stored in the RAM 223 (S1409: No), there is some abnormality regarding the variation effect to be executed. Therefore, a display error command for notifying the display control device 114 of the abnormality is generated and set (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the first embodiment, a display error command is generated and transmitted when the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i does not match the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command, and the execution information is also transmitted. When the stop type based on the value stored in the storage area 223i does not match the stop type indicated by the stop type command, a display error command is generated and transmitted, and a maximum of two display error commands are transmitted. It is configured. Instead, when the variation pattern based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i does not match the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command, or the stop based on the value stored in the execution information storage area 223i. When the type and the stop type indicated by the stop type command do not match, when either one does not match, one display error command may be transmitted. With this configuration, the number of command transmissions can be reduced, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  The display error command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). . By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 recognizes that some abnormality has occurred with respect to the variation effect, and switches the third symbol display device 81 to error display (for example, default variation). Starts display control of display.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, when it is determined that the stop type stored in the execution information storage area 223i matches the stop type stored in the RAM 223 (S1409: Yes), an abnormality is detected regarding the variation effect to be executed. Since it has not occurred, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  Next, in the processing of S1411, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is set in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the changing effect corresponding to the holding ball is performed) with the start of the changing effect. Is reduced by 1 (S1411), a display-holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the holding ball number indicated by the value of the updated sub-holding ball number counter 223b is set (S1412), and processing is performed. To S1413.

  Next, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing at which the “pending change notice” appears in the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (S1413). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 provided in the execution information storage area 223i. ”,“ After reach ”or“ after hold erase ”(hereinafter abbreviated as“ after start ”to“ after hold erase ”).

  As a result of the determination in S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is “0” on the number of reserved balls and indicates any of “from start” to “after deletion of hold”. If it is data (S1413: Yes), an execution symbol change process is performed in order to execute the “pending change notice” in the execution symbol (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is “0” on the number of reserved balls, and any of “from start” to “after hold erase” If it is not the data to show (S1413: No), the process of S1414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1415. The execution symbol change process of S1414 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing at which the “hold change notice” appears in the hold symbols displayed in the first to third hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 (S1415). This determination is performed for each scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 provided in the hold information storage first to third areas of the hold information storage area 223h. That is, whether or not each scenario data in each scenario data storage area 223h6 is the execution timing of the “hold change notice” in the hold symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 after the shift (for example, shifted to the hold information storage first area and stored) Whether or not the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 is data indicating the number of reserved balls “1”).

  As a result of the processing of S1415, if there are holding information storage first to third areas for storing scenario data corresponding to the execution timing (S1415: Yes), the display stored in the holding change information storage area 223h5 in the corresponding holding symbol In order to execute “hold change notice” in the form, a display shift hold change command including information on the corresponding hold symbol is set to the display control device 114 (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1417.

  Specifically, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the hold information storage first area is data indicating the hold number “1”, the hold change information storage area 223h5 of the hold information storage first area The display shift on-hold change command for notifying that the “hold change notice” is executed in the display mode stored in is generated and set. If the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the hold information storage second area is data indicating the hold number “2”, it is stored in the hold change information storage area 223h5 of the hold information storage second area. A display shift on-hold change command for notifying execution of “hold change notice” is generated and set. Further, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223h6 of the hold information storage third area is data indicating the hold number “3”, it is stored in the hold change information storage area 223h5 of the hold information storage third area. A display shift on-hold change command for notifying execution of “hold change notice” is generated and set.

  The display shift pending change command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Sent. The display control device 114 that has received the hold change command for display shift performs display control so that the corresponding hold symbol is displayed in the determined “hold change notice” display mode when the hold symbol is shifted and displayed. .

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1415, if scenario data corresponding to the execution timing is not stored in the scenario data storage areas 223h6 of the hold information storage first to third areas of the hold information storage area 223h (S1415: No), The process of S1416 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1417.

  As described above, when the execution symbol and the hold symbol accompanying the start of execution of the variation effect are displayed, the scenario data stored in the execution information storage area 223i and the hold information storage area 223h are confirmed, and the “hold change notice” is displayed. When there is scenario data corresponding to the execution timing, it is possible to make a “pending change notice” appear when the hold symbol and the shift of the execution symbol are displayed. This makes it possible to diversify the timing at which the “pending change notice” appears and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the process of S1417, the character display Se1, the character display Se2 in the reach, the fixed phrase display Se1 and the fixed phrase on the basis of the effect of the variation effect and the values of the character pattern counter 223e, the character color lottery counter 223f, and the color change timing counter 223g. A character mode setting process for setting the display mode of the character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) is performed (S1417), the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 41). The character mode setting process in S1417 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the execution symbol change process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the execution symbol change process (S1414).

  This execution symbol change process (S1414) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 44) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the third symbol display device 81. This is performed in order to execute the “pending change notice” in the execution symbol.

  In the execution symbol change process (S1414), first, the change timing of the execution symbol, that is, the execution timing at which the “pending change notice” appears in the execution symbol is determined (S1501). This determination is made by confirming the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i.

  As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating “0” and “starting” (S1501: “Start” ”), At the timing when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the display is displayed to the display control device 114 in order to execute the“ hold change notice ”in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223i5. The change command at the start of use is set (S1502), the execution symbol change process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The display start change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display control device 114 that has received the display start change command displays the execution symbol in the determined “pending change notice” display mode when the execution symbol is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. Take control.

  As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is “0” reserved balls and indicates “before reach” (S1501: “reach”). “Previous”), the timing before the “reaching display” of the fluctuation effect appears (for example, the stop of the left symbol row Z1 during the execution of the “high speed fluctuation” fluctuation element or the “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element In order to execute the “hold change notice” in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223i5 of the execution information storage area 223i, a pre-reach change command for display is set to the display control device 114. (S1503), the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The pre-reach change command for display set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display control device 114 that has received the pre-reach display change command displays the timing before the “reaching display” of the variation effect appears for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (for example, “high-speed fluctuation”). The execution symbol is changed to the determined “pending change notice” display mode (for example, when the left symbol row Z1 is stopped during execution of the variable component “low-speed variation”) (for example, Display control is performed so that “white” is changed to “blue”.

  As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating “0” and “reach” (S1501: “reach”). After ”), in order to confirm whether or not“ pending change notice ”can be executed at the timing after the“ reaching display ”of the variation effect appears (for example, during the execution of the variable element of“ normal reach ”) In step S1504, it is determined whether or not “reach display” appears. This determination is performed by determining the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42).

  As a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that “reach display” appears in the variation effect (S1504: Yes), the timing after the “reach display” of the initially set variation effect appears (for example, “ The “hold change notice” can be executed during the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”. Therefore, in order to execute the “hold change notice” in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223i5 of the execution information storage area 223i, a post-reach change command for display is set to the display control device 114 (S1505). ), The process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The post-reach change command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display control device 114 that has received the post-reach change command for display displays a timing after the “reaching display” of the variation effect appears (being displayed) for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 ( For example, during execution of the “normal reach” variable element), the display control is performed so that the execution symbol is changed (for example, from “white” to “blue”) in the determined “hold change notice” display mode.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when it is determined that “reach display” does not appear in the variation effect (S1504: No), “reach display” is set to “pending change notice” because “reach display” does not exist in the variation effect. Cannot be executed after “reach”. Accordingly, in order to change the “hold change notice” set to “after reach” to “before reach” which is an executable timing, the process proceeds to S1503 and is displayed for display toward the display control device 114. A reach change command is set (S1503), and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  By configuring in this way, even if it is a fluctuating effect that cannot execute the “hold change notice” after “reach” that was initially set, the “pre-change notice” is changed to an executable “before reach” execution timing. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases that are not executed despite winning the “pending change notice” execution lottery, increase the execution rate of the “pending change notice”, and improve the fun of the game. In addition, even when the lottery process for “holding change notice” and the lottery process for variation effect are performed in different systems, adjustments can be made so as not to cause wrinkles with respect to the contents of each other. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a different system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and execute a consistent production.

  As a result of the determination in S1501, if the scenario data stored in the scenario data storage area 223i6 of the execution information storage area 223i is data indicating “after suspend erasure” with “0” retained balls (S1501: “ This determination is based on the determination of the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i based on the processing in S1311 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 43). Do.

  As a result of the determination in S1506, when re-change information is stored in the re-change information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: Yes), the change in which “re-change” is executed after “reach display” Since it is an effect, next, “pending” is performed at the timing after the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variable effect (for example, after the execution of the “super reach” variable element or after the execution of the “special reach” variable element). In order to confirm whether or not the “change notice” can be executed, it is determined whether or not the cockpit display area Db is erased by executing the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” in the change effect ( S1507). This determination is performed by determining the hold erase information stored in the hold erase information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i in the process of S1307 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 43).

  As a result of the determination in S1507, when the hold deletion information is stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1507: Yes), the “hold change notice” can be executed after “hold deletion”. Therefore, in order to execute “hold change notice” in the display mode stored in the hold change information storage area 223 i 5 of the execution information storage area 223 i, a display change command after deletion for display is set to the display control device 114 ( S1508), the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The change command after display erasure set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display control device 114 that has received the change command after display erasure has a variable element of “super reach” or a variable element of “special reach” of the variation effect for the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. Display control to change the execution pattern (for example, from “white” to “blue”) to the determined “pending change notice” display mode after the completion and before the execution of “re-variation” I do.

  With such a configuration, when “holding change notice” is performed in the holding symbol and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect that generates a big hit, the execution symbol display region Db0 of the cockpit display region Db by the variable element “super-reaching or higher”. When the execution symbol displayed on the screen is erased, the effect of the variable element “super-reach” or more ends, and the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0 in the cockpit display area Db is displayed again. Is configured to be able to appear (execute). Thereby, the notice object (change object, in the first embodiment, the execution symbol in the first embodiment) that is always visible can be notified directly, or the notice object can be newly displayed and notified. Compared to the case, it is possible to change the display mode of the notice object casually while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the notice object. By making the object to be noticed once invisible and then casually changing it, the player first feels uncomfortable, and then recognizes that the source of the discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, jackpot) Thus, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing an unexpected production to the player.

  In addition, the display of the cockpit display area Db, and the execution symbol and the hold symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db are continuously displayed except when the variable element of “super reach or more” is being executed, This is to notify the execution suggestion of the effect and the presence or absence of the changing effect during standby. In addition, even when the cockpit display area is erased along with the execution of the variable element of “over super reach”, the variable element of “over super reach” is immediately redisplayed upon completion. The player does not feel uncomfortable with the redisplay. That is, the player recognizes that the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db should be displayed as the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, and that is an exceptional event ("super reach or more" It is recognized that even if it is erased along with the execution of the “variable element”, it will immediately return to its original form when the exceptional event ends. And in the first embodiment, at the timing to return to its original form, casually change the display form of the execution symbol from before deletion, so that it is difficult to notice the change, unexpected when the change is noticed Increases surprise by sex. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing an unexpected production to the player.

  Furthermore, by assigning the execution timing of the “hold change notice” to the second half of the fluctuation effect (after reach or after the hold elimination), the expectation of jackpot increases even after the second half of the change effect. The player can play the game while expecting the occurrence (appearance) of “change notice”. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting a big hit until the second half of the variation production, and it is possible to provide interest to the player for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1506, when it is determined that the revariation information is not stored in the revariation information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: No), the variation element of “revariation” in the variation effect. Therefore, there is no point in executing “hold change notice” after “hold erase”. Specifically, for example, even if the “pending change notice” of the execution symbol is executed after the “super reach” variable element is executed and the “big hit display” is confirmed, the effect is produced after the “super reach” variable element. However, no interest can be given to the player because it does not occur. In addition, for example, even if the “Hall Display” is executed after the “Super Reach” variable element is executed and the “Lose Display” is confirmed, the “Lose Display” is confirmed as it is, and the next change effect is displayed. When is started, the player is distrusted with the game by the effect of the production.

  Also, in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the pending erasure information is not stored in the pending erasure information storage area 223i7 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1507: No), the cockpit display area Db is erased in the variation effect. Since the performance is not performed, “hold change notice” after “hold erasure” cannot be executed.

  Therefore, in S1506, when it is determined that the re-variation information is not stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 of the execution information storage area 223i (S1506: No), or in the processing of S1507, the re-variation information is stored in the execution information storage area 223i. If it is determined that the hold deletion information is not stored in the hold deletion information storage area 223i7 (S1507: No), the “hold change notice” cannot be executed after “after hold deletion”, so “after hold deletion” is set. In order to confirm the timing at which the “pending change notice” can be executed, the process proceeds to S1504.

  By configuring in this way, even if it is a fluctuating effect that cannot be performed with the “pre-holding advance notice” of “after suspend deletion” that was initially set, at the executable execution timing (“after reach” or “before reach”) It is possible to change and execute “pending change notice”. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of cases that are not executed despite winning the “pending change notice” execution lottery, increase the execution rate of the “pending change notice”, and improve the fun of the game. In addition, even when the lottery process for “holding change notice” and the lottery process for variation effect are performed in different systems, adjustments can be made so as not to cause wrinkles with respect to the contents of each other. Therefore, by performing each lottery process with a program of a different system, it is possible to facilitate the design of each program and execute a consistent production.

  Next, the character mode setting process (S1417) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the character mode setting process (S1417).

  This character mode setting process (S1417) is executed in the variable effect process (see FIG. 44) executed in the main process (see FIG. 41), and in the variable effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, “ This is performed to determine the display mode of the character display Se1, the character display Se2 during reach, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that appear when the “reach display” is performed.

  In the character mode setting process (S1417), the processes of S1601 to S1610 are controls related to the character patterns of the character displays Se1 and Se2. Whether or not is selected is determined (S1601). This determination is made as to whether or not the effect mode of the variation effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the “normal reach” effect mode, that is, “E2: normal reach” or “E5: normal reach”. Is determined.

  In the process of S1601, if the effect mode of the “normal reach” effect mode is selected (S1601: Yes), then, in the variable effect to be executed this time, it is displayed at the time of “reach display (variable element of“ normal reach ”)”. The character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is determined (S1602). This determination is made based on the character pattern table 222g and the value of the character pattern counter 223e (see FIG. 18 and FIG. 19). Based on this determination, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed as “weak pattern”. It is decided whether to display or “strong pattern”.

  As a result of the determination in S1602, when it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be “weak pattern” (S1602: “weak pattern”), it is displayed that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be performed by “weak pattern”. A display weak pattern command for notification to the control device 114 is generated and set (S1603), and the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is to be “strong pattern” (S1602: “strong pattern”), the display control device 114 is to perform the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern”. A strong display pattern command for notification is generated and set (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1611.

  The weak display pattern command or the strong display pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device performs the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main process. 114. Upon receiving this display weak pattern command or display strong pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the character pattern of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs in the “normal reach” effect mode as “weak pattern” or “strong”. The third symbol display device 81 performs display control of the character pattern display of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at the start of the “normal reach” variable element.

  In the process of S1601, when the “normal reach” effect mode is not selected in the variation effect executed this time (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1605. In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the variation effect to be executed this time (S1605). This determination is similar to the determination of the “normal reach” effect mode, and the effect mode of the variable effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is “super reach” effect mode or “special reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a production mode, that is, “E3: super reach” or “E6: super reach”, “E4: special reach”, or “E7: special reach”.

  In the process of S1605, when the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected (S1605: Yes), the “reach display (“ super reach ”change) The character pattern of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during reach to be displayed at the time of “the element or the variable element of“ special reach ”” are determined (S1605). This determination is performed based on the character pattern table 222g and the value of the character pattern counter 223e (see FIG. 18 and FIG. 19). Based on this determination, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed. In this case, it is determined whether to display with “weak pattern” or “strong pattern”.

  As a result of the determination in S1605, when it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is also “weak pattern” (S1605: “weak pattern → weak pattern”), Generate and set a display weak pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is also “weak pattern” ( S1607), the process proceeds to S1611.

  In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is “strong pattern” (S1605: “weak pattern → strong pattern”), the reach is performed. Generate and set a display weak / strong pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 is generated by “weak pattern” and the character display Se2 being reached is “strong pattern” (S1608). ), The process proceeds to S1611.

  In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is “weak pattern” (S1605: “strong pattern → weak pattern”), the reach is performed. Generate and set a display strength pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is “strong pattern” and the character display Se2 in reach is “weak pattern” (S1609). The process proceeds to S1611.

  In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is “strong pattern” and the character display Se2 during reach is also “strong pattern” (S1605: “strong pattern → strong pattern”), the reach is performed. A display strong pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 that the character display Se1 at the time of occurrence is performed in the “strong pattern” and the character display Se2 in the reach is also performed in the “strong pattern” is generated and set (S16010). ), The process proceeds to S1611.

  Display weak / strong pattern command, display weak / strong pattern command, display strong / weak pattern command, or display strong / strong pattern command (hereinafter referred to as display weak pattern command, display strong pattern command, display weak / weak). A pattern command, a display weak / strong pattern command, a display strong / weak pattern command, and a display strong / strong pattern command may be collectively referred to as a “pattern command”). Once stored, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41).

  By receiving this pattern command, the display control device 114 changes the character pattern of the character display Se1 and the character display Se2 during reach in the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode to “weak pattern”. The display of the character pattern Se1 and the character display Se2 during the reach occurrence displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, when the variation effect is started, the effect mode of the variation effect is determined, and each character display Se1, in the variation effect is referred to by referring to the values of the character pattern table 222g and the character pattern counter 223e based on the effect mode. A character pattern of Se2 is determined, and a pattern command related to the character pattern is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the determined content. By configuring in this way, the character pattern of each character display Se1, Se2 displayed in the variation effect including “reach display” is diversified to enhance the interest of the game, and at the start of the variation effect, the display control device 114 It is possible to notify the contents of the character display that should appear in the variation effect, and to reliably perform display control in the variation effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1605 that the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is not selected (S1605: No), “reach display” is executed in the variable effect to be executed this time. Since none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is displayed, the subsequent process is skipped, the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The processing of S1611 to S1614 is control related to the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4. First, in the processing of S1611, whether or not the character color change lottery is won, that is, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4. It is determined whether or not the change lottery is won (S1611). This determination is performed based on the character color change table 222h and the value of the character color lottery counter 223f (see FIG. 22). Based on this determination, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are changed to normal display. Whether to display “white” as a color, “red” or “gold” as a chance-up pattern is determined.

  When the character color change lottery is won in the processing of S1611, that is, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in “red” or “gold” instead of “white” which is a normal display color. If so (S1611: Yes), it is next determined which display color has been selected (S1612). As a result of the determination, when “red” is selected as the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 (S1612: “red”), the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed as “red”. A display red character command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated and set (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1615. On the other hand, when “golden” is selected as the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 (S1612: “golden”), display control is performed to display the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 in “golden”. A display gold character command for notification to the device 114 is generated and set (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1615.

  The display red character command or the display gold character command set here (hereinafter, the display red character command and the display gold character command may be collectively referred to as a “color system command”) is provided in the RAM 223. The command is once stored in the command transmission ring buffer and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The display control device 114 receives the display red character command or the display gold character command, thereby changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variation effect including “reach display” to “red” or Recognizing that “golden” is displayed, the third symbol display device 81 executes display control relating to the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4.

  As described above, when the variation effect is started, the effect mode of the variation effect is determined, and each character display in the variation effect is referred to by referring to the values of the character color change table 222h and the character color lottery counter 223f based on the effect mode. The display colors of Se1 to Se4 are determined, and color commands relating to the display colors are transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the determined contents. By configuring in this way, the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variation effect including “reach display” are diversified to enhance the interest of the game, and at the start of the variation effect, the display control device 114 The contents of the character display to be displayed in the variation effect can be notified, and the display control in the variation effect can be reliably performed.

  In the process of S1611, when the display color change lottery of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not won (S1611: No), the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is not changed in the variation effect executed this time. Therefore, the subsequent process is skipped, the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 44).

  The processing of S1615 to S1618 is control related to the timing of changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2. First, in the processing of S1615, whether or not the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the variation effect to be executed this time. Is determined (S1615). This determination is made in the same manner as in S1601, whether the effect mode of the variable effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is the “normal reach” effect mode, that is, “E2: normal reach” or It is determined whether it is “E5: normal reach”.

  In the process of S1615, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected (S1615: Yes), the reach character display Se2 displayed at the time of the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach” is displayed. Since only the character display Se1 is displayed when the reach occurs, the process of S1616 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1617. In the processing of S1617, a generation change command for display is generated and set to notify the display control device 114 that the display color is changed at the timing when the character display Se1 is displayed at the time of reach occurrence (S1617). Goes to S1619.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1615, when the “normal reach” effect mode is not selected (S1615: No), the selected effect mode is the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode, and reach occurs. Since the time character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 are displayed together, next, the reflection timing of the lottery result of the character color change lottery, that is, the timing of changing the display color of each character display Se1, Se2. Is discriminated (S1616). This determination is performed based on the color change timing table 222i and the value of the color change timing counter 223g (see FIG. 23). Based on this determination, “when reach occurs”, that is, character display Se1 when reach occurs. It is determined whether or not to change the display color at the timing of displaying.

  As a result of the determination in S1616, when the reflection timing of the lottery result of the character color change lottery is “when reach occurs”, that is, when it is the timing to display the character display Se1 when reach occurs (S1616: Yes), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to S1617, and a generation change command for display is generated and set for notifying the display control device 114 that the display color is changed at the timing when the character display Se1 is displayed at the time of reach occurrence (S1617). Goes to S1619. On the other hand, when the reflection timing of the lottery result of the character color change lottery is not “when a reach occurs”, that is, when “reaching” (timing for displaying the character display Se2 during reach) (S1616: No), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to S1618 to generate and set a display reach change command for notifying the display control device 114 that the display color is changed at the timing when the reach character display Se2 is displayed (S1618). The process proceeds to S1619.

  The display occurrence change command or the display reach change command set here (hereinafter, the display occurrence change command and the display reach change command may be collectively referred to as a “timing command”). The data is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 41) of the main process.

  The display control device 114 receives this timing command to change the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence at the timing of displaying the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displayed at “at the time of reach occurrence”, or It is recognized whether or not the display color of the reaching character display Se <b> 2 is changed at the timing of displaying the reaching character display Se <b> 2 displayed in “Leaching”. And the display control apparatus 114 performs display control of each character display Se1-Se4 displayed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 based on the recognition.

  In this way, when the variation effect is started, the effect mode of the variation effect is determined, and the character display in the variation effect is made by referring to the values of the color change timing table 222i and the color change timing counter 223g based on the effect mode. The display color change timing of Se1 and Se2 is determined, and a timing-related command related to the display color change timing of each character display Se1 and Se2 is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the determined content. By configuring in this way, the timing of changing the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 displayed in a variable effect including “reach display” is diversified to enhance the fun of the game, and display control at the start of the variable effect The device 114 can be notified of the contents of the character display that should appear in the variation effect, and the display control in the variation effect can be reliably performed.

  In the process of S1619, when the display color of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is changed to “red” or “golden” chance up pattern, and the result of the variation effect is “lost display”, the batch setting is performed. Among the displayed character displays Se1 to Se3, only the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is executed to change the character color change restriction process from the chance up pattern to the normal “white” display color (S1619). After the character color change restriction process (S1619), the character mode setting process (S1417) is terminated and the process returns to the change effect process (see FIG. 44).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47, the character color change restriction process (S1619) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the character color change restriction process (S1619).

  Even if the character change restriction process (S1619) wins and changes the chance color of “red” or “gold” with respect to the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, When the variation element of “variation” is not included, and the result of the variation effect is “lost display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “reaching effect” of the “reach display” is This is performed in order to change the display color to “white” which is the normal display color.

  In the character change restriction process (S1619), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect to be executed this time includes a variation element of “revariation” (S1701). This determination is performed by determining the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 by the processing of S1310 to S1312 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 44). Note that it may be configured to determine directly from the received variation pattern command and stop type command as to whether or not a variation factor of “revariation” is included. By directly determining from the received variation pattern command and stop type command, even if there is a discrepancy between the content determined in the pre-read process due to the influence of noise or the like and the content of the actual variation effect, By making the determination based on the contents of the fluctuating effects, it is possible to prevent the effects contents from being wrinkled.

  In this way, by using the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 (223h8) at the stage of receiving the reserved ball number command, the “re-variation” variation in the variation effect is immediately performed. It can be determined whether the element is executed. Further, the presence / absence of a “re-change” variable element is stored in the re-change information storage area 223h8 (223i8) when the reserved ball number command is received. Based on the information, the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 can be determined, and whether or not “hold change notice” can be executed at the timing of “after hold deletion” can be determined. The re-variation information can be effectively used in the execution determination.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the variation pattern includes the variation element of “revariation” (S1701: Yes), the variation element of “revariation” is performed in the variation effect, “Display” appears. For this reason, even if the display colors of the fixed phrase text display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase text display Se4 are displayed in the chance-up pattern, the content of the effect does not occur and the player does not feel distrust. Therefore, the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1701 that the variation pattern does not include the “revariation” variation element (S1701: No), at least the “revariation” variation element is not executed in the variation effect. Then, it is determined whether or not “change display” appears as the variation effect to be executed this time (S1702). This determination is whether or not the variation effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is an effect mode in which “lost display” is indicated, that is, “E0: non-reach (shortened)”. "E1: Non-reach (normal)", "E2: Normal reach", "E3: Super reach" or "E4: Special reach". In addition, you may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine with the stop symbol of a fluctuation effect instead of an effect aspect.

  In the first embodiment, the variation effect including the “revariation” variable element is always a big hit, but the variation effect in which the “revariation” variable element is executed is also lost. You may comprise. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not the “revariation” variation element is included in the processing of S1701, and if the “revariation” variation element is included, the boilerplate character display Se3 Since the “pronounced effect” is executed after the display, it is possible to skip the setting process of the display fixed phrase normal command and display the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 as the chance-up pattern.

  If it is determined in the process of S1702 that the “big jackpot display” is the changing effect that appears (S1702: Yes), the “big hit display” appears in the changing effect, so the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. Even if the colors are displayed in the chance-up pattern, there will be no effect on the content, and the player will not feel distrust. Therefore, the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1702 that “big hit” is not a fluctuating effect that appears (S1702: No), the fluctuating effect is displayed as “losing display” instead of “big hit display”. In this variation effect, if the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern, there is a risk that the player may feel distrust due to the content of the effect. Therefore, in the processing of S1703, the display control device is to change (change) the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 from the initially set chance-up pattern and to change it to “white” which is the normal display color. A standard phrase normal command for display for notifying to 114 is generated and set (S1703), the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  The display standard phrase normal command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display controller 114 recognizes that the display color of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is changed from the chance-up pattern to “white” which is the normal display color by receiving the display fixed phrase normal command. The display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured to appear only when the “revariation” variation element is executed. Further, when the variable element of “re-change” is executed, “big hit display” always appears as a result. Therefore, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is configured to reflect the set contents as they are.

  In this way, when the variation effect is started, the effect mode (variation element) of the variation effect is determined, and based on the determination, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed as the chance-up pattern, It is determined whether or not the normal display color is displayed after being corrected (changed) to the normal pattern. When correcting (changing) the normal pattern, the display standard phrase normal command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust, The content of the character display that should appear in the variation effect can be notified to the display control device 114 at the start of the variation effect, and the display control in the variation effect can be reliably performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines in detail the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 displayed when “reach display” is selected as the variation effect. The display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 is executed by transmitting a command to the display control device 114 based on the determined content. Moreover, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern of each character display Se1, Se2, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, and the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 It is determined by separate lottery, and a command is generated and set as needed based on each determination.

  Here, if all the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined, commands relating to the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are set with one command. When generated, the number of commands corresponding to all variations of the character pattern, display color, and change timing must be prepared in advance, which may increase the number of commands. Therefore, a command is separately generated for each of the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the display control of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is adjusted on the display control device 114 side based on the commands. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of commands related to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  In particular, in this pachinko machine 10, even if the chance up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is “lost display”, the fixed phrase character display Se3 Is modified (changed) to the normal display color and displayed. Also in this case, after all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color correction (change) contents of each character display Se1 to Se4 are determined, a command for each character display Se1 to Se4 is generated with one command. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare in advance the number of commands corresponding to all display mode variations including the content of correcting (changing) the display color, and the number of commands may increase dramatically.

  Therefore, a command is generated separately for each character display Se1-Se4 character pattern, display color, change timing, and display color correction (change) content, and each character display is displayed on the display control device 114 side based on the command. By adjusting the display control of Se1 to Se4, the number of commands related to each character display Se1 to Se4 can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process (see FIG. 48) that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, and a command interrupt process (FIG. 49 (a) executed when a command is received from the audio lamp controller 113. )), And the V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed by the image controller 237 (FIG. 49 (FIG. 49)). b)). The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  When the main process is started by the MPU 231 when the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and the process of clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Also, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2002). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image 282 at power-on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 supplies image data corresponding to the main image 282 at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the main image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2002, the power-on fluctuation is then performed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image 283 to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003).

  In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283, the data size of the image data, and transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b that is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 from the character ROM 234 for resident use. The video RAM 235 is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image 283 to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the simple image display flag is then displayed. 233a is turned on (S2004). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61B) for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed.

  The simple image display flag 233a is stored in the character ROM 234 of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61B). It remains on until the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Thus, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B), the image-on-image (power-on main image 282 and power-on variation image 283) shown in FIG. 26 is drawn. Simple command determination processing (see S2028 in FIG. 49B) and simple display setting processing (see S2029 in FIG. 49B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on fluctuation image 283 are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image 282. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image 282 can be confirmed when the power is turned on. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image 282 when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. can do.

  On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the resident video RAM 235 is resident. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image 282 at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that it has been done. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the main image 282 can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transfer the power-on variation image 283 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image 282 after the power is turned on. Accordingly, when the player starts playing while the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the variation effect When the display start instruction is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received, FIG. The power-on variation image 283 shown in FIG. 5 can be displayed immediately during the variation production period, and a simple variation production can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player has been surely drawn by a simple variation effect by the power-on variation image 283. Can be confirmed.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image 282 at the time of power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, it takes time to transfer the ROM 234. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time when the main image 282 is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since this pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image 283 transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a power failure Even when the main image 282 at the time of power-on is displayed immediately after returning, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2004, interrupt permission is set (S2005), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2005, the command interrupt process (see FIG. 49A) and the V interrupt process (FIG. 49B) are performed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. )).

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2011), and the command interrupt process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are the command determination process (see FIG. 50) or the simple command determination process (see FIG. 49 (b)) of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 (b)) described later. ), And processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 32) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Accordingly, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing of the image or development of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored. Can do.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 49B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021), and it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on. Then (S2021: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In the meantime, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 26 on the third symbol display device 81, it is easy to determine whether or not the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S2028) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2029) for displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and S2 04 to the process to migrate.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on in the process of S2021, that is, if it is off (S2021: No), it means that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred. This means that a command determination process (S2022) is executed to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 26, and then a display setting process (S2023). Is executed, and the process proceeds to S2024.

  In the command determination process (S2022), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process (see FIG. 49A) is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. To do. When a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table 232a1 for demonstration or the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Further, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the set display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. In addition, when a command related to a prefetching notice such as a prefetching notice based on a reserved symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “prefetching command”) is stored, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the prefetching notice is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Set. Furthermore, when a command related to each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed at the time of “reach display” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “character command”) is stored, it corresponds to the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4. The additional data table 232a2 to be set is set in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there.

  In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, a character command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 and the character display Se1 to Se4 of “reach display” can be quickly grasped. Then, the rendering of the image can be controlled so that the effect image corresponding to the display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2023), based on the contents of the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c by the command determination process (S2022), the third symbol display device In 81, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically specified. Further, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2023) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2024). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2023) or the simple display setting process (S2029). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2025). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233a is off, predetermined image data is normally sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. A transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set. Further, even when a character command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is used in a display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of each character display Se1 to Se4. A transfer instruction for transferring the character design image data and the changed back image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2026). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2024), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2025) are used. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of this drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2027). And this V interruption process is complete | finished. As a counter updated by the process of S2027, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process (S2022), the stop types indicated by the display stop type command (“15R probability change big hit”, “2R probability change big hit”, “15R normal big hit) ”,“ Normal reach ”production mode at the time of losing,“ super reach ”production mode at the time of losing,“ special reach ”production mode at the time of losing,“ non-reach ”production mode) and stop type table (not shown) The stop symbol counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, details of the above-described command determination process (S2022) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), This command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), it indicates that the new command has been processed, sets the new command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) to ON (S2102), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2103).

  Then, in the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command (S2104). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S2104: Yes), the held ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S2105), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2105) will be described. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing (S2105), first, it is shown that the display reserved ball number command has been processed, the new reserved ball number command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) is turned on (S2121), and then Then, the reserved ball number information included in the display reserved ball number command is acquired (S2122). In the process of S2122, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the held ball number information is acquired from the last stored display ball number command. Thereby, the newest number of reserved balls can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the processing of S2122 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to other numbers of reserved balls are turned off. (S2123), this reserved ball number command process (S2105) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  Thereby, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new reserved ball number command flag is on, the number of held balls corresponding to the number determined flag set to ON by referring to the number determined flag is held. The reserved image data is expanded so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that there is no display pending ball number command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display demo command (S2106: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

  Details of the demo command process (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demo command processing (S2107), first, a demonstration display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2131). Next, the Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233c to clear the contents, and the Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233d to clear the contents (S2132). This is because the demonstration display data table 232a1 stipulates that image rendering is not required to newly transfer image data necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. This is because 232a3 is not prepared in the data table storage area 232a.

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set in the time counter 233g (S2133), and the pointer 233e is initialized to “0” (S2134). Then, a demonstration display flag (not shown) indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state is set to on, and a fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. A confirmation command flag (not shown) indicating display is set to OFF, and further, a confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2135), and demo command processing is performed. (S2107) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  By executing the demo command process (S2107), the display setting process (S2023) is set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2131 while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2134. The drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e are extracted from the demonstration display data table 232a1 and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  In the display setting process (S2023), the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table 232a1 for demonstration is measured using the time counter 233g in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set by the process of S2133. Further, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table 232a1 is ended by the time counting of the time counter 233g in the display setting process based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the process of S2135. Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again as an effect to be displayed next.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2106 that there is no display demo command (S2106: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, or the display confirmation command (hereinafter referred to as “display command”). The display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the display confirmation command are collectively referred to as “variable presentation command” (S2108). If there is (S2108: Yes), the variable effect command processing is executed (S2109), and the processing returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the variable effect command processing (S2109) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variable effect command processing. As described above, this variation effect command processing performs processing corresponding to the variation effect command of the display variation pattern command, display stop type command or display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113. It is.

  In the variable effect command processing (S2109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among unprocessed commands (S2141). If there is a display confirmation command (S2141: Yes), the confirmation is performed. The command process is executed (S2142), the variation effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53A, details of the confirmation command process (S2142) will be described. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2142), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2023) that the display confirmation command is received in the on state is set to on (S2151), and the confirmation command process (S2142) is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the variable effect command processing (see FIG. 52).

  Thereby, in the display setting process (S2023), the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Execute the setting process. In addition, when the display of the variable effect is processed and the confirmed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display setting processing is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2141 that there is no display confirmation command (S2141: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2143). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2143: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2144), this variation effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53B, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2144) will be described. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2144), first, the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table 232a1 is stored in the data table storage area 232a. Are set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2161).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 50), it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. And another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S2161, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

  If the display data table 232a1 for change corresponding to the change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the change having a change time shorter than the set display data table 232a1 for change is actually set. When the effect is instructed by the main control device 110, the main control device 110 (audio lamp) is displayed while the change effect according to the set change display data table 232a1 is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the control device 113), the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the first embodiment, by setting the display data table 232a1 for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233b, actually, the set display data for change is set. Even when a variation effect having a variation time longer than that of the table 232a1 is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233b is finished, the main control device. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed by the display setting process (S2023) so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from 110 (sound lamp control device 113) is received. The display is controlled. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as an integral part of the variation effect, and can continue to see the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without feeling uncomfortable until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

  Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the change display data table 232a1 set in S2161 is determined, read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2162). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233c (S2163).

  After that, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table 232a1 set by the processing of S2161 is turned on. Then, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other display data table for variation 232a1 is set to OFF (S2164). In the display control in the display control device 114, the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b corresponds to which variation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the processing of S2164. Can be easily determined. Then, the display control device 114 determines whether or not there is a contradiction between the set variation pattern of the variation display data table 232a1 and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. In some cases, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the default variation is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2161, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233g (S2165). The pointer 233e is initialized to “0” (S2166). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2167), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process (S2023) is initialized to “0” (S2168). ), The variation pattern command processing (S2144) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation effect command processing (see FIG. 52).

  By executing this variation pattern command process (S2144), in the display setting process (S2023), the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2166 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2161. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233e are extracted from the change display data table 232a1 and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the pointer The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by 233e is extracted, and the necessary sprite image data in the set display data for change 232a1 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance. So that the controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process (S2023), using the time counter 233g in which the time data is set based on the change display data table 232a1 by the process of S2165, the change effect time defined in the change display data table 232a1. Time. When it is determined that the variation effect in the variation display data table 232a1 has been completed, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113), the confirmation display effect is changed to the first. If the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is not received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control settings.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

  On the other hand, in this variation effect command processing (S2109), since the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, the confirmation command processing that is processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. On the other hand, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2167. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display.

  On the other hand, in the command determination process (see FIG. 50), since the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. On the other hand, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and the display data for variation is displayed by overwriting the display data table 232a1 for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233b by the demonstration command for display as in processing of S2161. The data table 232a1 can be rewritten. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2143 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2143: No), the unprocessed command related to the variation effect is a display stop type command, so stop type command processing is executed (S2145). ), This variation effect command processing (S2109) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2146) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53C is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (“15R probable big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “normal reach (losing reach other than before and after)” A stop type table corresponding to the production mode, “super / special reach (front / rear los-reach) production mode”, or “non-reach” production mode) at the time of losing is determined (S2171). By comparing the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is executed, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally determined. (S2172).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S2173), this stop type command process (S2146) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect command process (see FIG. 52).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table 232a1, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation based on the variation display data table 232a1 is started. As the type information for specifying “offset”, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is described. In the task processing (S2024) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2172 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2173, and the specified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process (S2023) described later to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main control device 110, the display control device 114 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 50), it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands are affected by noise or the like. And another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S2171, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is “non-reach”. Determine the stop type table. Thereby, the stop symbol (for example, “456”) corresponding to “non-reach” which is “losing display” is set by the processing of S2172.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually lost, and the player In other words, it is misunderstood that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the “non-reach” effect mode of “losing display” is set, and if it is actually a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 Even if a stop symbol corresponding to “losing display” is displayed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2108 that there is no fluctuating effect command (S2108: No), then a command related to a pre-reading notice such as “pending change notice”, that is, a display lighting state, among unprocessed commands. Hold change command, hold change command at display shift, change command at start of display, change command before display reach, change command after display reach, change command after erase for display or other pre-read command (hereinafter, when display is lit) The hold change command, the hold change command for display shift, the change command at the start of display, the change command before display reach, the change command after display reach, the change command after display erase, and other read-ahead commands are collectively referred to as “read ahead”. System command ”(in some cases, it is expressed as a“ system command ”) (S2110) If there is de (S2110: Yes), the execution of a prefetch command processing (S2111), the process returns to S2101.

  Details of the prefetch command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this prefetch command processing. This prefetch command processing executes processing corresponding to the prefetch command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this prefetch command processing (S2111), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display lighting hold change command among unprocessed commands (S2181), and if there is a display lighting hold change command ( S2181: Yes), the hold change command is set to ON (S2188). The hold change command is configured to notify a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, that the prefetch command including the display turn-on hold change command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the hold change notice image type (the display pattern of the hold symbol or the execution symbol) indicated by the display change-on-hold change command is determined, and the determined hold change additional data is determined. The table 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the pending change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2189).

  As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), with respect to the effects corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table for holding change stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2189. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the “pending change notice” corresponding to 232a2 is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, among the hold change advance notice determination flags provided for each hold change advance notice image type, the hold change advance notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change advance notice image type included in the display change-on-hold change command is turned on (S2190). The prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2181 that there is no on-hold hold change command for display (S2181: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hold on-shift change command for display among unprocessed commands. (S2182) If there is a hold change command for display shift (S2182: Yes), the processing of S2188 to S2190 is performed, and the hold change command for display shift is received as in the case of receiving the hold change command for lighting display. The hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the indicated hold change notice image type is determined, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the hold change command at the time of display shift is turned on, the prefetch command processing (S2111) is ended, and the command determination process (see FIG. 50). Return to.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2182 that there is no display shift pending change command (S2182: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display start change command among the unprocessed commands ( S2183) If there is a display start change command (S2183: Yes), the processing is performed in S2188 to S2190, and the display start change command is received in the same manner as when the display lighting change command is received. The hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the indicated hold change notice image type is determined, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the display start change command is turned on, the prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. Return.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2183 that there is no display start change command (S2183: No), it is then determined whether there is a display pre-reach change command among unprocessed commands (S2184). ), If there is a pre-display reach change command (S2184: Yes), the process is performed in steps S2188 to S2190, and is indicated by the display pre-reach change command in the same manner as when the display turn-on hold change command is received. The hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the hold change advance notice image type is determined, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, the on-hold change notice flag corresponding to the on-hold change notice type image included in the pre-reach change command for display is turned on, the prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command judgment processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. Return.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2184 that there is no change command before display reach (S2184: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a change command after display reach among unprocessed commands (S2185). ), If there is a change command after display reach (S2185: Yes), the processing is performed by performing the processing of S2188 to S2190, and is indicated by the change command after display reach as in the case of receiving the hold change command when lighting for display. The hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the hold change advance notice image type is determined, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, the on-hold change notice flag corresponding to the on-hold change notice type image included in the post-reach change command is turned on, the prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command judgment processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. Return.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2185 that there is no change command after display reach (S2185: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a change command after display erasure among unprocessed commands (S2186). ), If there is a change command after display erasure (S2186: Yes), the processing is performed by performing the processing from S2188 to S2190 and indicated by the change command after display erasure in the same manner as when the display change command is displayed. The hold change additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the hold change advance notice image type is determined, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the hold change notice type image included in the change command after display erasure is turned on, the prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) is performed. Return.

  If it is determined in step S2186 that there is no change command after display erasure (S2186: No), then other prefetch command processing is executed (S2187), and this prefetch command processing (S2111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  When the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the first embodiment detects that the pending change command flag set by the processing of S2188 is turned on in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 62) described later, the prefetching system It is determined by command processing (S2111) that a predetermined additional data table for holding change 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c, and is set in the additional data table buffer 233c from the holding change advance notice determination flag set by the processing in S2190. The hold change notice image type corresponding to the hold change additional data table 232a2 is specified. Then, a transfer instruction to the image storage area 236a for the image data (image data related to the display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of the holding symbol or the execution symbol) necessary for displaying the specified holding change notice image type Is performed on the image controller 237.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2110 that there is no prefetch command (S2110: No), then a weak pattern command for display, a strong pattern command for display, a weak pattern command for display, a weak pattern command for display, a display Pattern command for strength pattern command for display or pattern command for display strength, color command for display red character command or gold command for display, timing command for change command for display occurrence or change command for display reach, Or, a command related to each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the display standard phrase normal command (hereinafter, a pattern command, a color command, a timing command, and a display standard phrase normal command are displayed). Collectively expressed as "character commands" To determine whether there is) (S2112), if there is a character-based command (S2112: Yes), by executing the character command processing (S2113), the process returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the character command processing (S2113) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing character system command processing. This character command processing executes processing corresponding to the character command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the character command processing (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not there is a pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2191). If there is a pattern command (S2191: Yes), the received pattern command is determined. The character pattern memory 233j is set based on the command (S2192). Then, the process proceeds to S2202, and the character change command flag is set to ON (S2202). The character change command flag is configured to notify a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) described later that a character command including a pattern command has been processed in the ON state.

  Next, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is determined, and the determined character pattern additional data table 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a. The additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

  As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), the character pattern memory 233j stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The display contents of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 are specified so that the display forms of the character displays Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the additional character pattern data data base 232a2 are displayed. .

  Thereafter, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is set to ON (S2204). The process (S2113) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  It should be noted that the character change determination flag set here is the timing at which the variation effect executed this time ends, that is, the confirmation command flag indicating that the display confirmation command has been received in the display setting process (S2023). In some cases, the character change determination flag is set to OFF (see S2314 in FIG. 57).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2191 that there is no pattern command (S2191: No), it is then determined whether there is a color command in the unprocessed command (S2193). If there is (S2193: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the color command is a display red character command (S2194). As a result of the determination, if the command is a display red character command (S2194: Yes), the red character flag 233k is set to ON (S2195), and the process proceeds to S2202, but if there is no display red character command (S2194: No), since the received color command is a display gold character command, the gold character flag 233m is set to ON (S2196), and the process proceeds to S2202.

  In the process of S2202 after S2195 or S2196, the normal image transfer setting process described later (see FIG. 62) indicates that the character command including the color command is processed in the ON state, as in the case of receiving the pattern command. ) Is set to ON (S2202).

  Next, the character color additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k or the gold character flag 233m and the variation effect to be executed (display data table 232a1) is determined, and the determined character color The additional data table for data 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table for character color 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

  Thereby, in the display setting process (S2023), the red character flag 233k or the red character flag 233k stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 with respect to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The image of the next one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed so that the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the gold character flag 233m are additionally displayed. Specify the display contents.

  After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k or the gold character flag 233m is set to ON (S2204). This character command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

  Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when the pattern command and the color command are received for the variation effect, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the pattern command and the character based on the color command is displayed. The change determination flag is turned on.

  Specifically, a case where a display strength command is received as a pattern command and a display red character command is received as a color command in one variation effect is illustrated. In this case, in the character change determination flag, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach are both displayed as “strong pattern”, and the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed as “red”. A value indicating that is set. Accordingly, as the additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2193 that there is no color command (S2193: No), it is then determined whether there is a display regular phrase normal command among the unprocessed commands (S2197). If there is a regular phrase normal command (S2197: Yes), the late limit flag 233p is set on (S2198), and the process proceeds to S2202.

  In the process of S2202 after the process of S2198, as in the case of receiving a pattern command or the like, the normal image transfer setting process described later indicates that the character command including the display fixed phrase normal command is processed in the ON state. The character change command flag notified to (see FIG. 62) is set to ON (S2202).

  Subsequently, the character correction additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the late restriction flag 233p and the variation effect to be executed is determined, and the determined character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored in the data table storage area. The character correction additional data table 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

  Thereby, in the display setting process (S2023), the late limit flag 233p stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The display mode of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the additional data table for character correction 232a2 based on the above is displayed. .

  After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the late restriction flag 233p is set to ON (S2204). The command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when the pattern command, the color command, and the display fixed phrase normal command are received for the variation effect, the character change determination flag is turned on based on the pattern command. The character change determination flag is turned on based on the color command, and the character change determination flag is turned on based on the display regular phrase normal command.

  Specifically, in one variation effect, a strong command for display is received as a pattern command, a red character command for display is received as a color command, and a regular phrase normal command for display is received. An example of the case has been described. In this case, in the character change determination flag, both the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during the reach are displayed in a “strong pattern”, and the character display Se1 and the character display Se2 when the reach occurs are both “red”. And a value indicating that the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” is set. Therefore, as the additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, and the character correction additional data table 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2197 that there is no display fixed phrase normal command (S2197: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display change command at the time of occurrence of display in the unprocessed commands (S2199). ), If there is a display change command at the time of occurrence (S2199: Yes), the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence is set to ON (S2200), and the process proceeds to S2202, while there is no change command at the time of occurrence of display. (S2199: No), since the received character command is a display change command during reach, the reach character color change flag 233o is set to ON (S2201), and the process proceeds to S2202.

  In the process of S2202 after S2200 or S2201, the normal image transfer setting process described later (see FIG. 62) indicates that the character command including the timing command is processed in the ON state, as in the case of receiving the pattern command. ) Is set to ON (S2202).

  Next, the character timing additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the occurrence character color change flag 233n or the reach character color change flag 233o is determined, and the determined character timing additional data table 232a2 is determined. The data is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table for character timing 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2203).

  Thereby, in the display setting process (S2023), the character color change at the time of occurrence stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the process of S2203 for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The next one frame in the third symbol display device 81 so that the display color is changed and displayed at the appearance timing corresponding to the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the flag 233n or the character color change flag 233o in reach. The display content of the image is specified. In the character timing additional data table 232a2, when the display color is changed at the display timing of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, the display colors of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during the reach are changed. When the additional data table 232a2 for character timing is set and the display color is changed at the display timing of the character display Se2 during reach, the character display Se1 becomes the normal display color when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during the reach is displayed. The character timing additional data table 232a2 is set so that the display color becomes the change color.

  After that, among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change determination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character color change flag 233n at the time of occurrence or the character color change flag 233o being reached is turned on. After setting (S2204), the character command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 50).

  Therefore, in the character change determination flag, for example, when a pattern command, a color command, a display regular phrase normal command, and a timing command are received for the variation effect, the character change determination flag based on the pattern command is received. ON, the character change determination flag based on the color command, the character change determination flag based on the display regular phrase normal command, and the character change determination flag based on the timing command are set respectively. .

  Specifically, in one variation effect, a strong command for display is received as a pattern command, a red character command for display is received as a color command, and a regular phrase normal command for display is received. Further, a case where a display reach change command is received as a timing command will be exemplified. In this case, the character change determination flag indicates that the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 at the time of reach are both displayed as “strong pattern”, and the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed in “white”. A value indicating that the display Se2 is displayed in “red” and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” is set. Therefore, as the additional data table 232a2, the character pattern additional data table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, the character correction additional data table 232a2, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 (hereinafter referred to as additional data for the character pattern). The table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, the character correction additional data table 232a2, and the character timing additional data table 232a2 may be collectively referred to as “character change additional data table 232a2”. It is stored in the table buffer 233c.

  When the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 according to the first embodiment detects that the character change command flag set by the process of S2202 is turned on in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) described later, the character system It is determined that the predetermined additional data table for character change 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the command processing (S2113), and the additional data table buffer 233c is set from the character change determination flag set by the processing in S2204. The character change image type corresponding to the character change additional data table 232a2 is specified. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer image data necessary to display the specified character change image type.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2112 that there is no character command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2114). If there is a command (S2114: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2115), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2115) will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process (S2115), first, a back image change flag for notifying a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, of a back image change associated with reception of a back image change command in the ON state is set. Set to ON (S2211). And among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back surface type (back surfaces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back surface types are supported. The back image discrimination flag to be set is set to OFF (S22212), the back image change command processing (S2115) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing (see FIG. 50).

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2211 is turned on, the back surface after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2212. Specify the type. If the identified back image is the back B or the back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S2024), if it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table 232a1, the back image discrimination set in S2212 is performed. A RAM that specifies the back surface type to be displayed at that time from the flag, further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed in accordance with the passage of time, and stores image data corresponding to the back image range The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process (FIG. 50)), there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise, etc. There is a possibility that it may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S2212, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2114 that there is no rear image change command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2116), and there is an error command. If (S2116: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process (S2117), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2221). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2222). The process (S2117) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

  In the display setting process (S2023), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2221, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2222 is determined, and the error is determined. Processing is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2222, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2116 that there is no error command (S2116: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

  In the processing of S2101 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes). ), The processing of S2102 to S2119 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2101 to S2119 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process (S2022) ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2028) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is the same as the command determination process (S2022). . However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 26 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table determination command, the display variation pattern Only commands and display stop type commands are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command is confirmed command processing (see FIG. 53A), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 53B), and stop type. Command processing (see FIG. 53C) is executed, and for other commands, processing for discarding is performed without executing processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 53B) executed in this case, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image 283 is displayed in the display data table buffer 233b in the process of S2161. The image data of the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Since the data is stored, in the process of S2162, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233d and the content is cleared.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 57 to 60, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2023), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Will be described. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process (S2023), as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first (see FIG. 50), the processes of S2302 to S2306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2307. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S2302), S2303 to S2306 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S2303, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2303). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2303: Yes), the previous command determination process (FIG. 50). In step S2304, it is determined that the display reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59A, details of the hold image setting process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the hold image setting process, the hold symbols and the execution symbols for the number of hold balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 are initially stored in the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the display hold ball number command. This is a process for developing image data to be displayed by setting (default setting, that is, “white” “◯” symbol).

  In the reserved image setting process (S2304), first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the reserved symbols and execution symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON are displayed in the cockpit display area of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved image data to be displayed on Db (see FIG. 4A) is developed (S2341). In the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49B), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the expanded reserved image data, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Then, the new reserved ball number command flag is set to OFF (S2342), the reserved image setting process (S2304) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57).

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the reserved image setting process (S2304) or in the process of S2303, if the new reserved ball number command flag is not on (S2303: No), it is then determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on ( S2305). If the error occurrence flag is on as a result of the determination (S2305: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2306).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process (S2306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred.

  In the warning image setting process (S2306), first, with reference to the error determination flag, warning image data for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display warning images of errors corresponding to all the error determination flags set to ON is developed. (S2351). In the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49B), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Then, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2352), the warning image setting process (S2306) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57).

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the warning image setting process (S2306) or in the process of S2305, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2305: No), then the pointer update process is executed (S2305: No). S2307).

  Details of the pointer update process (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by the corresponding drawing from the display data table 232a1, the additional data table 232a2, and the transfer data table 232a3 respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table buffer 233d. This is a process of updating the pointer 233e for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the contents or transfer target image data is to be obtained.

  In this pointer update process (S2307), first, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 (S2361). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is executed. As described above, in the various data tables 232a1 to 232a3, the “Start” information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to “0” as the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the value is updated to “1” by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data tables 232a1 to 232a3 in order from the address “0001H”.

  After the value of the pointer 233e is updated by the processing of S2361, then in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is “End” information. It is determined whether or not (S2362). As a result, if it is “End” information (S2362: Yes), it is confirmed in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b that the pointer 233e has been updated past the address where the entity data is described. means.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is the demonstration display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363), and the demonstration display data table 232a1 or If it is the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: Yes), the pointer 233e is set to “1” (S2364), and the display data table for demonstration 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b or the restart display is set. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the data table 232a1 is set in the time counter 233g (S2365), and the process proceeds to S2367. Thus, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1, so that the third symbol display device 81 has An effect or a restart effect can be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2363 that the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is neither the demonstration display data table 232a1 nor the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: No), The value of the pointer 233e is decremented by 1 (S2366), and the process proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 57), the display data table buffer 233b displays the display data table 232a1 other than the demonstration display data table 232a1 and the restart display data table 232a1, for example, the display data table 232a1 for change and the fixed display. When the data table 232a1 is set, the drawing content at the previous address in which the “End” information is written is always expanded, so that the third symbol display device 81 is defined by the display data table 232a1. The last image to be displayed can be displayed in a stopped state.

  In the process of S2362, in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b, it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233e after the update in S2361 is not “End” information. (S2362: No), the process of S2363 to S2366 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2367.

  In the process of S2367, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2367). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2367: No), the pointer update process (S2307) is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 57). On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2367: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer In the display data table 232a1 set in 233b, the value of the pointer 233e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address in which “End” information is stored (S2368). Then, the value of the time counter 233g is set to “1” (S2369), the pointer update process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table 232a1 and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process (S2307), the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process from the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c. The drawing contents are expanded (S2308). In the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49B), the sprites (display objects) constituting the image based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2308 together with the reserved image and warning image previously expanded. In addition to specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  In the first embodiment, the display data table buffer 233b stores the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table buffer 233c stores the additional data table 232a2, and the same sprite is drawn at the address indicated by the pointer 233e. Is set, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents shown in the additional data table 232a2. Thus, by redefining the drawing content of the sprite defined in the display data table 232a1 with the additional data table 232a2, the drawing content of the display data table 232a1 is changed to the drawing content of the additional data table 232a2. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the plurality of additional data tables 232a2 can be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. However, in the state where the plurality of additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, When the drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents shown in the newly stored additional data table 232a2. In other words, the storage order of the additional data table 232a2 can be stored, and the drawing contents of the newest additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority. Therefore, when the display contents are changed, they are displayed accurately. It becomes possible.

  Specifically, for example, in the state where the additional data table buffer 233c stores a character color additional data table 232a2 for displaying each character display Se1 to Se4 in “red”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 When the character correction additional data table 232a2 for correcting “white” is stored, the character correction additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority over the character color additional data table 232a2.

  If Null data is described in the additional data table 232a2, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233c is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233c.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233g (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233g after the subtraction is “0” or less (S2310). If the value of the time counter 233g is not “0” or less, that is, if it is “1” or more (S2310: No), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated as it is, and the V interrupt process (FIG. 49) is performed. Return to (b).

  On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233g is equal to or smaller than “0” in the processing of S2310 (S2310: Yes), the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b has elapsed. Means that At this time, if the display data table for change 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. Command) is to be transmitted, and in the subsequent processing of S2311, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2311).

  As a result of the determination in S2311, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2311: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. First, the fixed display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively (S2312).

  Next, since the variation effect being executed ends, the setting contents of the character displays Se1 to Se4 set for the variation effect are cleared, that is, the character pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k, and the gold character flag 233m are generated. The hour character color change flag 233n, the reach character color change flag 233o, and the late limit flag 233p are turned off (cleared to 0) (S2313), and the character change determination flag is turned off (S2314). By configuring in this way, the setting content of each character display Se1 to Se4 can be initialized every time one variation effect is completed. For example, each character display Se1 set in the previous variation effect is displayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the set content of Se4 appears in the next variation effect.

  Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233g (S2315), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to “0” (S2316). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to off (S2317), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the “0” state (off state) is set to on (that is, “1”) ( In step S2318, the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2319), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the V interrupt process (FIG. 49B) is performed. Return to)).

  As a result, in a situation where the display data table for change 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table 232a1. . And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2319 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before. In the variation display data table 232a1, the display data table 232a1 is displayed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before the predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation based on is described.

  Therefore, in the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 49B), the variation effect performed one time before from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2319 until the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation was started. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2311: No) in the process of S2311, the process proceeds to the process of S2320 shown in FIG. 58 to determine whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S2320). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2320: Yes), the value of the time counter 233g is determined to be “0” or less (S2310: Yes) in the processing of S2310, indicating that the confirmed display effect has ended. means. Therefore, after the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2321), the demonstration display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2322), and then time data corresponding to the demonstration display effect time is stored in the time counter 233g. (S2323). Then, the pointer 233e is initialized to “0” (S2324), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2325), and the process proceeds to FIG. The process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B).

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received before the final display effect ends, the first is automatically performed. The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2320, when it is determined that the confirmed display flag is on, that is, the condition that the branch condition of Yes of S2320 is satisfied is the case where the confirmed display effect is performed. In this case, the process of S2312 The contents of both the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are cleared. Therefore, in the processing of S2322, the clear processing of those data table buffers 233c and 233d is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2320, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S2320: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2326). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2326: Yes), it is determined that the value of the time counter 233g is “0” or less (S2310: Yes) in the processing of S2310 means that the demonstration effect has ended. To do. Therefore, the process proceeds to FIG. 57, the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). In this case, the pointer update process (S2307) executed in the display setting process of the next V interrupt process performs various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2326, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2326: No), the value of the time counter 233g is determined to be “0” or less in the process of S2310 (S2310: Yes). Means that the fluctuating presentation has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the change effect, the change display data table 232a1 corresponding to the change effect is displayed in the display data table buffer 233b in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to “0” in accordance with the setting (S2327), and the value of the restart timer counter after the addition becomes a predetermined value (for example, “100”). Is discriminated (S2328).

  If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2328: No), the process proceeds to FIG. 57, the display setting process (see FIG. 57) is terminated, and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 (b)). Return to). On the other hand, when the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2328: Yes), the restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are respectively set to Null. The contents are cleared by writing the data (S2329). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233g (S2330), the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to “0” (S2331), and the process proceeds to FIG. The display setting process (see FIG. 57) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49 (b)).

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated, so that the player uses the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table 232a1 is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the top of the restart display data table 232a1 by the pointer update process (S2307). Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received.

  The simple display setting process (S2029 in FIG. 49B) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is also the display setting process (S2023). Similar processing is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image 283 is over. , One of the images (figure 26 (b) and FIG. 26 (c)) of the power-on variation image 283 corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table 232a1 that defines that in the display data table buffer 233b is performed.

  Further, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image 283 is over, the reception of the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received from the main control device 110 through the audio lamp control device 113 is not permitted. In this case, the process of setting the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, which specifies that the variation effect of the power-on variation image 283 is restarted as it is, is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, details of the transfer setting process (S2025) described above, which is a process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. explain. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process (S2025), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401). If the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S2402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3241, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, that is, if it is off (S2401: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2403), the transfer setting process (S2025) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S2402).

  In this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data is instructed to the image controller 237 (S2411), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S2411). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S2411: Yes). In the process of S2412, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer image data and then receives a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S2412 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2412: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process. To return to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed in the process of S2412 (S2412: Yes), the process proceeds to S2413. Also, in the process of S2411, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2411: No), the process proceeds to S2413.

  In the process of S2413, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2413). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2414), the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) ends, and the transfer setting process ( Returning to FIG.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list (see FIG. 32) transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information described in the above.

  The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident object image data to be stored is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  On the other hand, if all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S2413 (S2413: Yes), the simple image display flag 233a is set to OFF (S2415), and the resident image transfer setting processing (S2402) is performed. Then, the process returns to the transmission setting process (see FIG. 61A). Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 49B) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 49B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 50 to 56) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 57 to 60) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) (see S2401: No in FIG. 61A).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), thereby excluding the power-on main image 282 and the power-on fluctuation image 283 that have already been transferred in the main process (see FIG. 48). All the image data to be resident in the video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. . As a result, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, an error message, a cockpit image, and a sub-display image, a main controller 110, and an audio lamp control. After the display is determined by the device 113, the display control device 114, or the like, the image data of the reserved symbol or character symbol image to be displayed immediately is made resident, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, Responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at an arbitrary timing to displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S2403), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S2403).

  In this normal image transfer setting process (S2403), first, from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the pointer update process (S2307) of the display setting process (see FIG. 57) previously executed. Information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e is acquired (S2421).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2422). If it is transfer data information (S2422: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Further, a transfer start flag indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425.

  On the other hand, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S2422 (S2422: No), the processes of S2423 and S2424 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2425.

  In the process of S2425, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process has ended (S2425). If the transfer instruction has been set (S2425: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S2426).

  In the processing of S2426, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined in S2426 that the transfer process has not ended (S2426: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this normal image transfer setting process ( S2403) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2426: Yes), the process proceeds to S2427. Also, as a result of the processing in S2425, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S2425: No), the processing proceeds to S2427.

  In the process of S2427, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2427). If the transfer start flag is on (S2427: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S2428), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S2423 is set as the transfer target image, and the processing proceeds to S2438. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S2427: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold change command flag is on (S2429).

  If the hold change command flag is on (S2429: Yes), the prefetch command relating to the hold change notice is processed, and the hold change additional data table 232a2 for the hold change notice is set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, after the hold change command flag is set to OFF (S2430), it corresponds to the hold change notice determination flag in the ON state among the hold change notice determination flags provided for each hold change notice image type. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the pending change notice image are specified, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is specified ( S2431), image data indicated by the specified various types of information. On which the transferred image, the process proceeds to S2438. In S2431, when the image data of the pending change notice image corresponding to the pending change notice flag in the on state is transferred, all the pending change notice flags in the on state are set to off. It is configured.

  In the processing of S2429, if the pending change command flag is not on but off (S2429: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S2432). If the back image change flag is on (S2432: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S2433), the back image discrimination provided for each back type is set. Among the flags, the leading address (storage source top address) and the final address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination The head address of the (normal video RAM 236) is specified (S2434), and the image data indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2438.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S2434, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the back image change flag is regarded as off (S2432: No), and the processing proceeds to S2435.

  In the processing of S2432, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S2432: No), it is then determined whether or not the character change command flag is on (S2435). If the character change command flag is off (S2435: No), the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A).

  On the other hand, if the character change command flag is ON in the processing of S2432, (S2432: Yes) character design (reach occurrence character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, or pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) ), The character corresponding to the character change determination flag in the ON state among the character change determination flags provided for each character change image type after the character change command flag is set to OFF (S2436). Specify the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the symbol is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) (S2437); After the image data indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, S2 38 to the process of transition.

  In the processing of S2438, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2438). The determination in the processing of S2438 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233h. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 233h, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If it is determined that the image is stored in the image storage area 236a and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. .

  If the transfer target image is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S2438 (S2438: Yes), the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a. Since there is no need to transfer the image data, the normal image transfer setting process (S2404) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A). As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and to reduce traffic on the bus line 240. Mitigation can be achieved.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S2438 (S2438: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image is set (S2439). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S2439, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated (S2440), the normal transfer setting process (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 61A). As described above, the stored image determination flag 233h is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on” and in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process (S2403), the process for the pre-read command and the character command is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 50) executed previously. When the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the hold change notice image or the character change image indicated by the system command or the character command is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, the hold change notice image used in the additional data table 232a2 The image data of the character change image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process (see FIG. 50) executed previously, the image data used in the rear image is resident. Image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, and the display data table is displayed. A transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Here, in the transfer data table 232a3, the image to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. Data transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table 232a1 by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table 232a3, the drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for the image storage can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display is read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to display the corresponding effect on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the display data table 232a1. Further, by describing the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and surely transfer only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The transfer data table 232a3 defines the transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2026), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process (S2026), the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 49B) and the parameters (display position coordinates, magnification, The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated from the rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 49B). (S2501).

  That is, in the processing of S2501, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task processing. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 49B), the leading address of the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. (Storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236) are additionally written.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i are transmitted to the image controller (S2502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233i is “0”, the drawing target buffer flag 233i includes “1” including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. ”Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236). Then, the image data stored from the storage source head address to the storage source final address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Thereafter, in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being unused, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  The drawing process (S2026) updates the drawing target buffer flag 233i after the process of S2502 (S2503). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B). The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 49B) is executed.

  Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .

  Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, an execution example (display example) of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, the character display Se2 in reach, the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 will be described. .

  First, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a situation where the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed / restricted) in the loss variation effect. FIG. 64 shows a case where the chance restriction pattern 233p of the character display Se1 to Se3 is won by the post-restriction flag 233p described above while winning the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) for each character display Se1 in the effect of changing the loss executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a situation where the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed) to “white”.

  Specifically, FIG. 64A shows the state immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds. It is the figure which showed the state in which the character display Se1 at the time of reach | regeneration generation | occurrence | production which expressed the words emitted from the character design of the center small area | region Ds2 by the character is displayed on the left small area | region Ds1. In FIG. 64B, the “normal reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 64A, the sub display area Ds is deleted, and the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 64C, the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 64B, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is the figure which showed the state where the reach middle character display Se2 which expressed the line which is emitted from the character design of the player side with the letter is displayed. In FIG. 64D, the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 64C, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the third pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the left small area Ds1. The fixed phrase text display Se3 is a character that is generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. FIG. In FIGS. 64A to 64D, the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 64A, the third symbol “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol “7” symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. In the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still “not changed at high speed” so as to be invisible. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  In the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and the first chance up pattern “red” "Is displayed. More specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, “white”, which is the normal display color, is the line “Ikuze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2. To “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 64A, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display This means that “at the time of reach” is selected with respect to the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2. In FIG. 64A, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displays “weak pattern” of “Ikuze!”. Therefore, in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, This means that the “weak pattern” which is a normal character pattern is selected.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command and the display occurrence change command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the red character flag 233k is set based on the display red character command. The occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the occurrence change command for display.

  Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, at least the character pattern additional data table 232a2 (actually, FIG. 64 (c)) based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j (the “weak pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs). The character display additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and the character timing additional data based on the occurrence character color change flag 233n being turned on. The table 232a2 is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 (d), in the variation effects of FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (d), the late limit flag 233p is turned on, so in fact, as the additional data table 232a2. A character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored.

  FIG. 64B shows a state in which the “normal reach” variation element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 64A. In the variation element of “normal reach”, the “7” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. Is displayed.

  In the display state of FIG. 64B, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 in the display state of FIG. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c includes an additional data table 232a2 (additional data table for character change 232a2 of 3 (which actually includes the additional data table for character correction 232a2 4), which is equivalent to the storage state in FIG. The character change additional data table 232a2)) is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG. 64B is obtained.

  FIG. 64C shows a state in which the “super reach” variation element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 64B. In the “super reach” variation factor, the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variation factor is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A numerical symbol (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed. In addition, you may comprise so that the number symbol which shows the number of reservation balls of a variation effect may be displayed constantly during execution of a variation effect.

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed as a “weak pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db is deleted, the reach character display Se2 of “Kurae!”, Which is a speech uttered from the character design on the player side, is “white” which is a normal display color. "Is changed to" red "which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 64C, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the reach character display Se2 is also displayed in “red”. That is, in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence that has already been displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so the display color of the character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs. In FIG. 64C, the character display Se2 in the reach indicates “weak pattern” of “Kurae!”, So in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se2 in the reach, a normal character pattern This means that the “weak pattern” is selected.

  In the display state of FIG. 64C, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an additional command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIGS. 64A and 64B. Absent. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, an additional data table 232a2 equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) (additional data table for character change 232a2 in 3 (actually, a character correction addition) The third character change additional data table 232a2)) including the data table 232a2 is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  64 (d), from the state of FIG. 64 (c), the character design on the player side is defeated by the enemy character design and the main display area Dm is “ “Lose display” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the “lose display”, and the words emitted from the character design are displayed in the left small area Ds1. A fixed phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Sumane ...”, which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is “white” which is a normal display color. Is displayed.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 64D, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display. Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when the reach occurs” is selected, and further, the display effect of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is changed to “white” because the variation effect is “lost display”. It means that it has been modified (changed).

  When the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 64 (d), the player's character pattern is lost in the “battle presentation” of “super reach”, so that “super jack” is displayed in the “super reach”. It is predicted that “miss display” will appear without appearing. Further, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white”, the end of the variation effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable regarding the prediction of the “lost display”.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 should be displayed in “red” in accordance with the batch setting. Since the “lost display” appears, the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal display color instead of the chance up pattern.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command, the display occurrence change command, and the display fixed phrase normal command from the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the display red character command. The red character flag 233k is turned on, the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the display occurrence change command, and the late limit flag 233p is turned on based on the display regular phrase normal command. Is set. Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and a character color at the time of occurrence. This is a state where the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the change flag 233n being turned on and the character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the turn-on restriction flag 233p being stored (set), respectively.

  As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that the display red character command, the display occurrence change command, and the display fixed phrase normal command are transmitted without delay with the transmission variation pattern command and the display stop type command at the start of the variation effect, respectively. Has been sent from. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has already grasped the display contents related to the character displays Se1 to Se4 when starting the variation effect. Accordingly, the additional data table 232a2 for character correction based on the turn-on of the post-limit flag 233p at this time is the other additional data table 232a2 for character change at the stage (at least the state shown in FIG. 64A) at the start of this variation effect. At the same time, it is configured to be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  That is, regarding the fluctuation output shown in FIGS. 64A to 64D, at the start of the fluctuation production, one display data table 232a1 relating to the “super reach” production mode of the loss is stored in the display data table buffer 233b. In addition, the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the occurrence character color change flag 233n being turned on, and the late limit flag 233p being turned on. A character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can grasp the change effect to be displayed from now on and the contents of the effect to be added to the change effect at the start of the change effect. Can be performed.

  As described above, when the variation effect is determined by “losing display”, even if a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, The fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “reaching effect” of the variable element of “Super Reach” is configured not to appear a chance up pattern. That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a command for each of the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4 separately and transmits the command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 side receives the command. By adjusting the display control of each character display Se1 to Se4 based on this, the number of commands can be reduced as compared with the case where all variations of commands for each character display Se1 to Se4 are prepared in advance. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present pachinko machine 10, even when the chance display pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is “lost display”, the fixed phrase character display Se3 Is modified (rechanged) to the normal display color and displayed. Also in this case, after all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color correction contents of each character display Se1 to Se4 are determined, a command related to each character display Se1 to Se4 is generated with one command The number of commands corresponding to all display mode variations including the content to be corrected must be prepared in advance, and the number of commands may increase dramatically. Therefore, a command is generated separately for each character display Se1-Se4 character pattern, display color, change timing, and display color re-change contents, and each character display Se1- is displayed on the display control device 114 side based on the command. By adjusting the display control of Se4, it is possible to reduce the number of commands related to each character display Se1 to Se4 and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  In addition, since it is possible to execute a fluctuating effect that does not cause a flaw in the effect content simply by determining whether or not to add one additional data table 232a2, a comfortable game that does not make the player feel uncomfortable Can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the character pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k, the gold character flag 233m, the occurrence character color change flag 233n, the reach character color change flag 233o, and the late limit flag 233p are set. Each character change additional data table 232a2 is selected (selected), and the flags 233j to 233p are configured to be referred to only when the character change additional data table 232a2 is selected. Alternatively, the character change additional data table 232a2 may be directly selected (selected) when a command is received without using a flag or the like. By selecting (selecting) the character change additional data table 232a2 without using the flags 233j to 233p, it is not necessary to provide the RAM 233 with a capacity related to the flags 233j to 233k.

  Next, referring to FIG. 65, in the jackpot variation effect including the variation element of “revariation”, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (standard phrase character display Se3) is displayed as the chance-up pattern. Explain the situation. FIG. 65 shows that the chance increase pattern (for example, “red”) of each character display Se1 to Se4 is won in the jackpot variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the “revariation” variation element is executed. It is the figure which showed the condition where the display color of pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed before being performed is displayed with "red".

  Specifically, FIG. 65A is a state immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the sub display area Ds. It is the figure which showed the state in which the character display Se1 at the time of reach | regeneration generation | occurrence | production which expressed the words emitted from the character design of the center small area | region Ds2 by the character is displayed on the left small area | region Ds1. In FIG. 65B, the “normal reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 65A, the sub display area Ds is erased, and the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. It is the figure which showed the state. In FIG. 65 (c), the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 65 (b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is the figure which showed the state where the reach middle character display Se2 which expressed the line which is emitted from the character design of the player side with the letter is displayed. FIG. 65 (d) suggests that “border effect” is executed in the variation element of “super reach” from the state of FIG. 65 (c), and “losing display” appears in the “border effect”. It is the figure which showed the state in which the content is displayed. In FIG. 65 (e), the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 65 (d), the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the left small area Ds1. The fixed phrase text display Se3 is a character that is generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. FIG. FIG. 65 (f) is a diagram showing a state just before the “big hit display” appears when the “revariation” variable element is executed from the state of FIG. 65 (e). In FIGS. 65A to 65F, the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 65A, the third symbol “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol “7” symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. In the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still “in high speed fluctuation” so that it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “red” which is a “strong pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. It is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reach of “Ikeruze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “white” which is a normal display color. To “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 65A, “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of each character display Se1 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. This means that “red” is selected by winning the change lottery, and “when reach occurs” is selected in the lottery regarding the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1, Se2.

  Accordingly, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the “strong pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs (from FIG. 65C described later, the reach character display Se2 is also “strong pattern”) Therefore, the display strong character pattern command), the red character command for display, and the change command at the time of occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern” in the character pattern memory 233j , The red character flag 233k is set on based on the display red character command, and the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the display occurrence change command.

  Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and an occurrence character. The character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65B shows a state in which the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. In the variation element of “normal reach”, the “7” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. Is displayed.

  In the display state of FIG. 65 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 65 (a). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65C shows a state in which the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. In the “super reach” variation factor, the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variation factor is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A reach formation symbol of the number symbol indicating the number of balls (“4” in the first embodiment) is newly displayed.

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is erased, the reach character display Se2 that is a “strong pattern” line that is a word of “strong pattern” emitted from the character design on the player side is a normal one. The display color is changed from “white” to “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 65 (c), the “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of the reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display of each character display Se1 to Se3. The color change lottery is won and “red” is selected. Further, regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2, “when a reach occurs” is selected. It is displayed in “red”. That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence already displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so this character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs.

  In the display state of FIG. 65 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has additionally received a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display states of FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 65 (b). Absent. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (the character change additional data table 232a2 of 3) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (d), from the state of FIG. 65 (c), a “superior effect” is executed in the “super reach”, and the character design (left character design) on the player side is the enemy side in the “superior effect”. It is the figure which showed the state where the content which suggests that "losing display" appears appears losing to the character design (right character design).

  The display state of FIG. 65 (d) is a reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and is different from the reach formation symbol “8” in the central portion. "The symbol is stopped. That is, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting “miss display” with “787” is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is continuously displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. Yes.

  In the display state of FIG. 65 (d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c). Absent. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (three-character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 65 (e), from the state of FIG. 65 (d), the character design on the player side is defeated by the enemy character design and the temporary display in the main display area Dm in the “super-reaching” variable element “border effect”. “Miss display” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the temporary “lose display”, and the left small area Ds1 is emitted from the character design. A pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 that expresses words in characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 “Sumane ...”, which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is “white” which is a normal display color. "Changes to" red "and displayed.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 65 (e), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is also displayed in “red”. In other words, in the display colors of the reach occurrence character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 already displayed in this variation effect, a display color reflecting the display color change lottery result of the character display appears. The display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs and the character display Se2 during reach.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is also displayed in “red” in accordance with the change. In addition, in the variation production, a variable element of “temporary change” is performed from the temporary “losing display”, and “big hit display” appears, so that the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (standard phrase character) Even if the display Se3) is displayed in the chance-up pattern, the player is not distrusted, and there is no need to correct the display color of the chance-up pattern.

  Therefore, in the display state of FIG. 65 (e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally receives commands from the audio lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (d). Not done. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (three character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (d). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 65 (e), the player's character design is lost in the “battle presentation” of the variable element of “super reach” as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As a result, it is predicted that the “big hit display” will not appear in the variable element of the “super reach”, and the “losing display” will appear. However, since the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (the player recognizes it as the fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed in “red”, the player may Thus, the user feels uncomfortable, and re-predicts that some additional effect is executed instead of confirming the variation effect as “lost display”.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows a state in which the “revariation” variation element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 65 (e). In the variable element of “re-change”, the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and “lost display” that is stopped and displayed as “787” in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. Starts to fluctuate again, and is finally stopped at “777”, which is a “big hit display”. The player is surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of “re-variation” and, as estimated at the stage of FIG. Happiness and satisfaction can be obtained for the appearance of the “hits”.

  As described above, when the variation effect is determined as “big hit display”, when the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, The pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that are displayed after the “reaching” variation element is also configured to follow the chance-up pattern. That is, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “red” in the “big hit display” variation effect. By configuring in this way, there is no need to prepare additional commands in the jackpot variation production, and since there is no flaw in the production content in the first place, the player does not have excessive expectations, and the player A comfortable game without feeling distrust can be provided.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is confirmed by “lost display”, the chance up pattern (in the reach character display Se1 or in the reach character display Se2) For example, even if “red” is executed, the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “super-reach” variable element “due effect” is configured not to appear a chance-up pattern. That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Conventionally, in a configuration in which character display appears at a plurality of locations of variable effects, a lottery process for the appearing location is required if the chance up pattern is selected for each appearing location. As a result, the control becomes complicated and the processing load may increase. In addition, after the character display of the chance up pattern appears at the appearing place that is executed first in the variation effect, the character display of the normal pattern that is not the chance up pattern appears at the place that is executed later. The player who had become excited by the emergence of a chance-up pattern, because the expression of the jackpot expectation was reduced (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”), There is a risk of arousal.

  Therefore, the chance-up pattern lottery is performed at once for the variable effect character display, and if the chance-up pattern appears even once, the chance-up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform the lottery process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the chance up pattern is set, the chance up pattern is followed in the subsequent character display, thereby eliminating the phenomenon that the expression of falling down in the character display occurs, so that the player can enter the game. It can prevent being awakened. In particular, the more the number of character display appearance points (for example, five or more locations) that can execute the chance-up pattern in the variation production, the more the batch lottery works and the control burden is remarkably reduced. It becomes possible.

  However, when a plurality of chance-up patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are changed, for example, in the state where the “prohibition effect” is executed and the “lost display” appears in the variation effect, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is the chance. An up pattern (for example, “red”) may be displayed. In such a case, the player cannot execute the “change display” as it is because the fixed phrase display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern. Thus, it is predicted that “lost display” will change to “big hit display”. However, contrary to the prediction, the variation effect is determined as “losing display”, so that the player makes the pachinko machine 10 distrustful due to the flaw of the effect contents, and the pachinko machine 10 is There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect is determined by “lost display”, a chance-up pattern (for example, “red”) is displayed in the character display Se1 or the character display Se2 when the reach occurs. Even if it has been executed, the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “super effect” variable element of “super reach” is configured not to appear a chance up pattern. That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the variation element of “revariation” is executed in the variation effect, and it is determined whether or not the “hit display” is determined without being determined by “losing display”. When the variation element of “variation” is included, the variation effect is a big hit, so even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3), the player's mood is impaired. There is nothing. Therefore, when the chance up pattern is selected, the chance up pattern is displayed in the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3).

  On the other hand, when the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variable element, when the chance up pattern is selected, the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element, It is determined whether or not, and even when the “big hit display” is displayed, even if the chance up pattern is displayed on the fixed phrase character display Se3, the player is not disturbed. Therefore, when the chance up pattern is selected, the chance up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase text display Se3.

  However, if the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element and does not result in “big win display”, the player can display the chance increase pattern by displaying the chance increase pattern in the fixed phrase character display Se3. By recognizing, there is an excessive expectation that a “big hit display” may occur. Therefore, when the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element and does not become the “big hit display”, the standard phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal display color (“white”) that is not the chance up pattern. To do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, when the late limit flag 233p is set to on, the additional data for character correction corresponding to the on of the late limit flag 233p. The table 232a2 is determined, and the additional data table 232a2 for character correction is set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2203 in FIG. 55). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 is based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character change additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c. To create a drawing list.

  Thereby, by setting the character correction additional data table 232a2, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “reach display” “execution effect” is executed is the character display described above. Even if it is a chance-up pattern set by the character color additional data table 232a2 based on the winning of the display color change lottery, the character correction additional data table 232a2 displays the white color as the normal display color. Is done. Therefore, the character display additional data table 232a2 is created based on the setting contents of the late limit flag 233p, and the character display additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Alternatively, even when the reach character display Se2 is changed to the chance-up pattern and displayed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 can be corrected (rechanged) to the normal display color “white”. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is started, an effect mode (variation element) of the variation effect is determined, and based on the determination, the fixed phrase character display Se3 (pseudo fixed phrase character display) It is determined whether the display color of Se4) is displayed as the chance-up pattern or is corrected (rechanged) to the normal display color, and the display control device 114 is determined based on the determined content. Send regular command for display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust, The content of the character display that should appear in the variation effect can be notified to the display control device 114 at the start of the variation effect, and the display control in the variation effect can be reliably performed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 that is displayed when “reach display” is selected as the variation effect in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in detail. And it is comprised so that display control of each character display Se1-Se4 may be performed by transmitting a command to the display control apparatus 114 based on the determined content. Moreover, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern of each character display Se1, Se2, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, and the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 It is determined by separate lottery, and a command is generated and set as needed based on each determination.

  Temporarily, after determining the character pattern, display color and change timing of each character display Se1 to Se4, a command related to the character pattern, display color and change timing of each character display Se1 to Se4 is generated with one command. In this case, the number of commands corresponding to all variations of the character pattern, display color, and change timing must be prepared in advance, which may increase the number of commands. Therefore, a command is separately generated for each of the character patterns, display colors, and change timings of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and the display control of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is adjusted on the display control device 114 side based on the commands. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of commands related to each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  In particular, in the present pachinko machine 10, even when the chance display pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4 is selected, when the result of the variation effect is “lost display”, the fixed phrase character display Se3 Is modified (rechanged) to the normal display color and displayed. Also in this case, after all the character patterns, display colors, change timings, and display color correction contents of each character display Se1 to Se4 are determined, a command related to each character display Se1 to Se4 is generated with one command The number of commands corresponding to all display mode variations including the content to be corrected must be prepared in advance, and the number of commands may increase dramatically. Therefore, a command is generated separately for each character display Se1-Se4 character pattern, display color, change timing, and display color correction contents, and each character display Se1-Se4 is displayed on the display control device 114 side based on the command. By adjusting the display control, it is possible to reduce the number of commands related to each character display Se1 to Se4, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is erased during execution of the “super reach” variable element in which the reach character display Se2 is displayed, and the cockpit display area Db is erased. By configuring so that the reach character display Se2 is displayed in the area, the display content of the erased character display Se2 is not overlapped with other display objects while effectively using the display area of the erased cockpit display area Db. Can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the display contents of the reach character display Se2 easy to see for the player, and to make the effect contents of the variation effect be recognized accurately.

  Furthermore, by making a determination using the re-variation information stored in the re-variation information storage area 223i8 (223h8) at the stage of receiving the reserved ball number command, the variation element of “re-variation” can be immediately determined in the variation effect. It can be determined whether or not it is executed. Further, the presence / absence of the “re-change” variable element is stored in the re-change information storage area 223h8 (223i8) when the reserved ball number command is received, and thereafter, the re-change stored in the re-change information storage area 223h8 (223i8) is stored. Based on the information, the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 can be determined, and whether or not “hold change notice” can be executed at the timing of “after hold deletion” can be determined. The re-variation information can be effectively used in the execution determination.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the variation effect includes a variation element of “re-variation”, or does not include the variation element of “re-variation”, but displays “Large Win”, each character is displayed. When the chance up pattern of the display colors Se1 to Se4 is selected, the chance up pattern is displayed as it is in the fixed phrase character display Se3 and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4. Further, when the variation effect does not include the “revariation” variation element, or when it does not become “big hit display”, that is, when the variation effect becomes “lost display”, each character display Se1 to Se3. Even when the display color chance-up pattern is selected, the display color of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the normal display color.

  Here, when playing a game, a player is aiming for a jackpot state where a large number of balls can be acquired, but among the jackpot states, a `` probability variation state '' is additionally added after the jackpot state The game is performed with the primary expectation that a jackpot will be awarded. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a “probability variation state” or “2R probability variation jackpot” to which “probability variation state” is given after the jackpot state as a jackpot type, and “probability variation state” after the jackpot state. Is provided, but “15R normal jackpot” is provided, where the “time-reduced state” is granted, but the player is given “15R normal jackpot”, so The game is played with the expectation that “2R probable jackpot” will be awarded.

  This is because if the “probability fluctuation state” is given after the jackpot state, the winning probability of the jackpot will be higher than the “normal gaming state” and the next jackpot state will occur until the next jackpot state occurs. The state in which the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 (equivalent to opening extension in the “time reduction state”) continues. Then, if the next jackpot is also in the “probability variation state”, the transition to the gaming state is made again, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot states are chained, and the game value obtained by the chained jackpot is large. On the other hand, when the “time reduction state” is given after the big hit state, it is easy to enter the ball into the first entrance 64 by giving a predetermined number of “time reduction states”. The probability of jackpot occurrence itself has not changed. Therefore, if the jackpot is not won during the “time reduction state” that is performed a predetermined number of times, the gaming state will return to the “normal gaming state”, so there is a low possibility that the jackpot state will be continuously given. This is because there is little game value to be played. That is, the player is playing a game while expecting a jackpot to be given a “probability variation state” rather than a jackpot to be given a large number of temporary rounds. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting in the order of “15R probability variation jackpot”> “2R probability variation jackpot”> “15R normal jackpot” regarding the types of jackpot states obtained.

  In such a configuration, for example, when the variation effect is “15R normal jackpot”, if the chance up pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3, the player recognizes the chance up pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3. Then, based on the appearance of the chance-up pattern, the “15R normal jackpot” that is currently appearing is promoted to “15R probable big jackpot” etc. It is expected that the game value obtained will increase by developing into “15R probable jackpot” and “2R probable jackpot” without being confirmed with the jackpot symbol. However, contrary to that expectation, the “promotion” effect is not executed and the fluctuating effect is fixed with “15R normal jackpot”, so the player feels distrustful with the pachinko machine 10 due to the effect of the effect. At the same time, the game arcade where the pachinko machine 10 is installed may be distrusted, and the game may be interrupted immediately after the “time reduction state” ends.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, even if the “big hit display” occurs in the variation effect, the “big hit display” is “15R normal big hit” and the “promotion” effect is also performed. If not, the fixed phrase text display Se3 is configured not to display the chance-up pattern. That is, in the variation effect, it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is performed. If it is determined that the “promotion” effect is not performed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is a normal pattern. It is configured to display in a certain “white”. By configuring in this way, in the variable effect where “15R normal jackpot” is given in which the “promotion” effect is not executed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern, and is excessive for the player. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not impair the expectation and does not offend the player with the jackpot.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpots in the second embodiment will be described. 66 and 67 are diagrams schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpots stored in the ROM 202. FIG. The jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot is the variation pattern table 202e that is selected without fail when “15R probability variation jackpot” is won. Note that the big hit variation pattern table 202e1 for normal big hit that is selected when “15R normal big hit” is won is provided separately, but the description thereof is omitted here.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 of the second embodiment is divided into groups (groups) based on the selected effect mode, as in the first embodiment, and the “normal reach” effect mode is determined as the effect mode. “E5: Normal reach” and “E6: Super reach” are referred to when the “special reach” effect mode is determined. “E7: Special Reach” and “E8: Special Fluctuation”, which are referred to when the “special variation” effect mode is determined. Each of the divided groups is associated with a value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot of the second embodiment, “E5: normal reach” includes “normal reach only”, “pseudo gas + normal reach”, and “pseudo ream 1+” as in the first embodiment. In addition to the six fluctuation patterns of "normal reach", "normal reach + re-variation", "pseudo gasses + normal reach + re-variation", and "pseudo ream 1 + normal reach + re-variation" 6 variation patterns with effects are added, a total of 12 variation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable, and the variation type counter CS1 can be associated with each variation pattern.

  Here, as described above, the “promotion” effect is a jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” after the “border effect” of the variation effect when “15R probability variation jackpot” is confirmed and displayed in the variation effect. Is a change effect performed during a period from when the jackpot symbol corresponding to the “15R normal jackpot” is changed to the symbol corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot”. The present pachinko machine 10 is configured such that, when the “promotion” effect is performed, the jackpot symbol of “15R normal jackpot” is always changed to the jackpot symbol of “15R probability variable jackpot”. Further, the “promotion” effect is an effect that can be executed only when “15R Probable Bonus” is won, and when “15R Probable Bonus” is not won, that is, “lost display”, “15R normal jackpot” Alternatively, the “2R probability variation jackpot” is set so as not to be executed with a fluctuating effect that appears. In this pachinko machine 10, the variable element of the “promotion” effect is configured to be performed for 5 seconds, and the symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” is “15R probable jackpot” in the 5-second effect. Is changed to a symbol corresponding to "."

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern added to “E5: normal reach” includes “normal reach + promotion” with an overall fluctuation time of 20 seconds and “pseudo gasses + normal reach” with an overall fluctuation time of 30 seconds. + "Promotion", "pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + promotion" with an overall change time of 40 seconds, "normal reach + re-change + promotion" with an overall change time of 30 seconds, “Pseudo Gase + Normal Reach + Revariation + Promotion” and “Pseudo Ream 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation + Promotion” with an overall variation time of 50 seconds are provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E5: normal reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 4”, “pseudo gas + normal reach (for normal reach only (01H)”. 02H) "," 10-29 "for" Pseudo Ream 1 + Normal Reach (03H) "," 30-39 "for" Normal Reach + Revariation (04H) "," Pseudo “40-49” for “Gase + Normal Reach + Revariation (05H)”, “50-99” for “Pseudo-ream 1 + Normal Reach + Revariation (06H)”, “Normal Reach + Promotion (07H)” "100-104", "Pseudo gas + normal reach + promotion (08H)" "105-109", "Pseudo ream + normal reach + promotion (09H)" 110-129 ”,“ 130-139 ”for“ normal reach + revariation + promotion (0AH) ”,“ 140-149 ”for“ pseudo gasses + normal reach + revariation + promotion (0BH) ”,“ pseudo ” “150 to 199” for “ream 1 + normal reach + revariation + promotion (0CH)”.

  That is, in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach only (01H)” is 2.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasse + normal reach (02H)” is 2.5%, “pseudo ream 1+” The fluctuation pattern of “normal reach (03H)” is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach + revariation (04H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasses + normal reach + revariation (05H)” is 5%, The variation pattern of “1 + normal reach + revariation (06H)” is 25%, the variation pattern of “normal reach + promotion (07H)” is 2.5%, and the variation pattern of “pseudo gas + normal reach + promotion (08H)” is 2. 5%, "Pseudo-ream 1 + normal reach + promotion (09H)" variation pattern 10%, "normal reach + re-variation + promotion (0AH) ”Fluctuation pattern is 5%,“ pseudo gas + normal reach + re-variation + promotion (0BH) ”fluctuation pattern is 5%,“ pseudo ream + normal reach + re-variation + promotion (0CH) ”fluctuation pattern is 25%, It is set to be selected at a rate of.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, it is easy to select a variation pattern including a variation element of “revariation” (70% of the total). 06H) ”or“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Normal reach + Revariation + Promotion (0CH) ”is easily selected (two are 50% of the total). However, games that can expect big hits from any variation pattern by selecting “normal reach only (01H)” or “pseudo gas + normal reach (02H)” that does not include the “revariation” variation factor. Can provide sex.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the “normal reach” effect mode in the case of winning “15R probability variation jackpot” is configured such that the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect is selected with a probability of 50%. By configuring in this way, in the fluctuating effect, the “15R normal jackpot”, which is “bonus display”, is temporarily stopped, the first interest is given by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, “promotion” The second entertainment can be given by performing the production and “15R normal jackpot” becomes “15R probable jackpot”, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by playing an unexpected game.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot of the second embodiment, “E6: Super reach” is similar to the first embodiment, “super reach only”, “pseudo gasses + super reach”, “ "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach", "Pseudo Ream + Super Reach", "Super Reach + Revariation", "Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation", "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach + Revariation", In addition to the 8 variation patterns of “Pseudo-ream + Super Reach + Re-variation”, 8 variation patterns with “promotion” effect added to each of the above variation patterns are prepared, so that a total of 16 variation patterns can be selected. Each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern added to “E6: Super reach” includes “super reach + promotion” with an overall variation time of 30 seconds and “pseudo gasses” with an overall variation time of 40 seconds. + "Super Reach + Promotion", "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach + Promotion" with an overall change time of 50 seconds, and "Pseudo Ream 2 + Super Reach + Promotion" with an overall change time of 60 seconds. Is "Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion" with 40 seconds, "Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion" with an overall change time of 50 seconds, and "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super with an overall change time of 60 seconds" “Reach + Revariation + Promotion” and “Pseudo-ream 2 + Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion” with an overall variation time of 70 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E6: Super Reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0-4”, “Pseudo Gas ++” for “Super Reach Only (01H)”. "5-9" for "Super Reach (02H)", "10-29" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)", "30-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)" 49 ”,“ 50-59 ”for“ Super Reach + Revariation (05H) ”,“ 60-69 ”for“ Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation (06H) ”,“ Pseudo Ream 1 + Super Reach ” “70-84” for “+ revariation (07H)”, “85-99” for “pseudo-ream + superreach + revariation (08H)”, “superreach + promotion (09H)” "100-1 4 ”,“ 105-109 ”for“ pseudo gas + super reach + promotion (0AH) ”,“ 110-129 ”for“ pseudo ream + super reach + promotion (0BH) ”,“ pseudo ream + super "130-149" for "Reach + Promotion (0CH)", "150-159" for "Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0DH)", "Pseudo Gase + Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0EH) ) ”For“ 160-169 ”,“ Pseudo Ren 1 + Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0FH) ”for“ 170-184 ”,“ Pseudo Ren 2 + Super Reach + Revariation + Promotion (10H) ” Is “185 to 199”.

  That is, in the “super reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “super reach only (01H)” is 2.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gas + super reach (02H)” is 2.5%, The fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo-ream 1 + Super Reach (03H)” is 10%, the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo-ream 2 + Super Reach (04H)” is 10%, and the fluctuation pattern of “Super Reach + Re-variation (05H)” is 5%. The fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gas + super reach + re-variation (06H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo ream + super reach + re-variation (07H)” is 7.5%, “pseudo ream + super reach + re-variation Fluctuation pattern of “Variation (08H)” is 7.5%, Fluctuation pattern of “Super reach + promotion (09H)” is 2.5%, “Pseudo gasse + Super reach + Promotion (0AH) ”Fluctuation pattern is 2.5%,“ Pseudo-ream + Super Reach + Promotion (0BH) ”is 10%,“ Pseudo-Relax + Super Reach + Promotion (0CH) ”is 10%,“ Super 5% fluctuation pattern of “reach + revariation + promotion (0DH)”, 5% fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gasse + super reach + revariation + promotion (0EH)”, “pseudo ream + super reach + revariation + promotion” The variation pattern of (0FH) ”is selected at a rate of 7.5%, and the variation pattern of“ pseudo-continuous + superreach + revariation + promotion (10H) ”is selected at a rate of 7.5%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern including the “revariation” variation element and the variation pattern not including the “revariation” variation element are selected equally (50% each other). It has become so. In addition, a variation pattern including a variation element of “pseudo-continuation 2” is easily selected (35%). However, it is possible to select “super reach only (01H)” and “pseudo gas + super reach (02H)” which do not include the “revariation” variation factor and the “pseudo-ream 2” variation factor. , It can provide a game that can be a big hit from any variation pattern.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the “super reach” effect mode when “15R probability variation jackpot” is won, the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect is selected with a probability of 50%. By configuring in this way, in the fluctuating effect, the “15R normal jackpot”, which is “bonus display”, is temporarily stopped, the first interest is given by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, “promotion” The second entertainment can be given by performing the production and “15R normal jackpot” becomes “15R probable jackpot”, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by playing an unexpected game.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpot of the second embodiment, “E7: Special reach” includes “special reach only”, “pseudo gasses + special reach”, “ "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach", "Pseudo Ream 2 + Special Reach", "Special Reach + Revariation", "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation", "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach + Revariation", In addition to the eight fluctuation patterns of “Pseudo-ream + Special Reach + Re-variation”, eight fluctuation patterns with “promotion” effect added to each of the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns have been added, and a total of 16 fluctuation patterns can be selected. Each variation pattern is associated with a possible value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern added to “E7: Special Reach” includes “Special Reach + Promotion” with an overall variation time of 40 seconds and “Pseudo Gasket” with an overall variation time of 50 seconds. + Special Reach + Promotion ”,“ Pseudo-ream 1 + Special Reach + Promotion ”with an overall change time of 60 seconds and“ Pseudo-ream 2 + Special Reach + Promotion ”with an overall change time of 70 seconds Is "Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion" with 50 seconds, "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion" with an overall change time of 60 seconds, and "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special" with an overall change time of 70 seconds “Reach + Revariation + Promotion” and “Pseudo-ream 2 + Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion” with an overall variation time of 80 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, the correspondence between the variation pattern in “E7: Special Reach” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 4”, “Pseudo Gas ++” for “Special Reach Only (01H)”. "5-9" for "Special Reach (02H)", "10-19" for "Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)", "20-" for "Pseudo Ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)" 49 ”,“ 50 to 54 ”for“ Special Reach + Revariation (05H) ”,“ 55 to 59 ”for“ Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation (06H) ”,“ Pseudo Ream 1 + Special Reach ” “60-69” for “+ Revariation (07H)”, “70-99” for “Pseudo Ream + Special Reach + Revariation (08H)”, “Special Reach + Promotion (09H)” On the other hand, “100 to 104”, “105 to 109” for “pseudo gasses + special reach + promotion (0AH)”, “110 to 119” for “pseudo ream + special reach + promotion (0BH)”, "120-149" for "Pseudo Ream + Special Reach + Promotion (0CH)", "150-154" for "Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0DH)", "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Re "155-159" for "variation + promotion (0EH)", "160-169" for "pseudo-run 1 + special reach + re-variation + promotion (0FH)", "pseudo-run + special reach + re-change + “170 to 199” for “Promotion (10H)”.

  That is, in the “special reach” production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of “special reach only (01H)” is 2.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gas + special reach (02H)” is 2.5%, The fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo-ream 1 + Special Reach (03H)” is 5%, the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo-ream 2 + Special Reach (04H)” is 15%, and the fluctuation pattern of “Special Reach + Re-variation (05H)” is 2.5%. %, The fluctuation pattern of “pseudo gas + special reach + re-variation (06H)” is 2.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo ream + special reach + re-variation (07H)” is 5%, “pseudo ream + special reach” + Revariation (08H) "fluctuation pattern is 15%," Special Reach + Promotion (09H) "fluctuation pattern is 2.5%," Pseudo Gase + Special " The fluctuation pattern of “reach + promotion (0AH)” is 2.5%, the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo ream + special reach + promotion (0BH)” is 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo ream + special reach + promotion (0CH)” Is 15%, "Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0DH)" is 2.5%, "Pseudo Gase + Special Reach + Revariation + Promotion (0EH)" is 2.5%, Fluctuation pattern of "Pseudo-ream + Special Reach + Re-variation + Promotion (0FH)" is selected at 5%, and "Pseudo-ream + Special Reach + Re-variation + Promotion (10H)" is selected at a rate of 15%. Is set.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of jackpot, the variation pattern including the “revariation” variation element and the variation pattern not including the “revariation” variation element are selected equally (50% each other). It has become so. In addition, it is easy to select a variation pattern including a variation element of “pseudo-run 2” (60%). However, it is possible to select “special reach only (01H)” or “pseudo gas + special reach (02H)” that does not include the “revariation” variation factor or the “pseudo-ream 2” variation factor. , It can provide a game that can be a big hit from any variation pattern.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the “special reach” effect mode when “15R probability variation jackpot” is won, the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect is selected with a probability of 50%. By configuring in this way, in the fluctuating effect, the “15R normal jackpot”, which is “bonus display”, is temporarily stopped, the first interest is given by the occurrence of the jackpot game, and further, “promotion” The second entertainment can be given by performing the production and “15R normal jackpot” becomes “15R probable jackpot”, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by playing an unexpected game.

  In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e1 for probability variation jackpots of the second embodiment, “E8: Special variation” is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the variation effect including the “promotion” effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing an example of the variation effect of the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect in the second embodiment, and FIG. 68A shows only “super reach” in the second embodiment as a comparative example. 68 is a time chart showing the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3, and FIG. 68B shows the appearance timing of each character display Se1 to Se3 in “super reach + promotion” in the second embodiment. It is a time chart. In each time chart, the upper part of the time chart describes events such as variable elements and symbol stops in the variation effect along with the number of seconds, and each character display that appears in the variation effect in the lower part of the time chart. The names of Se1 to Se3 are described according to each appearance timing.

  As shown in FIG. 68, “at the time of reach occurrence” which is the appearance timing of the character display is the same as in the first embodiment, but after the fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” ends in the fluctuation effect, "Is a timing at which a fluctuation element is generated, and the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence corresponds to the character display of" at the time of reach occurrence ". In addition, “Leaching”, which is the appearance timing of the character display, means that, in the same way as in the first embodiment, the variable element of “super reach” (or the variable element of “special reach”) is being executed in the variable effect. This is the timing immediately before the “pronounced effect” indicating the content indicating “big hit display” or “losing display”, and the character display “Se2” corresponds to the character display “reach”.

  “Character stop”, which is the appearance timing of the character display, is a fixed display in the main display area Dm after any “reach display” (or “revariation” variation element) is executed in the variation effect. This is the timing at which the “big hit display” or “losing display” is displayed. In the case of “big jackpot display” including “promotion” effect, the “symbol temporary stop” means that after displaying a provisional “big jackpot display” (that is, the display result of “15R normal jackpot”). This is the timing before the “promotion” effect is executed. That is, the character display of “symbol stop” refers to the “promotion” effect when the “reach display” or “revariation” variable element ends, or when the “promotion” effect is executed. Is displayed as if the fixed phrase text display Se3 was emitted from the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds at each time point.

  In the second embodiment, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed at the time of “symbol stop” or “symbol temporary stop” excluding after the “promotion” effect is the display of the third symbol that is fixedly displayed in the main display area Dm. It is comprised so that it may display according to a result. Specifically, two types of character display are prepared, “Yataze!” Corresponding to “Big hit display” and “Sumane ...” corresponding to “Lost display” (FIG. 68 ( a)). In addition, this fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in a temporary “big win display” corresponding to this temporary “big hit display” even when a temporary “big hit display” appears before the “promotion” effect is performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 68B).

  In such a configuration, for example, when the variation pattern of “super reach only” in FIG. 68A is selected and the variation effect is “15R normal jackpot”, in the fixed phrase character display Se3 When the chance-up pattern is displayed, when the player recognizes the chance-up pattern in the fixed phrase display Se3, as shown in FIG. 68 (b) based on the appearance of the chance-up pattern, “15R normal jackpot” is promoted to “15R probable jackpot”, etc., and this fluctuating effect is not fixed with the “15R normal jackpot” jackpot design, We expect that it will develop into a “2R probable jackpot” and the gaming value obtained will increase. However, contrary to that expectation, the “promotion” effect is not executed and the fluctuating effect is fixed with “15R normal jackpot”, so the player feels distrustful with the pachinko machine 10 due to the effect of the effect. At the same time, the game hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed also raises distrust, and the game is immediately played after the “time reduction state” given by the “15R normal jackpot” is over. There is a risk of interruption.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, even when the “big hit display” occurs in the variation effect, the “big hit display” is “15R normal big hit”, and is shown in FIG. When the “promotion” effect is not performed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is configured not to display the chance-up pattern. That is, in the variation effect, it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is performed. If it is determined that the “promotion” effect is not performed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is a normal pattern. It is configured to display in a certain “white”. By configuring in this way, in the variable effect where “15R normal jackpot” is given in which the “promotion” effect is not executed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern, and is excessive for the player. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not impair the expectation and does not offend the player with the jackpot.

  Next, the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i in the second embodiment. The configuration of the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a “promotion” effect is provided in the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i, respectively. Promotion information storage areas 223h9 and 223i9 for storing promotion effect information indicating that the program is executed are provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the promotion information storage areas 223h9 and 223i9 are areas for storing promotion effect information indicating whether or not the “promotion” effect is executed in the variable effect. In this promotion information storage area 223h9, prefetch processing (pending display setting processing (see FIG. 70)) is performed based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the hold information storage X area. Promotion effect information generated based on the processing result is stored. In the execution information storage area 223i, when the shift process is executed in the hold information storage area 223h and the execution information storage area 223i, the counters stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h9 of the hold information storage first area The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) are moved and stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, at the start of the variation effect, the promotion effect information stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i is determined, and the promotion effect stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9. Based on the information, it is configured to control the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the hold display setting process (S1209) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the hold display setting process when the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In this hold display setting process, similarly to the first embodiment, each of the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the hold information storage X area indicated by the received hold ball number command is stored in the counters C1 to C3 similarly indicated by the hold ball number command. The value of CS1 is stored (see S1301 and S1302 in FIG. 70). Further, as in the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4, and determines the pending change information, The scenario data, the pending erasure information, and the re-variation information are stored in the respective storage areas 223h5 to 223h8 (see S1303 to S1312 in FIG. 70). On the other hand, as a difference from the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4, and promotes according to the determination result. The effect information is stored in the promotion information storage area 233h9 (see S1351 to S1353 in FIG. 70).

  Specifically, in the process of S1351 of the hold display setting process (S1209), it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is included in the change effect indicated by the currently received hold ball number command (S1351). In the second embodiment, when the variation effect does not include the “promotion” effect, the reserved ball number command is used to forcibly display the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variation effect as “white”. Is received, it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is included in the variation effect indicated by the reserved ball number command, and the determination result is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the hold information storage area 223h. It is configured.

  As a result of the processing of S1351, if it is a variation effect including a “promotion” effect (S1351: Yes), promotion effect information indicating that the “promotion” effect is performed with the change effect is promoted in the reserved information storage X area. The information is stored in the information storage area 223h9 (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1313. Here, the promotion effect information stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 is determined when the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the execution information storage area 223i is transferred, and the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is based on the determination result. It is determined.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1351, if the effect is a variation effect that does not include the “promotion” effect (S1351: No), the “promotion” effect is not executed in the change effect. Null data is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the holding information storage X area (S1353), and the process proceeds to S1313. In the process of S1353, by writing Null data in the promotion information storage area 223h9, for example, it is possible to prevent redundant use of information related to the “promotion” effect stored in the reserved information storage X area before writing, It is possible to prevent an occurrence of a production defect (for example, a problem caused by storing promotion effect information despite the fact that the effect is a variation of the loss that does not include the “promotion” effect).

  Next, the character color change restriction process (S1619) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a character color change restriction process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

  In the character color change restriction process (S1619) of the second embodiment, the result of the variation effect is “big hit display”, and the chance of “red” or “gold” is increased with respect to the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3. Even if the pattern is won and changed, if the change effect does not include the “promotion” effect, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected to “white” which is the normal display color ( Re-change). Even if the result of the variation effect is not “big hit display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (rechanged) to “white” which is the normal display color. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is not corrected (rechanged) by determining the presence / absence of a “revariation” variation element. Similarly to the embodiment, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 may be corrected (rechanged) by determining the presence or absence of the “revariation” variation element.

  In the character change restriction process (S1619) of the second embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the “big hit display” appears in the variation effect executed this time (S1751). This determination is made as to whether or not the variation effect stored in the RAM 223 in the process of S1202 of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) is an effect mode in which the “hit display” is performed, that is, “E5: normal reach”, “E6”. : Super reach ”,“ E7: Special reach ”, or“ E8: Special fluctuation ”.

  If it is determined in the process of S1751 that the “big hit display” is a varying effect that appears (S1751: Yes), then it is determined whether the “promotion” effect is included in the varying effect that is executed this time. (S1752). This determination is stored in the promotion information storage area 223h9 of the hold information storage area 223h in the process of S1352 or S1353 of the hold display setting process (see FIG. 70), and the execution information is stored by the subsequent shift process (see S1403 in FIG. 44). Whether or not the “promotion” effect is stored in the promotion effect information stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 of the area 223i, that is, “E507H” to “E50CH” is stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9. A fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation element of “normal reach” and a “promotion” effect, a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation factor of “super reach” and “promotion” production of “E609H” to “E610H”, Or “E709H” to “E710H” “special reach” variables and “promotion” Variation pattern including a fluctuation component of the presentation, information about it is determined whether or not stored.

  In the process of S1752, when it is determined that the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect is stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 (S1752: Yes), the “big hit display” appears in the variation effect. The “promotion” effect is executed, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” is changed to the jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R probability variable jackpot”. Therefore, even if the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears at the stage where the jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” is temporarily displayed in the fluctuating stage is displayed as the chance-up pattern, the “promotion” stage Is performed and a jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot” is obtained, so that the content of the production does not frustrate and the player is not distrusted. Therefore, the character color change restriction process (s1619) is terminated without changing the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1751 that the “big hit display” is not the changing effect that appears (S1751: No), the “spot display” is displayed instead of the “big hit display”. In this variation effect, if the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the chance-up pattern, there is a risk that the player may feel distrust due to the content of the effect. Therefore, in the processing of S1703, the display control device 114 is configured so that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is the normal display color regardless of whether or not the chance up pattern is set. A display standard phrase normal command for notifying to is generated and set (S1703), the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  Also, in the process of S1752, when it is determined that the variation pattern including the “promotion” effect is not stored in the promotion information storage area 223i9 (S1752: No), the “big hit display” appears in the variation effect. However, since the “promotion” effect is not performed, the result of the “big jackpot display” displayed when the “reach display” ends is determined as it is. In this variation effect, when a jackpot symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” is displayed, if the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed as a chance-up pattern, the chance-up pattern is displayed despite the chance-up pattern being displayed. Since the development effect such as the “promotion” effect is not executed, there is a risk that the content of the effect will be frustrated and the player may be distrusted. Therefore, in the processing of S1703, the display control device 114 is configured so that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is the normal display color regardless of whether or not the chance up pattern is set. A display standard phrase normal command for notifying to is generated and set (S1703), the character color change restriction process (S1619) is terminated, and the process returns to the character mode setting process (see FIG. 46).

  The display standard phrase normal command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 41). Is done. The display control device 114 receives this display fixed phrase normal command, and the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is the normal display color regardless of whether or not the chance up pattern is set. Recognizing that “white” is displayed, display control of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, when starting the variation effect, even if the “big hit display” appears in the variation effect, it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is executed, and based on the determination Then, it is determined whether the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed as the chance-up pattern, or is changed to the normal display color and displayed. When re-changing to the normal pattern, the display fixed phrase normal command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust, The content of the character display that should appear in the variation effect can be notified to the display control device 114 at the start of the variation effect, and the display control in the variation effect can be reliably performed.

In the second embodiment, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is not corrected. The pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is a character display that is displayed when the “re-variation” variation element is executed, and the variation effect including the “re-variation” variation element is always the “big hit display”. Therefore, after the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is displayed, the variable element of “revariation” is always executed and “bonus display” appears, and therefore, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 has the change of “revariation”. It can be said that the character display corresponds to the element. Therefore, since the variable element of “re-variation” is always executed after the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is displayed, it is not necessary to correct the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variation effect including the “promotion” effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 shows the “promotion” effect by winning the chance-up pattern (for example, “red”) of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the jackpot fluctuating effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the condition where the display color of fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed before is performed with "red" displayed.

  Specifically, FIG. 72 (a) shows that “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” in the third symbol corresponding to “15R normal big hit” in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Immediately after appearing, the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence showing the words uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in the left small area Ds1. It is a figure. In FIG. 72 (b), from the state of FIG. 72 (a), the variable element of “normal reach” in the third symbol corresponding to the “15R normal jackpot” is started, the sub display area Ds is erased, It is the figure which showed the state in which the fluctuation element of "normal reach" is performed in the display area Dm. In FIG. 72C, the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 72B, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is the figure which showed the state where the reach middle character display Se2 which expressed the line which is emitted from the character design of the player side with the letter is displayed. FIG. 72 (d) displays a content that suggests that a “big hit display” appears in the “spot effect” in the “super reach” from the state of FIG. 72 (c). It is the figure which showed the state performed. In FIG. 72 (e), the variation element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 72 (d), the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and “15R normal” is displayed in the main display area Dm. The “big jackpot display” of the third symbol corresponding to “big hit” appears, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that expresses the words emitted from the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds in the left small area It is the figure which showed the state currently displayed on Ds1. FIG. 72 (f) is a diagram showing a state immediately before the “Big jackpot display” of the third symbol corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot” appears when the “promotion” effect is executed from the state of FIG. 72 (e). It is. In FIGS. 72A to 72F, the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 72A, the third symbol of the “6” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol of the “6” symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. In the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still “not changed at high speed” so as to be invisible. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the “reach display” by the “6” symbol, which is the third symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot”, has appeared. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “red” which is a “strong pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. It is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reach of “Ikeruze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “white” which is a normal display color. Changes from “red” to “red”.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 72A, “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of each character display Se1 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. This means that “red” is selected by winning the change lottery, and “when reach occurs” is selected for the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

  Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command related to the “strong pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs from the sound lamp control device 113 (in FIG. 72 (c) described later, the character display Se2 during reach is also the “strong pattern”. Therefore, the display strong character pattern command), the red character command for display, and the change command at the time of occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern” in the character pattern memory 233j. , The red character flag 233k is set on based on the display red character command, and the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the display occurrence change command.

  Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and an occurrence character. The character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 (e), since the “promotion” effect is executed in the variation effect shown in FIG. 72, there is no need to correct the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3. Accordingly, in the variable effect shown in FIG. 72, the additional data table buffer 233c does not store the character correction additional data table 232a2 for correcting the display content of the fixed phrase character display Se3.

  FIG. 72B shows a state in which the “normal reach” variation element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72A. In the variable element of “normal reach”, the “6” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. Is displayed.

  In the display state of FIG. 72 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 72 (a). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 72C shows a state in which the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72B. In the “super reach” variable element, the reach formation symbol of “6” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A reach formation symbol of the number symbol indicating the number of balls (“4” in the first embodiment) is newly displayed.

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is erased, the reach character display Se2 that is a “strong pattern” line that is a word of “strong pattern” emitted from the character design on the player side is a normal one. The display color is changed from “white” to “red”.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 72 (c), “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of the reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display of each character display Se1 to Se3. The color change lottery is won and “red” is selected. Further, regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2, “when a reach occurs” is selected. It is displayed in “red”. That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence already displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so this character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs.

  In the display state of FIG. 72 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an additional command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display states of FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b). Absent. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (three-character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG.

  In FIG. 72 (d), from the state of FIG. 72 (c), a “spot effect” is executed in the variable element of “super reach”, and the player's character pattern (left character pattern) in the “spot effect”. It is the figure which showed the state where the content which suggests that it wins the character design (right side character design) of an enemy side and "big hit display" appears is displayed.

  The display state of FIG. 72 (d) is “6” symbol reach formation symbol displayed on the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and “6” is the same as the reach formation symbol at the center. "The symbol is stopped. In other words, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting a “big hit display” with “666” is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is continuously displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. Yes.

  In the display state of FIG. 72 (d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an additional command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display states of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c). Absent. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (three-character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 72 (e), from the state shown in FIG. 72 (d), the character design on the player's side wins the enemy character design in the “super-reaching” variable element, and the temporary display in the main display area Dm. Is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  Further, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed with a delightful expression due to the appearance of the temporary “big hit display”, and the left small area Ds1 is emitted from the character design. A fixed phrase character display Se3 that expresses words in characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. More specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Yetaze!”, Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is changed from “white” which is a normal display color. The color changes to “red”.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 72 (e), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is also displayed in “red”. In other words, in the display colors of the reach occurrence character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 already displayed in this variation effect, a display color reflecting the display color change lottery result of the character display appears. The display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 follows the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence and the character display Se2 during reach.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 should also be displayed in “red” in accordance with the batch setting, and the variation In the production, from the temporary “15R normal jackpot”, the “promotion” production is performed and the “15R probability variation jackpot” appears, so that the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “red” with the chance up pattern. It is configured.

  Thereby, in the display state of FIG. 72 (e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 additionally issues a command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display states of FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (d). Not received. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) an additional data table 232a2 (three character change additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (d). State. Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG.

  When the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 72 (e), as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the player's character pattern wins in the “battle presentation” of “super reach”, and the “ It is predicted that the “15R normal jackpot” that appears after “Super Reach” “Cream Production” will occur. However, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “red”, the player feels uncomfortable with the prediction that the “15R normal jackpot” will occur, and the variation effect is “15R normal jackpot”. It is re-predicted that some additional performance will be executed instead of confirming with "".

  FIG. 72 (f) shows a state where the “promotion” effect is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 72 (e). In the “promotion” effect, the main display area Dm is enlarged and the sub display area Ds is deleted, and “15R normal big hit”, which is stopped and displayed as “666” in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3, is dealt with. The “big hit display” in the third symbol starts to fluctuate again, and finally stops at “777” which is the “big hit display” in the third symbol corresponding to “15R probability variable big hit”. The player is surprised at the occurrence of the “promotion” effect, and as estimated at the stage of FIG. 72 (e), the change effect develops without being fixed at “15R normal jackpot”. Happiness and satisfaction can be obtained for the appearance of “big hit”.

  In this way, when the fluctuation effect is determined by executing the “promotion” effect and confirming with “big jackpot display” in the third symbol corresponding to “15R probability variation jackpot”, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence or the character display during reach When a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is being executed in Se2, the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “super effect” variable element of “Super Reach” follows the chance up pattern. Configure to display. That is, in the variable effect including the “promotion” effect, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears in a state where the third symbol corresponding to the temporary “15R normal jackpot” is displayed is displayed in “red”. Configure as follows. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare an additional command for the jackpot fluctuating effects including the “promotion” effect, and there is no flaw in the effect in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variation effect not including the “promotion” effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 shows that the chance display pattern (for example, “red”) for each character display Se1 to Se3 is won in the jackpot variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing a situation where the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected to “white” and displayed because the “big hit” is won and the “promotion” effect is not included.

  Specifically, FIG. 73A shows that “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” in the third symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot” in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 Immediately after appearing, the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence showing the words uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in the left small area Ds1. It is a figure. In FIG. 73 (b), from the state of FIG. 73 (a), the variable element of “normal reach” in the third symbol corresponding to the “15R normal jackpot” is started, the sub display area Ds is erased, It is the figure which showed the state in which the fluctuation element of "normal reach" is performed in the display area Dm. In FIG. 73 (c), the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 72 (b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is a diagram showing a state in which contents suggesting that a “big hit display” appears in the “superior effect” of the “super reach” are displayed. In FIG. 73 (d), the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 73 (c), the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and “15R normal” is displayed in the main display area Dm. The “big jackpot display” of the third symbol corresponding to “big hit” appears, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that expresses the words emitted from the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds in the left small area It is the figure which showed the state currently displayed on Ds1. 73 (a) to 73 (d), the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 73A, as in FIG. 72A, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of “6” is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. The third symbol of “6” symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is still “high-speed fluctuating” in the middle display area Dm2. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the “reach display” by the “6” symbol, which is the third symbol corresponding to “15R normal jackpot”, has appeared. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “red” which is a “strong pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. It is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reach of “Ikeruze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “white” which is a normal display color. Changes from “red” to “red”.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 73A, “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of each character display Se1 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. This means that “red” is selected by winning the change lottery, and “when reach occurs” is selected for the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2.

  Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least the command related to the “strong pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs (not shown, since the reach character display Se2 is also the “strong pattern” from the voice lamp control device 113. Display strong character command), a red character command for display, and a change command at the time of occurrence of display, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern” in the character pattern memory 233j. The red character flag 233k is set on based on the display red character command, and the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the display occurrence change command.

  Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and an occurrence character. The character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 performs display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG. 73 (a). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (d), in the variation effects of FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (d), the late limit flag 233p is turned on, so in fact, as the additional data table 232a2. A character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 73 (a). In the variable element of “normal reach”, the “6” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. 73 (a). Is displayed.

  In the display state of FIG. 73 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 73 (a). Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data table 232a2 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2 of 3 (which actually includes the additional data table 232a2 for character correction is also included 4) which is equivalent to the storage state in FIG. The character change additional data table 232a2)) is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so as to be in the display state of FIG. 73 (b).

  FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which a “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 73 (b). In the “super reach” variable element, the reach formation symbol of “6” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variable element is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A reach formation symbol of the number symbol indicating the number of balls (“4” in the first embodiment) is newly displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 73 (c), a “border effect” is executed in the variable element of “super reach”, and in this “border effect”, the character design on the player side (left character design) is the enemy character design. It is the figure which showed the state where the content which suggests winning (right-side character design) and appearing "big hit display" appears.

  In the display state of FIG. 73 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an additional command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display states of FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (b). Absent. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data table 232a2 (additional data table for character change 232a2 of 3 (which is actually added for character correction) is equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. In this state, four character change additional data tables 232a2)) including the data table 232a2 are stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so as to be in the display state of FIG. 73 (c).

  In FIG. 73 (d), from the state shown in FIG. 73 (c), the character design on the player side wins over the enemy character design in the “super effect” variable element of “Super Reach”, and “ The “big hit display” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed with a delighted expression by the appearance of the “big hit display”, and the words emitted from the character design are displayed in the left small area Ds1. A fixed phrase text display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal pattern. More specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Yet's!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “white” which is a normal display color. Is displayed.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 73 (d), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when a reach occurs” is selected, and furthermore, the fluctuating effect is “big hit display”, but “15R normal big hit” and “promotion” effect is executed This means that the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 has been corrected (changed) to “white”.

  When the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 73 (d), the “super jack” is displayed in the “super reach” because the character design on the player side has won in the “battle presentation” of “super reach”. Predict that it will appear. Further, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white”, it is recognized that the fluctuating effect ends with the “big hit display”.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 should be displayed in “red” in accordance with the batch setting. “Big jackpot display” appears, but “15R normal jackpot” appears without executing the “promotion” effect, so the fixed phrase character display Se3 is “white” which is not a chance-up pattern but a normal display color It is configured to be displayed.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received at least the display strength command, the display red character command, the display change command at the time of display, and the display fixed phrase normal command from the voice lamp control device 113, and the character When the reach occurrence character display Se1 and reach character display Se2 are set to “strong pattern” in the pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the display red character command, and when the display occurrence occurs The occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the change command, and the late limit flag 233p is set on based on the display fixed phrase normal command. Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and an occurrence character. This is a state in which the character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n and the character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the late limit flag 233p are stored (set), respectively.

  As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so as to be in the display state of FIG. 73 (d).

  In this way, when the fluctuating effect is “big jackpot display” and “15R normal jackpot” is executed without executing the “promotion” effect, the chance up pattern (in the reach character display Se1 or in the reach character display Se2 For example, even if “red” is executed, the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “super-reach” variable element “due effect” is configured not to appear a chance-up pattern. In other words, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern in “15R normal jackpot” in which the “promotion” effect is not executed even if the “jackpot display” variation effect. To do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, even when the “big hit display” occurs in the variation effect, the “big hit display” is “15R normal big win” When the “promotion” effect is not performed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is configured not to display the chance-up pattern. That is, in the variation effect, it is determined whether or not the “promotion” effect is performed. If it is determined that the “promotion” effect is not performed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is a normal pattern. It is configured to display in a certain “white”.

  Conventionally, if the chance effect pattern is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3 when the variation effect is “15R normal jackpot”, when the player recognizes the chance increase pattern of the fixed phrase character display Se3, the chance Based on the appearance of the up-pattern, the “15R regular jackpot” currently being promoted will be promoted to “15R probability variable jackpot” etc., and this variation will be confirmed with the “15R regular jackpot” jackpot design It is expected that the game value will be increased by developing into “15R probable jackpot” or “2R probable jackpot”. However, contrary to that expectation, the “promotion” effect is not executed and the fluctuating effect is fixed with “15R normal jackpot”, so the player feels distrustful with the pachinko machine 10 due to the effect of the effect. At the same time, the game arcade where the pachinko machine 10 is installed may be distrusted, and the game may be interrupted immediately after the “time reduction state” ends.

  Therefore, even if the “big jackpot display” occurs in the fluctuating effect, when the “big jackpot display” is “15R normal jackpot” and the “promotion” effect is not performed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 , It is configured not to display the chance-up pattern. By configuring in this way, in the variable effect where “15R normal jackpot” is given in which the “promotion” effect is not executed, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern, and is excessive for the player. It is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not impair the expectation and does not offend the player with the jackpot.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the fluctuation effect is executed by executing the “promotion” effect and determined by the “big jackpot display” in the third symbol corresponding to the “15R probability variation jackpot”, when the reach occurs When the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is executed in the character display Se1 or the reach character display Se2, also in the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “super effect” of the variable element of “super reach” Then, follow the chance-up pattern. That is, in the variable effect including the “promotion” effect, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears in a state where the third symbol corresponding to the temporary “15R normal jackpot” is displayed is displayed in “red”. Configure as follows. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare an additional command for the jackpot fluctuating effects including the “promotion” effect, and there is no flaw in the effect in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment has the same effect by the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db is deleted during execution of the “super reach” variable element, and the “battle effect” display content in the “super reach” variable element is displayed in the main display area. It is configured to display large on Dm and perform powerful performances. In addition, the “reach effect” such as the variable element of “super reach” is configured to display the reach character display Se2 in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is deleted. This reach character display Se2 can be changed from a “white” display color of the normal pattern to a “red” or “golden” chance-up pattern by lottery. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the variation effect in which “lost display” appears, even if the reach character display Se2 is displayed in a chance up pattern, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is not a chance up pattern but a normal pattern. The display color is changed to “white”, and is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol in the reserved symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is changed from “white” which is a normal display mode to “blue”. ”,“ Red ”, or“ Rainbow ”are configured to execute a“ pending change notice ”that can be changed to a chance-up pattern. By this “hold change notice”, the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol changes from the normal display mode (“white”) to another chance display pattern (for example, “blue”). It is configured to suggest to the player that the ratio of occurrence of “reach display” or “hit display” differs in the variation effect indicated by the holding symbol and the execution symbol.

  Here, the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db indicate the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation effect during standby or execution when the “hold change notice” is executed in the hold symbol and the execution symbol. In particular, with respect to the execution symbol, the result of “pending change notice” is displayed continuously (except when the cockpit display area Db is erased) during execution of the variable effect, so that the big hit expectation in the variable effect being executed is expected. The indicator is clearly showing the degree.

  In other words, the hold symbol and the execution symbol are display objects that can be confirmed immediately when the player wants to confirm (refute) the contents, and are suitable as an index display indicating the rough jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect. . Therefore, for example, the player predicts a rough jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect being executed based on the execution pattern of the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) in which the “pending change notice” is performed, Predicting the jackpot expectation of the entire variation effect by additionally converting the jackpot expectation of other notice displays such as the character displays Se1 to Se4 additionally appearing in the variation effect into the jackpot expectation of the above execution pattern And playing games.

  Therefore, the indicator display such as the execution symbol (pending symbol) is displayed immediately after the effect is finished even if it is erased (not visible) due to some effect being duplicated (executed). , And the display mode of the redisplayed indicator display should be the same as that before erasure (before visibility). If the redisplayed indicator display is changed from before deletion (before visibility), the player notices the change in the indicator display by changing the indicator display to be confirmed from time to time. This is because it is expected that some kind of production will be executed based on the change.

  Therefore, if the indicator display such as the execution symbol (pending symbol) is not additionally performed (for example, the “variation factor of“ re-change ”), if the indicator display is to be re-displayed, It is necessary to display in the same display mode as (before invisible). Specifically, when the execution symbol (holding symbol) is displayed in a normal pattern before erasure (before visual recognition), the normal symbol is displayed as it is after redisplay. If the execution symbol (holding symbol) is displayed in a chance-up pattern before erasure (before visibility), it is displayed as the chance-up pattern even after redisplay.

  On the other hand, each character display Se1 to Se4 displayed in the variation effect including “reach display” is a notice display displayed at a predetermined display (appearance) timing in the variation effect, and is displayed at the predetermined display timing. It is a fragmentary display that is erased after a certain period of time. That is, even if the player wants to confirm (refute) the content of the character displays Se1 to Se4, it cannot be confirmed after a certain time from the display timing, and after that certain time, Since the judgment is based only on the player's memory, it is not suitable as an indicator display.

  However, a fragmentary display such as each character display Se1 to Se4 is suitable for suggesting that there is a possibility that some effect may be exerted with respect to the effect performed at the timing immediately after that when it appears as a variable effect. Yes, it has a development suggestion function. In particular, when a fragmentary display such as each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in a chance-up pattern, the development suggestion function is emphasized (strongly appealed). Therefore, for example, when a fragmentary display such as each character display Se1 to Se4 appears, the player can display the content of the fragmentary display with respect to the jackpot expectation in the continuously displayed index display. The jackpot expectation degree is converted (summed) in order to determine the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuating effect, and the game is played with the expectation that some effect will be additionally performed by the development suggestion function by fragmentary display.

  As a result, the fragmentary display such as each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed when the additional presentation or the like (for example, the “variation factor of“ revariation ”) is not performed after the fragmentary display is displayed, When value is not given (for example, execution of jackpot game), it should not be displayed, but must be displayed for some reason (for example, supplemental notification of display results of variable effects such as boilerplate character display Se3) Even so, at least you should not display a chance-up pattern. If, in the above situation, the fragmentary display is displayed in a chance-up pattern, the player recognizes the fragmentary display of the chance-up pattern based on the development suggestion function of the fragmentary notice, This is because it is expected that some kind of production will be performed based on the appearance of the fragmentary notice.

  Therefore, each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, in particular, the fragmentary display such as the fixed phrase character display Se3 or the like is not additionally performed (for example, the “variable factor of“ revariation ”) or the game value is given to the player. Is not given (for example, execution of jackpot game), it should not be displayed, and even if displayed, it is configured not to display with a chance-up pattern. Specifically, even when the reach occurrence character display Se1 or the reach character display Se2 is displayed in the chance up pattern, if there is no “revariation” variation element, it is displayed after the “reproduction”, and the variation representation The fixed phrase text display Se3 responsible for supplementary notification of the display result is displayed in a normal pattern, not a chance-up pattern.

  In the first embodiment, regarding the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character pattern, display color, change timing, or display color re-change contents of each character display Se1 to Se4 drawn individually (standard phrase characters) Individual character change additions for each element of the display Se3 (normal pattern only) (hereinafter, elements such as the intensity pattern and display color, appearance timing, etc. constituting each notice are referred to as "effect elements") A data table 232a2 is set, and the character change additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, respectively, and display control is performed. In such a configuration, a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 relating to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are required for each effect element. In the first embodiment, a maximum of four types of additional data tables 232a2 are added to the additional data table buffer 233c. Need to be stored.

  Here, in the variation effect, in addition to each character display Se1 to Se4, a display regarding the reserved symbol and the execution symbol, a character appearance notice for causing a plurality of character symbols to appear, and a plurality of pattern division images (cut-in images) are displayed. There are a number of notice displays that are additionally displayed for variable effects such as cut-in notices to be displayed, and various effect elements (for example, number, display color, strength pattern, appearance timing, etc.) are also present in each notice display. It is provided in advance. Therefore, also in each of these notice displays, a plurality of types of additional data tables 232a2 are set for each effect element, and these additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, respectively, thereby executing display control of the variable effects. Is done.

  However, as the number of effects (notices) to be added increases and the number of effect elements of each effect (notice) increases, the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be set increases in proportion to the additional data table buffer 233c. There is a risk that the storage capacity will be tight, and it becomes necessary to increase the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c in advance at a cost. Further, when a large number of additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to increases when a drawing list is created (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63). There is a possibility that the processing load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may increase.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to select one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all effect elements of the effect (notice) for each effect (notice), and the selection thereof. By storing the added additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the display control of the variation effect is executed. Specifically, for example, as an additional data table 232a2 relating to the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, one addition that summarizes the character pattern, display color, change timing, and display color correction contents of each character display Se1 to Se4 The data table 232a2 is set. Further, for example, as the additional data table 232a2 related to the display mode of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol, the one additional data table 232a2 in which the number of the reserved symbols and the execution symbols, the content of the “holding change notice”, and the change timing are selected is selected.

  The selected additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c are stored. Refer to and create a drawing list. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effects (notice). As a result, the number of additional data tables 232a2 can be reduced, the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c need not be increased with the increase in the number of effects (notices), and the cost can be suppressed.

  Further, at the time of creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to may be only the number of presentations (notices). The processing burden on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  Further, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 is clearly defined by displaying indicators such as a reserved symbol and an execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as each character display Se1 to Se4. Separately configured. By configuring in this way, in the display object of the hold symbol and the execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and each character display Se1 to Se4, the display object is erased (not visible) and redisplayed In addition, display control is performed by clearly dividing the display object that is an indicator display that can be redisplayed with the chance-up pattern and the display object that is a fragmentary display that should not be displayed again with the chance-up pattern. be able to. In particular, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice) at the time of design and development of the pachinko machine 10, the additional data table 232a2 relating to the display object that may be displayed in the chance up pattern at the time of redisplay or the chance at the time of redisplay. Since it is possible to design the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 while grasping whether the display object should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as production content defects.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, initial setting (default setting) in the display data table 232a1 is performed, and “white” that is a normal display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is used as a character pattern. “Weak pattern” is set. In addition, as the initial setting (default setting) of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol, a display color of “white” is set, and in the reserved image setting process (see FIG. 59B), the initially set reserved symbol and execution symbol. Is set.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment, and the illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted.

  Details of the additional data table 232a2 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional character data table 232a2 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 schematically illustrates an example of the additional data table 232a2 for holding according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. The additional data table 232a2 of the third embodiment is a time lapse relative to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 (sound lamp control device 113). The display content to be displayed is described.

  As described above, the third embodiment is configured such that one additional data table 232a2 is set for one unit of production (notice). Specifically, for example, one character additional data table 232a2 (see FIG. 74) is set for the character (serif) notice by each character display Se1 to Se4 appearing in the “reach display”. In addition, for example, regarding the execution design and the holding design that suggests the jackpot expectation degree in the corresponding changing production by the existence of the running production of the fluctuation, the existence of the fluctuation production of waiting, or the “pending change notice”. One additional data table for holding 232a2 (see FIG. 75) is set.

  The additional character data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 74 is prepared in correspondence with the display modes related to all the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the “reach display” of the variation effect, and specifically, each character display Se1. Character data additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to all patterns of all effect elements of the character pattern, display color, change timing, and display color change contents of Se4 are stored in the data table storage area 232a, respectively.

  In the character additional data table 232a2, as in the first embodiment, each character display Se1 to Se4 corresponding to the address specified in the display data table 232a1 corresponding to one frame to be added at the time indicated by the address. The contents of the images (drawing contents) are stipulated in detail. The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite (character design 1, character design 2, etc.) that is a display object to be displayed as an image of each character display Se1 to Se4 for one frame, and the sprite. Depending on the type, drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined. ing.

  The additional character data table 232a2 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 74 exemplifies a table corresponding to a variation pattern of “super reach only”. For example, a variation effect of “super reach only” (for example, “ E301H ”(see FIG. 20B)), which is set in correspondence with the variation time of 25 seconds.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 74, the character type (sprite type) is associated with one character symbol (character symbol 1) in association with the address “01F4H” (10 seconds from the start of variation) defined in the display data table 232a1. ), Display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. This character design 1 corresponds to the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence that is displayed at the time when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation effect variation, that is, at the beginning of the variation element of “normal reach”.

  On the other hand, when there is no character display Se1 to Se4 to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table 232a1, the character additional data table 232a2 displays the character display to be added corresponding to the address. Null data indicating that Se1 to Se4 do not exist is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” or “02EEH” in FIG. 74). The address “02EEH” is an address corresponding to 15 seconds from the start of fluctuation, that is, corresponds to the start timing of the fluctuation element of “super reach”. At the “super reach” timing, none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is displayed, and thus Null data is defined.

  Further, in association with the address “044CH” (22 seconds from the start of change) defined in the display data table 232a1, for one character design (character design 2), the character type (sprite type), display position, and enlargement The rate, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. This character design 2 corresponds to the character display Se2 during reach that is displayed when 22 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation effect variation, that is, when the “super-reach” variation element “execution effect” is executed.

  Further, in association with the address “04B0H” (24 seconds from the start of change) defined in the display data table 232a1, for one character design (character design 3), the character type (sprite type), display position, and enlargement The ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. This character design 3 is displayed when 24 seconds have passed since the start of the variation effect variation, that is, at the timing when the variation element of “super reach” ends and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed. This corresponds to the fixed phrase character display Se3.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the additional character table for character 232a2, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table 232a1, and is the final address of the additional data table for character 232a2. (In the example of FIG. 74, “04E2H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address “04E2H” in which the “End” information is described, an effect to be specified in the additional data table 232a2 for characters. The corresponding drawing contents are described.

  The MPU 231 of the third embodiment includes character commands (pattern commands, color commands, timing commands, and display boilerplates) related to the character displays Se1 to Se4 received from the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of the variation effect. Command) is received, and after all display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 are determined, the character additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicated by the character commands is stored in the data. The data is read from the table storage area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Specifically, when a character command is received, a waiting process is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds), and when a character command is received during the waiting process, the character received first is received. Based on the system command and the character system command received during the standby process, the additional character data table 232a2 is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to define all the display modes of the character displays Se1 to Se4 with one additional character data table 232a2.

  Instead of selecting one character additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 is provisionally selected for each display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4, and all the additional data tables 232a2 are selected. After that, all the additional data tables 232a2 may be combined to generate one character additional data table 232a2 to be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, after selecting one additional character data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 may be selected so as to partially correct the display mode.

  Next, the additional data table for holding 232a2 shown in FIG. 75 is prepared corresponding to the display state of the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol, and the holding symbol. Specifically, whether or not the cockpit display region Db is displayed and executed A plurality (for each pattern) of additional data tables 232a2 for holding corresponding to all patterns of all effect elements of the number of symbols and holding symbols and the display colors of execution symbols and holding symbols are respectively stored in the data table storage area 232a. Stored.

  This additional data table for holding 232a2 should be added at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table 232a1 in the same manner as the additional data table for character 232a2 (similar to the first embodiment). The contents (drawing contents) of the image of the cockpit display area Db for one frame, the execution symbol, and the reserved symbol are defined in detail. The drawing content includes the sprite type for each sprite (cockpit image, execution symbol, holding symbol 1, etc.) that is to be displayed as the image of the cockpit display area Db, execution symbol and holding symbol for one frame. In addition to prescribing, the third symbol display device 81 draws sprites such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information is defined.

  75, the additional data table for holding 232a2 of the third embodiment is similar to the additional data table for character 232a2, and corresponds to the variation pattern of “super reach only”. It is set corresponding to the time corresponding to the change time of the change effect (for example, “E301H” as the change pattern. See FIG. 20B), that is, the change time of 25 seconds.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 75, one execution symbol and four reserved symbols (in the example of FIG. 75, the reserved symbols are associated with the address “0001H” defined in the display data table 232a1 (immediately after the start of change). On the other hand, drawing information corresponding to each sprite is defined for each address.

  One execution symbol and four reserved symbols are displayed on the front side of the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db, and for each of the one execution symbol and the four reserved symbols, the sprite type (execution) Design type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

  On the other hand, when the execution symbol and the holding symbol are not displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1, the holding additional data table 232a2 sets the translucent value to the highest value and sets the execution symbol and the holding symbol. It may be set so that the reserved symbol becomes transparent and cannot be visually recognized. When the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are not displayed (erased), predetermined deletion data (for example, “Erasse” is displayed in the additional data table 232a2. ”Data etc.) can be set, and when the predetermined erase data is set at a predetermined address, the execution symbol and the suspended symbol are hidden (erased) at the timing indicated by the address. May be.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the additional data table for holding 232a2, contains “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the additional data table for character 232a2 (display data table 232a1). “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described in the final address (“04E2H” in the example of FIG. 75) of the additional data table 232a2. For each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address “04E2H” in which the “End” information is described, an effect that should be specified in the additional data table for holding 232a2 The corresponding drawing contents are described.

  The MPU 231 of the third embodiment is a command for changing the display mode of the execution symbol or the hold symbol received from the sound lamp control device 113 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or when the variation effect is started. (Display change command for lighting on hold, hold change command for display shift, change command for display start, change command before display reach, change command after display reach and change command after erase for display. These commands are shown below. Are collectively referred to as a “pending change command”), the holding additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the execution symbol indicated by the holding change command and the display mode of the holding symbol is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. By configuring in this way, it is possible to specify all display modes of the execution symbol and the holding symbol in the one additional data table 232a2 for holding, and when the holding change command is received, the holding symbol or the execution symbol Can be changed, and the gaming state can be accurately suggested to the player.

  When the MPU 231 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. The data is read from the table storage area 232a and stored in the display data table buffer 233b. At this time, when a character command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, one additional character data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 indicated by the character command is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Further, when the hold change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the cockpit display area Db indicated by the hold change command, the execution symbol, and one hold additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display manner of the hold symbol are stored in the data. The data is read from the table storage area 232a and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  Each time the pointer 233e is updated, one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and the additional character table 232a2 for characters and the additional data table for holding 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c are used. The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233e is specified, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) is created.

  For example, in the example of FIGS. 74 and 75, when the pointer 233e becomes “0001H”, the MPU 231 adds the address of the holding additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites defined by the address “0001H” of the display data table 232a1. A drawing list is created by adding sprites such as a cockpit image, an execution symbol, and a holding symbol 1 defined in “0001H”, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

  Null data is defined in the address “0001H” of the additional character data table 232a2. Therefore, the MPU 231 determines that there is no display object to be added for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4, and adds the address of the additional data table for holding 232a2 to the various sprites defined in the address “0001H” of the display data table 232a1. A drawing list is created by adding various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  Further, when the pointer 233e becomes “01F4H”, the MPU 231 executes the execution symbol defined in the address “01F4H” of the holding additional data table 232a2 in the various sprites defined in the address “01F4H” of the display data table 232a1. In addition to adding each sprite such as the reserved symbol 1, etc., a drawing list is created by adding each sprite of the character symbol 1 (character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence) defined in the address “01F4H” of the character additional data table 232a2. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol indicated by the additional data table for holding 232a2 are displayed, and the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence indicated by the additional data table for character 232a2 is displayed.

  When the pointer 233e becomes “02EEH”, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on various sprites defined in the address “02EEH” of the display data table 232a1, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. To do. On the other hand, Erase data is defined for both the address “02EEH” of the additional data table for holding 232a2 and the address “02EEH” of the additional data table for character 232a2. Therefore, the MPU 231 determines that there is no display object to be added regarding the execution symbol, the reserved symbol 1, the character symbol, and the like, and draws based on various sprites defined in the address “02EEH” of the display data table 232a1. Create a list. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the cockpit image, the execution symbol, and the reserved symbol are deleted (not displayed), and all the character displays Se1 to Se4 are deleted (not displayed).

  When the pointer 233e is “044CH”, the MPU 231 adds the character design defined in the address “044CH” of the additional character data table 232a2 to the various sprites defined in the address “044CH” of the display data table 232a1. 2 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, Erase data is defined in the address “044CH” of the additional data table for holding 232a2. Therefore, the MPU 231 determines that there is no display object to be added with respect to the execution symbol, the reserved symbol 1, and the like. A drawing list is created by adding various sprites defined in the address “044CH”. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the reach character display Se2 indicated by the additional character data table 232a2 is displayed, while the cockpit image, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are erased (not displayed).

  When the pointer 233e becomes “04B0H”, the MPU 231 adds the cockpit image specified by the address “04B0H” of the holding additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified by the address “04B0H” of the display data table 232a1. In addition to adding sprites such as execution symbol, hold symbol 1 and the like, a drawing list is added by adding each sprite of character symbol 3 (standard phrase character display Se3) defined in the address “04B0H” of the character additional data table 232a2. And instruct the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the cockpit display area Db indicated by the holding additional data table 232a2 and the execution symbol and the holding symbol are displayed again, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 indicated by the character adding data table 232a2 Is displayed.

  Thus, for each effect (notice), one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all effect elements of the effect (notice) is set, and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. In this way, the display control of the variation effect is executed. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effects (notice). As a result, the number of additional data tables 232a2 can be reduced, the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c need not be increased with the increase in the number of effects (notices), and the cost can be suppressed.

  Further, at the time of creating a drawing list (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to may be only the number of presentations (notices). The processing burden on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  Further, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 is clearly defined by displaying indicators such as a reserved symbol and an execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as each character display Se1 to Se4. Separately configured. By configuring in this way, in the display object of the hold symbol and the execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and each character display Se1 to Se4, the display object is erased (not visible) and redisplayed In addition, display control is clearly divided between the display object that is an indicator display that can be redisplayed in the chance-up pattern and the display object that is a fragmentary display that should not be redisplayed in the chance-up pattern. It can be carried out. In particular, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice) at the time of design and development of the pachinko machine 10, the additional data table 232a2 relating to the display target object that may be displayed in a chance-up pattern at the time of redisplay, Since it is possible to design the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 while grasping the additional data table 232a2 related to the display object that should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as flaws in the production contents.

  In the third embodiment, the content of the additional data table for holding 232a2 is configured to be displayed with priority over the content of the additional data table for character 232a2. This is because the additional data table for holding 232a2 indicates a gaming state such as a holding symbol or an execution symbol, while the additional data table for character 232a2 indicates one effect mode of the variation effect. Therefore, it is configured such that the reserved symbol or the execution symbol indicating the gaming state is displayed with priority over each character display Se1 to Se4, and the gaming state can be accurately suggested to the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se3 which is a fragmentary display in the third embodiment, and the display of the execution symbol and the hold symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db which is an index display The aspect will be described. FIG. 76 shows a normal display pattern in the fixed phrase character display Se3 while winning the chance up pattern of each character display Se1 and Se2 in the variation effect of the loss executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment. On the other hand, it is a figure showing the situation where "hold change notice" is executed in the execution symbol.

  Specifically, FIG. 76A shows a state immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds. The character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence expressing the words uttered from the character design of the central small region Ds2 in the form of characters is displayed in the left small region Ds1, and is displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0 of the cockpit display region Db. It is the figure which showed the state where "red change notice" of "red" is displayed in the execution design. In FIG. 76B, the “normal reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. 76A, the sub display area Ds is deleted, and the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a state where “red” “pending change notice” is continuously displayed in the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. In FIG. 76 (c), the variable element of “super reach” is started from the state of FIG. 76 (b), the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is the figure which showed the state where the reach middle character display Se2 which expressed the line which is emitted from the character design of the player side with the letter is displayed. In FIG. 76D, the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 76C, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed in the left small area Ds1, and a fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and is displayed in the left small area Ds1. It is the figure which showed the state where "red" "hold change notice" is continuously displayed in the execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display area Db0 of the display area Db. In addition, in FIG. 76 (a)-FIG.76 (d), the display mode of the 3rd symbol is abbreviate | omitted and expressed.

  First, in FIG. 76A, the third symbol “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol “7” symbol is displayed in the right display region Dm3. In the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still “not changed at high speed” so as to be invisible. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is displayed in “red”, and each reserved symbol displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 is “ It is displayed in “white”. Therefore, in the execution symbol, “red” “holding change notice” is being executed.

  In the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and the first chance up pattern “red” "Is displayed. More specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, “white”, which is the normal display color, is the line “Ikuze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2. To “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 76 (a), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 wins the “lottery change notice” execution lottery in the variation effect corresponding to the execution symbol, and “red” is selected and executed. The execution timing of “Pending change notice” has arrived at the timing before the reach of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the symbol, that is, when the reserved symbol is displayed, or when the execution symbol is displayed (shift) or before the reach. I mean.

  In addition, “red” is selected in the display color change lottery of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the change timing of the display color of each character display Se1 and Se2 is selected. This means that “when reach occurs” is selected. In FIG. 76 (a), the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displays “weak pattern” of “Ikuze!”, So in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, This means that the “weak pattern” which is a normal character pattern is selected.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives from the sound lamp control device 113 the display reserved ball number command related to the number of reserved balls and the prefetching-type command related to “hold change notice”. The number determination flag corresponding to the command is set to ON, and the hold change notice determination flag corresponding to the prefetch command relating to “hold change notice” is set to ON.

  In addition, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least a display red character command and a display change command at the time of occurrence of display as commands related to the character displays Se1 to Se4 from the sound lamp control device 113. The red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the red character command, and the occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the display occurrence change command.

  Accordingly, in the additional data table buffer 233c, at least the holding additional data table 232a2 based on the ON of the number determination flag and the ON of the holding change notice determination flag, the ON of the red character flag 233k, and the occurrence character color change flag 233n. The character additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 renders the drawing based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the holding additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (d), in the variation effects of FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (d), the late limit flag 233p is turned on. As 232a2, a character additional data table 232a2 reflecting the ON state of the late limit flag 233p is stored.

  FIG. 76B shows a state in which the “normal reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 76A. In the variation element of “normal reach”, the “7” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. Is displayed, and “red” “pending change notice” is continuously displayed in the execution symbol.

  In the display state of FIG. 76 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has not additionally received a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 76 (a). Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data table 232a2 (the holding additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 76A is stored (set). is there. Therefore, the MPU 231 uses the drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the holding additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create Then, the image controller 237 performs display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG.

  FIG. 76C shows a state in which the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 76B. In the “super reach” variation factor, the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variation factor is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A numerical symbol (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed.

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed as a “weak pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db is deleted, the reach character display Se2 of “Kurae!”, Which is a speech uttered from the character design on the player side, is “white” which is a normal display color. "Is changed to" red "which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 76C, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the reach character display Se2 is also displayed in “red”. That is, in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence that has already been displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so the display color of the character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs. In FIG. 76 (c), the character display Se2 in the reach indicates “weak pattern” of “Kurae!”, So in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se2 in the reach, a normal character pattern This means that the “weak pattern” is selected.

  In the display state of FIG. 76 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an additional command from the sound lamp control device 113 for the display states of FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b). Absent. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (the holding additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b). ). Therefore, the MPU 231 uses the drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the holding additional data table 232a2 and the character additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 76 (d), from the state of FIG. 76 (c), the character design on the player side is defeated by the enemy character design in the “super effect” variable element “Super Reach”, and “ “Lose display” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In the re-displayed cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 are displayed in “red” as before the deletion, and the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 are displayed. Each reserved symbol displayed in is also displayed in “white” as before being erased. Therefore, in the execution symbol, “red” “pending change notice” is continuously executed.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the “lose display”, and the words emitted from the character design are displayed in the left small area Ds1. A fixed phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Sumane ...”, which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is “white” which is a normal display color. Is displayed.

  That is, the display state of FIG. 76 (d) means that the display state before the cockpit display area Db is erased by the execution of the “super reach” variable element is displayed again without change. ing.

  In addition, the display state of FIG. 76 (d) indicates that “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display. Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when the reach occurs” is selected, and further, the display effect of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is changed to “white” because the variation effect is “lost display”. It means that it has been modified (changed).

  When the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 76 (d), the character pattern on the player's side is lost in the “battle presentation” of the variable element of “super reach”. It is predicted that “display” will appear instead of “display”. In addition, since the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is in the same display state as before being erased by the execution of the “super reach” variation element, the end of the variation effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable. . Further, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white”, the end of the variation effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable with respect to the prediction of the “lost display”.

  If the display mode at the time of redisplaying the execution symbol is changed from the display mode before the execution symbol is deleted, the player notices that the change has occurred, and the change is recognized as a further “pending change notice”. However, it is expected that some kind of production will be executed by the “pending change notice” based on the change. However, because the “miss display” is confirmed in a form that betrays that expectation, changing the execution pattern from the display mode before erasure causes a habit in the production content, and the player can While causing the pachinko machine 10 to be distrusted, the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed may also be distrusted, which may interrupt the game.

  Therefore, when the variation effect is confirmed by “losing display”, if the execution symbol (holding symbol) is erased by the “super-reach” variable element, etc., and displayed again, the display mode before erasure is increased. Even if it is displayed as a pattern, it is configured to display it in the display mode displayed before erasure (see FIGS. 76B and 76D). That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display mode of the execution symbol (holding symbol) is configured to be the same display mode before erasure and at the time of redisplay. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  In addition, when the variation effect is confirmed by “lost display”, even if a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is executed in the character display Se1 or the character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence, In the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “due effect” of the variable element “”, the chance-up pattern is configured not to appear. That is, in the variation effect of “losing display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the indicator display such as the execution symbol (holding symbol) is displayed when the effect or the like (for example, the “variable factor of“ revariation ”) is not additionally executed. Even in such a case, when the indicator display is displayed again, it is configured to display in the same display mode as before erasure (before visibility). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  In addition, each character display Se1 to Se4, in particular, the fragmentary display such as the fixed phrase character display Se3 or the like is not performed additionally (for example, a variable element of “re-change”) or the game value to the player Is not displayed with a chance-up pattern when a bonus is not given (for example, execution of a jackpot game). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production contents from becoming hazy, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Further, in setting the additional data table 232a2, the additional data table 232a2 is clearly defined by displaying indicators such as a reserved symbol and an execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and fragmentary displays such as each character display Se1 to Se4. Separately configured. By configuring in this way, in the display object of the hold symbol and the execution symbol (cockpit display area Db) and each character display Se1 to Se4, the display object is erased (not visible) and redisplayed In addition, display control is clearly divided between the display object that is an indicator display that can be redisplayed in the chance-up pattern and the display object that is a fragmentary display that should not be redisplayed in the chance-up pattern. It can be carried out. In particular, when setting the display mode of each effect (preliminary notice) at the time of design and development of the pachinko machine 10, the additional data table 232a2 relating to the display object that may be displayed in the chance up pattern at the time of redisplay or the chance at the time of redisplay. Since it is possible to design the configuration of the additional data table 232a2 while grasping whether the display object should not be displayed in the up pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as production content defects.

  Also, for each effect (notice), one additional data table 232a2 corresponding to all effect elements of the effect (notice) is set, and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. The display control of the variation effect is executed. With this configuration, the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c is only the number of types of effects (notice), and the additional data table 232a2 is set for each effect element of the effects (notice). It is possible to reduce the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and it is not necessary to increase the capacity of the additional data table buffer 233c as the number of presentations (notices) increases, thereby reducing costs. can do.

  Furthermore, when the drawing list is created (see S2501) in the drawing process (see FIG. 63), the number of additional data tables 232a2 to be referred to is only the number of effects (notice). The processing burden on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same effects by the same configuration as the first to second embodiments.
<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is drawn using the additional data table 232a2 (and the transfer data table 232a3) for one display data table 232a1. A list is created, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by adding the effect indicated by the additional data table 232a2 to the basic effect indicated by the one display data table 232a1.

  In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the data tables 232a4 to 232an (n is a natural number of 5 or more) grouped for each image (sprite) or scene (scene) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same shall apply hereinafter), and each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an is configured to provide a large number of display patterns. Then, the display control device 114 selects a display pattern from each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an based on an effect instruction (command) such as a change effect from the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the selected display pattern. A drawing list is created so as to draw with a predetermined priority. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute a production rich in variations of the number obtained by multiplying the number of data tables 232a4 to 232an and the number of display patterns provided in each data table 232a4 to 232an. .

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the data tables 232a4 to 232an of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the configuration of the data tables 232a4 to 232an in the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the fourth embodiment, the data tables 232a4 to 232an are grouped for each image (sprite) or scene (scene) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, a computer graphics (Computer Graphics, hereinafter referred to as “CG”) image of a background image such as the back A displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “animation”). A background image data table 232a4 for displaying the animation, and a cockpit image data table 232a5 for displaying the animation of the cockpit display area Db, a symbol data table 232a6 for displaying the animation of the third symbol, and a character symbol Character data table 232a7 for displaying the animation of character, and character design data table 2 for displaying the animation of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, the character display Se1 during reach, the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 2a8, a reserved symbol data table 232a9 for displaying an animation of a reserved symbol (including an execution symbol, the same applies hereinafter), an error symbol data table 232a10 for displaying an animation of an error symbol, etc. There are a large number of grouped data tables 232a4 to 232an.

  The data tables 232a4 to 232an are stored in the data table storage area 232a of the program ROM 232, and a large number of display patterns are associated with each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an.

  When the display control device 114 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 selects one display pattern from each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an according to the command and stores it in each buffer (not shown) of the work RAM 233. To do. A drawing list is created based on the display pattern stored in each buffer based on a counter value (not shown) of a switching counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233.

  Each data table 232a4 to 232an has a predetermined priority order (for example, priority order 1 to priority order 12), and the priority order is set when a drawing list (see FIG. 81) described later is created. Based on this, a drawing list is created with reference to each buffer (not shown) corresponding to each data table 232a4 to 232an. That is, when one image overlaps another image at a predetermined drawing position, the display contents indicated by the data tables 232a4 to 232an having a high priority (low priority number) are displayed in the front (front side). Side).

  Specifically, as shown in the example of FIG. 77, the background image data table 232a4 is associated with “priority order 12”, which is the lowest priority, and the cockpit image data table 232a5 is based on the background image data table 232a4. “Priority order 11” having a higher priority is associated,..., “Priority order 5” having a higher priority than the data table (not shown) of “priority order 6” is associated with the symbol data table 232a6. The character data table 232a7 is associated with “priority order 4” having a higher priority than the symbol data table 232a6, and the character symbol data table 232a8 is associated with “priority order 3” having a higher priority than the character data table 232a7. Attached to the reserved symbol data table 232a9. Priority than Le 232a8 associated high "priority 2" is associated has the highest priority "Priority 1" to the error pattern data table 232A10.

  Next, referring to FIG. 78 to FIG. 80, when the display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the variation pattern “normal reach only”, the display pattern selected for each of the data tables 232a4 to 232an. An example will be described. FIG. 78A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the background pattern 1 of the background image in the “normal reach only” variation pattern of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 78B is the diagram of the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the cockpit pattern 1 of the cockpit image in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach only".

  78 to 80, background pattern 1 is selected from background image data table 232a4, cockpit pattern 1 is selected from cockpit image data table 232a5, symbol pattern 1 is selected from symbol data table 232a6, and character symbol data A case where the character pattern 1 is selected from the table 232a8 will be described. As described above, the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of “normal reach only” is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 receives each variation of the data table based on the reception of the display variation pattern command. The display pattern corresponding to the variation effect of “normal reach only” is selected from 232a4 to 232a7. This time, an example in which the background pattern 1, the cockpit pattern 1, the pattern pattern 1, and the character pattern 1 are selected will be described. . Note that description of other data tables 232a4 (character data table 232a7, reserved symbol data table 232a9, etc.) is omitted.

  In each display pattern, a “display order” indicating the display order, a “switching counter value” corresponding to the “display order”, and a “scene” corresponding to the “display order” are defined. In “scene”, “time” indicating the display time of each “target data” constituting the “scene”, “target data” indicating the type of image data, a transfer source address (not shown), and the like. “Parameter” indicating the display position coordinates of the “target data”, the transfer destination address (not shown), and the drawing method of the “target data” are clearly displayed “display” or “transparent” Display information of “transparent”, “enlarged display” displayed in an enlarged manner, “display mode” indicating “non-display” not displayed, and “summary” in the “scene” are defined. In each display pattern, each time a switching counter value (to be described later) reaches a “switching counter value” assigned to each “scene” according to the “display order”, the “scene” is the next “display order”. “Scene” is switched to be displayed.

  Here, the switching counter in the fourth embodiment will be described. The switching counter of the fourth embodiment has a function similar to that of the pointer 233e in the first embodiment, and the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image is displayed from the display pattern stored in each buffer (not shown) of the work RAM 233. This is for designating a “scene” from which data transfer data information is to be acquired.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 once initializes the switching counter to “0” as the data tables 232a4 to 232an are stored in the buffer (not shown). Then, the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame. In the display setting process (see FIG. 57), a counter update process (not shown) is executed, and the value of the switching counter is incremented by one. The MPU 231 initializes the value of the switching counter to “0” every time the “scene” is switched, that is, every time the “switching counter value” associated with each “scene” is reached. The “scene” is switched to the “scene” corresponding to the next “display order”.

  The MPU 231 uses the display patterns of the data tables 232a4 to 232an stored in the buffers (not shown) to display the drawing contents (“target data”, “parameter”, “display” defined in the “scene” indicated by the switching counter. A mode ") is specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 81) described later is created, and a predetermined parameter to be transferred at that time from the" parameter "associated with the" target data "of the" scene " Transfer data information regarding sprite image data (information for transferring image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236) is acquired, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add. Specifically, a new drawing list is created by adding transfer data information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display pattern of the data tables 232a4 to 232an stored in each buffer (not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the display pattern of each data table 232a4 to 232an is stored in each buffer, and the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display pattern based on the command or the like. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when there is transfer data information in the “parameter”, the data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the sprite corresponding to the transfer data information before the drawing of the corresponding predetermined sprite is started. The image data that has not been stored can always be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the background pattern 1 of FIG. 78A, the “display order” is composed of only “1”, and “switch counter value” = “750” and “scene” = “display order” of “1”. “Scene 001” is associated. Accordingly, the display of the background image is controlled by the “scene 001” of 1 until the value of the switching counter reaches “750”, that is, for 750 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 15 seconds. I mean.

  Specifically, in “Scene 001”, “CG”, which is “target data”, is “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds). And “display mode” is defined as “display” at the position of display coordinates (x1, y1) defined as “parameter”, and display control is performed. Thereafter, a total of 15 background images in the entire main display area Dm based on “target data”, “parameter”, and “display mode” for each “time” in the order defined by “scene 001”. Displayed for seconds.

  In the cockpit pattern 1 of FIG. 78 (b), similarly to the background pattern 1, the “display order” is composed of only “1”. And “scene” = “scene 101”. Therefore, the display control of the cockpit image is performed until the value of the switching counter reaches “750”, that is, for 750 × 20 milliseconds (frames) = 15 seconds. I mean.

  Specifically, in the “scene 101”, the “cockpit symbol” which is the “target data” first is “time” between “750” (ie, 750 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 15 seconds). ), The display coordinates (x50, y1) defined as “parameters” are displayed with the “display mode” defined as “display”, and the cockpit image is totaled in the cockpit display area Db on the lower side of the display screen. Displayed for 15 seconds.

  In the symbol pattern 1 of FIG. 79, “display order” is composed of “1” to “4”, and “switching counter value” = “350” and “scene” with respect to “display order” of “1”. ”=“ Scene 201 ”,“ Switching counter value ”=“ 150 ”and“ Scene ”=“ Scene 202 ”are associated with“ Display order ”of“ 2 ”, and“ 3 “Display counter” is associated with “switch counter value” = “200” and “scene” = “scene 203”, and “display order” of “4” "=" 50 "and" scene "=" scene 204 "are associated with each other, and thereafter, the process ends.

  Therefore, in “scene 201” corresponding to “1” of “display order”, the value until the value of the switching counter reaches “350”, that is, 350 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 7 seconds, This means that the display of the third symbol is controlled. In this “scene 201”, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the “high-speed fluctuation” variable element of the third symbol. ing. Further, in “scene 202” corresponding to “2” of “display order”, until the value of the switching counter reaches “150”, that is, 150 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 3 seconds, This means that the display of the third symbol is controlled. In this “scene 202”, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the variable element of “slow fluctuation” of the third symbol. ing. Further, in “scene 203” corresponding to “3” of “display order”, until the value of the switching counter reaches “200”, that is, 200 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 4 seconds, This means that the display of the third symbol is controlled, and in this “scene 203”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation (scroll) of the third symbol in the variation element of “normal reach”. It is configured as follows. In “scene 204” corresponding to “4” of “display order”, the value until the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, that is, 50 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 1 second. This means that the display of the 3rd symbol is controlled. In this “scene 204”, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the fixed stop display of the 3rd symbol in the variation element of “normal reach”. It is configured as follows.

  Specifically, in “scene 201” whose “display order” is “1”, “left data”, “left symbol”, “ Display coordinates defined as “parameters” when the “right symbol” and the “middle symbol” are “time” between “20” (that is, 20 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.4 seconds), respectively. Display control is performed so as to be “displayed” as the “display mode” at the positions (x10, y50), (x90, y50), (x50, y50)). That is, each symbol image (previous stop result) is stopped and displayed at the stop position of each symbol Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm for 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the “scene 201”, the “target data” “left symbol”, “right symbol” and “middle symbol” are “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame). ) = 0.2 seconds), the “display mode” is “half” at the position of the display coordinates defined as “parameter” (respectively (x10, y51), (x90, y51), (x50, y51)). Display control is defined as “transparent”. That is, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is in a “high-speed fluctuation” state, and each third symbol drawn in a translucent state is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the initial stop position to another coordinate. Is displayed in the correct state. Therefore, the display object arranged on the back side of each 3rd symbol can be seen through each 3rd symbol because each 3rd symbol is translucent. In this state, the third symbol is configured to be difficult to visually recognize, and the previous stop symbol is replaced with the current stop symbol.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “350” defined by the “switching counter value”, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are in the order defined by the “scene 201”. Each of the symbol images is controlled to be displayed, and in this “scene 201”, “high-speed fluctuation” is executed for a total of 7 seconds. When the value of the switching counter reaches “350”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 201” to “scene 202”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in the “scene 202” whose “display order” is “2”, the “left pattern” as the “target data” is “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame) =). For 0.2 seconds), the “display mode” is defined as “display” at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y99) defined as “parameter”, and the display is controlled. In the “scene 202”, the “right symbol” and the “middle symbol” as the “target data” are “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds). The display mode is defined as “translucent” at the position of the display coordinates defined as “parameter” (respectively (x90, y99), (x50, y99)). That is, the variation pattern of the third symbol in the main display area Dm is in the “low-speed variation” state, and the third symbol in the left symbol column Z1 is displayed clearly visible from the upper part of the main display region Dm, and the middle symbol column In the right symbol rows Z2 and Z3, the third symbols drawn translucently are displayed in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the upper part of the main display area Dm.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “150” defined by the “switching counter value”, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are in the order defined by the “scene 202”. Each of the symbol images is controlled to be displayed, and in this “scene 202”, “low speed fluctuation” is executed for a total of 3 seconds. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “150”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 202” to “scene 203”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in “scene 203” with “display order” “3”, “left symbol” and “right symbol” as “target data” are “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 mm). Second (frame) = 0.2 seconds), “display mode” is “enlarged display” at the position of display coordinates defined as “parameter” ((x10, y99), (x90, y99), respectively). Display control. In “scene 203”, “medium pattern” as “target data” is “time” for “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds), “ At the position of display coordinates (x50, y99) defined as “parameter”, the “display mode” is defined as “display” and the display is controlled. In other words, the variation pattern of the third symbol in the main display area Dm is in the “normal reach” state, and the third symbols of the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 are enlarged and displayed at a predetermined stop position, and the middle symbol is displayed. In the column Z2, the third symbol in the “low speed fluctuation” state is displayed in a state visible to the player from the upper part of the main display area Dm.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “200” defined by the “switching counter value”, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are in the order defined by the “scene 203”. In the “scene 203”, the effect until the stop of the middle symbol in the variation element of “normal reach” is executed for a total of 4 seconds. When the value of the switching counter reaches “200”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 203” to “scene 204”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in “scene 204” whose “display order” is “4”, “left symbol”, “right symbol” and “middle symbol” which are “target data” are “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 milliseconds (frame) = 0.2 seconds), at display coordinates defined as “parameter” (respectively (x10, y50), (x90, y50), (x50, y50)) , “Display mode” is defined as “display” and display control is performed. That is, the variation pattern of the third symbol in the main display area Dm is in the “temporary stop” state, and the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “50” defined by the “switching counter value”, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm are in the order defined by the “scene 204”. In the “scene 204”, a stop display effect of each symbol in the variable element of “normal reach” is executed for a total of 1 second. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, the “scene 204” is ended, and the entire effect relating to the symbol pattern 1 is ended.

  In the character pattern 1 of FIG. 80, “display order” is composed of “1” to “4”, and “switching counter value” = “500” and “scene” with respect to “display order” of “1”. ”=“ Scene 000 ”,“ switching counter value ”=“ 50 ”and“ scene ”=“ scene 301 ”are associated with“ display order ”of“ 2 ”, and“ 3 “Display counter” is associated with “switch counter value” = “150” and “scene” = “scene 000”, and “display order” of “4” "=" 50 "and" scene "=" scene 302 "are associated with each other, and thereafter, the process ends. Note that “scene 000” indicates that the “display mode” of the “target data” is “non-display”, that is, the state is not visible.

  Therefore, in “scene 000” corresponding to “1” of “display order”, any character display is performed until the value of the switching counter reaches “500”, that is, 500 × 20 frames = 10 seconds. Is also displayed, and in the “scene 000”, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display the character displays Se1 to Se4. In the “scene 301” corresponding to “2” of the “display order”, the character design 1 is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, that is, 50 × 20 frames = 1 second. This means that the display is controlled. In the “scene 301”, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the character display Se1 when reach occurs. In “scene 000” corresponding to “3” of “display order”, any character display is performed until the value of the switching counter reaches “150”, that is, 150 × 20 frames = 3 seconds. Is also displayed, and in the “scene 000”, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display the character displays Se1 to Se4. In the “scene 302” corresponding to “4” of the “display order”, the character design 3 is displayed until the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, that is, 50 × 20 frames = 1 second. This means that the display is controlled. In the “scene 302”, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display the fixed phrase text display Se3.

  Specifically, first, in “scene 000” having “display order” “1”, “target data” does not exist (denoted as “−”), and “display mode” is defined as “non-display”. Therefore, during “500” as “time” (that is, between 500 × 20 frames = 10 seconds), display control is performed such that none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The state defined by “scene 000” (that is, “non-display”) is maintained until the value of the switching counter reaches “500” defined by “switching counter value”. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “500”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 000” to “scene 301”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in the “scene 301” with the “display order” of “2”, the “character data 1” as the “target data” is “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 frames = 0.2). During the second), the “display mode” is defined as “display” at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y90) defined as “parameter”, and the display is controlled. That is, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence corresponding to the character design 1 is displayed for 0.2 seconds at the position of the small left region Ds1 of the sub display region Ds.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “50” defined by the “switching counter value”, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs in the left small area Ds1 in the order defined by the “scene 301”. In this “scene 301”, the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs for a total of 1 second. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 301” to “scene 000”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in “scene 000” having “display order” “3”, “target data” does not exist (denoted as “−”), and “display mode” is defined as “non-display”. During “150” as “time” (ie, 150 × 20 frames = 3 seconds), the display control is performed such that none of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The state defined by “scene 000” (that is, “non-display”) is maintained until the value of the switching counter reaches “150” defined by “switching counter value”. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “150”, the “scene” is switched from “scene 000” to “scene 302”, and the value of the switching counter is initialized to “0”.

  Next, in “scene 302” with “display order” “4”, “character pattern 3” as “target data” is “time” between “10” (that is, 10 × 20 frames = 0.2). During the second), the “display mode” is defined as “display” at the position of the display coordinates (x10, y90) defined as “parameter”, and the display is controlled. That is, the fixed phrase character display Se3 corresponding to the character design 3 is displayed for 0.2 seconds at the position of the small left region Ds1 of the sub display region Ds.

  Thereafter, until the value of the switching counter reaches “50” defined by the “switching counter value”, the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the left small area Ds1 is the content in the order defined by the “scene 302”. Display control is performed, and in this “scene 302”, the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed for a total of 1 second. Then, when the value of the switching counter reaches “50”, the “scene 302” is ended, and the entire effect relating to the character pattern 1 is ended.

  Next, a drawing list in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list at the time of occurrence of a “normal reach” variation element in the variation pattern of “normal reach only” according to the fourth embodiment.

  When the MPU 231 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 selects one display pattern from each of the data tables 232a4 described above according to the command, and refers to the value of the switching counter in the selected display pattern. However, the drawing list shown in FIG. 81 is created in accordance with a predetermined priority set for each display pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 81, “scene 001” of the background pattern 1 is extracted as the background image in order of increasing priority of the sprite, and “scene 101” of the cockpit pattern 1 is extracted as the cockpit image. “Scene 203” of symbol pattern 1 is extracted as (third symbol),... “Scene 301” of character symbol 1 is extracted as a character symbol, and detailed “target data” and “parameter” of each sprite are extracted. The drawing information (detailed information) such as “is described. Although not shown in the drawing, the drawing list of the fourth embodiment is similar to the drawing list of the first to third embodiments, and the predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image video 236 for the image controller 237. Transfer data information to be transferred to the storage area 236a is also described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffers 236b and 236c by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite with the lowest priority can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite with the highest priority can be arranged on the most front side.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the data table 232a4 grouped for each image (sprite) or scene (scene) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is provided. In the data table 232a4, a large number of display patterns are provided. Then, the display control device 114 selects a display pattern from each data table 232a4 based on an effect instruction (command) such as a change effect from the audio lamp control device 113, and a predetermined pattern based on the selected display pattern. Create a drawing list to draw in priority order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute effects rich in variations of the number obtained by multiplying the number of data tables 232a4 and the number of display patterns provided in each data table 232a4.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same effects as the first embodiment to the third embodiment.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the variation effect, the display mode of each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 is changed in accordance with the jackpot expectation level of the variation effect. While the change form of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is maintained and displayed, in the case of a loss, the fixed phrase character display Se3 that appears after the “bright effect” is changed from the change form to the normal display form (that is, “white”). It is configured to be displayed after being corrected.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when an abnormal state occurs in the gaming state, an abnormal sound (warning sound) is output from the audio output device 226 in order to suggest the abnormal state to the player, An error character display Se5 that suggests to the player that an abnormality (error) has occurred in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is in an abnormal state, and the cause of the abnormality is indicated to the player. It is structured to suggest.

  Here, the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 appearing in the variation effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation effect, while the error character display Se5 is a pachinko machine regardless of the variation effect lottery. 10 is determined on the basis of the abnormality that has occurred, and the display mode is determined by independent control.

  However, when the error character display Se5 is displayed in the variation effect, each character display Se1 to Se4 that appears in the variation effect and the display mode of the error character display Se5 are displayed in an unrelated display mode. Then, the player may misunderstand the jackpot expectation or abnormal state in the variation effect.

  Specifically, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same system color as the chance up pattern even though the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variation effect are not displayed in the chance up pattern. In this case, the player mistakes for the chance-up pattern by witnessing the display color of the error character display Se5, and expects that a big hit will occur in the variation effect. On the other hand, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same display color of the normal display color that is not the chance up pattern although the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4 in the variation effect are displayed in the chance up pattern. In such a case, the player misunderstands that the expectation degree of jackpot in the variation effect is lowered by observing the display color of the error character display Se5, and the player is awakened to the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicating the degree of jackpot expectation in the variation effect, an error character display Se5 for notifying abnormality in the gaming state during the variation effect is present. When it comes out, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is configured to synchronize with the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4. Specifically, when the variable effect is a big hit and each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in a chance up pattern, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same system as the chance up pattern. Is displayed. Further, when the variation effect is lost, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 are displayed in a chance-up pattern, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the normal pattern display color, While the reach occurrence character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 are displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same display color as the chance up pattern while the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed. The error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the same display color as the normal pattern display color.

  By configuring in this way, the player misunderstands the big hit expectation degree in the variation effect even when each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time. In addition, the contents of the abnormal state can be clearly recognized. Therefore, while allowing the player to accurately recognize the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the production content from becoming obscured, to avoid excessive expectations from the player, and to ensure that the player does not feel distrust Games can be provided.

  Further, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the forefront among the display objects in the third symbol display device 81 in order to notify the player of the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is displayed so as to be synchronized with the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 (normal pattern or chance up pattern). With this configuration, each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed even if the character display Se1 to Se4 is difficult to be visually recognized by the player due to other display objects, in particular, the error character display Se5. The error character display Se5 in synchronization with the display color of is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the player can visually recognize it. be able to.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  82 and 83, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, the character display Se2 in reach, the fixed phrase character display Se3, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, and the error character display Se5 in the fifth embodiment. An execution example (display example) will be described.

  First, referring to FIG. 82, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed / restricted) and the error character display is synchronized with the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the variation effect of the loss. A situation in which Se5 is displayed will be described. FIG. 82 shows a fixed pattern by the late limit flag 233p while winning a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) of each character display Se1 to Se3 in the variation variation effect of the loss executed by the third symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed the condition where the display color of phrase character display Se3 is corrected (changed) to "white". Moreover, it is the figure which showed the condition where error character display Se5 is displayed with the display color in synchronization with the display color of each character display Se1-Se3.

  Specifically, FIG. 82A shows the state immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds. FIG. 82B is a diagram showing a state in which the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence representing the words emitted from the character design of the central small region Ds2 is displayed in the left small region Ds1. The variable element of “normal reach” is started from the state of 82 (a), the sub display area Ds is deleted, the variable element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm, and an error character indicating an error state FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing a state where display Se5 is displayed. FIG. 82 (c) starts the variable element of “super reach” from the state of FIG. 82 (b) and erases the cockpit display area Db. The variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm, and the reach character display Se2 in which the words uttered from the character design on the player side are displayed as characters and an error is displayed. FIG. 82 (d) shows a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating the state is displayed. FIG. 82 (d) shows a state where the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 82 (c), and the sub display area Ds. And the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, and the “miss display” of the third pattern appears in the main display area Dm, and further, the words emitted from the character pattern of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds are displayed as characters. 7 is a diagram showing a state in which the fixed phrase character display Se3 shown in FIG. 5 is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed.In FIGS. 82A to 82D, the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 82A, as in FIG. 64A in the first embodiment, the third symbol of “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm. In the region Dm3, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, and in the middle display region Dm2, the third symbol is still “not subject to high-speed fluctuation”. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  In the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is a “weak pattern” character pattern and the first chance up pattern “red” "Is displayed. More specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs, “white”, which is the normal display color, is the line “Ikuze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2. To “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 82A, the red color is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display This means that “at the time of reach” is selected with respect to the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2. In FIG. 82 (a), the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence displays “weak pattern” of “Ikuze!”, So in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, This means that the “weak pattern” which is a normal character pattern is selected.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command and the display occurrence change command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the red character flag 233k is set based on the display red character command. The occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the occurrence change command for display.

  Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores at least the character pattern additional data table 232a2 (actually, FIG. 82 (c)) based on at least the contents of the character pattern memory 233j (the “weak pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs). The character display additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and the character timing additional data based on the occurrence character color change flag 233n being turned on. The table 232a2 is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (d), in the fluctuating effects of FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (d), since the late limit flag 233p is turned on, the additional data table 232a2 is actually used. A character correction additional data table 232a2 is stored.

  In FIG. 82 (b), from the state of FIG. 82 (a), the variation factor of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm, and the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is full. An error suggesting a bottom full state in the forefront of the third symbol display device 81 when the full state of the bottom plate 50 is detected by a bottom full switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not A state in which the character display Se5 is displayed is shown.

  In the variation element of “normal reach”, the “7” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. Is displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and it is an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. An error character display Se5 suggested to the user is displayed. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please pull out the ball” is displayed to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50, and each character display Se1 to Se3. Are displayed in the same display color (for example, “white”) as “white”, which is the normal display color. That is, in FIG. 82 (b), since each character display Se1-Se3 is not displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in a normal display color (for example, “white”).

  The error character display Se5 in FIG. 82 (b) may be configured to be displayed in the same display color (for example, “red”) as the display color of the chance-up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se3. . Further, the display position of the error character display Se5 may be displayed in a portion other than the central portion of the main display area Dm, and any display can be used as long as it can clearly indicate the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. An error character display Se5 may be displayed in the area. Specifically, the error character display Se5 may be displayed in a lower area of the main display area Dm, a display area overlapping with the cockpit display area Dm, or a display area overlapping with the sub display area Ds. Furthermore, the error character display Se5 is configured to suggest that the lower plate is full, but another error display may be displayed as the error character display Se5. Specifically, an error character display Se5 displays a message such as a ball clogging abnormality, a door opening abnormality, an excessive payout abnormality, a magnet detection abnormality, a radio wave detection abnormality, etc. suggesting an illegal act. May be.

  In the display state of FIG. 82 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received an error command indicating the full state of the lower pan from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 82 (a). . Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the storage state shown in FIG. 82A (character change additional data table 232a2 (actually, four character change additional data tables including the character correction additional data table 232a2) is stored. In addition to 232a2)), the error additional data table 232a2 is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 82 (c) shows a state in which a “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 82 (b). In the “super reach” variation factor, the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variation factor is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the “super reach” variable element, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A numerical symbol (“4” in the first embodiment) indicating the number of balls is newly displayed. Further, in the center portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as in FIG. 82 (b). In addition, you may comprise so that the number symbol which shows the number of reservation balls of a variation effect may be displayed constantly during execution of a variation effect.

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed as a “weak pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area where the cockpit display area Db is deleted, the reach character display Se2 of “Kurae!”, Which is a speech uttered from the character design on the player side, is “white” which is a normal display color. "Is changed to" red "which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 82 (c), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display. Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the reach character display Se2 is also displayed in “red”. That is, in the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence that has already been displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so the display color of the character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs. In FIG. 82 (c), the character display Se2 in the reach indicates “weak pattern” of “Kurae!”. Therefore, in the lottery of the character pattern of the character display Se2 in the reach, a normal character pattern is displayed. This means that the “weak pattern” is selected.

  In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 82 (b), the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. The error character display Se5 that suggests to the player is displayed, but the display color is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) in synchronization with the display color of the reach character display Se2. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed in the reach character display Se2 so as to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50. It is displayed in the same display color (for example, “red”) as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

  In the display state of FIG. 82 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 82 (b). That is, the error cancel command indicating that the abnormal state of the lower pan full state is cancelled is not received. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, the additional data table 232a2 for each character display Se1 to Se3 equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 3 additional data table for character change 232a2) including the additional data table for data 232a2) and 1 additional data table for error 232a2 are stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 82 (d), from the state of FIG. 82 (c), the character design on the player side is defeated by the enemy character design in the “Creative effect” of the variation element of “Super reach”, and “ “Lose display” appears, and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are displayed again on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the “lose display”, and the words emitted from the character design are displayed in the left small area Ds1. A fixed phrase character display Se3 expressed in characters is displayed in a normal display color. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the fixed phrase character display Se3 “Sumane ...”, which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is “white” which is a normal display color. Is displayed.

  Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 82 (c), the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. An error character display Se5 that suggests to the player is displayed on the foreground of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display color is synchronized with the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 (for example, , “White”). Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3 so as to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50. It is displayed in the same display color (for example, “white”) as the normal display color “white”.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 82 (d), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display. Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when a reach occurs” is selected, and further, the display effect of the fixed phrase text display Se3 is changed to “white” when the variation effect is “lost display”. It means that it has been modified (changed).

  When the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 82 (d), the “super-reach” has a “hit display” because the character pattern on the player side is lost in the “battle presentation” of “super-reach”. It is predicted that “miss display” will appear without appearing. Further, since the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in “white”, the end of the variation effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable regarding the prediction of the “lost display”. Further, since the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in “white”, the end of the variation effect is recognized without feeling uncomfortable regarding the prediction of the “losing display”.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the fixed phrase character display Se3 should be displayed in “red” in accordance with the batch setting. Since the “lost display” appears, the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed in “white” which is a normal display color instead of the chance up pattern.

  Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives at least the display red character command, the display occurrence change command, the display fixed phrase normal command, and the error command from the sound lamp control device 113, and the display red character The red character flag 233k is set to ON based on the command, the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set to ON based on the display occurrence change command, and the trailing limit flag 233p is set based on the display regular phrase normal command. Is set to ON, and a lower plate error flag (not shown) is set to ON based on the error command. Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and a character color at the time of occurrence. The character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the change flag 233n being turned on, the character correction additional data table 232a2 based on the late limit flag 233p being turned on, and the error additional data table 232a2 based on the lower plate error flag being turned on Are stored (set).

  As a result, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. To create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the variation effect is lost, the character display Se1 when the reach occurs and the character display Se2 during reach are displayed in a chance-up pattern, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed in the display color of the normal pattern. In this case, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is displayed while the error character display Se5 is displayed in the same display color as the chance up pattern while the reach character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 are displayed. In the meantime, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the same display color as that of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the player misunderstands the big hit expectation degree in the variation effect even when each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time. In addition, the contents of the abnormal state can be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, causes the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Next, referring to FIG. 83, in the jackpot variation effect including the variation element of “revariation”, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (standard phrase character display Se3) is displayed as the chance-up pattern. Explain the situation. FIG. 65 shows that the chance increase pattern (for example, “red”) of each character display Se1 to Se4 is won in the jackpot variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the “revariation” variation element is executed. It is the figure which showed the condition where the display color of pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 displayed before being performed is displayed with "red". Moreover, it is the figure which showed the condition where error character display Se5 is displayed with the display color in synchronization with the display color of each character display Se1-Se3.

  Specifically, FIG. 83A is immediately after the “reach display (variation factor of“ normal reach ”)” appears in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a state in which a character display Se1 at the time of reach that represents a speech uttered from the character design of the central small region Ds2 of the sub display region Ds is displayed in the left small region Ds1. FIG. 83 (b) shows that the variation factor of “normal reach” is started from the state of FIG. 83 (a), the sub display area Ds is erased, and the variation element of “normal reach” is executed in the main display area Dm. FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating the state is displayed. FIG. 83 (c) shows that the “super reach” variable element is started from the state of FIG. The display area Db is erased, the variable element of “super reach” is executed in the main display area Dm, and the reach middle character display Se2 in which the words uttered from the character design on the player side are displayed as characters is displayed. FIG. 83 (d) shows a state where an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is displayed. FIG. 83 (d) shows the “super-reach” variable element from the state of FIG. 83 (c). The “drafting” is executed, and the contents suggesting that the “lack display” appears in the “bounce effect” and the error character display Se5 indicating the error state are displayed. FIG. 83 (e) shows that the variable element of “super reach” ends from the state of FIG. 83 (d), the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are redisplayed, In the display area Dm, the “design display” of the third symbol appears, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that expresses the words uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds in the left small area Ds1. FIG. 83 (f) shows a state where the error character display Se5 indicating the error state is displayed, and FIG. 83 (f) shows a variation factor of “revariation” from the state of FIG. 83 (e). 6 is a diagram showing a state in which an error character display Se5 indicating an error state is being displayed in addition to the time when the “big hit display” appears. In FIGS. 65A to 65F, the display pattern of the third symbol is omitted.

  First, in FIG. 83 (a), as in FIG. 65 (a) of the first embodiment, in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed. In the region Dm3, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed, and in the middle display region Dm2, the third symbol is still “not subject to high-speed fluctuation”. Therefore, this is a state immediately after the so-called “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbols are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively.

  Further, in the left small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the character display Se1 at the time of reach generated from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “red” which is a “strong pattern” character pattern and a chance-up pattern. It is displayed. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the character display Se1 at the time of reach of “Ikeruze!” Which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2 is “white” which is a normal display color. To “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 83A, “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of each character display Se1 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. This means that “red” is selected by winning the change lottery, and “when reach occurs” is selected in the lottery regarding the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1, Se2.

  Therefore, in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, at least a command relating to the “strong pattern” of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs (from FIG. 83C described later, the reach character display Se2 is also the “strong pattern”). Therefore, the display strong character pattern command), the red character command for display, and the change command at the time of occurrence of display are received, and at least the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is “strong pattern” in the character pattern memory 233j. , The red character flag 233k is set on based on the display red character command, and the on-occurrence character color change flag 233n is set on based on the display occurrence change command.

  Accordingly, the additional data table buffer 233c includes at least a character pattern additional data table 232a2 based on the setting contents of the character pattern memory 233j, a character color additional data table 232a2 based on the red character flag 233k being turned on, and an occurrence character. The character timing additional data table 232a2 based on the ON state of the color change flag 233n is stored (set). As a result, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and each character change additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. . Then, the image controller 237 executes display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG.

  83 (b), from the state of FIG. 83 (a), is the “normal reach” variable element being executed in the main display area Dm, and is the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) full? An error character display Se5 indicating a full state of the lower plate is detected by the third symbol display device when the full state of the lower plate 50 is detected by a lower plate full switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not the lower plate is full. The state displayed on the forefront of the display surface of 81 is shown.

  In the variation element of “normal reach”, the “7” symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged in the left display region Dm1 and the right display region Dm3 of the main display region Dm, and the third symbol is displayed in the middle display region Dm2. A fluctuating effect (for example, low-speed scrolling from “5” symbol to “6” symbol) is performed so as to be visible at low speed. Further, the sub display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the “normal reach” variable element, and the sub display area Ds is in a state of being invisible. In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, respectively, as in the display state of FIG. 83 (a). Is displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and it is an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. An error character display Se5 suggested to the user is displayed. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50, and each character display Se1 to Se4. Are displayed in the same display color (for example, “white”) as “white”, which is the normal display color. That is, in FIG. 83B, since each character display Se1 to Se4 is not displayed, the error character display Se5 is displayed in a normal display color (for example, “white”).

  Note that the error character display Se5 of FIG. 83B may be configured to be displayed in the same display color (for example, “red”) as the display color of the chance-up pattern of each character display Se1 to Se4. .

  In the display state of FIG. 83 (b), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives an error command indicating the full-bottom state of the lower pan from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 83 (a). . Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the error additional data table 232a2 in addition to the storage state (character change additional data table 232a2 in FIG. 83A). . Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG. 83 (b).

  FIG. 83C shows a state in which the “super reach” variable element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 83B. In the “super reach” variation factor, the reach formation symbol of “7” symbol displayed in the “normal reach” variation factor is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and instead, the variable effect is suspended at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. A reach formation symbol of the number symbol indicating the number of balls (“4” in the fifth embodiment) is newly displayed. Further, in the center portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as in FIG. 83 (b).

  In addition, the variable element of “Super Reach” displays a “battle presentation” in which multiple character designs compete for victory or defeat, and the character design on the player's side speaks the speech, and the reach medium that expresses the speech in characters. The character display Se2 is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the display area from which the cockpit display area Db is erased, the reach character display Se2 that is a “strong pattern” line that is a word of “strong pattern” emitted from the character design on the player side is a normal one. The display color is changed from “white” to “red” which is the first chance up pattern.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 83C, “strong pattern” is selected in the character pattern lottery of the reach character display Se2 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display of each character display Se1 to Se3. The color change lottery is won and “red” is selected. Further, regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2, “when a reach occurs” is selected. It is displayed in “red”. That is, in the display color of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence already displayed in this variation effect, the display color reflecting the change lottery result of the display color of the character display appears, so this character display Se2 during reach Is a display that follows the display color of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs.

  Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83 (b), the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state and is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. The error character display Se5 that suggests to the player is displayed, but the display color is displayed in a display color (for example, “red”) in synchronization with the display color of the reach character display Se2. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed in the reach character display Se2 so as to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50. It is displayed in the same display color (for example, “red”) as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

  In the display state of FIG. 83 (c), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the sound lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 83 (b). That is, the error cancel command indicating that the abnormal state of the lower pan full state is cancelled is not received. Therefore, in the additional data table buffer 233c, an additional data table 232a2 for each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. The additional data table 232a2 is stored (set). Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. The image controller 237 executes display control based on the drawing list so that the third symbol display device 81 is in the display state of FIG. 83 (c).

  In FIG. 83 (d), from the state of FIG. 83 (c), a “superior effect” is executed in the “super reach”, and the character symbol on the player side (left character symbol) is the enemy side in the “superior effect”. It is the figure which showed the state where the content which suggests that "losing display" appears appears losing to the character design (right character design). Further, in the center portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 is displayed on the forefront of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as in FIG. 83 (c).

  The display state of FIG. 83 (d) is a reach formation symbol of “7” symbol that has been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is different from the reach formation symbol “8” at the center. "The symbol is stopped. That is, in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a display suggesting “miss display” with “787” is performed. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is continuously erased, and a numerical symbol indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is continuously displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and below the reach formation symbol. Yes.

  Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83 (c), the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. An error character display Se5 that indicates to the player is displayed, but the display color is synchronized with the display color of the reach character display Se2 that appears in FIG. 83C (for example, “red”). ) Is displayed. Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed in order to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50, while the reach character display Se2 ( 83 (c)), the display color of the chance up pattern shown in “red” is the same color as the display color (for example, “red”). If the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in the normal display color (for example, “white”) at this time, it is as if the variation effect has been lost in spite of being in the middle of the “border effect”. It gives an impression. Therefore, the display mode of the error character display Se5 displayed during the “prohibition effect” is configured to maintain a display synchronized with the display mode of the reach character display Se2 that appears during the “prohibition effect”. ing.

  In the display state of FIG. 83 (d), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not additionally receive a command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 83 (c). That is, the error cancel command indicating that the abnormal state of the lower pan full state is cancelled is not received. Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2 and 1 additional data table for error 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 83C. It is a state that has been. Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so that the display state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 83 (e), from the state of FIG. 83 (d), the character design on the player side loses the enemy character design in the “super-reaching” variable element “decision effect”, and the temporary display in the main display area Dm. “Miss display” appears, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are re-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this state, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds and the execution symbol and the reserved symbol of the cockpit display area Db are visible again.

  In addition, the character design of the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is displayed in a disappointed manner due to the appearance of the temporary “lose display”, and the left small area Ds1 is emitted from the character design. A pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 that expresses words in characters is displayed in a chance-up pattern. Specifically, in the left small area Ds1, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 “Sumane ...”, which is a speech uttered from the character design of the central small area Ds2, is “white” which is a normal display color. "Changes to" red "and displayed.

  That is, in the display state of FIG. 83 (e), “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, as a result of selecting “when reach”, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 is also displayed in “red”. In other words, in the display colors of the reach occurrence character display Se1 and the reach character display Se2 already displayed in this variation effect, a display color reflecting the display color change lottery result of the character display appears. The display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 follows the display color of the character display Se1 when reach occurs and the character display Se2 during reach.

  Here, in this variation effect, as described above, “red” is selected by winning the lottery for changing the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and each character display Regarding the lottery of the change timing of the display colors of Se1 and Se2, “when reach occurs” is selected. Therefore, since the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se3 are collectively set as described above, the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (fixed phrase character display Se3) is also displayed in “red” in accordance with the change. In addition, in the variation production, a variable element of “temporary change” is performed from the temporary “losing display”, and “big hit display” appears, so that the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (standard phrase character) Even if the display Se3) is displayed in the chance-up pattern, the player is not distrusted, and there is no need to correct the display color of the chance-up pattern.

  Further, in the center portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83 (d), the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) is in a full state, and is in an abnormal state in which no more balls can be paid out. An error character display Se5 that suggests to the player is displayed on the foreground of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display color is synchronized with the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 (for example, , “Red”). Specifically, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an error character display Se5 “Please remove the ball” is displayed in the fixed phrase character display Se3 so as to prompt the player to remove the ball from the lower plate 50. It is displayed in the same display color (for example, “red”) as “red” which is the display color of the chance up pattern.

  Therefore, in the display state of FIG. 83 (e), the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 does not receive an additional command from the audio lamp control device 113 with respect to the display state of FIG. 83 (d). Therefore, the additional data table buffer 233c stores (sets) the additional data table 232a2 (3 additional data table for character change 232a2 and 1 error display data table 232a2) equivalent to the storage state in FIG. 83 (d). It is a state that has been. Therefore, the MPU 231 is based on the change display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, and each character change additional data table 232a2 and error additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Create a drawing list. Then, the image controller 237 executes display control on the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing list so as to be in the display state of FIG. 83 (e).

  In addition, when the player recognizes the display content of FIG. 83 (e), the character design on the player's side lost in the “battle presentation” of the variable element of “super reach” as shown in FIG. 83 (d). As a result, it is predicted that the “big hit display” will not appear in the variable element of the “super reach”, and the “losing display” will appear. However, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 (the player recognizes as the fixed phrase character display Se3) is displayed in “red”, and the display color of the error character display Se5 is displayed in “red”. For this reason, the player feels uncomfortable with the prediction of the “miss display” and does not confirm that the variation effect remains “miss display”. , Predict again.

  FIG. 83 (f) shows a state in which the “re-change” variation element is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 83 (e). In the variable element of “re-change”, the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased, and “lost display” that is stopped and displayed as “787” in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3. Starts to fluctuate again, and is finally stopped at “777”, which is a “big hit display”. Further, an error character display Se5 is displayed in the forefront of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the central portion of the main display area Dm, as in FIG. 83 (e). The player is surprised at the occurrence of the variable element of “re-change” and, as estimated at the stage of FIG. 83 (e), the change effect develops without being determined by the “miss display”. Happiness and satisfaction can be obtained for the appearance of the “hits”.

  As described above, when the variation effect is determined as “big hit display”, when the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is executed in the character display Se1 when the reach occurs or the character display Se2 during the reach, The pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 and the fixed phrase character display Se3 that are displayed after the “reaching” variation element is also configured to follow the chance-up pattern. In addition, the error character display Se5 that appears during the “super-reaching” variable element “border effect” is also displayed in a display color in synchronization with the display colors of the character displays Se1 to Se4. In other words, the display color of the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4, the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the error character display Se5 is displayed in “red” in the variation effect of “big hit display”. By configuring in this way, since there is no habit of effect contents, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the character displays Se1 to Se4 indicating the degree of jackpot expectation in the variation effect, to notify the abnormality in the gaming state during the variation effect. When the error character display Se5 appears, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is configured to synchronize with the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4. By configuring in this way, the player misunderstands the big hit expectation degree in the variation effect even when each of the character displays Se1 to Se4 and the error character display Se5 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time. In addition, the contents of the abnormal state can be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, causes the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  Further, the error character display Se5 is configured to be displayed in the forefront among the display objects in the third symbol display device 81 in order to notify the player of the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the display mode of the error character display Se5 is displayed so as to be synchronized with the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 (normal pattern or chance up pattern). With this configuration, each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed even if the character display Se1 to Se4 is difficult to be visually recognized by the player due to other display objects, in particular, the error character display Se5. By displaying the error character display Se5 in a visible manner on the forefront of the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the display color, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the expected degree of jackpot in the variation effect.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same effects by the same configuration as that of the first to fourth embodiments.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

<Modification 1>
In each of the embodiments described above, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of each character display Se1 to Se4 in the variation effect being executed (hereinafter referred to as “the variation effect”) by lottery at the start of the variation effect, Each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed based on the lottery result, and the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected when the variation effect is “lost display”. On the other hand, in the correction process of the fixed phrase character display Se3 in the variation effect, it is determined whether or not the “big hit display” is present in the variation effect on hold (hereinafter referred to as “pending variation effect”). When the “big hit display” is present in the effect, the fixed phrase text display Se3 may be displayed as the chance-up pattern without correcting the display color of the fixed phrase text display Se3. With this configuration, when the fixed phrase text display Se3 is displayed as a chance-up pattern in a state where the display result of “miss display” appears in the “reach display” of the variable display, It is possible to increase the interest of the game by expecting the player to see whether the “big jackpot display” appears in the variation effect or whether the “spot display” appears in the hold variation effect.

<Modification 2>
In each of the embodiments described above, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the character pattern, the character color, and the character color change timing of each character display Se1 to Se4 at the start of the variation effect. Instead, in the pre-reading process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 43)), the character pattern table 222g, the character color change table 222h, and the color change timing table 222i are referred to, and “reach” in the variation effect of the third symbol is performed. You may comprise so that the character pattern of each character display Se1-Se4 appearing by "display", character color, and the change timing of a character color may be determined.

<Modification 3>
In each said embodiment, it is comprised in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 so that 1 character display Se1-Se4 may be displayed independently. Instead, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a plurality of characters at the same time. Note that “display at the same time” includes a case where a plurality of character displays are displayed simultaneously, a case where another character display is displayed while one character display is displayed, and the like.

<Modification 4>
In the above four embodiments, the data table 232a4 is provided for each sprite, and the display control is performed by selecting a display pattern from the data table 232a4. In contrast, when a display color data table for specifying only the display color of each sprite is provided and the display color of each sprite is changed, the display color of each sprite is changed by changing the contents of the display color data table. You may comprise as follows.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the character displays Se1 to Se4 are displayed in pieces at a predetermined timing (for example, a display period of 1 second) based on the execution of “reach display”. Instead of this, a dedicated character display area (telop area) for displaying the character display may be provided, and the character display may be scroll-displayed in the character display area. When scrolling the character display in the character display area, for example, scroll the character display from the right side of the screen to the left side of the screen, and if the character display moves to the left side of the screen, display the character display from the right side of the screen again. You may comprise. Therefore, when the character display is displayed in the chance display pattern (for example, “red”) in the character display area, the character display is usually performed after the “effect effect” in the “effect display” variation effect. The display mode (for example, “white”) may be displayed. As a method of returning the character display that was displayed in the chance up pattern to the normal display mode after the “pronounced effect”, the display mode of the character display in the character display area is displayed in the chance up pattern when moving to the left side of the screen. Then, when the character display disappears from the left side of the screen and is displayed again from the right side of the screen, it may be configured to display in a normal display mode.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, when a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is selected in the display color lottery of each character display Se1 to Se4, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is once set as the chance up pattern. After that, when the variation effect in which each character display Se1 to Se4 is performed is “lost display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected (rechanged) to a normal pattern that is not a chance-up pattern. Was configured to display. In place of this, in the variation effect that does not have the “losing display” or “promotion” effect, each character display Se1, Se2 is displayed as the chance-up pattern display color as the character color additional data table 232a2 of each character display Se1-Se4. (For example, “red”), and the fixed phrase text display Se3 may select the additional data table 232a2 for color change of the normal display color (for example, “white”). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to display a chance-up pattern having a development suggestion function in a variable effect in which no additional variable element is executed after the execution of the “border effect”, and the effect content is flawed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above embodiments, when a chance up pattern (for example, “red”) is selected in the display color lottery of each character display Se1 to Se4, the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is once set as the chance up pattern. After that, when the variation effect in which each character display Se1 to Se4 is performed is “lost display”, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is corrected to a normal pattern that is not a chance-up pattern and displayed. Was composed. Instead, the fixed phrase character display Se <b> 3 may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable effect that does not have the “losing display” or “promotion” effect. By not displaying the fixed phrase display Se3 on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the “losing display” or “promotion” effects, it is possible to cause the player to be distrusted without causing a flaw in the effect contents. Can be prevented.

  In such a case, even if the fixed phrase character display Se3 is not displayed, the sound corresponding to the fixed phrase character display Se3 that is not displayed from the sound output device 226 (for example, “Sumane ...”) is output. You may comprise as follows. In the case of “losing display” or the like, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the display Se3 is not displayed (cannot be visually recognized), it can be difficult to recognize that the law is broken.

  Further, as a method for preventing the fixed phrase character display Se3 from being displayed, a value that makes the display form of the fixed phrase character display Se3 transparent in the color change additional data table 232a2 is set to be invisible to the player. The display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is set to the same color as the display color of the sprite arranged behind the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the fixed phrase character display Se3 is assimilated with the rear sprite. The player may not be able to see, or other sprites may be set to be arranged in front of the sprite of the fixed phrase character display Se3 so as to be invisible to the player.

<Modification 8>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when “hold change notice” “after hold deletion” is executed, whether or not it is a variable effect that can execute “hold change notice” at the initially set execution timing (“after hold deletion”). If it is a variable effect that can be executed, the “pending change notice” is performed at the execution timing (“after hold deletion”) as originally set. The execution timing of the “hold change notice” is changed, and the “hold change notice” is determined after determining the timing at which the “hold change notice” can be executed. Instead, when executing “holding change notice” after “holding erasure”, it is determined whether or not it is a variable effect that can execute “holding change notice” at the initially set execution timing. If it is, the content is changed to a content that can execute the “hold change notice” after “hold deletion” in the variation effect, and the “hold change notice” that is initially “after hold deletion” is executed. May be.

  By configuring in this way, when “holding change notice” of “after erasure” is selected in the variation effect, “hold change notice” is executed at the execution timing of “after erasure” in that variation effect. When it is determined that the effect mode (variable element) cannot be performed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a variable element that can be changed to a variable element that erases the cockpit display area Db (for example, a variable element related to the “pseudo effect”). When it is determined that a variable element that can be changed (for example, a “pseudo effect” variable element) is included, the variable element that can be changed (for example, all or part of the “pseudo effect”) is displayed in the cockpit. The region Db is converted into a variation factor (for example, “super reach”) that eliminates the region Db. Therefore, by adding a variable element for erasing the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to execute “hold change notice” after “hold delete”. With this configuration, when “hold change notice” after “hold erase” is selected, the “hold change notice” can be easily executed at the execution timing after “hold erase”. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing an unexpected production to the player.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the “hold change notice” after “hold deletion” is executed, the execution symbol and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed for some effect (for example, “super reach”). It is configured to execute “holding change notice” when it is erased by a variable element or the like and then displayed again. Instead, a movable accessory that can cover a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used so that the cockpit display area Db cannot be visually recognized (is difficult to visually recognize) and can be driven. . In a state where the cockpit display area Db is covered with the movable accessory, the “pending change notice” is executed in the execution symbol. After that, when the movable accessory returns from the state covering the cockpit display area Db to the original state, the player becomes able to visually recognize the execution symbol again, and the “pending change notice” is displayed in the execution symbol. It is possible to recognize that it is being executed.

<Modification 10>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the “hold change notice” after “hold deletion” is executed, the execution symbol and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed for some effect (for example, “super reach”). It is configured to execute “holding change notice” when it is erased by a variable element or the like and then displayed again. Instead of this, the large character cut-in image can be displayed so that it overlaps the cockpit display area Db during the variation effect, and the display time of the large character cut-in image is set to any variable element of the variation effect. Configure to be shorter than time. In addition, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that any variable element can be always displayed during execution of the variable effect. Further, in the variation effect, the cockpit display area Db is not visible to the player while the large character cut-in image is displayed. After that, when the large character cut-in image disappears and the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again, the “pending change notice” of “after large cut-in display” in which the display mode of the execution symbol changes is executed. Configure. With this configuration, the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db is concealed by the large character cut-in image having a display time shorter than the execution time of each variable element, and the execution symbol is displayed when the concealment is released. If the notification object (change object) that is always visible is directly changed by performing “hold change notice” after “holding erasure”, or a new notice object is notified. Compared with the case where the object is displayed and notified, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change of the notice object, and the display mode of the execution symbol can be changed casually. By changing the execution pattern casually, the player is first given a sense of incongruity, and then the player is surprised by recognizing that the root of the sense of discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, jackpot). While providing a characteristic production, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, by setting the display time of the large character cut-in image to be shorter than the execution time of each variable element, it is possible to display the large character cut-in image with any variable element. Compared with the case where the cockpit display area Db is covered by driving the movable accessory in the modified example 7, it is not necessary to determine whether the large character cut-in image can be displayed or not. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to perform control to determine the display of the large character cut-in image in order to perform the “hold change notice” after “hold erase”. While reducing the control burden of the game, the player can be provided with an unexpected effect, and the effect can be enhanced by diversifying the effect.

<Modification 11>
In each of the embodiments described above, “hold change notice” “after hold deletion” is executed in the execution pattern indicating the changing effect being executed. Instead of this, “g hold change advance notice” “after hold erase” may be executed in the hold symbol. By configuring in this way, the player does not pay attention to the change in the retained symbol as much as the execution symbol, and is hard to notice the change. Therefore, when performing a “hold change notice” after “hold erasure” for the hold symbol, the player can delay recognizing the change of the hold symbol compared to when the execution symbol changes. In the meantime, the player can feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game while providing an unexpected production to the player.

<Modification 12>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable element of “super reach” appears in the variation effect being executed, the cockpit display area Db is erased, and the variable element of “super reach” ends and the cockpit display area Db At the time when is displayed again, the “schedule change notice” of “after erasure” was performed on the execution symbol. The “reach display” includes three types of “normal reach” variable elements, “super reach” variable elements, and “special reach” variable elements (hereinafter may be abbreviated as “each reach display”). The “reach display” is provided, and the reach pattern (execution mode) of “each reach display” is composed of one type. Instead, a plurality of reach patterns of “each reach display” (for example, two types of “weak pattern” and “strong pattern”) are provided, and when “each reach display” is selected, A reach pattern of “reach display” may be determined. In addition, in this configuration, when the “hold change notice” after “hold erase” is executed, when the reach pattern of “each reach display” is “strong pattern”, the “strong pattern” is set to “ Change to “weak pattern” reach pattern. Then, after “reach display” of the “weak pattern” is executed, “hold change notice” “after hold deletion” is executed.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when performing “hold change notice” after “hold erasure” in the jackpot variation effect, the “strong pattern” reach pattern is selected in “each reach display” of the variation effect. If so, the reach pattern of the “strong pattern” is changed to the reach pattern of the “weak pattern”. By configuring in this way, even when a reach pattern of “weak pattern” appears, after “variable display” of “reach display” of “weak pattern” ends, “hold change notice” after “hold deletion” Since it will be a big hit if appears, it will be possible to enjoy the game without being awakened even when the "weak pattern" appears.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, when the “super reach” appears, the entire cockpit display area Db is erased, and both the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db are not visible. It was erased. On the other hand, only the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db may be erased, and the execution symbol indicating the content of the variation effect being executed may be continuously displayed. By configuring in this way, when the “pending change notice” is executed in the execution symbol, the player is informed of the jackpot expectation degree regarding the running variation effect based on the display mode of the “pending change notice”. It is possible to continue, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the changing production being executed. In the case where the execution symbol is continuously displayed without being erased during the fluctuating effect, it is preferable that the “hold change notice” of “after suspend deletion” is executed for the hold symbol.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment or the fifth embodiment, in the execution symbol or the holding symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db that is normally visible and becomes invisible when “super reach” occurs, The “super-reach” variable element ends, and the “hold change notice” after “hold erasure” is executed at the timing when the execution symbol and the hold symbol become visible again. On the other hand, you may comprise so that "after a deletion""changenotice" may be performed in the display thing different from an execution symbol or a hold symbol.

  Specifically, for example, “post-erase” “change notice” may be performed on the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. When “change notice” of “after erasure” is performed on the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2, the character design of the character design is displayed at the timing when the central small area Ds2 is displayed again after the end of the “super reach” variable element. The display mode may be configured to display in a special display mode (for example, a delighted mode) different from a normal display mode (for example, a mode disappointed at the time of appearance of “losing display”). .

  Further, for example, a level meter display object is displayed in the small right area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds, and the level meter display object is always displayed at the normal time. This level meter display is configured to specifically display the jackpot expectation degree in the variation effect, and specifically, each time an effect that increases the jackpot expectation value appears in the variation effect (for example, a character The level meter display item is raised step by step (such as the appearance of a symbol or the appearance of a cut-in symbol), and the jackpot expectation at that stage is visualized and displayed in a manner that is easy to understand for the player. Then, at the timing when the sub display area Ds is erased by “super reach” or the like, the level meter display object is also erased, and when the variable element such as “super reach” ends, the sub display area Ds is displayed again. The level meter display is also displayed again. When the redisplayed level meter display has changed from the display mode before erasure (for example, the level meter level has increased since before erasure), perform "Revariation" Is derived.

  Further, for example, in the background display of the main display area Dm, the background display is erased by “super reach” or the like, and the variable display such as “super reach” ends, and the background display of the main display area Dm is displayed again. The background display is redisplayed at the timing of When the redisplayed background display has changed from the display mode before erasure (for example, “city stage” to “empty stage”), “revariation” is performed to derive “hit display” Configure.

  In this way, by changing and displaying the display object that is not the execution symbol or the holding symbol at the time of redisplaying the display object, the object that is always visible can be directly changed and notified. In comparison with the case where the object is newly displayed and notified, the display mode of the object can be changed casually while making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the change of the object. By making the object invisible once and then casually changing it, first give the player a sense of discomfort and then recognize that the source of the discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, jackpot) Thus, while providing an unexpected production to the player, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the interest of the game.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the change of the said target object may be performed with a some target object. By configuring in this way, the player can find out where there is a display object that has been changed since before erasure when the variable element such as “super reach” ends and the display screen returns to the normal display mode. A game to search for is born, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above embodiments, when the “hold change notice” after “hold erase” is executed, the display pattern of the execution symbol or the hold symbol is displayed in a display mode that is increased (chance-up) from the normal display mode. Was configured. On the other hand, when executing “hold change notice” after “hold erasure”, the display pattern of the execution symbol or the hold symbol is displayed in a display mode that is lowered (chance down) from the display mode before erasure. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, for example, when the reserved symbol before erasure is in the “blue” display mode, the reserved symbol is displayed in “white” which is the normal display mode at the time of redisplay. , The display of the hold symbol for which “hold change notice” after “hold erase” is performed can be made to be the same display as other hold symbols, making it difficult for the player to know which hold symbol has changed. . By making the reserved symbols that have been changed before erasure unknown, it becomes unclear in which fluctuating effects the “pending change notice” occurred. Then, the player feels uncomfortable from the unclear impression, and then makes the player realize that the root of the discomfort is directly related to the game value (for example, jackpot). While providing a game, it is possible to diversify the production and enhance the fun of gaming.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, when the “hold change notice” is performed after the execution symbol or the hold symbol is made invisible, the “pending change notice” is displayed in the execution symbol or the hold symbol at the timing when the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. Was running. On the other hand, “holding change notice” may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the cockpit display area Db becomes visible again. In this case, a configuration may be used in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the execution symbol or the holding symbol is changing according to a display mode (for example, morphing or the like) that gradually changes.

<Modification 17>
In the sixth embodiment, when the “weak pattern” of “super reach” appears, the “hold change notice” after “hold deletion” may appear. That is, the “weak pattern” of “super reach” suggests the possibility of executing “hold change notice” after “hold erasure”. On the other hand, during the execution of the fluctuating effect, it is suggested that the “hold change notice” after “hold erasure” may be executed by the background display, the notice symbol, or the “lost display” stop symbol, etc. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, the player is allowed to play a game while paying attention to whether or not an effect suggesting the execution of the “hold change notice” after “holding erasure” appears during execution of the variable effect. , Can enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, the display object (execution symbol or hold symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 switches from a state in which the display object can be visually recognized to a state in which it cannot be recognized, and is visually recognized again. By changing the display mode at a possible timing, it is configured to generate a sense of incongruity based on the change. On the other hand, it may be configured to cause the player to feel uncomfortable by changing perception based on perception other than vision, for example, hearing or skin sensation (touch, temperature, pain, wind, etc.). .

  Specifically, for example, in order to generate a sense of incongruity due to hearing, the sound output by the audio output device 226 is changed from a normal state so that the player feels a sense of discomfort. The sense of discomfort due to voice means that the player feels discomfort by changing the method of stimulating the hearing of the player from the normal output state, such as the pitch of the sound, the change pattern of the sound image, the magnitude of the sound, the change of the rhythm, etc. To make you feel. Visual recognition is easy to recognize early if you feel a sense of incongruity because it is possible to continue to check with your eyes, but auditory recognition is that the sound is only the output at that moment, Since it cannot be confirmed continuously, it is lower than the visual recognition ability. Therefore, changing the sound from the normal output state to make the player feel uncomfortable can prolong the time until the player clearly recognizes the uncomfortable feeling.

  Also, for example, skin sensation (tactile sensation that feels touch), temperature sensation (perception that senses temperature), pain sensation (perception that feels pain and stimulation), pressure sensation (perception that feels pressure), wind sense (perception that feels wind) For example, the operation handle 51, the frame button 22, the ball release lever 52, the ball lending button 42, the return button 43, and other fans, heaters, etc. It is configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by making the control state different from the normal state for the part that gives the player a stimulus. For example, the operation handle 51 may be configured to make the player feel uncomfortable by increasing the biasing force of a spring (not shown) that biases the operation handle 51 to the initial position. In addition, for example, the frame button 22 is provided with a lock mechanism that locks the frame button 22 so that the frame button 22 cannot be pushed in, so that the player feels uncomfortable because the frame button 22 is locked and cannot be pushed in. It may be configured. In this case, it is preferable to output the announcement such as “Please press the frame button” on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Furthermore, for example, a fan that can output wind toward the player is configured to normally release (output) the wind to stimulate the player's wind sensation. The player may be configured to stimulate the player's wind sensation by inhaling the wind.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, when “after hold deletion” is selected as the execution timing of “hold change notice”, when the variation effect of “re-change” is not included in the change effect, “hold change notice” Is changed to a timing other than “after erasure” (for example, “after reach”). On the other hand, when “After Hold Deletion” is selected as the execution timing of “Pending Change Notice”, when “Pending Change Notice” cannot be executed at the “After Hold Deletion” execution timing in the variation effect, Another notice effect other than “notice” may be executed. Specifically, for example, in the case of a variation pattern in which “re-variation” is performed but the cockpit display area Db is not erased, such as “normal reach + re-variation”, ”Is selected, instead of“ holding change notice ”after“ holding erasure ”,“ re-display area erasing ”in the subdisplay area Ds is displayed again at the timing when the subdisplay area Ds is displayed again. Display notice ". In the variation effect including “re-variation”, the variation factor of “normal reach” is always executed, and when the variation factor of “normal reach” is executed, the central small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds is erased. It is a variation pattern in which “after” “pending change notice” cannot be executed, and any notice effect can be executed without fail, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of “pending change notice” display modes are provided, and any one execution timing is selected with respect to the execution timing of the “pending change notice”, and any one determined at the one execution timing is selected. Is configured to execute “pending change notice”. On the other hand, when a display mode (for example, “red” or “rainbow”) on multiple levels is selected in “hold change notice”, “hold change notice” is executed step by step at multiple execution timings. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a “holding change notice” step by step and execute a notice effect in which the expectation level of jackpots is stepped up, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 is the display color from normal “white” to “red” as a chance-up pattern, or “golden” having a higher jackpot expectation than the “red” And the display color of the determined chance-up pattern is displayed at the display timing of each character display Se1, Se2. On the other hand, when a display color in a plurality of stages (ie, “golden”) is selected as the display color of each character display Se1, Se2, the display of each character display Se1, Se2 is performed step by step at a plurality of execution timings. You may comprise so that a color may be changed. Specifically, for example, when “golden” is determined as the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4, the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence is displayed in “red” at the display timing of the character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence. Then, the display color of the reach character display Se2 is displayed in “golden” at the display timing of the reach character display Se2. By configuring in this way, the display color of each character display Se1, Se2 can be changed step by step, and a notice effect can be executed to step up the jackpot expectation level, which can enhance the interest of the game. it can.

  When the display colors of the character displays Se1 and Se2 are changed step by step, the display color of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs (for example, “red”) and the reach character display Se2 by one additional data table 232a2. Display color (for example, “golden”) may be defined, or an additional data table 232a2 is set for each character display Se1, Se2, and each character is set for each additional data table 232a2. You may comprise so that the display color of display Se1 and Se2 may be prescribed | regulated.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, as the initial setting of the display data table 232a1, the normal patterns of the character displays Se1 to Se4 (patterns that are not chance-up patterns of the display color “white” and the character pattern “weak pattern”) are displayed. When the normal pattern is selected by various lotteries of the character displays Se1 to Se4, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the selection result is selected and displayed by the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2. It is configured to perform control. Therefore, although the display contents shown in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 are duplicated, is the control to select the additional data table 232a2 always executed so that the additional data table 232a2 is selected? The determination process of whether or not is unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, you may prescribe | regulate so that the display regarding each character display Se1-Se4 may not be performed to the display data table 232a1. That is, the character display Se1 to Se4 is not displayed only by setting the display data table 232a1, but the character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed only after the additional data table 232a2 is set. Also good. By configuring in this way, the overlapping designation of display contents in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 is eliminated.

<Modification 23>
Moreover, although demonstrated using each character display Se1-Se4 as several marking means displayed with a predetermined | prescribed relationship mutually, for example, when marking means have the same attribute, or the same kind If it appears in the same timing, or if it appears at a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. Any means may be used as long as the means is a sign means having a relationship that is organically involved (closely related) in terms of time, shape, and conception.

  Specifically, for example, a notice display displayed in the same display area (for example, a character display Se1 and a fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed in the small left area Ds1, or a cockpit display area Db is displayed. Execution symbol or holding symbol), a notice display that is displayed in a different manner at the same timing (for example, a strong or weak character notice that appears on the reach display, or a mini character notice that appears at the start of variable production), A notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (for example, step-up notice, reach display character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4 character display, etc.), a notice that the same effect is executed a plurality of times in one variation effect (for example, a “pseudo-ream” variation element, etc.), and the like.

<Modification 24>
In addition, if “15R Probable Bonus” is won, a temporary display result corresponding to “15R Normal Jackpot” will be displayed in the fluctuating production, and it is suggested that “15R Probable Bonus” was in the middle of the jackpot. When the promotion effect during the round is executed, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 may be displayed as the chance-up pattern.

<Modification 25>
Moreover, in each said embodiment, by setting the additional data table 232a2 with respect to the display content prescribed | regulated by the display data table 232a1, from the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 prescribed | regulated by the display data table 232a1, The display control of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to reflect the change contents defined by the additional data table 232a2. Instead of this, the display data table 232a1 may be configured to define the display contents including the change contents of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the display data table 232a1 may be configured so that the display data table 232a1 includes information for changing display contents.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, the additional data table 232a2 is set for the display content defined by the display data table 232a1, and image data relating to the display content defined by the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 is used for resident use. When not stored in the video RAM 235, the transfer data table 232a3 is set, and image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Instead of this, the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 may be defined to include data relating to transfer of image data. That is, the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2 may be configured to include the transfer information of the image data in the display data table 232a1 or the additional data table 232a2.

<Modification 27>
Further, when the additional data table 232a2 is set, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 may be set.

<Modification 28>
Moreover, you may comprise so that the display content of the display data table 232a1 may be changed using a flag etc., without using the additional data table 232a2. Specifically, when a specific flag is set, the display content of the display object corresponding to the flag is changed from the display content indicated by the display data table 232a1 according to the setting content of the flag. May be.

<Modification 29>
Further, the MPU 231 grasps the drawing contents of several frames ahead displayed on the third symbol display device 81, creates drawing information including transfer information based on the grasped drawing contents, and uses the drawing information as an image controller. 237, the image controller 237 grasps drawing information in advance (preliminary analysis), and image data is provided in the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer information defined in the drawing information grasped in advance. Alternatively, the data may be transferred to the prior analysis data area.

  Specifically, for example, the description will be made based on an execution drawing list scheduled to be drawn this time, a next drawing list scheduled to be drawn next time, and a next drawing list scheduled to be drawn next time. First, the execution drawing list is analyzed, and based on the transfer information defined in the execution drawing list, the image data of the character ROM 234 is set to a predetermined address (first address) in the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236. At the same time, a next drawing list is created by rewriting the reference destination of the image data to be transferred to the predetermined address (first address) after the transfer. Then, only the transfer information of the rewritten next drawing list is analyzed in advance, and the image data of the character ROM 234 is converted into the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer information defined in the next drawing list. At the same time, a drawing list is created one after another by rewriting the reference destination of the image data to be transferred to the predetermined address (second address) after transfer. With this configuration, it is possible to execute drawing using pre-analyzed image data.

  Since image data is read while drawing by the image controller 237 is performed, if image data is directly referred to the character ROM 234, the image processing performance may be greatly reduced. Therefore, the drawing list is pre-analyzed and the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 in advance, so that the drawing can be performed quickly and accurately.

  In addition, since there is an upper limit for the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236, when performing the pre-analysis of the drawing list, it is based on the capacity that can be stored in the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the preliminary analysis and the transfer of the image data may be performed within the capacity range. In addition, a range for performing pre-analysis of the drawing list (for example, up to one frame ahead or up to two frames ahead) is set in advance so as to be within the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236. By performing the pre-analysis of the drawing list, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the capacity of the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 is exceeded.

  Further, regarding the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236, a plurality of image data (for example, 512 at the maximum) may be stored. When the drawing list is pre-analyzed and the same image data as the image data to be transferred to the pre-analysis data area of the normal video RAM 236 exists in the history, the normal video RAM 236 is used instead of the character ROM 234. The image data may be acquired from the pre-analysis data area and stored in the image storage area 236a. Note that the same image data is determined such that, for example, the same image data is determined when the start addresses on the character ROM 234 are the same.

<Modification 30>
In each of the embodiments described above, the display fixed phrase normal command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and the after limit flag 233p is turned on based on the reception of the display fixed phrase normal command in the display control device 114. By confirming the restriction flag 233p at that time, the display color of the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “effect effect” of the change effect of the loss is displayed as “white” which is a normal display color. Thus, the additional data table 232a2 for character correction is set. Instead, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 determines the display result (presence / absence) of the variation effect that can be executed based on the command. The late limit flag 233p may be set based on the result.

  Specifically, for example, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command, the display result of the variation effect that can be executed based on the command is a losing display. It is determined whether or not. Then, when the variation effect that can be executed is a loss, the after limit flag 233p is set to ON, and the effect (after the “effect”) of the variation effect is displayed based on the ON of the after limit flag 233p ( For example, the fixed phrase character display Se3) is configured to be displayed in a normal pattern (for example, “white”) that is not a chance-up pattern.

  By configuring in this way, the chance-up pattern is not displayed even if any setting is made based on other lotteries in the effect displayed after the “change effect” of the variation effect of the loss. Therefore, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the player from feeling a disappointment without causing excessive expectation to the player and preventing the player from feeling distrust. In addition, a determination process such as a lottery result of the display mode of the character display on the voice lamp control device 113 side, transmission / reception of a display regular phrase normal command, additional data based on a display regular phrase normal command on the display control device 114 side Since control such as setting of the table 232a2 becomes unnecessary, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received at the start of the variation effect, the display control device 114 can determine whether or not the variation effect is appropriate at the start of the variation effect. Based on the determination result, it is possible to set the display content of the character display displayed in the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production content from being flawed while effectively utilizing the conventional configuration in executing the variation effect.

<Modification 31>
In each of the embodiments described above, when the late limit flag 233p is set to ON, the character correction additional data table 232a2 is selected (determined), and the additional data table buffer 233c of the character correction additional data table 232a2 is selected. By storing (setting), the display color of the fixed phrase text display Se <b> 3 in the loss variation effect is displayed in the normal display color (that is, “white”). On the other hand, when the late limit flag 233p is set to ON, the additional data table 232a2 (the character pattern additional data table 232a2, the character color additional data table 232a2, the character timing addition) regarding the fixed phrase character display Se3 The data table 232a2 may be configured to be prohibited from being used.

  Specifically, for example, when the late limit flag 233p is turned on and the character color additional data table 232a2 is stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character color additional data The table 232a2 is deleted (discarded or invalidated), and the display color of the character display is set to the initial setting (default setting). Further, for example, when the late limit flag 233p is set to ON and the character color additional data table 232a2 is stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character color additional data table 232a2 is stored. The portion related to the fixed phrase character display Se3 in FIG. 6 is corrected to a normal pattern (the portion of the fixed phrase character display Se3 is selected again from the additional data table 232a2 for the normal pattern character color), and the corrected (reselected) character color addition is added The data table 232a2 is newly stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

  By configuring in this way, the fixed phrase character display Se3 displayed after the “pronounced effect” without providing the additional data table 232a2 for character correction can be displayed in the display color of the normal pattern that is not the chance-up pattern. . Therefore, by reducing the number of additional data tables 232a2 stored (set) in the additional data table buffer 233c, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the MPU 231 creates a drawing list. In addition, in the fixed phrase text display Se3 displayed after the “pronounced effect”, the chance up pattern (for example, “red”) can be configured not to be displayed. It is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

<Modification 32>
In the fifth embodiment, when the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4 is displayed in a chance-up pattern, when the error character display Se5 is displayed, the display color of the error character display Se5 is set to each character display. The display color is configured to be displayed in synchronization with the display colors of Se1 to Se4. Instead, when the error character display Se5 is displayed even before each character display Se1 to Se4 appears, the error character is displayed in a display color synchronized with the display color of each character display Se1 to Se4. You may comprise so that display Se5 may be displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, in the stage before the reach display occurs, the lower plate full state is generated and the error character display Se5 is displayed, and the display color of the error character display Se5 is changed. Gameability to confirm whether it is displayed was born, adding a notice function that suggests a big hit expectation degree in the fluctuating production to the error character display Se5 that usually has only an abnormal state notification function, realizing a variety of gameplay, The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  Further, the prefetch process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, information for performing a prefetch process, that is, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 upon starting winning A holding information storage area and execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. 24 for storing each value of the counter CS1 are provided in the display control device 114, and when a holding ball number command for display is received, the holding information storage area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area, the display control device 114 executes a prefetch process, and it is a big hit among the variable effects being executed and the variable effects being held. If it is determined that there is a fluctuating effect, “pending change notice” may be executed. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 may transmit the reserved ball number command as it is to the display control device 114 as the display reserved ball number command. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main controller 110 in accordance with the start winning prize are stored in the hold information first to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area of the display control device 114. Of these, it can be stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. Then, each time the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 may execute a shift process similar to the processes of S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 44 on the hold information storage area. Thus, the execution information storage area of the display control device 114 can store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation ball execution area 203c of the main control device 110. In the fourth area, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that a command instructing the output of each audio and lighting of the lamp is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as a single control device, the RAM of the single control device has a holding information storage area and an execution information storage area similar to those shown in FIG. When the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the area corresponding to the number of prefetch hold of the hold ball number command in the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area The counter values C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command may be stored. Each time the control device receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the same shift processing as the processing in S1403 and S1404 in FIG. 44 is performed between the hold information first to fourth areas and the execution information storage area. May be executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the case where the variation start flag 223a is always set to ON when a stop type command is received has been described. When the stop type command is received after reception, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON. Thereby, when there is no reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command is received, it is possible to suppress the strange variation effect from being executed.

  Alternatively, the fluctuation start flag 223a may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command is notified to the display control device 114 based on the variation start flag 223a being turned on. A display variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This causes the display control device 114 to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can do. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command. You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol that is held and executed upon entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), The case where “hold change notice” is performed in the hold symbol has been described. On the other hand, the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is held and executed when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (start winning prize) as a trigger (stops at the symbol “○”). In accordance with whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol, using the second symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., or Instead, the player may be notified. As a result, whether there is a variable display that is a hit in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) being held, or in the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) being executed and pending The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, it can be estimated whether or not the second symbol is a hit before execution of variable display of the second symbol. Among gaming machines, there are those that increase the gameability by the presence or absence of normal symbols, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, is not necessarily limited to this. The third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image which are used by the change production.

  In the above embodiment, the case where “holding change notice”, which is one form of continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuating effect is performed has been described. A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Unlike the “pending change notice” or “pending change notice”, a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice effect” including the “pending change notice”) is executed. May be. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory that is different from each movable accessory that operates in accordance with various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effects, thereby executing a continuous notice effect. Also good. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect (dynamic display) is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), symbols are displayed on the 4th symbol display device continuously. By operating in a predetermined manner, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of jackpot. . In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, off) after the end of the continuous notice effect. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by “1” when there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64. For the number command, the case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer with the starting winning prize are included and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described. The counter type may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counter values. In addition, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired with the start winning prize, the information indicating the values of these counters is included in the reserved ball number command. Instead of this, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize may be used, or other information such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any number of holding times. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information regarding the number of holds included in the command, each of the areas included in the command in any one of the hold information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of holds. A counter value can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the reserved ball number command are stored in the hold information storage area 223h. The case has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When a pending ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, it is based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. Whether or not, whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, part or all of the type of missed out in the case of outage, etc., and these determination results, instead of the value of each counter indicated by the command, or The information may be stored in the hold information storage area 223h together with part or all of the counter value. As a result, when the prefetch process is executed, the determination result such as whether or not the variation effect being executed or held is a big hit has already been stored in the hold information storage area 223h. It is only necessary to read out, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. In addition, when the variation time of the variation effect is determined according to the number of retained balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), When the command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect is started cannot be determined, so the variation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation time in the hold information storage area 223h. As a result, when the pre-reading process is executed, if the launching of the ball to the game area is stopped, the number of balls to be held when the fluctuating effect is started can be determined, and therefore stored in the holding information storage area 223h. It is possible to calculate the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, together with the determination result of whether or not it is a big hit, the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and the determination result of the outage type in the case of a loss.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one first entrance 64 that starts a lottery lottery when a player enters the game is described in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first entrances at which entrances are detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged in the game board 13. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrance holes are arranged in the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the counter value acquired with winning (starting prize) at each first entrance. May be. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main controller 110 with the start winning is acquired with the start winning to any of the first entrances. It may include information indicating whether or not In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 when the variation is started includes information indicating which variation effect is associated with the first winning entry to the first entrance. May be. Furthermore, in the sound lamp control device 113, a hold information storage area may be prepared for each first entrance. As a result, each time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process is performed on the hold information storage area corresponding to the first entrance that detected the start prize that triggered the variation presentation indicated by the variation pattern command. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating effect on hold for each first entrance can also be held in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outage type, etc. are different depending on the first entrance that has won the start, whether or not each variation effect will be a big hit in the look-ahead processing It is possible to correctly determine whether or not the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, the losing type when the jackpot is missed, and the like based on which start winning prize to which first entrance. In addition, when the variation effect based on the start winning at one first entrance is preferentially performed over the variation effect based on the start winning at another first entrance, Prefetch processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variation effect based on the start winning at the ball opening.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the command from the main control unit 110 to obtain the value of each counter obtained based on the start winning to the first entrance. If the start of the continuous notice effect is decided when received, the continuous notice effect is executed over all the fluctuating effects (holding balls) that are held at that time, regardless of the first entrance where the start prize was received. May be. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and a variation effect for winning a prize at one first entrance is preferentially executed over a change effect for winnings at another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only from the prefetch result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the first entrance where the change effect is preferentially executed. . Thereby, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not started for this variable effect. . If the continuous notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with a high priority, There is a risk that the continuous notice effect will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modified example, the presence / absence of the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variation effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, Since the continuous notice effect is not started, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 (see S1411 in FIG. 44). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S307). The reserved ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 35). It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. Further, the value (N) of the retained ball number counter 203a after the subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the number of retained balls (N) included in the variation pattern command may be extracted and set in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect that is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the symbol variation display is not limited to symbol variation effects. For example, one or a plurality of characters can be displayed together with the symbols or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated may be used.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.
<Group A: Change the display of multiple characters to red, and change the character display after white production to white according to whether or not you win big>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). Appearance information judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, variation effect processing (S1109)),
An advantageous situation determination means (for example, character mode setting process (S1417)) for determining whether or not a situation advantageous for the player occurs
A plurality of marking means (for example, character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3 and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the appearance information determination means, the notification mode of the marking means is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. ) To change mode (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing a notification mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect is executed to execute a determination effect (for example, a “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Means (e.g., "super-reach" variables),
The aspect changing means includes
When the display mode of the indication unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, when the advantageous status determining unit determines that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the determination effect executing unit The game machine A0 is provided with first mode notification means (for example, a display regular phrase normal command) for notifying in the first mode the indication means to be notified after execution of the determination effect by. .

  According to the gaming machine A0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the appearance information determination means determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Is done. Further, whether or not a situation advantageous to the player occurs is determined by the advantageous situation determination means. Then, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the appearance information determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. And when changing a labeling means to a 2nd aspect by an aspect change means, the alerting | reporting aspect of a some marking means is changed to a 2nd aspect by a multiple change means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. When the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the mode changing unit is provided when it is determined by the advantageous status determining unit that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur. The first mode notification unit notifies the first mode of the marking unit that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution unit. That is, when a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, even when the notification mode of the plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the notification is performed after the execution of the dynamic display determination effect. The notification mode of the marking means is notified in the first mode that is not the second mode.

  As in the prior art, when reporting means having a predetermined relevance to each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of dynamic display, the marking means is provided for each reporting location. If the configuration is to set (lottery) whether to report in one mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the reporting location is required, and control is complicated. And the processing burden may increase. In addition, after indicating in the second mode the labeling means that appears first in the dynamic display, if the labeling means to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the labeling unit has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the appearance of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who is uplifted by notifying the second mode in the previous sign means will awaken by witnessing the falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump (multiple simultaneous), and the second mode notified by one labeling means is also used in the other labeling means. By being configured to follow and notify, it is not necessary to perform setting processing for each notification location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other is notified in the second mode even once, the indication means is configured to notify the subsequent indication means by following the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the expression of downfall occurs.

  However, when a plurality of labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, for example, the labeling unit is notified in the second mode even in a state where a situation advantageous to the player does not occur. Sometimes. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the appearance information determination unit, it suggests that the current production status can be changed based on the change. Has a development suggestion function. On the other hand, the labeling means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is notified in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function superior to the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is notified in the second mode. Then, it is predicted that a situation advantageous to the player will not be determined and a certain development effect will be executed to change to a situation advantageous to the player. However, contrary to the prediction, the situation is determined without causing any advantageous situation for the player. There is also a risk that distrust will be raised to the game hall that is playing, and the game will be interrupted.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine A0, when a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, even if the indication means is changed to the second aspect, the indication means notified after the determination effect provides the second aspect. Is not notified. That is, in a state where a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

  In addition, the “determination effect” is, for example, a dynamic display in a case where an effect part indicating whether special identification information appears or general identification information appears among a plurality of variable elements constituting dynamic display. 1 represents the entire variable element, or represents the entire dynamic display.

  Further, the “situation advantageous to the player” means that, for example, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during execution and a predetermined game value can be given, the special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display during standby. When it can appear and a predetermined game value can be given, a special effect (for example, a “super-reach” effect mode) in which the special identification information can be expected to appear in dynamic display during execution or standby can be executed When a first special state (for example, “probability variation state”) in which special identification information is more likely to appear than normal can occur, or a second special state in which dynamic display with a dynamic time shorter than normal is easily selected ( For example, a case where a “time reduction state”) may occur.

In gaming machine A0,
The advantageous situation determination means includes:
In the dynamic display, comprising special identification information judging means for judging whether the special identification information appears or whether the general identification information appears,
The first aspect notification means includes:
When the special identification information determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution means, A gaming machine A1 that is notified in a manner.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the special identification information determination means provided in the advantageous situation determination means determines whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. And when it is judged by the special identification information judging means that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the marking means to be notified after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means is performed by the first aspect notification means. Informed in the first mode. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display, even if the notification mode of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, The notification mode of the marking means that is notified after the execution of the display determination effect is reported in the first mode that is not the second mode.

  Conventionally, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic display In the state where the determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the labeling means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is notified in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function superior to the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is notified in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, since the dynamic display is determined as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. Also, there is a risk of distrusting the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine A1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the signing means is changed to the second mode, the signing means that is notified after the determination effect provides the first It is configured not to notify the two modes. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In the gaming machine A1,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second indication means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
When the special identification information determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indication means and the second indication means are changed to the second mode based on the plurality of change means. A second mode continuation means for displaying at
When the special identification information determining means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indicating means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality of changing means, A gaming machine A2 comprising: a second mode changing unit that displays the second marking unit in the first mode by a first mode notifying unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the special identification information determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the second indication continuation means provided in the aspect changing means causes the first indication means based on the plurality of changing means. And the 2nd indication means is displayed in the 2nd mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information judging means judges that the special identification information is not displayed in the dynamic display, the second indication changing means provided in the aspect changing means makes the first indication based on the plural changing means. The means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notifying means.

  As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine A2,
The first indicating means is
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine A3, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A3,
The aspect changing means includes
Display mode changing means (for example, character color) for changing the display mode of the marking means from a predetermined normal display mode (for example, “white”) to a special display mode (for example, “red”) different from the normal display mode Lottery counter 223f),
The timing at which the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g),
The plurality of changing means are:
A batch changing unit that collectively changes the display mode of the indication unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit to the special display mode;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The normal display mode displays the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect after the timing when the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective change unit. A gaming machine A4 comprising an aspect display means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode changing unit provided in the mode changing unit changes the display mode of the marking unit from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. Similarly, the timing selecting unit provided in the mode changing unit selects the timing at which the display mode of the labeling unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit. Then, the display mode of the display unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit provided in the plurality of change units. Here, after the timing when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective changing unit, the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as display timing, and the display mode of the display means is increased. When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, it can be changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch setting and displayed in the normal display mode (first mode). Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine A4,
The display mode changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing selection means includes
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The batch change means is:
Color batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The display color of the marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display color after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means. A gaming machine A5 comprising a normal color display means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means changes the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color. Also, the color change timing selection means provided in the timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, the color batch change means provided in the batch change means changes the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notifying means. The normal color display means displays the image in the normal display color. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display unit having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display unit is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the display unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The display mode changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the indication means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means; With
The first instruction output means includes:
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the change element of the display color of the marking unit is the normal display color And a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection unit provided in the display mode change unit individually selects the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern change element for the display mode of the marking unit. Similarly, the first instruction output means provided in the aspect change means outputs a display instruction for displaying the marking means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. When the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed by the first mode notification means in the first mode, a display instruction to display at least the change element of the display color of the marking means in the normal display color Is output by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. That is, with respect to the display mode of the labeling means, the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern is separately selected (determined) by the mode changing means, and the display instruction of the marking means is output based on the selection contents. When the display mode of the labeling unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, a display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the labeling unit is output. It is configured.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, the display instruction for the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may be enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means, there is an effect that the number of display instructions regarding the marking means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine A1, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes general identification information, The display means (second display means) that appears after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display colors, change timings and display patterns of the respective indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication means is associated with one display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction, display instructions corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the labeling means including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the effect determination must be prepared in advance. The number may increase dramatically. Therefore, a display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after the effect determination, and the display of each display means is displayed by the image display means based on the display instruction. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to each marking means, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, at least the display color is usually set in the indication means displayed after the determination effect even if the plural indication means are changed to the second mode. Configure to display in display color. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the display means after the determination effect is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine A6,
The first instruction output means includes
A gaming machine A7, comprising start time output means for outputting all display instructions relating to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. In other words, the start time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines A1 to A7,
The aspect changing means includes
When it is determined by the special identification information determination means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the special identification information determination means appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means based on the aspect change means. The game machine A8, further comprising a mode maintaining unit (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction process: Yes) for displaying the marking unit in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination by the determination effect execution means based on the change by the aspect change means by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means. The marking means that appears after the performance is executed is displayed in the second mode. Thereby, when the special identification information appears, the player can maintain that the display of the changed marking means is maintained in the second mode and the special identification information can appear and a predetermined game value can be given. Can be congratulated and can enhance the interest of the game.

<Group B: The character display is changed to red, and the character display after the rendition is modified to white depending on whether or not a probable jackpot is granted>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
The special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information (for example, “15R normal jackpot”) and second special identification information (for example, “15R probability variation jackpot” that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. )), And
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A determination unit for determining whether or not to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113);
When it is determined that the special identification information appears by the appropriateness determination means, the start information stored in the corresponding storage means is the start information related to the first special identification information, or the second Type determination means (for example, MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113) for determining whether the start information is related to the special identification information;
A plurality of marking means (for example, character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3 and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. A mode changing means for changing (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f);
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing a notification mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, it is possible to determine whether or not to display the first special identification information, the second special identification information, or the general identification information (for example, “super effect” of the variable element of “super reach”. ”), A determination effect execution means (for example, a variable element of“ super reach ”),
The aspect changing means includes
When the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the type determining unit stores start information related to the first special identification information in the corresponding storage unit. A first mode notification unit (for example, a display regular phrase normal command) for notifying, in the first mode, the marking unit that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution unit when the determination is made; A gaming machine B0 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, as the special identification information, predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information that can be given a game value higher than the first special identification information are included. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage means, whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or whether the general identification information different from the special identification information appears is judged by the appropriateness judgment means. Then, when it is determined that the special identification information appears by the validity determination means, the start information stored in the corresponding storage means by the type determination means is the start information related to the first special identification information, or 2. It is determined whether the start information is related to special identification information. Also, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the mode changing unit changes the notification mode of the marking unit from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode. Moreover, when changing the marking means to the second mode by the mode changing unit, the notification mode of the plurality of marking units is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Here, the determination effect of whether or not the first special identification information, the second special identification information, or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Is executed. Then, when the notification mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the type determining unit determines that the start information related to the first special identification information is stored in the corresponding storage unit At this time, the first mode notification unit provided in the mode change unit reports the labeling unit that is notified after the determination effect is performed by the determination effect execution unit in the first mode. That is, when the first special identification information that can be given a game value lower than the second special identification information in the dynamic display appears, the notification mode of the plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode. Even if it has been changed, the notification mode of the marking means that is notified after the execution of the dynamic display determination effect is reported in the first mode that is not the second mode.

  As in the prior art, when reporting means having a predetermined relevance to each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of dynamic display, the marking means is provided for each reporting location. If the configuration is to set (lottery) whether to report in one mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the reporting location is required, and the control becomes complicated. The processing burden may increase. In addition, after the labeling means to be notified first in the dynamic display appears in the second mode, if the labeling unit to be notified later is notified in the first mode, the labeling unit has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation for the appearance of the special identification information is lowered (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who is uplifted by notifying the second mode in the previous sign means will awaken by witnessing the falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the notification mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode notified by one labeling means is also followed by other labeling means for notification. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each notification location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the indicating means having a predetermined relationship with each other is notified even in the second mode even once, the indicating means that appears afterwards follows the second aspect to be notified. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the expression of downfall occurs in the means.

  However, when a plurality of labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, for example, a movement in which a display result of the first special identification information that can be given a game value lower than the second special identification information appears. In the target display, the marking means may be notified in the second mode in a state where the dynamic display determination effect is performed and the first special identification information appears. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the labeling means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is notified in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function superior to the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is notified in the second mode. The dynamic display is not confirmed with the first special identification information as it is, and some development effect is executed, and the first special identification information being displayed is changed to the second special identification information that can be given a higher game value. Predict that it will change. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is determined as the first special identification information, so that the player makes the game machine distrustful due to the effect of the content, and There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine B0, when information related to the first special identification information is stored in the storage means, when the indication means is changed to the second mode, the indication means notified after the determination effect is the first. It is configured not to notify the two modes. That is, when the game value of the first special identification information is given, the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

  In addition, the “determination effect” is, for example, a dynamic display in a case where an effect part indicating whether special identification information appears or general identification information appears among a plurality of variable elements constituting dynamic display. 1 represents the entire variable element, or represents the entire dynamic display.

In gaming machine B0,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
When it is determined by the type determining means that start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating notifying means are based on the plurality of changing means. A second mode continuation means for displaying in the second mode;
When it is determined by the validity determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, or the type determination means stores start information related to the first special identification information in the dynamic display. The first indication means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality of changing means, and the second indication means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification means. And a game machine B1 characterized by comprising two aspect change means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the type determining means that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the second aspect continuation means provided in the aspect changing means is based on the plurality of changing means. The first marking means and the second marking means are displayed in the second mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display by the validity determination unit, or the type determination unit determines that the start information related to the first special identification information is stored in the dynamic display. The first indication means is displayed in the second aspect by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means based on the plurality of change means, and the second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. Is displayed.

  Thereby, when the second special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and the general identification information or the first special identification information is changed in the dynamic display. When appearing, it is set so that the first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the first special identification information that can be given a game value lower than the second special identification information or the general identification information appears, the second indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode. To be configured. By comprising in this way, after 1st special identification information and general identification information appear, the 2nd indication means of a 2nd aspect does not appear, but it does not suggest that an effect develops. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the content from being trapped, makes the player not have excessive expectations, and does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine B1,
The first indicating means is
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine B2 comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, the more the number of appearances of the first marking means that can execute the second mode in dynamic display (for example, five or more), the more suitable the above-mentioned multiple changes work, and the control burden is remarkably reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B2,
The aspect changing means includes
Display mode changing means (for example, character color) for changing the display mode of the marking means from a predetermined normal display mode (for example, “white”) to a special display mode (for example, “red”) different from the normal display mode Lottery counter 223f),
The timing at which the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g),
The plurality of changing means are:
A batch changing unit that collectively changes the display mode of the indication unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit to the special display mode;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The normal display mode displays the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect after the timing when the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective change unit. A gaming machine B3 comprising an aspect display means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode changing unit provided in the mode changing unit changes the display mode of the marking unit from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. Similarly, the timing selecting unit provided in the mode changing unit selects the timing at which the display mode of the labeling unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit. Then, the display mode of the display unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit provided in the plurality of change units. Here, after the timing when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective changing unit, the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display means is set on the basis of a plurality of display elements such as display timings, and the display mode of the display means is increased. When the general identification information appears in the marking means after the determination effect, it can be changed (corrected) from the contents of multiple changes and displayed in the normal display mode (first mode). Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines B3,
The display mode changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing selection means includes
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The batch change means is:
Color batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The display color of the marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display color after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means. A gaming machine B4 comprising a normal color display means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means changes the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color. Also, the color change timing selection means provided in the timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, the color batch change means provided in the batch change means changes the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notifying means. The normal color display means displays the image in the normal display color. As a result, regarding the display elements of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling means is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling means When the general identification information appears in the marking means after the determination effect, the normal display color (first mode) can be displayed after being changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch change. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine B3 or B4,
The display mode changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the indication means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. And comprising
The first instruction output means includes:
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the change element of the display color of the marking unit is the normal display color A gaming machine B5, comprising a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection unit provided in the display mode change unit individually selects the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern change element for the display mode of the marking unit. Similarly, the first instruction output means provided in the aspect change means outputs a display instruction for displaying the marking means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. When the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the labeling is performed by the second command output unit provided in the first command output unit. A display instruction for displaying the change element of the display color of the means in the normal display color is output. That is, with respect to the display mode of the labeling means, the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern is separately selected (determined) by the mode changing means, and the display instruction of the marking means is output based on the selection contents. When the display mode of the labeling unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, a display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the labeling unit is output. It is configured.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, the display instruction for the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may be enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means, there is an effect that the number of display instructions regarding the marking means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine B0, if the result of the dynamic display becomes the first special identification information even if the second mode of each marking means is selected, the determination The display means (second display means) that appears after the performance is executed is displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color) and displayed. In this case, after all the display colors, change timings and display patterns of the respective indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication means is associated with one display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction, display instructions corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the labeling means including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the effect determination must be prepared in advance. The number may increase dramatically. Therefore, a display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or indication (change) content after the effect determination, and the display of each display means is displayed on the image display means based on the display instruction. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to each marking means, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, some development effect is executed in the dynamic display by changing the display color of the marking means. Predict. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display, at least the display color is displayed in the display means displayed after the determination effect even if the plurality of display means are changed to the second mode. Is displayed in the normal display color. That is, in the dynamic display in which the first special identification information appears, the marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine B5,
The first instruction output means includes
A gaming machine B6, comprising: a start-time output unit that outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the marking unit in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B6,
The aspect changing means includes
When it is determined by the type determination means that start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the determination effect execution means by the determination effect execution means is based on the aspect change means. A gaming machine B7, comprising: mode maintaining means for displaying the marking means that appears after execution in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the type determination means that the start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the dynamic display, the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is provided by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means. The display means that appears after the execution of is displayed in the second mode. Thereby, when the game value based on the second special identification information is given, the game value based on the second special identification information can be given by initially maintaining the display of the changed sign means in the second mode. It has the effect of congratulating the player about this and enhancing the fun of the game.

In gaming machines B0 to B6,
The dynamic display executing means includes
Special game generating means for generating a special game state that can give the predetermined game value when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display (for example, any “big hit state”);
When it is determined by the type determination means that start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, a temporary display result corresponding to the first special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display. Temporary display means (for example, a display result corresponding to “15R normal jackpot”),
Corresponding to the second special identification information in the special game state by the special game generating means after the provisional display means displays the temporary display result corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display. And a promotion display means for displaying a promotion display result to be displayed,
The aspect maintaining means includes
When the type determining means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, and the promotion display result appears in the special gaming state by the promotion display means And, based on the aspect changing means, comprising a promotion aspect maintaining means for displaying in the second aspect the indication means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect executing means. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, a special game state that can give a predetermined game value is generated by the special game generating means provided in the dynamic display executing means. Further, when the type determining means determines that the starting information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means, the temporary display means provides a temporary display corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display. Results appear. Then, after displaying the provisional display result corresponding to the first special identification information in the dynamic display by the temporary display means, the promotion display means corresponds to the second special identification information in the special game state by the special game generating means. The promoted display result is displayed. Here, when it is determined that the start information related to the second special identification information is stored in the storage means by the type determination means, and the promotion display result is displayed in the special gaming state by the promotion display means, The promotion means maintaining means provided in the maintaining means displays, in the second aspect, the marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means based on the aspect change means. As a result, when the promoted display result corresponding to the second special identification information appears, even if the temporary display result corresponding to the first special identification information appears in the metaphor dynamic display, Since the display means to be displayed is displayed in the second mode, the game value corresponding to the second special identification information is given, so whether or not the display unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode. There is an effect that game nature is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, initially, the display of a plurality of changed marking means is maintained in the second mode, and as a result, the player is congratulated with the fact that a game value corresponding to the second special identification information can be given. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<C group: When the character display is changed to red and pre-read and there is a big hit in the hold, the red color of the character display after the effect is maintained>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
When special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big jackpot display”) appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In gaming machines that grant
Storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number (for example, the holding ball storage area 203b or the holding ball execution area 203c);
It is determined whether information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is started to be executed by the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. Execution determination means (for example, variation effect processing (S1109));
Whether the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. Standby determination means for determining (for example, hold display setting processing (S1209));
A plurality of marking means (for example, character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3 and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the execution determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. A mode changing means for changing (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f);
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing a notification mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, the effect of determining whether to display the special identification information or to display general identification information (for example, “losing display”) to which the predetermined game value is not given unlike the special identification information. (For example, a determination effect execution means (for example, a “super reach” variable element) that executes a “super reach” variable element)
The aspect changing means includes
When the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the execution determining unit displays the special identification information in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display unit. When it is determined not to be performed, and the information regarding the special identification information is not stored in the start-up information corresponding to the dynamic display for which execution in the image display unit is on standby by the standby determination unit. A first mode notification means (for example, a display regular phrase normal command) for notifying, in the first mode, the marking means to be notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution means when determined;
When the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the execution determining unit displays the special identification information in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display unit. When it is determined, or by the standby determination unit, it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display for which execution in the image display unit is standby. A game machine C0, comprising: an aspect maintaining means for notifying, in the second aspect, the marking means notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine C0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value of the player is given. Further, the starting information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with the predetermined number as an upper limit. Here, of the start information stored in the storage means, it is determined by the execution determination means whether or not the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means. Is done. Further, the standby determination means determines whether or not the information related to the special identification information is stored in the startup information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. To be judged. Then, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Further, based on the determination result by the execution determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. Here, when the marking means is changed to the second mode by the mode changing means, the plurality of reporting modes are changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing means. Then, by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or the general identification information that is not given a predetermined game value unlike the special identification information is displayed. The effect of determining whether to output is executed. Here, when the notification mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the execution determining unit determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display in which the execution is started by the image display unit. And when it is determined by the standby determination means that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means. In the first mode, the first mode notifying unit provided in is notified in the first mode, which is notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution unit. Further, when the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, it is determined by the execution determining unit that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display starting execution by the image displaying unit. Or when it is determined by the standby determination means that the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means. The indication means notified after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is notified in the second aspect by the aspect maintaining means. That is, when the general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in the dynamic display that starts execution in the image display means, the special identification is also performed in the dynamic display in which the execution in the image display means is awaited. When the information does not appear, even if the notification mode of the plurality of labeling units having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, the marking unit that is notified after the execution of the dynamic display determination effect The notification mode is displayed in a first mode that is not the second mode. On the other hand, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display that starts execution in the image display means, or the special identification information that gives a predetermined game value in the dynamic display that is waiting for execution in the image display means When the notification mode of the plurality of labeling means is changed to the second mode when appearing, the notification mode of the labeling unit to be notified after the execution of the dynamic display determination effect being performed is reported in the second mode. .

As in the prior art, when reporting means having a predetermined relevance to each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of dynamic display, the marking means is provided for each reporting location. If the configuration is to set (lottery) whether to report in one mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the reporting location is required, and the control becomes complicated. The processing burden may increase. In addition, after indicating in the second aspect the indicating means to be notified first in dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first aspect, the indicating means has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, the expression of the special identification information appears lower (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who is uplifted by notifying the second mode in the previous sign means will awaken by witnessing the falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the setting (lottery) of notification modes of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other in dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode notified by one marking means is also followed by other marking means. By configuring so as to be notified, it is not necessary to perform setting processing for each notification location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other is notified in the second mode even once, the indication means is configured to notify the subsequent indication means by following the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the expression of downfall occurs.

  However, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, for example, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the general identification information to which the predetermined game value is not given appears, the dynamic display In the state where the determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the labeling means notified after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is notified in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function superior to the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is notified in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, if the dynamic display is confirmed as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, and the predetermined game value is not given even in the dynamic display during standby, the player There is a possibility that the game content may be interrupted by causing the distrust to the gaming machine and the distrust feeling to the game hall in which the gaming machine is installed due to the effect content.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C0, special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display starting execution in the image display means, and the special identification is also performed in the dynamic display in which the execution in the image display means is on standby. When the information does not appear, even if the sign means is changed to the second form, the sign means notified after the determination effect is configured not to inform the second form. On the other hand, if the special identification information appears in the dynamic display starting execution on the image display means, or if the special identification information appears in the dynamic display waiting to be executed on the image display means When the labeling means in the dynamic display is changed to the second mode, the marking unit that is notified after the determination effect is configured to be notified in the second mode. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, when the special identification information appears on the dynamic display during standby while the sign means after the determination effect is notified in the first mode, Even if it is the dynamic display of information, it is comprised so that the alerting | reporting aspect of the marking means after the determination effect may be alert | reported in a 2nd aspect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the production content from being trapped, to prevent excessive expectations from the player, and to display general identification information in the dynamic display during execution. In addition, when the indication means after the determination effect is informed and displayed in the second mode, it can be suggested that the special identification information is stored in the dynamic display during standby. Therefore, while providing a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by providing a pre-reading function of the dynamic display during standby in the indicating means after the determination effect, There is an effect.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

  In addition, the “determination effect” is, for example, a dynamic display in a case where an effect part indicating whether special identification information appears or general identification information appears among a plurality of variable elements constituting dynamic display. 1 represents the entire variable element, or represents the entire dynamic display.

In gaming machine C0,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
When the execution determining means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, or the standby determining means waits for execution in the image display means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating notifying means based on the plurality of changing means A second mode continuation means for displaying in the second mode;
When the execution determining means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, and the standby determining means waits for execution in the image display means When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display being performed, the first indication means in the second mode based on the plurality of change means A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second mode changing means for displaying and displaying the second marking means in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the execution determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, or the dynamic that is waiting for execution in the image display means by the standby determining means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the display, the second indication continuation means provided in the aspect change means provides the first indication means and the first indication based on the plurality of change means. Two marking means are displayed in the second mode. On the other hand, when it is determined by the execution determining means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, and when the standby determining means is waiting for execution in the image display means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the start information corresponding to the target display, the second indication change means provided in the indication change means causes the first indication means based on the plurality of change means. The second mode is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit.

  As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display for starting execution or when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during standby, both the first marking means and the second marking means are second. It is changed to a mode. On the other hand, if the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display for starting execution and the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display during standby, the first indication means is in the second mode. The second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. That is, when the display result of the special identification information does not appear in any of the currently stored dynamic displays, the second indicating means after the determination effect of the dynamic display being performed is displayed in the first mode. Configure as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent occurrence of habits of production contents, not to give excessive expectation to the player, and to display general identification information in dynamic display during execution. In addition, when the indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, it can be suggested that the special identification information is stored in the dynamic display during standby. Therefore, while providing a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by providing a pre-reading function of the dynamic display during standby in the indicating means after the determination effect, There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C1,
The first indicating means is
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine C2 comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2,
The aspect changing means includes
Display mode changing means (for example, character color) for changing the display mode of the marking means from a predetermined normal display mode (for example, “white”) to a special display mode (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Lottery counter 223f),
The timing at which the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g),
The plurality of changing means are:
A batch changing unit that collectively changes the display mode of the indication unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit to the special display mode;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The normal display mode displays the display mode of the labeling unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect after the timing when the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective change unit. A gaming machine C3 comprising an aspect display means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode changing unit provided in the mode changing unit changes the display mode of the marking unit from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. Similarly, the timing selecting unit provided in the mode changing unit selects the timing at which the display mode of the labeling unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit. Then, the display mode of the display unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit provided in the plurality of change units. Here, after the timing when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the special display mode by the collective changing unit, the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. It is displayed in the normal display mode by the normal mode display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display means is set on the basis of a plurality of display elements such as display timings, and the display mode of the display means is increased. When the general identification information appears in the marking means after the determination effect, it can be changed (corrected) from the contents of multiple changes and displayed in the normal display mode (first mode). Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine C3,
The display mode changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing selection means includes
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The batch change means is:
Color batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The display color of the marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display color after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means. A gaming machine C4 comprising normal color display means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means changes the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color. Also, the color change timing selection means provided in the timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, the color batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means changes the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means to the special display color. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notifying means. The normal color display means displays the image in the normal display color. As a result, regarding the display mode of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling unit is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4,
The display mode changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the indication means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. And comprising
The first instruction output means includes:
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine C5, comprising: a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection unit provided in the display mode change unit individually selects the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern change element for the display mode of the marking unit. Similarly, the first instruction output means provided in the display mode changing means outputs a display instruction for displaying the marking means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. . When the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the labeling is performed by the second command output unit provided in the first command output unit. A display instruction for displaying the change element of the display color of the means in the normal display color is output. That is, with respect to the display mode of the labeling means, the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern is separately selected (determined) by the mode changing means, and the display instruction of the marking means is output based on the selection contents. When the display mode of the labeling unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, a display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the labeling unit is output. It is configured.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, the display instruction for the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may be enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means, there is an effect that the number of display instructions regarding the marking means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine C0, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, the result of the dynamic display for starting execution is not the special identification information, and When the result of the dynamic display during standby is not the special identification information, the indication means (second indication means) that appears after execution of the determination effect is displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). It is configured to display. In this case, after all the display colors, change timings and display patterns of the respective indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication means is associated with one display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction, display instructions corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the labeling means including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the effect determination must be prepared in advance. The number may increase dramatically. Therefore, a display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after the effect determination, and the display of each display means is displayed by the image display means based on the display instruction. By adjusting the control, it is possible to reduce the number of display instructions relating to each marking means, and to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display to start execution, and when the special identification information does not appear even in the dynamic display during standby, the plurality of indication means is changed to the second mode. Even in such a case, the display means displayed after the determination effect is configured to display at least the display color in the normal display color. In other words, when no special identification information is generated in all the dynamic displays stored in the storage means including the standby state, the indication means after the determination effect in the dynamic display being executed is displayed in at least the normal display color. To be configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine C5,
The first instruction output means includes
A gaming machine C6, comprising: a start-time output unit that outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the marking unit in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the start time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

<Group D: Display color is determined by determining whether there is a variation element of the development effect after the character display>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big win display”) appears, a predetermined game value of the player In gaming machines that grant
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
A plurality of marking means (for example, character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3 and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing a notification mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display includes a plurality of dynamic elements (for example, a “fast fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “low speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “normal reach” fluctuation element, a “super reach” fluctuation element, ”Revariable” variable elements),
The aspect changing means includes
When the notification mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, at least 1 after the notification of the one marking unit in the dynamic display (before the display of the marking unit). Dynamic element execution determination means for determining whether or not the dynamic element is executed,
When the dynamic element execution determining means determines that at least one of the dynamic elements is not executed after the notification of the indicating means (before displaying the indicating means), the one indication A gaming machine D0, comprising: first mode notification means for reporting means in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine D0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value of the player is given. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Also, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. Moreover, when changing the marking means to the second mode by the mode changing unit, the notification mode of the plurality of marking units is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. The dynamic display is configured by combining a plurality of dynamic elements. Here, when the notifying mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units by the dynamic element execution determining unit provided in the mode changing unit, the dynamic display is performed (before the display of the marking unit). It is determined whether at least one dynamic element is executed after the notification of one marking means in step. Provided in the element changing means when the dynamic element execution determining means determines that at least one dynamic element is not executed after the notification of one indicating means (before displaying the indicating means). The first mode notification means notifies the marking means in the first mode. That is, when at least one dynamic element is not executed after informing one indication means in dynamic display, the indication mode of a plurality of indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode. Even if it exists, the alerting | reporting aspect of the 1 marking means is alert | reported by the 1st aspect which is not a 2nd aspect.

  As in the prior art, when reporting means having a predetermined relevance to each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of dynamic display, the marking means is provided for each reporting location. If the configuration is to set (lottery) whether to report in one mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the reporting location is required, and the control becomes complicated. The processing burden may increase. In addition, after indicating in the second aspect the indicating means to be notified first in dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first aspect, the indicating means has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, the expression of the special identification information appears lower (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who is uplifted by notifying the second mode in the previous sign means will awaken by witnessing the falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the notification mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode notified by one labeling means is also followed by other labeling means for notification. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each notification location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other is notified in the second mode even once, the indication means is configured to notify the subsequent indication means by following the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the expression of downfall occurs.

  However, when a plurality of labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other are changed to the second mode, for example, after the determination effect in the dynamic display is executed and immediately before the dynamic display is ended, When notifying and notifying (suggesting, outputting, displaying) the contents of the current production situation as a result of dynamic display by the indicating means, the indicating means may be notified in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, as described above, the marking means that is notified immediately before the end of the dynamic display has a situation notification function that notifies the contents of the current production situation that is the result of the dynamic display. Therefore, if the indication means displayed immediately before the end of the dynamic display is notified in the second aspect, the player develops from the situation notification function of the indication means by notifying the indication means in the second aspect. It is predicted that the suggestion function will be won, the current display state will not be confirmed, and some kind of development effect will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, the dynamic display is fixed as it is in the current display state, so that the player can raise distrust to the gaming machine and install the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. There is also a risk that distrust will be raised to the game hall that is playing, and the game will be interrupted.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D0, even when a plurality of marking means are changed to the second mode, at least one dynamic element is not executed after notifying one marking means in the dynamic display. The notification mode of the first marking means is configured to be notified in the first mode. That is, the notification mode of the marking means displayed in the state where there is no dynamic element executed in the dynamic display is configured to be notified in the first mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

In gaming machine D0,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect is executed to execute a determination effect (for example, a “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Means (e.g., "super-reach" variables),
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The dynamic element execution determination means includes
A second post-labeling discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not at least one of the dynamic elements is executed after the display of the second marking unit;
The aspect changing means includes
The first indication when the second indication means determines that the dynamic element is to be executed after the second indication means is displayed (before the second indication means is displayed). A second aspect continuation means for displaying the means and the second indication means in the second aspect;
The first marking means when the second marking means determines that the dynamic element is not executed after displaying the second marking means (before displaying the second marking means). And a second mode changing means for displaying the second marking means in the first mode by the first mode marking means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. Further, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Then, at least one dynamic element is executed after the display of the second labeling means (before the display of the second labeling means) by the second labeling determination means provided in the dynamic element execution determining means. Is determined. Here, when it is determined that the dynamic element is executed after the display of the second labeling means (before the display of the second labeling means) by the second labeling determination means, the mode changing means is provided. The second indication continuation means displays the first indication means and the second indication means in the second aspect. Further, when it is determined that the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the second labeling means by the second labeling determining means, the second sign changing means provided in the mode changing means causes the first signing means to The second mode is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit. Thereby, when the dynamic element is executed after the display of the second marking means, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the second marking means. In this case, the first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, the second marking means after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode or the second mode depending on whether or not the dynamic element is executed after the second marking means is displayed. With this configuration, when the dynamic element is not executed after the determination effect, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear and does not suggest that the effect develops. This is advantageous in that it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the player from feeling excessive distrust and prevents the player from feeling distrust.

  The “determination effect” is, for example, a dynamic display in a case where an effect part of whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears among a plurality of variable elements constituting the dynamic display. 1 represents the entire variable element, or represents the entire dynamic display.

In the gaming machine D1,
The first indicating means is
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine D2 comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
The aspect changing means includes
Display mode changing means (for example, character color) for changing the display mode of the marking means from a predetermined normal display mode (for example, “white”) to a special display mode (for example, “red”) different from the normal display mode Lottery counter 223f),
The timing at which the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g),
The plurality of changing means are:
A batch changing unit that collectively changes the display mode of the indication unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit to the special display mode;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The normal display mode is the display mode of the labeling unit that appears after the timing when the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit and the dynamic element is not executed. A gaming machine D3 comprising a normal mode display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode changing unit provided in the mode changing unit changes the display mode of the marking unit from a predetermined normal display mode to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. Similarly, the timing selecting unit provided in the mode changing unit selects the timing at which the display mode of the labeling unit is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode by the display mode changing unit. Then, the display mode of the display unit displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit provided in the plurality of change units. Here, the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the timing when the display mode of the labeling unit is changed to the special display mode by the batch change unit and the dynamic element is not executed is the first mode notification unit. Displayed in the normal display mode by the provided normal mode display means. As a result, with respect to the display modes of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling means is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display timing, and the variation of the display mode of the marking means is increased. The display mode of the display means that appears in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed can be changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch setting and displayed in the normal display mode (first mode). Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine D3,
The display mode changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing selection means includes
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing at which the character display Se1 is displayed when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach is displayed. Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The batch change means is:
Color batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
The display color of the marking means that appears after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means and the dynamic element is not executed is the normal display color. A gaming machine D4, characterized by comprising normal color display means for displaying in (4).

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the color changing means provided in the display mode changing means changes the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color. Also, the color change timing selection means provided in the timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, the color batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means changes the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means to the special display color. Here, the display color of the marking means that appears after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means and the dynamic element is not executed is displayed in the first mode notification means. The display is performed in the normal display color by the provided normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display unit having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display unit is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation The display mode of the display means that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed can be changed (corrected) from the contents of the batch setting and displayed in the normal display color (first mode). Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4,
The display mode changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
First instruction output means (for example, command output processing (S1102)) for outputting a display instruction for displaying the indication means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. And comprising
The first instruction output means includes:
When displaying in the first mode the display mode of the marking unit that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed by the first mode reporting unit, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is A gaming machine D5, comprising a second instruction output means for outputting a display instruction for displaying in a normal display color.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection means provided in the aspect change means individually selects the change element of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display form of the marking means. Similarly, the first instruction output means provided in the aspect change means outputs a display instruction for displaying the marking means on the image display means based on each change element selected by the change element selection means. And when the display mode of the labeling means to be displayed in the situation where the dynamic element is not executed is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit, at least the change element of the display color of the labeling unit is displayed in the normal display color. The display instruction to be output is output by the second instruction output means provided in the first instruction output means. That is, with respect to the display mode of the labeling means, the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern is separately selected (determined) by the mode changing means, and the display instruction of the marking means is output based on the selection contents. When the display mode of the labeling unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, a display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the labeling unit is output. It is configured.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, the display instruction for the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is generated by one display instruction. In this case, display instructions corresponding to all variations of display colors, change timings, and display patterns must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may be enormous. Therefore, by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means, there is an effect that the number of display instructions regarding the marking means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine D0, even if the second mode of each marking means is selected, the marking means (second marking means) that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed. ) Is displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display color, change timing, and display pattern of each labeling means and the display (change) contents of the labeling means that appear in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed are determined, one display In the case of outputting a display instruction regarding each labeling means in accordance with the instructions, according to variations in the display mode of all the marking means including the contents to be displayed (changed) on the marking means that appears in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed Display instructions must be prepared in advance, and the number of display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, a display instruction is separately output for each display means display color (change) displayed in the situation where the display color, change timing, display pattern, or dynamic element of the display means is not executed, and based on the display instructions. Thus, by adjusting the display control of each indication means by the image display means, the number of display instructions relating to each indication means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the dynamic element is not executed after the display of the labeling means in the dynamic display, the dynamic element is displayed in a situation where the dynamic element is not executed even when the plurality of labeling means are changed to the second mode. The marking means is configured to display at least the display color in the normal display color. That is, the marking means just before the end of the dynamic display is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine D5,
The first instruction output means includes
A game machine D6, comprising: a start-time output unit that outputs all display instructions regarding the display mode of the marking unit in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the start time output means provided in the first instruction output means outputs all display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines D1 to D6,
The aspect changing means includes
When it is determined by the dynamic element execution determination means that at least one of the dynamic elements is executed after the display of the labeling means (before the display of the labeling means), A gaming machine D7, comprising a mode maintaining unit for displaying the marking unit in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is determined by the dynamic element execution determining means that at least one dynamic element is executed after the display of one marking means, the aspect changing means is provided by the aspect maintaining means provided in the aspect changing means. The one marking means is displayed in the second mode based on the above. Thereby, when a dynamic element is executed after the display of one marking means, it is suggested that the display of the changed marking means is initially maintained in the second mode to develop from the current performance state, Since the dynamic element is actually executed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In gaming machine D7,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, provisional display means for displaying provisional identification information other than the special identification information;
Re-dynamic display executing means for executing re-dynamic display for changing the temporary identification information to the special identification information after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means,
The aspect maintaining means includes
It has been determined by the dynamic element execution determination means that the redynamic display by the redynamic display execution means is executed after the display of the labeling means of 1 (before the display of the indication means). In this case, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the one indication means is displayed in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, provisional identification information other than special identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, after the temporary identification information is displayed by the temporary display means by the redynamic display execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means, the redynamic display for changing the temporary identification information to the special identification information is executed. Is done. Here, when it is determined by the dynamic element execution determining means that the redynamic display by the redynamic display executing means is executed after the display of the one indicating means (before the displaying of the indicating means). By means of the aspect maintaining means, one indication means is displayed in the second aspect. As a result, the labeling means is displayed in the second mode in a state where the provisional identification information that is not the special identification information is displayed, and the presenting state is developed by displaying the labeling unit in the second mode. To suggest. Then, by executing the re-dynamic display from the state and changing the displayed temporary identification information to the special identification information, an effect directly connected to the game value is executed based on the second mode of the marking means, There is an effect of diversifying the production and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D7 or D8,
The special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information (for example, “15R normal jackpot”) and second special identification information (for example, “15R probability variation jackpot” that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. )), And
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, first special provisional display means for provisionally displaying the first special identification information;
After the first special identification information is provisionally displayed by the first special provisional display means, the promotion execution means for executing the promotion display for changing the first special identification information to the second special identification information; Prepared,
The aspect maintaining means includes
When it is determined by the dynamic element execution determination means that the promotion display by the promotion execution means is executed after the display of the indication means of 1 (before the indication of the indication means), the 1 The game machine D9 is characterized in that the marking means is displayed in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. Then, the first special provisional display means provided in the dynamic display execution means temporarily displays the first special identification information in the dynamic display, and the first special identification information is provisionally displayed by the first special provisional display means. After the display, the promotion execution means executes the promotion display in which the first special identification information is changed to the second special identification information. Here, when it is determined by the dynamic element execution determination unit that the promotion display by the promotion execution unit is executed after the display of the one labeling unit (before the display of the display unit), the mode maintenance unit One marking means is displayed in the second mode. As a result, the marking means is displayed in the second mode in a state where the first special identification information is displayed, and it is suggested that the marking unit is displayed in the second mode, so that the present production state is developed. . Then, the promotion display is executed from the state, and the first special identification information displayed is changed to the second special identification information, thereby producing an effect directly connected to the game value based on the second mode of the indicating means. In addition, there is an effect that the entertainment can be enhanced by diversifying the production.

<E group: Additional data table for each character display change element>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (for example, the third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113), In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
Marking means displayed in the image display means (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, or pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4);
A plurality of change elements (for example, character patterns, display colors, change timings or display color correction contents) that determine the display mode of the marking means;
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, the image is changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection unit and displayed. Second display determining means for determining the change element of the marking means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)),
The second definition information (for example, for each screen) is provided for each of the change elements of the marking means and indicates drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) in the change element. Second character information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing character color additional data table 232a2),
Second selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting, from the second definition information storage means, the second definition information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means. ,
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the updated information is updated based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means and the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
A drawing that generates drawing instruction information (for example, a drawing list) that instructs the image drawing unit to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying unit. Instruction information generating means (for example, S2501 of the drawing process (S2026)),
The gaming machine E0, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine E0, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means, the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image is displayed by the sub-control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. The display means is controlled. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, first definition information that is provided for each first display type and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen is stored in the first specification information storage. Stored by means. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. In addition, the marking means is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the marking means is determined by a plurality of changing elements. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the change element of the marking means to be displayed after being changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection means is determined to be the second display. Determined by means. And the 2nd regulation information which provided for every change element of a marking means, and specified the drawing information which shows information required for drawing of the picture which should be changed (added) in the change element and to display for every screen, Stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second selection information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination unit is selected from the second definition information storage unit by the second selection unit. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second specified information, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means. Thus, when the display means for the second display instruction is changed (added) and displayed on the image of the first display type for the first display instruction from the main control means, the second rule for the change element of the display means is displayed. By simply selecting information from the second specified information storage means, the display mode of the marking means can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In the gaming machine E0,
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114) for causing the image display means to dynamically display identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means; With
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. A gaming machine that adds value,
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
In the dynamic display, a sign display means for displaying a plurality of the sign means so as to have a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect is executed to execute a determination effect (for example, a “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Means (e.g., "super-reach" variables),
The aspect changing means includes
When the display means of the indication means is changed to the second aspect by the plurality of changing means, and the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect A first mode notification unit (for example, a display regular phrase normal command) that displays the indication unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution unit in the first mode;
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means includes
Based on the second display instruction, batch defining information (for example, additional data table for character color 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Collective prescription information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the prescription information from the second prescription information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, first aspect defining information that defines drawing information when the display form of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect informing means. And a first mode prescription information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting (for example, the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second prescription information storage unit. A gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are produced. That is, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. In addition, the sign display means displays a plurality of sign means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing unit. Further, when the indication means is changed to the second aspect by the aspect changing means, the display aspect of the plurality of indication means is changed to the second aspect by the plural changing means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. And when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the determination unit is provided in the mode changing unit when it is determined that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. The first mode notification unit displays the display unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution unit in the first mode. Here, the dynamic regulation information defining the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage means based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection means provided in the first selection means. Information is selected. Further, the batch defining information selecting unit provided in the second selecting unit defines the drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units based on the second display instruction. The regulation information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Similarly, the drawing when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. First aspect defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in dynamic display, even if the display mode of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, The display mode of the marking means displayed after execution of the determination effect of the target display is displayed in the first mode that is not the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of marking means are collectively set and changed (added), and the marking means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the marking means is collectively set is displayed. In addition to selecting the specified collective provision information, the first aspect defining information defining the drawing information in the case where the indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect is selected.

  As in the prior art, when the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is displayed at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the display means is provided for each appearance location. Is set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in the second mode different from the first mode, the setting process (lottery process) for the appearing location is required and control is performed. May become complicated and increase the processing load. In addition, if the marking means that appears first in the dynamic display appears in the second mode and then the marking means that appears later appears in the first mode, the marking having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation that special identification information will appear (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been uplifted due to the appearance of the second mode in the preceding sign means will be awakened by witnessing the above-mentioned falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the display mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode displayed by one labeling means is followed by the other labeling means. By configuring so as to be output, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other appears in the second mode even once, the marking means that appears afterwards follows the second mode to make it appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the falling expression occurs in the marking means.

  However, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the sign means displayed after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function over the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is displayed in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, since the dynamic display is determined as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. Also, there is a risk of distrusting the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine E1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is collectively set to the second mode, the signing means displayed after the determination effect is the second An aspect is configured not to appear. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the display means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. Further, based on the second display instruction, collective provision information defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units is selected from the second regulation information storage unit, Similarly, drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective. In addition, when a plurality of labeling means are changed (added), and when the labeling means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, collective provision information that defines drawing information when the marking means is changed Various display modes of a plurality of marking means can be easily changed by selecting the first mode defining information that defines the drawing information when the marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode. (Added) can be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

  Note that “a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the marking means have the same attribute or fall under the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (E.g., variable elements of “pseudo-ream”) and the like.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
The second selection means includes
A selection information storage means configured to select and store a plurality of the second prescribed information;
The drawing information specifying means includes
One screen giving priority to the drawing information of the second specified information stored later than the drawing information of the second specified information stored earlier among the plurality of second specified information stored in the selection information storage means. A gaming machine E2 comprising priority specifying means for specifying the minute drawing information.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the selection information storage means provided in the second selection means is configured to be able to select and store a plurality of second prescribed information. Further, the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means is stored after the drawing information of the second prescription information stored earlier among the plurality of second prescription information stored in the selection information storage means. The drawing information for one screen is specified with priority given to the drawing information of the second specified information. Thereby, since the content of the 2nd prescription information memorize | stored later can be displayed with priority over the content of the 2nd prescription information memorize | stored previously, the 2nd prescription information with respect to the marking means to change is added. By storing it, the display mode of the marking means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination process of the second specified information to be prioritized is unnecessary, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

In gaming machine E2,
The second selection means includes
The collective provision information by the collective provision information selection means is stored in the selection information storage means first, and the first aspect provision information by the first aspect provision information selection means is stored in the selection information storage means later. Characteristic gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are produced. That is, by the second selection means, the collective provision information by the collective provision information selection means is first stored in the selection information storage means, and the first aspect provision information by the first aspect provision information selection means is later stored in the selection information storage means. The Thereby, even when a plurality of marking means are changed to the second mode, the first mode regulation information is stored after the batch regulation information, so that the labeling unit that appears after execution of the determination effect is the first mode. Can be displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing for discriminating the second specified information that should be prioritized, and the processing load of display control can be reduced, while the content of production is prevented from being trapped, and the player is not overly expected. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
A second mode continuation unit for displaying the first labeling unit and the second labeling reporting unit in the second mode when the determination unit determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication is indicated by the first aspect notification means. And a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second aspect by the second aspect continuing means provided in the aspect changing means. Is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means, The second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine E4,
The first indicating means is:
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine E5, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are produced. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The plurality of changing means are:
Batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
Normal after displaying the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means. A gaming machine E6 comprising color display means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Similarly, the timing selecting means provided in the mode changing means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means. Then, the display color of the labeling means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling unit is changed to the special display color by the batch changing unit, the display color of the labeling unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. Displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling unit is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine E6,
The aspect changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
Instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means (for example, command output processing (S1102)),
The instruction output means includes
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the change element of the display color of the marking unit is the normal display color A game machine E7, comprising: a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the change element selection means provided in the aspect change means individually selects the change element of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display form of the marking means. Similarly, a second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means provided in the aspect change means. And when the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. The display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode change means selects (determines) the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern separately for the display mode of the labeling means, and each of the second display instructions of the marking means is determined based on the selection contents. A second display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the marking means when the display mode of the marking means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit. Is configured to output.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is performed by one second display instruction. If generated, second display instructions corresponding to all variations of display color, change timing, and display pattern must be prepared in advance, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, the effect that the number of second display instructions related to the marking means can be reduced and the increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means. There is.

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine E1, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes general identification information, The display means (second display means) that appears after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display color, change timing, and display pattern of each indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication is made by one second display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction related to the means, a second display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the marking means must be prepared in advance, including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the presentation determination. The number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, a second display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination of each marking means, and each image display means outputs each second display instruction based on the second display instruction. By adjusting the display control of the marking means, the number of second display instructions relating to each marking means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color is the normal display color in the labeling means displayed after the determination effect. Configure to display. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the display means after the determination effect is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine E7,
The instruction output means includes
A game machine E8, comprising: a start-time output unit that outputs all second display instructions related to a display mode of the labeling unit in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all second display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines E1 to E8,
The aspect changing means includes
When the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. A game machine E9, comprising: a mode maintaining means (for example, S1702 for character color change restriction processing: Yes).

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means Means are displayed in a second manner. Thereby, when special identification information appears, it is maintained that the display of the labeling means set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be given. Blessing the person and enhancing the fun of the game.

<F group: Data table for each production unit>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (for example, the third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113), In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
In the image display means, a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relation to each other (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) )When,
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, a second display determination unit (for example, a command determination process (S2022)) that determines the marking unit to be displayed on the image display unit. S2112),
Second definition information (for each screen), which is provided for a plurality of the labeling means and indicates information necessary for rendering an image to be changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means and displayed. For example, a second specified information storage unit (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing the additional data table for character 232a2)
Second selection means (for example, character command processing (S2113)) for selecting, from the second definition information storage means, the second definition information corresponding to the marking means determined by the second display determination means;
In the image display means, a plurality of suggesting means (for example, an execution symbol and a holding symbol) that suggest a gaming state,
Based on a third display instruction from the main control means (for example, a display change-on-holding change command), a third display determination means (for example, a command determination process) that determines the suggestion means to be displayed on the image display means. S2110) of S2022)
Third provision information (for each screen) that is provided for a plurality of the suggestion means and indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of suggestion means ( For example, a third specified information storage unit (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing a holding additional data table 232a2),
And third selection means (for example, prefetch command processing (S2111)) for selecting the third definition information for the suggestion means determined by the third display determination means from the third definition information storage means. ,
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means, the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means, and the third selecting means are selected. Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) based on the third specified information;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen (for example, Drawing processing (S2026) S2501),
The gaming machine F0, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine F0, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means, the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image is displayed by the sub control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. The display means is controlled. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, the first definition information storage means provides a first definition that is provided for each first display type and that indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. In the image display means, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are displayed. In addition, the second display determination unit determines the display unit displayed on the image display unit based on the second display instruction from the main control unit. Second definition information that is provided for a plurality of labeling means and that indicates drawing information indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means. Is stored by the second prescribed information storage means. Here, the second selection information is selected from the second specification information storage means by the second selection means with respect to the marking means determined by the second display determination means. In the image display means, a plurality of suggesting means for suggesting the gaming state are displayed. Further, the third display determining unit determines the suggesting unit displayed on the image display unit based on the third display instruction from the main control unit. And the 3rd prescription | regulation information which provided with respect to several suggestion means, and showed the drawing information which shows the information required for drawing of the image which should be changed (added) in the some suggestion means, and should be displayed Is stored by the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information for the suggesting means determined by the third display determining means is selected by the third selecting means from the third specifying information storage means. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second prescribed information and the third prescribed information selected by the third selecting means, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means.

  In the gaming machine E0, regarding the display modes of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other, separate second prescribed information is selected for each change element of each marking means that has been individually drawn and selected. The display control of each marking means is performed based on the second specified information. In such a configuration, the second specified information is necessary for each change element of each marking means.

  Here, in the dynamic display, in addition to each indication means, there are a plurality of presentations (notices) such as a display relating to a plurality of suggestion means indicating a gaming state and a production design such as a plurality of character designs. In addition, various changing elements (for example, number, display color, strength pattern, appearance timing, etc.) are provided in advance. Therefore, also in each of these effects, a plurality of types of third regulation information and the like are selected for each change element, and display control of the entire dynamic display is executed based on the selected third regulation information.

  However, the more productions (notices) to be added and the more change elements for each production (notice), the more the number of second specified information to be selected increases proportionally, which increases the storage capacity of the gaming machine. There is a risk of being tight, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity in advance at a cost. In addition, when a large number of second regulation information is selected, when generating drawing instruction information in the drawing process, the number of the first regulation information and the second regulation information to be referred to increases, so that the processing burden regarding display control is increased. May increase.

  Therefore, when displaying each image corresponding to the first display instruction, the second display instruction, or the third display instruction from the main control means, the first provision information, the second provision information, or the third provision information for each production unit is displayed. The display mode of the image display means can be easily changed (added) and displayed only by selecting from the first regulation information storage means, the second regulation information storage means, or the third regulation information storage means. Moreover, it comprises so that 2nd regulation information may be selected with respect to several marking means, and it may comprise with several images by comprising so that 3rd regulation information may be selected with respect to several suggestion means. Since display control can be performed collectively with respect to effects, display control can be managed in units of related effects. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved. In addition, the number of the second specified information and the third specified information to be selected is the number of types of presentation (notice). 3 The total number of prescribed information can be reduced, the capacity of the second prescribed information does not need to be increased with the increase in the number of changing elements of the production (notice), and the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed. There is an effect. In addition, when the drawing instruction information is generated in the drawing process, it is possible to reduce the number of the first specified information, the second specified information, and the third specified information to be referred to, thereby reducing the processing load when generating the drawing instruction information. There is an effect that can be.

  Note that “a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the marking means have the same attribute or fall under the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (E.g., variable elements of “pseudo-ream”) and the like.

In gaming machine F0,
The main control means includes
Comprehensive output means for outputting a plurality of the second display instructions for a display mode of the plurality of indication means collectively during a predetermined period,
The sub-control means is
Standby means for waiting for the predetermined period when receiving the second display instruction for one of the indication means from the main control means;
And a post-waiting determining means for determining the display means to be displayed on the image display means based on the received one or more second display instructions after the standby by the standby means. Machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are produced. That is, the plurality of second display instructions for the display modes of the plurality of labeling means are collectively output during a predetermined period by the comprehensive output means provided in the main control means. Further, when a second display instruction for the marking means from the main control means is received by the standby means provided in the sub-control means, the standby means waits for a predetermined period. Similarly, the post-standby determination unit provided in the sub-control unit determines the display unit to be displayed on the image display unit based on the received one or more second display instructions after the standby by the standby unit. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute display control related to the marking means after receiving all of the second display instructions that are output together during a predetermined period. Thereby, in the case of drawing a plurality of marking means, once the display mode of all the marking means is determined, the marking means can be drawn with one second prescribed information, and the plurality of marking means can be It is possible to display the second specified information. Therefore, since it is possible to perform display control collectively for effects related to a plurality of marking means, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes of the marking means displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The main control means includes
When a predetermined condition (for example, a start winning) is established, it includes an occasional output means for outputting the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of suggestion means as needed,
The sub-control means is
When receiving the third display instruction for the suggesting means from the main control means, it is provided with a timely determining means for determining the suggesting means to be displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction. A gaming machine F2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are produced. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the occasional output means provided in the main control means, the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of suggestion means is outputted at any time. Further, when the third display instruction for the suggestion means from the main control means is received by the occasional determination means provided in the sub-control means, the suggestion means to be displayed on the image display means is determined based on the third display instruction. Is done. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute display control related to the suggesting means every time a third display instruction output as needed is received when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the third display instruction is output, the display mode of the suggesting unit based on the third display instruction can be changed at any time. Therefore, since the contents of the suggestion means indicating the game state can be displayed immediately, there is an effect that the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2,
The drawing information specifying means includes
A gaming machine F3, comprising priority specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen in preference to the drawing information of the third specifying information over the drawing information of the second specifying information.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means specifies the drawing information of the third specified information as drawing information for one screen with priority over the drawing information of the second specified information. That is, the display of the suggestion means indicating the game state can be displayed with priority over the indication means, and the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F3,
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means includes
Based on the second display instruction, batch defining information (for example, additional data table for character color 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Collective prescription information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the prescription information from the second prescription information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, first aspect defining information that defines drawing information when the display form of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect informing means. And a first mode prescription information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting (for example, the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second prescription information storage unit. Game machine F4 to do.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic regulation information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage unit based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection unit provided in the first selection unit. Is selected. Further, the batch defining information selecting unit provided in the second selecting unit defines the drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units based on the second display instruction. The regulation information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Similarly, the drawing when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. First aspect defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in dynamic display, even if the display mode of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, The display mode of the marking means displayed after execution of the determination effect of the target display is displayed in the first mode that is not the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of marking means are collectively set and changed (added), and the marking means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the marking means is collectively set is displayed. In addition to selecting the specified collective provision information, the first aspect defining information defining the drawing information in the case where the indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect is selected.

  As in the prior art, when the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is displayed at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the display means is provided for each appearance location. Is set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in the second mode different from the first mode, the setting process (lottery process) for the appearing location is required and control is performed. May become complicated and increase the processing load. In addition, if the marking means that appears first in the dynamic display appears in the second mode and then the marking means that appears later appears in the first mode, the marking having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation that special identification information will appear (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been uplifted due to the appearance of the second mode in the preceding sign means will be awakened by witnessing the above-mentioned falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the display mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode displayed by one labeling means is followed by the other labeling means. By configuring so as to be output, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other appears in the second mode even once, the marking means that appears afterwards follows the second mode to make it appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the falling expression occurs in the marking means.

  However, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the sign means displayed after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function over the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is displayed in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, since the dynamic display is determined as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. Also, there is a risk of distrusting the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine F4, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the marking means is set in the second mode at the same time, the second marking means displayed after the determination effect is used. An aspect is configured not to appear. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the display means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. Further, based on the second display instruction, collective provision information defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units is selected from the second regulation information storage unit, Similarly, drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective. In addition, when a plurality of labeling means are changed (added), and when the labeling means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, collective provision information that defines drawing information when the marking means is changed Various display modes of a plurality of marking means can be easily changed by selecting the first mode defining information that defines the drawing information when the marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode. (Added) can be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In gaming machine F4,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
A second mode continuation unit for displaying the first labeling unit and the second labeling reporting unit in the second mode when the determination unit determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication is indicated by the first aspect notification means. And a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second aspect by the second aspect continuing means provided in the aspect changing means. Is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means, The second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine F5,
The first indicating means is:
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine F6, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are produced. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In either gaming machine F5 or F6,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The plurality of changing means are:
Batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
Normal after displaying the display color of the marking means that appears after execution of the judgment effect after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means. A gaming machine F7, comprising color display means.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Similarly, the timing selecting means provided in the mode changing means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means. Then, the display color of the labeling means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling unit is changed to the special display color by the batch changing unit, the display color of the labeling unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. Displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling unit is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine F7,
The aspect changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
Instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means (for example, command output processing (S1102)),
The instruction output means includes
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the change element of the display color of the marking unit is the normal display color A gaming machine F8, comprising: a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the above.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection means provided in the aspect change means individually selects the change element of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display form of the marking means. Similarly, a second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means provided in the aspect change means. And when the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. The display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode change means selects (determines) the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern separately for the display mode of the labeling means, and each of the second display instructions of the marking means is determined based on the selection contents. A second display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the marking means when the display mode of the marking means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit. Is configured to output.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is performed by one second display instruction. If generated, second display instructions corresponding to all variations of display color, change timing, and display pattern must be prepared in advance, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, the effect that the number of second display instructions related to the marking means can be reduced and the increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means. There is.

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine F4, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes general identification information, The display means (second display means) that appears after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display color, change timing, and display pattern of each indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication is made by one second display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction related to the means, a second display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the marking means must be prepared in advance, including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the presentation determination. The number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, a second display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination of each marking means, and each image display means outputs each second display instruction based on the second display instruction. By adjusting the display control of the marking means, the number of second display instructions relating to each marking means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color is the normal display color in the labeling means displayed after the determination effect. Configure to display. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the display means after the determination effect is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine F8,
The instruction output means includes
A game machine F9, comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all second display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines F4 to F9,
The aspect changing means includes
When the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. A game machine F10, comprising: an aspect maintaining means (for example, S1702 for character color change restriction processing: Yes).

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F4 to F9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means Means are displayed in a second manner. Thereby, when special identification information appears, it is maintained that the display of the labeling means set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be given. Blessing the person and enhancing the fun of the game.

<G group: one character additional data table for a plurality of character displays>
Image display means for displaying a predetermined image (for example, the third symbol display device 81), main control means for performing main control of the game (for example, the main control device 110 or (and) the sound lamp control device 113), In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
In the image display means, a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relation to each other (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) )When,
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, the image is changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection unit and displayed. A second display determination means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)) for determining the marking means;
Second definition information (for each screen), which is provided for a plurality of the labeling means and indicates information necessary for rendering an image to be changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means and displayed. For example, a second specified information storage unit (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing the additional data table for character 232a2)
Second selection means (for example, character command processing (S2113) for selecting one second definition information corresponding to the plurality of indication means determined by the second display determination means from the second definition information storage means. ))
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the updated information is updated based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means and the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen (for example, Drawing processing (S2026) S2501),
The gaming machine G0, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine G0, a predetermined image is displayed by the image display means, the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and an image is displayed by the sub-control means based on a display instruction from the main control means. The display means is controlled. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, the first definition information that is provided for each first display type by the first definition information storage unit and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Is memorized. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. In the image display means, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are displayed. Further, the second display determining means determines the marking means for changing (adding) from the image indicated by the first specification information selected by the first selecting means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. Is done. Second definition information that is provided for a plurality of labeling means and that indicates drawing information indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means. Is stored by the second prescribed information storage means. Here, by the second selection means, one second definition information for the plurality of marking means determined by the second display determination means is selected from the second definition information storage means. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second specified information, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means. Thus, when the display means for the second display instruction is changed (added) and displayed on the image of the first display type for the first display instruction from the main control means, the second specified information for the display means is stored in the second display information. It is possible to easily change (add) the display modes of the plurality of marking means and display them simply by selecting from the two prescribed information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In gaming machine G0,
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means (for example, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114) for causing the image display means to dynamically display identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means; With
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. A gaming machine that adds value,
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
In the dynamic display, a sign display means for displaying a plurality of the sign means so as to have a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. Mode changing means (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit changes the marking unit to the second mode; Prepared,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect is executed to execute a determination effect (for example, a “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Means (e.g., "super-reach" variables),
The aspect changing means includes
When the display means of the indication means is changed to the second aspect by the plurality of changing means, and the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect A first mode notification unit (for example, a display regular phrase normal command) that displays the indication unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution unit in the first mode;
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means includes
Based on the second display instruction, batch defining information (for example, additional data table for character color 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Collective prescription information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the prescription information from the second prescription information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, first aspect defining information that defines drawing information when the display form of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect informing means. And a first mode prescription information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting (for example, the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second prescription information storage unit. A gaming machine G1 to play.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are produced. That is, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. In addition, the sign display means displays a plurality of sign means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from the predetermined first mode to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode changing unit. Further, when the indication means is changed to the second aspect by the aspect changing means, the display aspect of the plurality of indication means is changed to the second aspect by the plural changing means. Here, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. And when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the determination unit is provided in the mode changing unit when it is determined that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. The first mode notification unit displays the display unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution unit in the first mode. Here, the dynamic regulation information defining the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage means based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection means provided in the first selection means. Information is selected. In addition, a batch defining information storage unit provided in the second selecting unit defines a drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units based on the second display instruction. The regulation information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Similarly, the drawing when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. First aspect defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in dynamic display, even if the display mode of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, The display mode of the marking means displayed after execution of the determination effect of the target display is displayed in the first mode that is not the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of marking means are collectively set and changed (added), and the marking means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the marking means is collectively set is displayed. In addition to selecting the specified collective provision information, the first aspect defining information defining the drawing information in the case where the indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect is selected.

  As in the prior art, when the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is displayed at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the display means is provided for each appearance location. Is set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in the second mode different from the first mode, the setting process (lottery process) for the appearing location is required and control is performed. May become complicated and increase the processing load. In addition, if the marking means that appears first in the dynamic display appears in the second mode and then the marking means that appears later appears in the first mode, the marking having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation that special identification information will appear (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been uplifted due to the appearance of the second mode in the preceding sign means will be awakened by witnessing the above-mentioned falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the display mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode displayed by one labeling means is followed by the other labeling means. By configuring so as to be output, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other appears in the second mode even once, the marking means that appears afterwards follows the second mode to make it appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the falling expression occurs in the marking means.

  However, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the sign means displayed after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function over the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is displayed in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, since the dynamic display is determined as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. Also, there is a risk of distrusting the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine G1, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is collectively set to the second mode, the signing means displayed after the determination effect has the second An aspect is configured not to appear. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the display means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. Further, based on the second display instruction, collective provision information defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units is selected from the second regulation information storage unit, Similarly, drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective. In addition, when a plurality of labeling means are changed (added), and when the labeling means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, collective provision information that defines drawing information when the marking means is changed Various display modes of a plurality of marking means can be easily changed by selecting the first mode defining information that defines the drawing information when the marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode. (Added) can be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

  Note that “a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the marking means have the same attribute or fall under the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (E.g., variable elements of “pseudo-ream”) and the like.

In gaming machine G1,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
A second mode continuation unit for displaying the first labeling unit and the second labeling reporting unit in the second mode when the determination unit determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication is indicated by the first aspect notification means. And a second mode changing means for displaying the means in the first mode.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EG1, the following effects are produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second aspect by the second aspect continuing means provided in the aspect changing means. Is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means, The second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine G2,
The first indicating means is:
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine G3, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are produced. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The plurality of changing means are:
Batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
Normal after displaying the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means. A gaming machine G4 comprising color display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Similarly, the timing selecting means provided in the mode changing means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means. Then, the display color of the labeling means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling unit is changed to the special display color by the batch changing unit, the display color of the labeling unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. Displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling unit is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine G4,
The aspect changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
Instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means (for example, command output processing (S1102)),
The instruction output means includes
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the change element of the display color of the marking unit is the normal display color A gaming machine G5, comprising: a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the above.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection means provided in the aspect change means individually selects the change element of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display form of the marking means. Similarly, a second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means provided in the aspect change means. And when the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. The display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode change means selects (determines) the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern separately for the display mode of the labeling means, and each of the second display instructions of the marking means is determined based on the selection contents. A second display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the marking means when the display mode of the marking means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit. Is configured to output.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is performed by one second display instruction. If generated, second display instructions corresponding to all variations of display color, change timing, and display pattern must be prepared in advance, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, the effect that the number of second display instructions related to the marking means can be reduced and the increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means. There is.

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine G1, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes general identification information, The display means (second display means) that appears after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display color, change timing, and display pattern of each indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication is made by one second display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction related to the means, a second display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the marking means must be prepared in advance, including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the presentation determination. The number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, a second display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination of each marking means, and each image display means outputs each second display instruction based on the second display instruction. By adjusting the display control of the marking means, the number of second display instructions relating to each marking means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color is the normal display color in the labeling means displayed after the determination effect. Configure to display. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the display means after the determination effect is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine G5,
The instruction output means includes
A gaming machine G6, comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are produced. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all second display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines G1 to G6,
The aspect changing means includes
When the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. A game machine G7, comprising: an aspect maintaining means (for example, S1702 of character color change restriction processing: Yes).

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means Means are displayed in a second manner. Thereby, when special identification information appears, it is maintained that the display of the labeling means set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be given. Blessing the person and enhancing the fun of the game.

<Group H: Red for character display and red for hold display>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114);
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
In the image display means, a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relation to each other (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) )When,
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. Marking mode changing means (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing the display mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the marking mode is changed to the second mode by the marking mode changing unit;
After displaying the marking means, a marking erasing means for erasing the marking means after a predetermined period;
Storage symbol display means (for example, an execution symbol display area Db0) for displaying a symbol (for example, an execution symbol) based on the starting information stored in the storage means;
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, the display mode of the symbol displayed by the stored symbol display unit is different from the first symbol mode from a predetermined first symbol mode (for example, “white”). A pattern mode changing means (for example, “pending change notice”) for changing to a pattern mode (for example, “red”),
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect is executed to execute a determination effect (for example, a “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Means (e.g., "Superreach" variables)
Display state means for bringing the symbol into a display state at the start of the dynamic display;
A non-display state means for switching the symbol displayed by the display state means to a non-display state when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is executed;
When the determination effect by the determination effect execution means ends, a redisplay state means that switches the symbol that has been hidden by the non-display state means to a display state again,
The marking mode changing means is:
When the display means of the indication means is changed to the second aspect by the plurality of changing means, and the determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the determination effect A first mode notification unit (for example, a display normal phrase normal command) that displays the indication unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the execution unit in the first mode;
The pattern aspect changing means is:
In a situation where the display mode of the symbol is displayed in the second symbol mode by the symbol mode changing unit, the determination unit determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. After the symbol of the second symbol form is made non-displayed by the non-display state means, when the symbol is again displayed by the re-display state means, the symbol is displayed in the second symbol aspect. A gaming machine H0, comprising two pattern mode continuation means.

  According to the gaming machine H0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. The image display means displays a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode change unit changes the display mode of the labeling unit from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode. Further, when the labeling means is changed to the second mode by the labeling mode changing unit, the display mode of the plurality of labeling units is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Further, after the display means is displayed by the display deletion means, the display means is deleted after a predetermined period. Here, the symbol based on the starting information stored in the memory means is displayed by the memory symbol display means, and the symbol displayed by the memory symbol display means based on the judgment result of the judgment means by the symbol mode changing means. The display mode is changed from a predetermined first design mode to a second design mode different from the first design mode. In addition, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect as to whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, when the dynamic state is started by the display state means, the symbol is in the display state, and when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is executed, the symbol in the display state by the display state means is not displayed. The non-display state is switched by the state means. In addition, when the determination effect by the determination effect execution means ends, the symbol that has been hidden by the non-display state means is switched again to the display state by the redisplay state means. Here, when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, the determination mode is provided in the marking mode changing unit when it is determined that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. The indicating means displayed after the execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. Further, in the situation where the symbol display mode is displayed in the second symbol mode by the symbol mode changing means, the non-display state means when the judgment means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. After the symbol of the second symbol mode is set to the non-display state, when the symbol is again displayed by the re-display state unit, the symbol is displayed in the second symbol mode by the second mode continuation unit.

  Conventionally, while displaying a symbol based on starting information stored in the storage means, the display mode of the symbol is changed from a predetermined first symbol to a second symbol depending on whether or not special identification information appears. The mode is configured to be changeable, and is configured to suggest to the player whether or not special identification information appears due to the change.

  Here, the above-mentioned symbol is displayed continuously during execution of dynamic display, so that the appearance expectation of the special identification information in the dynamic display being executed is clearly shown by the display mode of the symbol. is there.

  That is, by continuously displaying the above-mentioned symbols during the dynamic display, the player can immediately confirm the contents, and the expected expectation level of the special identification information in the dynamic display. It is suitable for indicating Thus, for example, when a symbol change occurs, the player can predict the appearance expectation level of the special identification information of the dynamic display being executed based on the change, and display the dynamic display. In addition, the appearance expectation level of the special identification information by other effects such as each indication means that appears additionally is converted into the expected appearance degree of the special identification information by the above design, and the special display in the entire dynamic display A game is played by predicting the expected level of appearance of identification information.

  However, even if the design is erased (not visible) by overlapping (execution) some effect, it immediately redisplays as soon as the effect is finished, and the redisplayed design The display mode should be the same as before erasure (before visibility). If the redisplayed symbol is changed from before deletion (before visual recognition), the player may change the symbol to be checked from time to time based on the change in the symbol. It is predicted that some kind of production will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, when the additional display is not executed and the dynamic display is ended, the player causes the game machine to be distrusted by the trap of the display contents, and the gaming machine This may cause distrust to the game hall where the game machine is installed, and interrupt the game.

  Therefore, even if the effect is not additionally executed, the above-mentioned symbol needs to be displayed in the same display mode as before the erasure when it is displayed again after the erasure. Specifically, if the symbol is displayed in the first symbol mode before erasure, the symbol is displayed in the first symbol mode even after redisplay. Further, when the symbol is displayed in the second symbol mode before erasure, the symbol is displayed in the second symbol mode even after being redisplayed.

  On the other hand, the marking means that appears in the dynamic display is a notice display that is displayed at a predetermined timing in the dynamic display, and is deleted after a predetermined period after the display at the predetermined timing. In other words, even if the player wants to confirm (refute) the content, the marking means cannot confirm after a predetermined period from the above timing, and only determines the player's memory after the predetermined period. is there.

  However, the indication means is suitable for suggesting that there is a possibility that some effect will be exerted on the performance performed at the timing immediately after that when it appears additionally by dynamic display. It has a function. In particular, when the marking means is displayed in a second mode different from the predetermined first mode, the development suggesting function is more emphasized. Therefore, for example, when the sign means appears, the player converts the display content of the sign means to the continuously displayed symbols, and the expected expectation level of the special identification information in the dynamic display In addition, it is predicted that some kind of performance will be additionally performed by the development suggestion function by the marking means. However, after the display means is displayed in the second mode, if the additional display is not executed and the dynamic display ends, the player solicits distrust from the gaming machine due to the effect content. At the same time, there is a risk of distrust to the game arcade where the gaming machine is installed, thereby interrupting the game.

  Therefore, in the case of redisplaying after the execution of the determination effect, the same display as before the erasure is displayed when redisplaying the symbol even when the effect is not additionally executed. It is configured to display in a manner. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective. In addition, the display means displayed in pieces is configured not to be displayed in the second mode when an effect is not additionally executed or when a game value is not given to the player. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  Note that “a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the marking means have the same attribute or fall under the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. (E.g., variable elements of “pseudo-ream”) and the like.

In the gaming machine H0,
Main control means (for example, main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113) for performing main control of the game, and sub-control means for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means (For example, a display control device 114),
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, a second display determination unit (for example, a command determination process (S2022)) that determines the marking unit to be displayed on the image display unit. S2112),
Second definition information (for each screen), which is provided for a plurality of the labeling means and indicates information necessary for rendering an image to be changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means and displayed. For example, a second specified information storage unit (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing the additional data table for character 232a2)
Second selection means (for example, character command processing (S2113)) for selecting, from the second definition information storage means, the second definition information corresponding to the marking means determined by the second display determination means;
Based on a third display instruction from the main control means (for example, a change-on command for on-display lighting change), a third display determination means (for example, a command determination process (S2022) for determining the symbol to be displayed on the image display means ) S2110)
The third definition information (for example, for example) that is provided for a plurality of symbols and that indicates information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of symbols. A third prescribed information storage means (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing the additional data table for holding 232a2);
Third selection means (for example, prefetching system command processing (S2111)) for selecting the third specified information for the symbol determined by the third display determining means from the third specified information storage means,
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means, the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means, and the third selecting means are selected. Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) based on the third specified information;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen (for example, Drawing processing (S2026) S2501),
The gaming machine H1, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are achieved. That is, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image display means is controlled by the sub-control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, the first definition information storage means provides a first definition that is provided for each first display type and that indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. In addition, the second display determination unit determines the display unit displayed on the image display unit based on the second display instruction from the main control unit. Second definition information that is provided for a plurality of labeling means and that indicates drawing information indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of labeling means. Is stored by the second prescribed information storage means. Here, the second selection information is selected from the second specification information storage means by the second selection means with respect to the marking means determined by the second display determination means. Further, the third display determining means determines a symbol displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction from the main control means. The third regulation information that is provided for a plurality of symbols, and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for rendering an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of symbols, is provided in the third regulation information. 3 is stored by the regulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information for the symbol determined by the third display determining means is selected by the third selecting means from the third specifying information storage means. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second prescribed information and the third prescribed information selected by the third selecting means, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means.

  Thereby, when displaying each image corresponding to the first display instruction, the second display instruction, or the third display instruction from the main control means, the first specified information, the second specified information, or the third specified information for each production unit. Can be easily displayed by changing (adding) the display mode of the image display means simply by selecting each of them from the first prescribed information storage means, the second prescribed information storage means, or the third prescribed information storage means. Moreover, it comprises so that 2nd regulation information may be selected with respect to several marking means, and it may comprise with several images by comprising so that 3rd regulation information may be selected with respect to several suggestion means. Since display control can be performed collectively with respect to effects, display control can be managed in units of related effects. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved. In addition, the number of second specified information and third specified information to be selected is only the number of types of production (notice), and the case where second definition information and third definition information are selected for each change element of the production (notice). The number of the second prescribed information and the third prescribed information can be reduced, and it is not necessary to increase the capacity of the second prescribed information and the third prescribed information as the number of changing elements of the production (notice) increases. There is an effect that the cost of the machine can be suppressed. Further, when the drawing instruction information is generated in the drawing process, the number of the first specified information, the second specified information, and the third specified information to be referred to may be only the number of effects (notice). There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced. Furthermore, in selecting the second regulation information and the third regulation information, the second regulation information relating to the marking means and the third regulation information relating to the symbol are clearly divided and configured so that the second symbol form can be reproduced. The display control can be performed separately clearly with respect to the symbols that can be displayed and the marking means that should not be displayed again in the second mode. In particular, when setting the display mode of each effect at the time of design and development of a gaming machine, the sign means that should not be displayed in the second mode at the time of redisplay, or the symbol that may be displayed in the second pattern mode at the time of redisplay It is easy to design the configuration of each regulation information while grasping whether the third regulation information is related to, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bugs such as a flaw in production contents.

In the gaming machine H1,
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means includes
Based on the second display instruction, batch defining information (for example, additional data table for character color 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Collective prescription information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the prescription information from the second prescription information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, first aspect defining information that defines drawing information when the display form of the indicating means displayed after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect informing means. And a first mode prescription information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting (for example, the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second prescription information storage unit. A gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic regulation information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage unit based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection unit provided in the first selection unit. Is selected. In addition, a batch defining information storage unit provided in the second selecting unit defines a drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units based on the second display instruction. The regulation information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Similarly, the drawing when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. First aspect defining information defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. That is, when general identification information that does not give a predetermined game value appears in dynamic display, even if the display mode of a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other is changed to the second mode, The display mode of the marking means displayed after execution of the determination effect of the target display is displayed in the first mode that is not the second mode. In addition, when a plurality of marking means are collectively set and changed (added), and the marking means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, the drawing information when the marking means is collectively set is displayed. In addition to selecting the specified collective provision information, the first aspect defining information defining the drawing information in the case where the indication means after the determination effect is displayed in the first aspect is selected.

  As in the prior art, when the display means having a predetermined relationship with each other is displayed at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of the dynamic display, the display means is provided for each appearance location. Is set (lottery) whether to display in the first mode or in the second mode different from the first mode, the setting process (lottery process) for the appearing location is required and control is performed. May become complicated and increase the processing load. In addition, if the marking means that appears first in the dynamic display appears in the second mode and then the marking means that appears later appears in the first mode, the marking having a predetermined relevance Because it is a means, it becomes an expression in which the degree of expectation that special identification information will appear (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been uplifted due to the appearance of the second mode in the preceding sign means will be awakened by witnessing the above-mentioned falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the display mode setting (lottery) of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump, and the second mode displayed by one labeling means is followed by the other labeling means. By configuring so as to be output, it is not necessary to perform the setting process for each appearance location, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other appears in the second mode even once, the marking means that appears afterwards follows the second mode to make it appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the falling expression occurs in the marking means.

  However, when a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are collectively set in the second mode, for example, in a dynamic display in which a display result of general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given appears, In a state where the display determination effect is performed and the general identification information appears, the marking means may be displayed in the second mode. Since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the predetermined first mode based on the determination result of the determination unit, the development suggestion function that suggests that the current performance state can be changed based on the change Have On the other hand, the sign means displayed after the determination effect has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect status that is the result of the determination effect. Therefore, if the indication means after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the second mode, the player has the development suggestion function over the status notification function of the indication means because the indication means is displayed in the second mode. Therefore, it is predicted that the dynamic display is not fixed with the general identification information as it is, and that some development effect is executed and changes from the general identification information to the special identification information. However, contrary to the prediction, since the dynamic display is determined as general identification information to which a predetermined game value is not given, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the production contents. Also, there is a risk of distrusting the game arcade where the game machine is installed, and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine H2, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the marking means is set to the second mode at the same time, the second marking means displayed after the determination effect is the second. An aspect is configured not to appear. That is, in the dynamic display of the general identification information, the display means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. Further, based on the second display instruction, collective provision information defining drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units is selected from the second regulation information storage unit, Similarly, drawing information when the display mode of the marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notification unit based on the second display instruction by the first mode definition information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. The defined first mode defining information is selected from the second defining information storage means. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective. In addition, when a plurality of labeling means are changed (added), and when the labeling means after the determination effect is changed to the first mode and displayed, collective provision information that defines drawing information when the marking means is changed Various display modes of a plurality of marking means can be easily changed by selecting the first mode defining information that defines the drawing information when the marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the first mode. (Added) can be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In the gaming machine H2,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) appearing after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
A second mode continuation unit for displaying the first labeling unit and the second labeling reporting unit in the second mode when the determination unit determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display; ,
When the determination means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect, and the second indication is indicated by the first aspect notification means. And a second aspect changing means for displaying means in the first aspect.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second aspect by the second aspect continuing means provided in the aspect changing means. Is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means, The second indication means is displayed in the first aspect by the first aspect notification means. As a result, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode, and when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, The first marking means is displayed in the second mode, while the second marking means is displayed in the first mode. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In the gaming machine H3,
The first indicating means is:
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine H4, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The plurality of changing means are:
Batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selection means to the special display color;
The first aspect notification means includes:
Normal after displaying the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the judgment effect after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means. A gaming machine H5 comprising color display means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H2 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Similarly, the timing selecting means provided in the mode changing means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means. Then, the display color of the labeling means displayed after the timing selected by the timing selecting means is changed to the special display color by the batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means. Here, after the timing when the display color of the labeling unit is changed to the special display color by the batch changing unit, the display color of the labeling unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the first mode notification unit. Displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the labeling unit is set based on a plurality of changing elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the labeling unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine H5,
The aspect changing means includes
Regarding the display mode of the marking unit, a change element selection unit (for example, a character mode setting process (S1417)) for individually selecting a display color, a change timing, or a display pattern change element;
Instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction based on each change element selected by the change element selection means (for example, command output processing (S1102)),
The instruction output means includes
When displaying the display mode of the marking unit that appears after the execution of the determination effect by the first mode notification unit in the first mode, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. A gaming machine H6, comprising: a correction instruction output means for outputting the second display instruction to be displayed in the above.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are produced. That is, the change element selection means provided in the aspect change means individually selects the change element of the display color, the change timing, or the display pattern with respect to the display form of the marking means. Similarly, a second display instruction is output based on each change element selected by the change element selection means by the instruction output means provided in the aspect change means. And when the display mode of the labeling means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit, at least the display color changing element of the marking unit is displayed in the normal display color. The display instruction is output by the correction instruction output means provided in the instruction output means. That is, the mode change means selects (determines) the display color, the change timing, or the change element of the display pattern separately for the display mode of the labeling means, and each of the second display instructions of the marking means is determined based on the selection contents. A second display instruction for displaying at least the display color in the normal display color among the change elements of the marking means when the display mode of the marking means is displayed in the first mode by the first mode notifying unit. Is configured to output.

  Temporarily, after selecting all of the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means, that is, the display color, the change timing, and the display pattern, a display instruction regarding the plurality of change elements in the plurality of labeling means is performed by one second display instruction. If generated, second display instructions corresponding to all variations of display color, change timing, and display pattern must be prepared in advance, and the number of second display instructions may become enormous. Therefore, the effect that the number of second display instructions related to the marking means can be reduced and the increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed by separately selecting the display instructions for each change element of each marking means. There is.

  In particular, in the gaming machine adopting the invention of the gaming machine H2, even when the second mode of each marking means is selected, when the result of the dynamic display becomes general identification information, The display means (second display means) that appears after execution is configured to be displayed (changed) in the first mode (normal display color). In this case, after all the display color, change timing, and display pattern of each indication means and the display (change) contents of the indication means after the production determination are determined, each indication is made by one second display instruction. In the case of outputting a display instruction related to the means, a second display instruction corresponding to variations in the display mode of all the marking means must be prepared in advance, including the contents to be displayed (changed) after the presentation determination. The number of second display instructions may increase dramatically. Therefore, a second display instruction is output separately for each display color, change timing, display pattern, or display (change) content after effect determination of each marking means, and each image display means outputs each second display instruction based on the second display instruction. By adjusting the display control of the marking means, the number of second display instructions relating to each marking means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Of the change elements of the marking means, the change in display color is easier to recognize than the change in other change elements (change timing or display pattern). Specifically, for example, in the case of a display pattern, the meaning of the display pattern cannot be understood unless the type of the display pattern is remembered in advance. This is because it can be determined by whether or not the display color is changed from the normal display color (white). Therefore, if the player recognizes that the display color of the marking means has been changed to the special display color, the player can change the display color of the marking means so that some kind of development effect is produced in the dynamic display. Predict that it will be executed. However, contrary to the prediction, if the development effect is not executed with the dynamic display, the player is caused to distrust the gaming machine by the trap of the effect content, and the game in which the gaming machine is installed There is also a risk of distrust to the venue and interrupting the game.

  Therefore, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the labeling means is changed to the second mode, at least the display color is the normal display color in the labeling means displayed after the determination effect. Configure to display. That is, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the display means after the determination effect is configured to display at least the normal display color. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In gaming machine H6,
The instruction output means includes
A gaming machine H7, comprising start time output means for outputting all second display instructions relating to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced. That is, the start time output means provided in the instruction output means outputs all second display instructions related to the display mode of the marking means in the dynamic display at the start of the dynamic display. Thereby, at the start of dynamic display, it is possible to instruct the image display means of the contents of the marking means that should appear in the dynamic display, and the display of each marking means in the dynamic display can be performed smoothly. There is an effect.

In gaming machines H2 to H7,
The aspect changing means includes
When the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means is displayed in the second mode. A game machine H8, comprising: a mode maintaining means (for example, S1702 for character color change restriction processing: Yes).

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H2 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication that appears after execution of the determination effect by the determination effect execution means by the aspect maintenance means provided in the aspect change means Means are displayed in a second manner. Thereby, when special identification information appears, it is maintained that the display of the labeling means set at the beginning is maintained in the second mode and the special identification information appears and a predetermined game value can be given. Blessing the person and enhancing the fun of the game.

<Group I: Expectation effect production multiple times in a predetermined period, execution of expectation effect multiple times when advantageous situation occurs, and expectation effect production less than multiple times when advantageous situation does not occur>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
Storage means for storing the identification information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i);
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, a judgment means for judging whether or not an advantageous situation advantageous to the player is achieved (for example, a variation effect process (S1109));
Based on the determination result by the determination means, a suggestion effect (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach middle sentence suggesting that there is a possibility of the advantageous situation in a predetermined period (for example, within one variation effect) Suggestive effect execution means (for example, “super reach” effect mode) for executing the character display Se2, the fixed phrase character display Se3, and the pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) a predetermined specified number of times;
A mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, which is a predetermined normal suggestion mode (for example, “white” character display),
An aspect of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, which is an expectation increasing aspect (for example, “red” character display) that suggests that the expectation degree of the advantageous situation is higher than the normal suggestion aspect When,
A rising mode continuation execution means (for example, a character color change table 222h) that continuously executes the expected level increasing mode over at least a plurality of times of execution of the suggestion effect when the expected level increasing mode appears; With
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
When the determination means determines that the advantageous situation is achieved, the expected number increase mode by the increase mode continuation execution unit executes the specified number of times (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach middle sentence) Character display Se2 and fixed phrase character display Se3 are all "red"),
Less than specified execution means (for example, character at the time of reach occurrence) that executes the expected degree increase mode by the increase mode continuous execution means for a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times when it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous situation does not occur. Display Se1 and reach character display Se2 are "red"),
The suggestion effect that is executed after a specific timing after the predetermined number of times when the expected degree increase mode by the rising mode continuation execution unit is executed for the predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number of times by the less-specific execution unit. The game machine I0, further comprising: an expectation execution restricting means (for example, the fixed phrase character display Se3 is “white”) that restricts execution of the expectation increasing mode.

  According to the gaming machine I0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit makes a determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information memorize | stored in a memory | storage means, it will be judged by a judgment means whether it will become an advantageous situation advantageous to a player. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of an advantageous situation in a predetermined period. Moreover, a predetermined normal suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion effect execution means as one mode of the suggestion effect. Furthermore, an expectation increase mode that suggests that the expectation level in which the advantageous situation is more favorable than the normal suggestion mode is high is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit as one mode of the suggestion effect. When the expectation increasing mode is executed, the expectation increasing mode is continuously executed by the increasing mode continuing execution means over at least a plurality of executions of the suggestion effect. Here, when it is determined by the determination means that an advantageous situation is obtained, the expected number increase mode by the increase mode continuous execution means is executed a specified number of times by the specified number execution means provided in the suggestion effect execution means. Further, when it is determined by the determining means that the advantageous situation is not obtained, the expected degree increasing mode by the rising mode continuing executing means is executed a predetermined number of times less than the specified number by the less than specified executing means provided in the suggestion effect executing means. . When the expected degree increasing mode by the rising mode continuation executing unit is executed a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times by the less specified execution means, the expectation executed by the expected level execution restricting unit after a specific timing after the predetermined number Execution of the expectation increasing mode is restricted in the production.

  Conventionally, when a suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period on the basis of a determination result by a determination means for determining whether or not an advantageous situation for the player is given, to indicate whether or not an advantageous situation is obtained Configuration for each suggestion effect to set (lottery) whether to perform the suggestion effect in the normal suggestion mode or to execute the expectation increasing mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the normal suggestion mode. If it is, the setting process (lottery process) for the number of executions of the suggestive effect is required, and the control becomes complicated and the processing load may increase. In addition, in the suggestion effect that is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period, after the suggestion effect that appears first is executed in the expectation increasing manner, the suggestion effect that is executed thereafter is executed in the normal suggestion manner. Therefore, the expression of the expectation of becoming an advantageous situation is reduced (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who has been uplifted by the execution of the expectation increasing mode in the previous suggestion will be awakened by witnessing the above-mentioned falling expression in the later suggestion .

  Accordingly, in the suggestion effect that is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, when the expectation increase mode is executed, each of the suggestion effects is configured so that the expectation increase mode is continued in the multiple suggestion effects. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the setting process, and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, when the previous suggestion effect is executed in the expectation effect increasing manner, it is configured so that the expectation increasing manner is continuously executed also in the suggestion effect executed subsequently, so that the down expression in the suggestion effect is expressed. It is possible to prevent the player from awakening to the game by eliminating the phenomenon that occurs.

  However, when multiple suggestive effects are executed in an expectation increasing manner, for example, even if a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the suggestion effects may be executed in an expectation increasing manner. Since the expected increase mode of the suggestion effect is executed after being changed from the normal effect mode based on the determination result of the determination means, it has a development suggestion function that suggests that the current effect status can be changed. On the other hand, the suggestion effect executed in the second half of the predetermined period has a situation notification function for notifying the contents of the current effect situation. Therefore, if the suggestion effect executed in the second half of the predetermined period is executed in the expectation increasing manner, the player can perform the suggestion effect in the expectation increasing manner from the suggestion effect situation notification function. It is predicted that the development suggestion function is won and the situation that is not advantageous to the player is not determined, and that some development effect is executed and the situation changes to the situation advantageous to the player. However, contrary to the prediction, since the predetermined period ends without an advantageous situation for the player and the advantageous situation does not occur, the player decides against the gaming machine due to the effect content. In addition to raising distrust, there is a risk that distrust will be raised in the game hall where the gaming machine is installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine I0, if a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, even if the suggestion effect is changed to the expectation increasing mode, it is executed after a specific timing after a predetermined number of times. The suggestion effect is configured to restrict the execution of the expectation increasing mode. Therefore, for example, in a state where a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the suggestion effect executed after a specific timing after a predetermined number of times is executed in a normal suggestion manner. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

  The “advantageous situation advantageous to the player” means, for example, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display during execution and a predetermined game value can be given, and the special identification information in the dynamic display during standby Can be given a predetermined game value, a special effect (for example, a “super-reach” effect mode) in which the special identification information can be expected to appear in the dynamic display during execution or standby can be executed. The first special state in which special identification information is more likely to appear than usual (for example, “probability variation state”), or the second special state in which a dynamic display with a dynamic time shorter than normal is likely to be selected. (For example, “time reduction state”) may occur.

  In addition, “to restrict the execution of the expectation increase mode” means, for example, that the normal suggestion mode different from the expectation increase mode is executed, or the suggestion effect itself including the expectation increase mode and the normal suggestion mode is not executed. Or a case where the suggestion effect is difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine I0,
The determination means includes
As the advantageous situation, it is determined whether to display the special identification information in the dynamic display or to display general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “lost display”). A gaming machine I1.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are produced. That is, as an advantageous situation, it is determined by the determination means whether special identification information appears in dynamic display or general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Thereby, for example, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, even if the expectation effect is changed to the expectation increase manner in the suggestion effect, the expectation increase manner in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing It is configured to regulate the execution of. That is, for example, in the dynamic display in which the general identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the specific timing is executed in the normal suggestion mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In the gaming machine I0,
The special identification information is
Predetermined first special identification information (for example, “15R normal jackpot”) and second special identification information (for example, “15R probability variation jackpot”) that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. And
The determination means includes
As the advantageous situation, it is determined whether the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or whether the second special identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification information includes predetermined first special identification information and second special identification information that can be given a higher game value than the first special identification information. Then, as an advantageous situation, the determination means determines whether the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the second special identification information appears. Thereby, for example, when the first special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the expectation degree in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing is changed even when the expectation effect is changed to the expectation increase mode. It is configured to restrict the execution of the rising mode. That is, for example, in the dynamic display in which the first special identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the specific timing is configured to be executed in the normal suggestion mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that prevents the production content from being trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust. effective.

In the gaming machine I0,
The determination means includes
It is determined whether or not the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means among the identification information stored in the storage means. Execution determination means (for example, variation effect processing (S1109));
Whether the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means among the start information stored in the storage means. Standby determination means for determining (for example, hold display setting processing (S1209)),
The suggestion effect execution means includes:
It is determined by the execution determination means that no information relating to the special identification information is stored in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, and the standby determination means performs the execution in the image display means. When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting, the less than the prescribed execution means performs the predetermined number of times less than the prescribed number. The expectation increasing aspect is executed, and the execution of the expectation increasing aspect is restricted in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing after the predetermined number of times by the expectation execution restricting means. Game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination unit is provided with whether or not the information related to the special identification information is stored in the start information corresponding to the dynamic display that is started by the image display unit among the start information stored in the storage unit. It is determined by the execution determination means. Further, in the starting information stored in the storage means, whether or not the information related to the special identification information is stored in the starting information corresponding to the dynamic display that is waiting to be executed in the image display means is determined by the determining means. This is determined by the standby determination means provided. Then, it is determined by the execution determining means that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display starting to be executed by the image display means, and the dynamic display that is waiting for execution in the image display means by the standby determining means When it is determined that the information related to the special identification information is not stored in the start-up information, the suggestion effect executing means executes the expectation increasing mode at a predetermined number of times less than the specified number by the less than specified execution means, In the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing after the predetermined number of times by the expectation degree execution restricting means, the execution of the expected degree normal use mode is restricted. Thereby, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display starting execution in the image display means, and the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display waiting for execution in the image display means. Even if it is a case where an expectation rise mode is performed in a suggestion production, it comprises so that an expectation rise aspect may not be performed in the suggestion production performed after a specific timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause distrust to the player, so as not to cause defects in the production contents. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I3,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, the determination to execute the determination effect (for example, the “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Production execution means (for example, "super-reach" variable element),
The gaming machine I4, wherein the specific timing is a timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 to I3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect as to whether special identification information appears or general identification information appears in dynamic display. The timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect is set as the specific timing. As a result, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, in the suggestion effect before the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect, the expectation increasing mode is continued by the less than prescribed execution means. In the suggestion effect after the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect, execution of the expectation increasing mode is restricted by the expectation execution restricting means. Therefore, for example, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the general identification information appears, the suggestion effect after the determination effect is executed in the normal suggestion mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the suggestion effect of the expectation increase mode is not executed, and it is not suggested that the effect develops. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4,
Main control means (for example, main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113) for performing main control of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
A plurality of changing elements (for example, character patterns, display colors, change timings or correction contents of display colors) that determine the display mode of the suggestive effect displayed in the image display means;
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, the image is changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection unit and displayed. Second display determination means (for example, S2112 of command determination processing (S2022)) for determining the change element of the suggestion effect;
Provided for each change element of the suggestive effect, the second definition information (for example, Second specified information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing the character color additional data table 232a2);
Second selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting, from the second definition information storage means, the second definition information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means. ,
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the updated information is updated based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means and the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
A drawing that generates drawing instruction information (for example, a drawing list) that instructs the image drawing unit to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for the one screen specified by the drawing information specifying unit. Instruction information generating means (for example, S2501 of the drawing process (S2026)),
The gaming machine I5, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are produced. That is, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image display means is controlled by the sub-control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, first definition information that is provided for each first display type and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen is stored in the first specification information storage. Stored by means. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. The suggestion effect is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the suggestion effect is determined by a plurality of change elements. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the change element of the suggestion effect to be displayed after being changed (added) from the image indicated by the first specified information selected by the first selection means is determined to be the second display. Determined by means. And the 2nd regulation information which prescribed | regulated the drawing information which shows the information required for drawing of the image which should be changed (added) and should be displayed in the change element provided for every change element of suggestion effect, Stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second selection information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination unit is selected from the second definition information storage unit by the second selection unit. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second specified information, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means. Thereby, when the suggestion effect for the second display instruction is changed (added) and displayed on the image of the first display type for the first display instruction from the main control means, the second rule for the change element of the suggestion effect is displayed. The display mode of the suggestive effect can be easily changed (added) and displayed simply by selecting information from the second specified information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In gaming machine I5,
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means is
Based on the second display instruction, ascending mode defining information (for example, a character color additional data table 232a2) defining drawing information when the display mode of the suggestion effect is changed to the expected level increasing mode is used. 2 ascending mode regulation information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) to be selected from the regulation information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, expectation degree regulation defining information that defines drawing information when the expectation increase mode in the suggestion effect after the specific timing is regulated by the expectation degree execution regulation unit (for example, A game machine, comprising: an expectation restriction regulation information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the character correction additional data table 232a2) from the second regulation information storage unit. I6.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic regulation information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage unit based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection unit provided in the first selection unit. Is selected. Also, an ascending mode rule that defines drawing information when the display mode of the suggestive effect is changed to the expected level increasing mode based on the second display instruction by the ascending mode specifying information selecting unit provided in the second selecting unit Information is selected from the second specified information storage means. Similarly, the expectation restriction regulation information selecting means provided in the second selecting means regulates the expectation increasing mode in the suggestion effect after the specific timing by the expectation execution restricting means based on the second display instruction. Expectation degree regulation regulation information that defines the drawing information of the case is selected from the second regulation information storage means. By configuring in this way, the suggestion effect that is executed a plurality of times is changed (added), and further, when the expectation increase mode in the suggestion effect after the specific timing is regulated, the suggestion effect that is executed before the specific timing Ascending mode regulation information that defines drawing information when the display mode is changed to the expected level increasing mode is selected, and the expected level increasing mode in the display mode of the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing is regulated It is possible to easily change (add) and display various display modes of a plurality of suggestion effects simply by selecting the expectation degree regulation provision information that defines the drawing information of the case. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

In the gaming machine I5 or I6,
The second selection means includes
A selection information storage means configured to select and store a plurality of the second prescribed information;
The drawing information specifying means includes
One screen giving priority to the drawing information of the second specified information stored later than the drawing information of the second specified information stored earlier among the plurality of second specified information stored in the selection information storage means. A gaming machine I7, comprising priority specifying means for specifying the minute drawing information.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are produced. In other words, the selection information storage means provided in the second selection means is configured to be able to select and store a plurality of second prescribed information. Further, the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means is stored after the drawing information of the second prescription information stored earlier among the plurality of second prescription information stored in the selection information storage means. The drawing information for one screen is specified with priority given to the drawing information of the second specified information. Thereby, since the content of the 2nd regulation information memorize | stored later can be displayed with priority over the content of the 2nd regulation information memorize | stored previously, the 2nd regulation information with respect to the suggestion effect to change is added. By storing it, the display mode of the suggestion effect can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination process of the second specified information to be prioritized is unnecessary, and the processing load of display control can be reduced.

In the gaming machine I7,
The second selection means includes
The ascending mode prescribing information by the ascending mode prescribing information selecting unit is first stored in the selection information storage unit, and the expectation degree regulation prescribing information by the expectation degree regulation prescribing information selecting unit is stored in the selection information storage unit later. This is a gaming machine I8.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are produced. That is, by the second selection means, the ascending mode definition information obtained by the ascending mode definition information selecting means is first stored in the selection information storage means, and the expectation degree regulation provision information obtained by the expectation degree regulation provision information selection means is later stored in the selection information storage means. Remembered. Thereby, even when a plurality of suggestion effects are changed to the expectation increase mode, the expectation increase aspect in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing is stored by storing the expectation degree regulation provision information after the increase aspect provision information. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing for discriminating the second specified information that should be prioritized, and the processing load of display control can be reduced, while the content of production is prevented from being trapped, and the player is not overly expected. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4,
Main control means (for example, main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113) for performing main control of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, a second display determination unit (for example, a command determination process (S2022)) that determines the marking unit to be displayed on the image display unit. S2112),
Second provision information (for each screen) that is provided for a plurality of the suggestion effects and indicates drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) in the plurality of suggestion effects. For example, a second specified information storage unit (for example, a data table storage area 232a) for storing the additional data table for character 232a2)
Second selection means (for example, character command processing (S2113)) for selecting the second specified information corresponding to the suggestion effect determined by the second display determining means from the second specified information storage means;
In the image display means, a plurality of second suggestion effects (for example, an execution symbol and a holding symbol) suggesting a gaming state different from the suggestion effect;
Based on a third display instruction from the main control means (for example, a display change-on-holding change command), third display determination means (for example, command determination) that determines the second suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means. Processing (S2110) of processing (S2022),
Drawing information that is provided for a plurality of the second suggestion effects and indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of second suggestion effects is defined for each screen. 3 prescription information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) which memorize | stores 3 prescription information (for example, additional data table 232a2 for holding | maintenance),
Third selection means (for example, prefetch command processing (S2111)) for selecting the third specified information for the second suggestion effect determined by the third display determining means from the third specified information storage means; With
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means, the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means, and the third selecting means are selected. Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) based on the third specified information;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen (for example, Drawing processing (S2026) S2501),
The gaming machine I9, wherein the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image display means is controlled by the sub-control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, the first definition information storage means provides a first definition that is provided for each first display type and that indicates information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen. Information is stored. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. Further, the second display determining means determines the suggestion effect displayed on the image display means based on the second display instruction from the main control means. And the 2nd regulation information which prescribed | regulated the drawing information which shows the information required for drawing of the image which should be changed (added) in the some suggestion effects, and should be displayed in the some suggestion effects for every screen Is stored by the second prescribed information storage means. Here, the second specifying information for the suggestion effect determined by the second display determining means is selected by the second selecting means from the second specifying information storage means. Further, the image display means executes a plurality of second suggestion effects that suggest a gaming state different from the suggestion effects. The third display determining means determines the second suggestive effect displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction from the main control means. Then, drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed after being changed (added) in the plurality of second suggestion effects is defined for each screen. Third regulation information is stored by the third regulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information for the second suggestion effect determined by the third display determining means is selected by the third selecting means from the third specified information storage means. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second prescribed information and the third prescribed information selected by the third selecting means, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. Further, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Is done. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means. Thereby, when displaying each image corresponding to the first display instruction, the second display instruction, or the third display instruction from the main control means, the first specified information, the second specified information, or the third specified information for each production unit. Can be easily displayed by changing (adding) the display mode of the image display means simply by selecting each of them from the first prescribed information storage means, the second prescribed information storage means, or the third prescribed information storage means. In addition, it is configured to select the second specified information for a plurality of suggested effects, and is configured to select the third specified information for the plurality of second suggested effects, thereby configuring a plurality of images. Since the display control can be performed collectively for the effect to be performed, the display control can be managed in the related effect unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved. In addition, the number of the second specified information and the third specified information to be selected is the number of types of presentation (notice). 3 The total number of prescribed information can be reduced, the capacity of the second prescribed information does not need to be increased with the increase in the number of changing elements of the production (notice), and the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed. There is an effect. In addition, when the drawing instruction information is generated in the drawing process, it is possible to reduce the number of the first specified information, the second specified information, and the third specified information to be referred to, thereby reducing the processing load when generating the drawing instruction information. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine I9,
The main control means includes
Comprehensive output means for collectively outputting a plurality of the second display instructions for a plurality of display modes of the suggestive effects during a predetermined period,
The sub-control means is
Standby means for waiting for the predetermined period when receiving the second display instruction for one of the suggestive effects from the main control means;
And a post-waiting determination means for determining the suggestive effect to be displayed on the image display means based on the received one or more second display instructions after the standby by the standby means. Machine I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I9, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of second display instructions for a plurality of suggestive effect display modes are collectively output during a predetermined period by the comprehensive output unit provided in the main control unit. Further, when a second display instruction for the marking means from the main control means is received by the standby means provided in the sub-control means, the standby means waits for a predetermined period. The suggestion effect to be displayed on the image display means is determined based on the received one or more second display instructions after the standby by the standby means by the post-standby determination means similarly provided in the sub-control means. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute display control related to the suggestive effect after receiving all the second display instructions that are collectively output during the predetermined period. Thereby, in the case of drawing a plurality of suggestive effects, once the display mode of all the suggestive effects is determined, the suggestive effects can be drawn with the first prescribed information of one. It is possible to display the second specified information. Therefore, since it is possible to perform display control of effects related to a plurality of suggested effects, there is an effect that it is possible to easily diversify the display modes of the suggested effects displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine I9 or I10,
The main control means includes
When a predetermined condition (for example, start winning) is established, it is provided with an occasional output means for outputting the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of second suggestion effects as needed,
The sub-control means is
When receiving the third display instruction for the second suggestion effect from the main control means, the determination unit for determining the second suggestion effect to be displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction; A gaming machine I11 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I9 or I10, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the occasional output means provided in the main control means, the third display instruction regarding the display mode of the plurality of second suggestion effects is outputted at any time. In addition, when the third display instruction for the second suggestion effect from the main control means is received by the occasional determination means provided in the sub-control means, the second display is displayed on the image display means based on the third display instruction. Suggestion production is decided. That is, the sub-control means is configured to execute display control related to the second suggestion effect every time a third display instruction output as needed is received when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the third display instruction is output, the display mode of the second suggestion effect based on the third display instruction can be changed at any time. Therefore, since the content of the second suggestion effect indicating the gaming state can be displayed immediately, there is an effect that the gaming state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I9 to I11,
The drawing information specifying means includes
A gaming machine I12 comprising priority specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen in preference to the drawing information of the third specified information over the drawing information of the second specified information.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I9 to I11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the priority specifying means provided in the drawing information specifying means specifies the drawing information of the third specified information as drawing information for one screen with priority over the drawing information of the second specified information. That is, there is an effect that the display of the second suggestion effect indicating the game state can be displayed with priority over the suggestion effect, and the game state can be accurately suggested to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I9 to I12,
The first selection means includes
Based on the first display instruction, dynamic definition information (for example, a display data table for variation 232a1) that defines drawing information of the entire dynamic display is selected from the first definition information storage unit. Provision information selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b),
The second selection means includes
Based on the second display instruction, ascending mode defining information (for example, a character color additional data table 232a2) that defines drawing information when the display mode of the plurality of suggestive effects is changed to the expected level increasing mode. Ascending mode prescription information selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting from among the second prescription information storage means;
Based on the second display instruction, expectation degree regulation provision information (for example, additional data for character correction) that defines drawing information in the case of restricting the execution of the expectation increase mode in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing The gaming machine I13, comprising: an expectation restriction regulation information selection unit (for example, an additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting the table 232a2) from the second regulation information storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I9 to I12, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic regulation information that defines the drawing information of the entire dynamic display from the first regulation information storage unit based on the first display instruction by the dynamic regulation information selection unit provided in the first selection unit. Is selected. Moreover, the rise which prescribed | regulated the drawing information in case the display mode of several suggestion effects is changed into an expectation rise mode based on a 2nd display instruction | indication by the rise mode prescription information selection means provided in the 2nd selection means Aspect regulation information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. Similarly, the drawing when the expectation level increasing mode in the suggestion effect executed after the specific timing is regulated based on the second display instruction by the expectation level regulation provision information selection unit provided in the second selection unit. Expectation restriction regulation information defining the information is selected from the second regulation information storage means. By configuring in this way, a plurality of suggestion effects are changed (added), and further, the drawing information when the suggestion effects are changed when the execution of the expectation increasing mode in the suggestion effects after the specific timing is restricted. By selecting the rising aspect prescribing information that prescribes, and selecting the degree of expectation restriction prescribing information that prescribes the drawing information when the execution of the expectation rising aspect in the suggestion effect after specific timing is restricted Various display modes of effects can be easily changed (added) and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

<Group J: In case of loss variation, the character display after a specific timing is returned to the initial state>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114),
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
Storage means for storing the identification information acquired by the acquisition means (for example, an execution information storage area 223i);
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
A plurality of marking means (for example, character display Se1, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3 and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) that are notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the first mode (for example, “white”) in the initial state to the second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. A mode changing means for changing (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f);
A plurality of changing means (for example, a character color change table 222h) for changing a reporting mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the mode changing unit reports the marking unit in the second mode; Prepared,
The determination means includes
General identification information determining means (for example, a character color change restriction process (S1619)) for determining whether or not the general identification information appears in the dynamic display;
The aspect changing means includes
When the general identification information determining unit determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the notification mode of the indication unit that notifies after the specific timing in the dynamic display is changed to the first mode. A gaming machine J0, characterized by comprising an initializing means for initializing (for example, display fixed phrase normal command).

  According to the gaming machine J0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value of the player is given. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. Also, a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other are notified. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the notification mode of the marking unit is changed from the first mode in the initial state to the second mode different from the first mode by the mode change unit. Moreover, when changing the marking means to the second mode by the mode changing unit, the notification mode of the plurality of marking units is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units. Here, it is determined by the general identification information determination means provided in the determination means whether or not the general identification information appears in the dynamic display. And when the general identification information judging means judges that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means for informing after the specific timing in the dynamic display by the aspect initializing means provided in the aspect changing means The notification mode is initialized to the first mode. That is, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, among the notification modes of the plurality of labeling units having a predetermined relationship with each other, the notification mode of the labeling unit that reports after the specific timing is the first state in the initial state. Announces in a manner.

  Conventionally, when reporting means having a predetermined relevance to each other at a plurality of locations (timing or display area; the same applies hereinafter) of dynamic display, the marking means is in the initial state for each reporting location. If the configuration is to set (lottery) whether to report in one mode or in a second mode different from the first mode, setting processing (lottery processing) for the reporting location is required, and control is complicated. And the processing burden may increase. In addition, after indicating in the second aspect the indicating means to be notified first in dynamic display, if the indicating means to be notified later is notified in the first aspect, the indicating means has a predetermined relevance. Therefore, the expression of the special identification information appears lower (hereinafter referred to as “falling expression”). Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who is uplifted by notifying the second mode in the previous sign means will awaken by witnessing the falling expression in the later sign means.

  Therefore, the setting (lottery) of the notification modes of the labeling means having a predetermined relationship with each other in the dynamic display is performed in a lump (multiple simultaneous), and the second mode notified by one labeling means is also used in the other labeling means. By being configured to follow and notify, it is not necessary to perform setting processing for each notification location, and the processing burden can be reduced. In addition, when the indication means having a predetermined relationship with each other is notified in the second mode even once, the indication means is configured to notify the subsequent indication means by following the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game by excluding the phenomenon that the expression of downfall occurs.

  However, since the second mode of the marking unit is a mode that is changed from the first mode of the initial state based on the determination result of the determination unit, it suggests that the current production situation can be changed based on the change. Has a development suggestion function. On the other hand, the labeling means that is notified after a specific timing of dynamic display (for example, at the end of dynamic display) has a situation notification function that notifies the contents of the current production situation in the dynamic display. Therefore, if the indication means after the specific timing in the dynamic display when the general identification information appears is notified in the second aspect, the player indicates that the indication means is notified in the second aspect. It is predicted that the development suggestion function is superior to the status notification function of the means, and some kind of development effect occurs. However, contrary to the prediction, if the general identification information is finalized without causing the development effect, the player causes the game machine to be distrusted by the trap of the contents of the effect, and the game machine is There is also a risk that distrust will be raised for the game halls that are installed, and the game may be interrupted.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine J0, when the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, among the notification modes of the plurality of labeling means having a predetermined relevance to each other, the notification of the marking means to be notified after the specific timing An aspect is alert | reported by the 1st aspect of an initial state. Since the sign means that is the first mode in the initial state does not have the development suggestion function, the player does not have excessive expectation even when the sign means that is notified in the initial state is witnessed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game that does not cause a trap of production contents, does not cause the player to have excessive expectations, and does not cause the player to feel distrust.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

In gaming machine J0,
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, the determination to execute the determination effect (for example, the “super effect” variable element of “super reach”) whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears. Production execution means (for example, "super-reach" variable element),
The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the specific timing is a timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J0, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a determination effect as to whether special identification information appears or general identification information appears in dynamic display. The timing at which the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect is set as the specific timing. Thereby, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the notification mode of the marking means after the special identification information or the general identification information appears in the determination effect is initialized and notified. Therefore, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the general identification information appears, it is configured to notify the sign means notified after the determination effect in the first state in the initial state. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, there is no notification of the indication means of the second mode having the development suggestion function, and it does not suggest that the production develops. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not feel excessive distrust and the player does not feel distrust.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The aspect changing means includes
A second mode determination unit (for example, S1611 of the character mode setting process (S1417)) for determining whether or not the marking unit is notified in the second mode;
The aspect initialization means includes:
When the second mode determining unit determines that the indication unit is notified in the second mode, the notification mode of the marking unit that is notified after the specific timing is initialized to the first mode. A gaming machine J2 comprising two-mode initialization means (for example, S1702 of a character color change restriction process (S1619)).

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the 2nd aspect judgment means provided in the aspect change means whether the marking means is notified in the 2nd aspect. When the second mode determining unit determines that the marking unit is notified in the second mode, the second mode initializing unit provided in the mode initializing unit reports after the specific timing. The notification mode of the means is initialized to the first mode. That is, whether or not to initialize the notification mode of the labeling unit after the specific timing is determined based on the notification of the labeling unit in the second mode. Thus, by performing the initialization process of the labeling means only when the labeling means is notified in the second mode, the initialization process becomes unnecessary when the labeling unit is in the first mode, and the display control process While being able to reduce the burden, it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and prevents the player from feeling distrustful, so that the production content is not flawed. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The dynamic display executing means includes
A notification determination unit that determines whether the indication unit is notified after the specific timing in the dynamic display;
The aspect initialization means includes:
When the subsequent notification determining means determines that the indication means is notified after the specific timing, the notification mode of the indication means to be notified after the specific timing is initialized to the first aspect. An gaming machine J3 comprising an initialization means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined whether or not the indicating means is notified after the specific timing in the dynamic display by the subsequent notification determining means provided in the dynamic display executing means. Then, when it is determined by the notification determining means that the marking means is notified after the specific timing, the notification means that notifies after the specific timing is notified by the subsequent notification initialization means provided in the mode initialization means. The aspect is initialized to the first aspect. That is, when there is a sign means to be notified after a specific timing in the dynamic display, it is configured to notify in the first mode in the initial state. As a result, it is possible to notify in the initial state of the indicating means that is notified after the specific timing, so that it is not necessary to determine whether or not the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the display control processing burden is reduced. The effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game that can be reduced but prevents the production content from becoming trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J3,
The general identification information judging means includes
Judgment result storage means (for example, a late limit flag 233p) for storing that the general identification information appears,
The aspect initialization means includes:
A gaming machine J4 that initializes the notification mode of the marking means after the specific timing when the judgment result storage means stores the appearance of the general identification information.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the judgment result storage means provided in the general identification information judgment means stores that the general identification information appears. Then, when it is stored in the determination result storage means that the general identification information appears, the manner initialization means initializes the notification manner of the indication means after the specific timing. As a result, it is possible to notify in the initial state of the indicating means that is notified after the specific timing, so that it is not necessary to determine whether or not the indicating means is notified in the second mode, and the display control processing burden is reduced. The effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game that can be reduced but prevents the production content from becoming trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4,
The marking means is
First indication means (for example, character display Se1 or reach character display Se2 at the time of reach occurrence) that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second indication means (for example, fixed phrase character display Se3) that appears after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
When the general identification information determining means determines that the general identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indicating means and the second indicating means are changed to the second indicating means based on the plurality of changing means. A second mode continuation means for displaying in a mode;
When the general identification information determining means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second aspect based on the plurality of changing means, and the aspect A gaming machine J5, comprising: second mode changing means for displaying the second marking means in the first mode by initialization means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are produced. That is, the marking means includes a first marking means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect, and a second marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect. In addition, when the general identification information judging means judges that the general identification information is not displayed in the dynamic display, the second indication continuation means provided in the aspect changing means makes the first indication based on the plurality of changing means. The means and the second marking means are displayed in the second mode. On the other hand, when it is determined by the general identification information determination means that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indication means based on the plurality of change means by the second aspect change means provided in the aspect change means Is displayed in the second mode, and the second marking unit is displayed in the first mode by the mode initialization unit.

  As a result, when the general identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, that is, when the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, both the first marking means and the second marking means are changed to the second mode. When the general identification information appears in the target display, that is, when the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indication means is displayed in the second mode, while the second indication means is the first indication. It is configured to be displayed in a manner. That is, in the dynamic display in which the display result of the special identification information appears when the marking means is changed to the second mode, the second marking unit after the determination effect is displayed in the second mode and the general identification is performed. In the dynamic display in which the display result of the information appears, the second marking means after the determination effect is configured to be displayed in the first mode. By configuring in this way, after the general identification information appears, the second indication means of the second aspect does not appear, and it does not suggest that the effect develops. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a comfortable game in which the player does not have excessive expectations and the player does not feel distrust.

In gaming machine J5,
The first indicating means is
1 in the dynamic display, at least a plurality of appearances;
The plurality of changing means are:
A gaming machine J6, comprising at least first labeling collective means for collectively setting a display mode of the first signing means.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are produced. That is, in one dynamic display, at least a plurality of first indication means are displayed, and at least the display form of the first indication means is collectively displayed by the first indication collective means provided in the plurality of changing means. It is configured to be set. As a result, a plurality of first indication means appearing in one dynamic display can be set at a time, so that the control burden can be reduced as compared with the control in which the setting process is performed for each first indication means. There is an effect that can be done. In particular, as the number of appearing locations of the first marking means capable of executing the second mode in dynamic display increases (for example, 5 or more locations), the collective setting is more effective, and the control burden is significantly reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The plurality of changing means are:
Color batch change means for collectively changing the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selection means to the special display color;
The aspect initialization means includes:
The display color of the marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect is displayed in the normal display color after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means. A gaming machine J7 comprising a normal color display means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J1 to J6, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Further, the color change timing selecting means provided in the mode changing means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing means. Then, the color batch changing means provided in the plurality of changing means changes the display color of the marking means displayed after the timing selected by the color change timing selecting means to the special display color. Here, after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color batch changing means, the display color of the marking means that appears after the execution of the determination effect is provided in the mode initialization means. Displayed in the normal display color by the normal color display means. As a result, regarding the display mode of the display unit having a predetermined relationship with each other, the display mode of the display unit is set based on a plurality of display elements such as the display color and the display timing, and the display mode variation of the display unit When the general identification information appears in the labeling means after the determination effect, the general display color (first mode) can be displayed by changing (correcting) the contents of the batch setting. Therefore, while diversifying the production to enhance the fun of the game, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, provides a comfortable game that does not cause excessive expectations to the player and does not cause the player to feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J7,
Main control means (for example, main control device 110 or (and) sound lamp control device 113) for performing main control of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, display control device 114) for controlling the image display means based on a display instruction from the main control means,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means (for example, an image controller 237) for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
First display determination means (for example, command determination processing (S2022) for determining a first display type (for example, variation effect) to be displayed based on a first display instruction (for example, display variation pattern command) from the main control means. ) S2108)
Drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type is provided for each first display type. 232a1) for storing first prescribed information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a),
First selection means (for example, display data table buffer 233b) for selecting, from the first definition information storage means, the first definition information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination means;
A plurality of changing elements (for example, character patterns, display colors, change timings or correction contents of display colors) that determine the notification mode of the indication means displayed on the image display means,
Based on a second display instruction (for example, a display red character command) from the main control unit, the image is changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection unit and displayed. Second display determining means for determining the change element of the marking means (for example, S2112 of the command determination process (S2022)),
The second definition information (for example, for each screen) is provided for each change element of the marking means, and drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be changed (added) in the change element and displayed. Second specified information storage means (for example, data table storage area 232a) for storing the character color additional data table 232a2);
Second selection means (for example, additional data table buffer 233c) for selecting, from the second definition information storage means, the second definition information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination means. ,
The sub-control means is
Update means (e.g., pointer 233e) that is updated as time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, the updated information is updated based on the first specified information selected by the first selecting means and the second specified information selected by the second selecting means. Drawing information specifying means (for example, S2308 of the display setting process (S2023)) for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the means;
When the display mode of the marking unit is initialized by the mode initialization unit, the second specified information selected by the second selection unit is discarded (invalidated) and selected by the first selection unit. Second drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means based on the first specified information;
Based on the drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means or the second drawing information specifying means, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen (for example, A drawing instruction information generating means (for example, S2501 of the drawing process (S2026)) for generating a drawing list),
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means,
A gaming machine J8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J7, the following effects are produced. That is, main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the image display means is controlled by the sub-control means based on the display instruction from the main control means. Also, an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means is drawn by the image drawing means provided in the sub-control means. Then, the first display determination means determines the first display type to be displayed based on the first display instruction from the main control means. In addition, first definition information that is provided for each first display type and that defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the first display type for each screen is stored in the first specification information storage. Stored by means. Here, the first selection information corresponding to the first display type determined by the first display determination unit is selected from the first definition information storage unit by the first selection unit. In addition, the marking means is displayed on the image display means, and the display mode of the marking means is determined by a plurality of changing elements. Further, based on the second display instruction from the main control means, the change element of the marking means to be displayed after being changed (added) from the image indicated by the first regulation information selected by the first selection means is determined to be the second display. Determined by means. And the 2nd regulation information which provided for every change element of a marking means, and specified the drawing information which shows information required for drawing of the picture which should be changed (added) in the change element and to display for every screen, Stored by the second specified information storage means. Here, the second selection information corresponding to the change element determined by the second display determination unit is selected from the second definition information storage unit by the second selection unit. Then, the updating means provided in the sub-control means is updated every time, and each time the updating means is updated, the first regulation information selected by the first selection means and the second selection means are selected. Based on the second specified information, each drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the drawing information specifying means. When the display mode of the marking unit is initialized by the mode initialization unit, the second specified information selected by the second selection unit is discarded (invalidated), and the first selection unit selected by the first selection unit is selected. Based on the regulation information, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means is specified by the second drawing information specifying means. Then, based on each drawing information for one screen specified by the drawing information specifying means or the second drawing information specifying means, the drawing instruction information generating means instructs the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen. Drawing instruction information to be generated is generated. Then, based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the image drawing means. Thereby, when the suggestion effect for the second display instruction is changed (added) and displayed on the image of the first display type for the first display instruction from the main control means, the second rule for the change element of the suggestion effect is displayed. The display mode of the suggestive effect can be easily changed (added) and displayed simply by selecting information from the second specified information storage means. In addition, when initializing the display mode of the labeling means, the change of the labeling means is not reflected in the display contents by discarding (invalidating) the second specified information, and the display mode of the marking means is easily initialized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the image display means can be easily achieved.

<K group: Character display for production and character display for error>
Acquisition means (for example, the first entrance 64) for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means (for example, main controller 110) for making a determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display execution means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) performs dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Display control device 114);
In the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information (for example, “big hit display”) appears, a predetermined game is given to the player. In gaming machines that add value,
Storage means (for example, execution information storage area 223i) for storing the start-up information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the starting information stored in the storage means, the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, or general identification information different from the special identification information (for example, “miss display”). A judging means for judging whether to appear (for example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113);
In the image display means, a plurality of marking means displayed with a predetermined relation to each other (for example, character display Se1 at the time of reach occurrence, reach character display Se2, fixed phrase character display Se3, and pseudo fixed phrase character display Se4) )When,
Based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined first mode (for example, “white”) to a second mode (for example, “red”) different from the first mode. Marking mode changing means (for example, a character color lottery counter 223f),
State determination means for determining the state of the gaming machine (for example, the lower pan full tank switch)
State notification means (for example, error character display Se5) for notifying the state of the gaming machine based on the determination result by the state determination means;
A state notification tuning unit that changes a notification mode of the state notification unit so as to synchronize with a change state of the marking unit by the marking mode change unit when the state notification unit reports the state of the gaming machine. A gaming machine K0 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K0, the start information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the start information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means. When special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, the start information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Here, based on the starting information stored in the storage unit, the determination unit determines whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. The image display means displays a plurality of marking means having a predetermined relationship with each other. Then, based on the determination result by the determination unit, the display mode change unit changes the display mode of the labeling unit from the predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode. Here, the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determination means. Further, based on the determination result by the state determination means, the state notification means notifies the state of the gaming machine. When the state notification unit notifies the state of the gaming machine, the state notification tuning unit changes the notification mode of the state notification unit so as to synchronize with the change status of the marking unit by the marking mode change unit.

  Conventionally, a state of a gaming machine is determined, and the determination result is notified by a state notification unit, so that a player or the like can recognize the state of the gaming machine. Specifically, for example, when an abnormal state occurs in the gaming state, an abnormal sound (warning sound) is output and an abnormality (error) occurs in the display means in order to suggest the abnormal state to the player. A character display indicating to the player that the player is playing is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is in an abnormal state, and the cause of the abnormality is suggested to the player.

  Here, the notification mode of the indicating means notified in the dynamic display is determined based on whether the special identification information appears in the dynamic display or the general identification information different from the special identification information appears. The status notification means for notifying the state of the gaming machine is determined to appear regardless of the special identification information lottery in the dynamic display, and the notification mode is determined by independent control.

  However, when notifying the state of the gaming machine by the state notification unit during execution of the dynamic display, the notification mode in which the indication unit notified in the dynamic display and the notification mode by the state notification unit are not related to each other If executed, the player may misunderstand the expectation of the special identification information in the dynamic display and the state of the gaming machine.

  Specifically, for example, when the state notification means is notified in a manner related to the second aspect of the indication means in spite of not indicating the indication means in the dynamic display in the second aspect, the player Misunderstands that the second mode has been notified by witnessing the notification mode of the state notification means, and expects the special identification information to appear in the dynamic display. Conversely, the notification mode of the state notification unit is notified in a mode related to the first mode that is not the second mode of the labeling unit, even though the notification mode of the labeling unit in the dynamic display is reported in the second mode. In such a case, the player misunderstands that the expectation of the special identification information in the dynamic display has dropped by witnessing the notification mode of the state notification means, and wakes up the game. End up.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine K0, when the notification by the state notification unit for notifying the state of the gaming machine is performed during execution of the dynamic display, the notification mode of the state notification unit is synchronized with the notification mode of the indication unit. To be configured. By configuring in this way, even if the player is notified of the marking means and the status notification means at the same time, the player does not misunderstand the expected level of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display. The state of the gaming machine can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, while providing accurate notification of the state of the gaming machine, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and provides a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, “a plurality of indication means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other” means, for example, when the indication means have the same attribute or correspond to the same type, at the same timing. In case of appearing, or even when appearing with a time difference, if one appears, the other appears, etc. A relationship that is conceptually organically related (having close links). Specifically, for example, a notice display (such as a character display Se1 when a reach occurs and a fixed phrase character display Se3) displayed in the same display area, or a notice display (strong or weak character notice displayed in a different manner at the same timing). Etc.), a notice display in which another notice appears after one notice appears (step-up notice, reach occurrence character display Se1 and fixed phrase character display Se3, etc.), and the same effect is executed multiple times. Notifications (such as “variables of“ pseudo-continuous ”) and the same or similar sounds (for example,“ similar sounds ”are sounds in which the type of sound steps up step by step) are output intermittently. The production etc. are illustrated.

  The “gaming machine state” means, for example, an abnormal state occurring in the gaming machine, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player running on the gaming machine, or a game being continued on the gaming machine A game continuation state etc. are illustrated.

In the gaming machine K0,
The state determination means includes
An abnormal state determination means for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in an abnormal state that is not a predetermined normal state,
A gaming machine K1 comprising: an abnormality type notifying means for notifying the abnormality type of the abnormal state by the state notifying means when the abnormal state is determined by the abnormal state determining means.

  According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K0, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the abnormal state determination means provided in the state determination means whether or not the gaming machine is in an abnormal state that is not a predetermined normal state. When the abnormal state determination unit determines that the abnormal state has occurred, the abnormal type notification unit notifies the abnormal type of the abnormal state by the state notification unit. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player or the like of the type of the abnormal state, and it is possible to clearly recognize the abnormal part in the gaming machine and to solve the abnormality at an early stage.

In the gaming machine K0 or K1,
The aspect changing means includes
Color changing means (for example, character color lottery) for changing the display color of the marking means from a predetermined normal display color (for example, “white”) to a special display color (for example, “red”) different from the normal display color Counter 223f),
The timing at which the display color of the marking unit is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color changing unit (for example, the timing for displaying the character display Se1 when reach occurs, or the character display Se2 during reach). Color change timing selection means (color change timing counter 223g) for selecting (timing),
The state notification tuning means is
The display color of the state notification means that appears after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color change timing selection means is the same or the same display color as the special display color. A gaming machine K2 comprising the same-line display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K0 or K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the display color of the marking unit is changed from a predetermined normal display color to a special display color different from the normal display color by the color changing unit provided in the aspect changing unit. Further, the color change timing selection means selects the timing at which the display color of the marking means is changed from the normal display color to the special display color by the color change means. Then, by means of the same system display means provided in the status notification tuning means, the display color is displayed on the status notification means that appears after the timing when the display color of the marking means is changed to the special display color by the color change timing selection means. Displayed in the same or the same display color as the display color. As a result, when notifying the state of the gaming machine during execution of the dynamic display, the display color of the state notification means that appears after the display color of the indication means is changed is the same as or the same as the display color of the indication means. Can be displayed in the system. Therefore, even if the player is notified of the indication means and the state notification means at the same time, the player does not misunderstand the expected level of appearance of the special identification information in the dynamic display. Can also be clearly recognized. Therefore, while providing accurate notification of the state of the gaming machine, it prevents the production content from becoming trapped, does not cause excessive expectations to the player, and provides a comfortable game in which the player does not feel distrust There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine K2,
The state notification tuning means is
When the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determination unit and the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state notification unit before the timing selected by the color change timing selection unit, the state is changed by the color change unit. The game machine K3, comprising: a pre-display unit that displays the display color of the state notification unit in the same or the same display color as the special display color.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the state of the gaming machine is determined by the state determination unit and the state of the gaming machine is notified by the state notification unit before the timing selected by the color change timing selection unit, the state notification synchronization unit is provided. The prior display means displays the display color of the state notification means in the same or the same display color as the special display color changed by the color changing means. Thereby, for example, in a stage before the display means is displayed, a state as determined by the state determination means is generated, the state notification means is displayed, and the display color of the state notification means is displayed. A variety of games are created by adding a notice function that suggests the expected degree of appearance of special identification information in dynamic display to the state notification means that usually has only a function to notify the state of the gaming machine. This has the effect of realizing sex and enhancing the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines A0 to A8, the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, 10 to A configuration limited to any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, 10 to A configuration limited to any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines C0 to C6, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, 10 to A configuration limited to any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines D0 to D9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, 10 to A configuration limited to any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines E0 to E9, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, 10 to A configuration limited to any one of I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F10, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0. A configuration limited by any one of H8, I0 to I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Moreover, with respect to any one of the above gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited by any one of H8, I0 to I13, J0 to J8, and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines H0 to H8, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, I0 to I13, J0. A configuration limited by any one of ˜J8, K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I13, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8. , J0 to J8, and any one of K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines J0 to J8, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0. A configuration limited to any one of ˜I13 and K0 to K3 may be applied. Further, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines K0 to K3, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B8, C0 to C6, D0 to D9, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G7, H0 to H8, I0. A configuration limited to any one of ˜I13 and J0 to J8 may be applied. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, The gaming machine I1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, The gaming machine I2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of gaming machines A0-A8, B0-B8, C0-C6, D0-D9, E0-E9, F0-F10, G0-G7, H0-H8, I0-I13, J0-J8, K0-K3, The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  The “entrance ball” to the “first entrance 64” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “predetermined start condition” in the claims, and the “counters C1 to C3,” described in the above embodiment. “CS1 value” corresponds to “information” acquired by “acquisition means” in the claims, and “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” in the claims. The “variation effect” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “dynamic display of identification information” described in the claims, and the “big hit symbol” described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. Corresponding to “predetermined identification information”, “big jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “predetermined game value” described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (part of acquisition means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of image display means)
110 Main controller (part of determination means)
113 Sound lamp control device (part of judging means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display execution means)
203b Reservation ball storage area (part of storage means)
203c Reservation ball execution area (part of storage means)
221 MPU (part of judging means)
222h Character color change table (part of multiple change means)
223f Character color lottery counter (part of the mode changing means)
223i execution information storage area (part of storage means)
Se4 fixed phrase text display (part of marking means)

Claims (3)

Acquisition means for acquiring start information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means for performing determination based on the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Dynamic display execution means for causing the image display means to dynamically display identification information based on a determination result by the determination means,
In a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, when special identification information that is predetermined identification information appears, a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value,
Storage means for storing the starting information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the start-up information stored in the storage means, it is determined whether to display the special identification information in the dynamic display or general identification information different from the special identification information. Outgoing information judgment means,
Advantageous situation determination means for determining whether or not a situation advantageous to the player occurs;
A plurality of marking means to be notified with a predetermined relationship with each other;
Based on a determination result by the appearance information determination unit, a mode changing unit that changes a notification mode of the marking unit from a predetermined first mode to a second mode different from the first mode;
A plurality of changing means for changing the notification mode of the plurality of marking means to the second mode when the marking means is changed to the second mode by the mode changing unit;
The dynamic display executing means includes
In the dynamic display, a determination effect execution means for executing a determination effect on whether the special identification information appears or the general identification information appears,
The aspect changing means includes
When the display mode of the indication unit is changed to the second mode by the plurality of changing units, when the advantageous status determining unit determines that a situation advantageous to the player does not occur, the determination effect executing unit A gaming machine, comprising: a first mode notification unit that reports in the first mode the marking unit that is to be notified after execution of the determination effect. The advantageous situation determination means includes:
In the dynamic display, comprising special identification information judging means for judging whether the special identification information appears or whether the general identification information appears,
The first aspect notification means includes:
When the special identification information determination means determines that the general identification information appears in the dynamic display, the indication means that is notified after the determination effect is executed by the determination effect execution means, The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is notified in a mode. The marking means is
First indication means that appears before or during execution of the determination effect;
Second marking means that appears after execution of the determination effect,
The aspect changing means includes
When the special identification information determination means determines that the special identification information appears in the dynamic display, the first indication means and the second indication means are changed to the second mode based on the plurality of change means. A second mode continuation means for displaying at
When the special identification information determining means determines that the special identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the first indicating means is displayed in the second mode based on the plurality of changing means, The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising: a second mode changing unit that displays the second marking unit in the first mode by a first mode notifying unit.

Images